Epiphan Video Pearl-2 User guide

Epiphan Video Pearl-2 User guide
User Guide
Epiphan Pearl-2
Pearl-2 Rackmount
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin
Release 4.13
December 8, 2020
UG115-23
© and ™ 2020, Epiphan Systems, Inc
Terms and conditions
This document, the Epiphan web site, and the information contained therein, including but not limited to the text,
videos and images as well as Epiphan System Inc.’s trademarks, trade names and logos are the property of Epiphan
Systems Inc. and its affiliates and licensors, and are protected from unauthorized copying and dissemination by
Canadian copyright law, United States copyright law, trademark law, international conventions and other intellectual
property laws.
Epiphan, Epiphan Video, Epiphan Systems, Epiphan Systems Inc., and Epiphan logos are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Epiphan Systems Inc., in certain countries. All Epiphan product names and logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Epiphan. All other company and product names and logos may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective owners in certain countries.
Copyright © 2020 Epiphan Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE
INFORMATION PACKET OR PRODUCT INSTALLATION SOFTWARE PACKAGE THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND
ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSES OR LIMITED
WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR EPIPHAN REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO
CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. EPIPHAN PERIODICALLY ADDS OR UPDATES THE INFORMATION AND DOCUMENTS ON
ITS WEB SITE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS ARE BELIEVED TO BE
ACCURATE AT TIME OF WRITING BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL EPIPHAN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
EXEMPLARY OR OTHER INDIRECT DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM THE USE OF, OR THE INABILITY TO USE, THIS
PRODUCT OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT OR PROVIDED ON EPIPHAN’S WEB SITE, EVEN IF
EPIPHAN HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL EPIPHAN’S TOTAL
LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES, LOSSES, AND CAUSES OF ACTION RESULTING FROM YOUR USE OF THIS
PRODUCT, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE,
EXCEED THE AMOUNTS YOU PAID TO EPIPHAN DURING THE MOST RECENT THREE-MONTH PERIOD IN CONNECTION
WITH AMOUNTS WHICH YOU PAID FOR USING THIS PRODUCT.
INFORMATION AND DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS, PROVIDED IN THIS DOCUMENT OR THE
EPIPHAN WEB SITE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS”. SPECIFICALLY, BUT NOT WITHOUT LIMITATION, EPIPHAN DOES NOT
WARRANT THAT: (i) THE INFORMATION IS CORRECT, ACCURATE, RELIABLE OR COMPLETE; (ii) THE FUNCTIONS
CONTAINED ON THE EPIPHAN WEB SITE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE; (iii) DEFECTS WILL BE
CORRECTED, OR (iv) THIS WEB SITE OR THE SERVER(S) THAT MAKES IT AVAILABLE ARE FREE OF VIRUSES OR OTHER
HARMFUL COMPONENTS. EPIPHAN SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES, AND
CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY, BY USAGE OF TRADE OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
For additional terms and conditions, see additional sections in this document.
ii
Thank you for choosing Epiphan!
At Epiphan Video (“Epiphan”), building reliable video systems with pro features that perform above your
expectations is our mission.
We value your feedback! Email us your suggestions and let us know how you think we're doing and where
you'd like to see our products improve: [email protected]
Warranty
All Epiphan Video systems have a 100% return to depot warranty for one year from the date of purchase.
Technical support
Epiphan’s products are backed by our professional support team. You can reach our team several ways:
l
Email [email protected]
l
Live chat from our support site https://www.epiphan.com/support/
l
Phone toll free at 1-877-599-6581 or call +1-613-599-6581
Gather as much information about your problem as you can before you contact us so we can help you better,
including:
l
A description of the problem
l
Details about your video or audio source (type, connection, resolution, refresh rate, etc.)
l
Product serial number
l
Product firmware version (using the admin interface)
l
Product LED lights
iii
What's new in release 4.13?
We've made some awesome changes in firmware 4.13. Integration with AV Studio is replaced with Epiphan
Cloud - your new destination to remotely manage and operate your Pearl-2 devices. We also made it easier for
you to troubleshoot installations with more diagnostic tests and statistics. And we added support for
Dynamic DNS (DDNS) and DHCP Option 81, making sure you have seamless access to Pearl-2 on the network
even if a DHCP server changes Pearl-2's IP address. Plus more enhancements are available in this latest
release.
Firmware 4.13
Epiphan Cloud support
Manage all your Pearl devices from Epiphan Cloud with a diagnostics dashboard for remote rescue
troubleshooting, configurable email alerts, channel creation and configuration from the cloud, confidence
monitoring, batch operations, remote firmware updates, and more! It's easy to get started with a free Epiphan
Cloud account. For details, see: www.epiphan.com/cloud/
Diagnostic tools
Diagnostic tools are added to the touch screen and Admin panel so you can instantly check the connectivity
status of Pearl-2, get the external IP address of your Pearl-2, and more. From one easy location, you can run
network diagnostics like ping, traceroute, test the network upload/download speeds, confirm domain name
resolution, and probe to see if a network port is open on the network side.
Scheduled AFU
Now you can schedule file uploads to only occur during a specific period of time every 24-hours. Recordings
that end within the configured time period automatically upload right away. Recordings that end outside the
upload time period are queued up and upload when the scheduled upload time period is reached.
DHCP Option 81 (FQDN) support
Ensure your Domain Name Server (DNS) always has Pearl-2's most up-to-date IP address mapped to Pearl-2's
Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN). Option 81 support means you can keep using Pearl's FQDN no matter
how many times the DHCP server may change Pearl's IP address. Pearl-2 automatically asks the DHCP server
to tell the Domain Name Server (DNS) to update Pearl-2's record with any changes to Pearl-2's IP address or
FQDN.
iv
Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
If the DHCP server doesn't support Option 81, no problem. Enabling DDNS ensures that whenever the DHCP
server changes Pearl-2's IP address, Pearl-2 informs the Dynamic Domain Name Server (DNS). Use Pearl-2's
FQDN without worry because the domain name records are always kept up-to-date. Custom, dyndns.org, and
noip.com DDNS servers are supported.
Panopto low storage alerts
Now you can configure Pearl-2 to not send low storage alerts to Panopto.
NDI resource discovery across subnets and external networks
You can add remote NDI input resources from other networks and subnets when you enter the
NDI resource's IP address using the Admin panel.
SHA hashing algorithm support
We added support for SHA-256 and SHA-512 hashing algorithms for HLS (push) and MPEG-DASH stream
authentication.
Changes affecting remote login using AV Studio
AV Studio is going away
AV Studio is being replaced by Epiphan Cloud. You'll now see Epiphan Cloud instead of AV Studio in the Admin
panel as a configuration option. When the switch over occurs, Pearl-2 devices that are currently paired with AV
Studio automatically migrate to Epiphan Cloud. Previously uploaded recordings and scenes related to AV
Studio's post-production tools are not accessible from Epiphan Cloud. After updating Pearl-2 to firmware
4.13, all pairing functions from the Admin panel link to Epiphan Cloud. To access your devices, simply create a
free Epiphan Cloud account or use your AV Studio credentials to login to Epiphan Cloud at:
https://go.epiphan.cloud
v
Table of contents
What's new in release 4.13?
iv
Table of contents
vi
Start here
1
About this Guide
1
What is Pearl-2?
2
Feature add-ons
Front and back view Pearl-2
4
5
What's in the Box?
12
Quick start
14
Live video mixing / switching
19
Monitoring audio
20
Selecting an audio source
22
Connecting microphones to the XLR line level inputs
24
Specifications
25
AV inputs
25
Tech specs
26
Optimum CPU performance
35
International character support
37
User interfaces and remote access
The touch screen
38
39
About the touch screen
39
The Channel view
41
Record a channel using the touch screen
43
Stream a channel using the touch screen
44
Switching / mixing using the touch screen
45
One Touch streaming and recording control
47
About One Touch streaming and recording
47
Customize the One Touch control display
49
Specify channels and recorders for One Touch recording
50
Specify channels for One Touch streaming
53
CMS event controls using the touch screen
54
Stop/start scheduled events using the touch screen
58
Create ad hoc events using the touch screen
60
Configure the touch screen
The Admin panel
63
70
vi
About the Admin panel
70
Connect to Admin panel
72
Admin panel access using local console
74
Enable local console using the Admin panel
75
Enable local console using the touch screen
76
Connect using a DNS-based service discovery
77
Connect using persistent static IP address
78
Switching / mixing using the Admin panel
79
Epiphan Live
81
About Epiphan Live
81
The Dashboard interface
82
Access Epiphan Live using a web browser or mobile device
84
Access Epiphan Live from the Admin panel
85
Stream, record, and monitor using the Dashboard interface
86
Switching / mixing using Epiphan Live
94
Your recordings
98
Cloud-based device management
100
About device management with Epiphan Cloud
100
Enable or disable Epiphan Cloud access
101
Pair and unpair from Epiphan Cloud
103
Remote login to the Admin panel and Epiphan Live
106
PART 1: Setup
108
Rackmount installation
109
Configure network settings
110
Network ports used by Pearl-2
110
Verify IP address and MAC address of Pearl-2
112
Configure a static IP address
113
Configure DHCP
116
Configure DHCP Option 81
118
Configure Dynamic DNS
119
Change the HTTP/HTTPS port values
121
Perform network diagnostics
122
Disable the network discovery port
123
Configure network security
125
Configure 802.1x network security and manage user certificates
125
Manage CA and self-signed certificates
127
Configure HTTPS
128
vii
Configure date and time
130
Audio input ports
135
Configure audio ports for stereo or mono
135
Assign audio sources to an input
136
Adjust audio gain and delay
137
Mute audio
139
Video output ports
142
About video output ports
142
Video output port resolution
143
Show a channel or video source on the output port
144
Select the video output source using the touch screen
147
Preview the video output port
148
Disable the video output port
149
Disable or enable audio and output port volume
149
Display and reposition the audio VU meter
152
Rename a video output port
153
Mirror the video output port display
154
Connect an external keyboard
155
Connect a USB status light
156
Feature add-ons
158
4K feature add-on
Configuration presets
161
163
About configuration presets
163
Configuration preset considerations
165
Configuration groups
169
The Factory default configuration preset and Factory reset
170
Create a configuration preset
172
Apply a configuration preset using the Admin panel
173
Apply a configuration preset using the touch screen
175
Export and import configuration presets
176
Update a configuration preset
178
Delete a configuration preset
179
User administration
181
User types and privileges
181
Assign administrator privileges to operators
186
Set or change user passwords
189
Remove user passwords
190
Overcome lost passwords
191
Configure LDAP user authentication
192
viii
Change the logged-in user
194
Restrict viewers by IP address
195
IP restriction examples
196
Status and monitoring
199
Monitoring audio and VU sensitivity
199
Channel monitoring using the touch screen
200
View system information using the touch screen
202
View system information using the Admin panel
205
View device information using the touch screen
205
View network status
207
View 802.1x network connection status messages
207
View channel status and stream information
208
View the video output port status
210
View AFU and file transfer progress
211
View scheduled events and history
214
PART 2: Capture
What is a channel?
216
217
Channel layout examples
218
About automatic channels Auto A and Auto B
221
Channel configuration
224
Configure auto channels
225
Create a channel
225
Add video sources or a channel as a source
229
Add an audio source to a layout
233
Duplicate a channel
234
Rename a channel
235
Delete a channel
236
Preview channel
237
Add or remove channel metadata
240
Configure encoding
242
Codecs and file format compatibility
242
Configure video encoding
244
Configure audio encoding
249
Multi-encoding and channel as a source
251
Custom layout configuration
253
About the custom layout editor
253
Move and size items in the layout editing area
255
ix
Audio source selection and saving edits
256
Resize and position items using percents or pixels
257
Open the custom layout editor for a channel
263
Add or edit a custom layout
264
Rename a layout
266
Delete, move, or duplicate a layout
267
Set the background color
269
Add an image to a layout
270
Upload or remove an image using the Media page
272
Add a text overlay
274
Custom system variables for text overlays
277
Crop a video source
278
Configure chroma keying
281
Performance considerations
282
What is upstream chroma keying?
282
What is downstream chroma keying?
283
Set up chroma key for a green screen video source
284
Add chroma key titler effects using Microsoft Powerpoint slides
290
Add external titler software effects to Pearl-2
295
Video and audio input sources
About connecting video and audio sources
302
302
Tested RTSP-based IP cameras
304
Supported web cameras
306
Connect an RTSP source
306
Connect an SRT stream as an input
309
Connect an NDI source
312
Change an NDI input resource
315
Connect an AV.io video grabber
316
Preview a video source using the Admin Panel
317
Rename an input port
318
Configure a video input source
319
HDMI and DVI video settings
320
SDI video settings
321
USB video and web camera settings
322
Add a custom No Signal image
PART 3: Stream
What is streaming?
325
326
327
x
Streaming to a CDN, multicasting, and streaming to multiple destinations
328
About streaming using SRT
331
Secure streaming
332
Suggested stream settings
334
Streaming a channel direct to viewers
336
Share a live broadcast stream (HTTP, HTTPS or RTSP)
337
Enable HLS (pull)
338
Restrict viewer access to channel streams
340
Restrict viewers by IP address
341
IP restriction examples
342
Change HTTP and RTSP streaming port values
345
Disable and enable direct channel streaming
346
Directly share channel stream URLs with viewers
348
Viewing a channel's live broadcast stream
349
View the live broadcast URL using a web browser
350
View the streaming URL using a media player
352
Streaming to servers, CDNs, and other devices
354
Set up an RTMP or RTMPS (push) stream
354
Set up an SRT stream using rendezvous mode
356
Set up an SRT stream using caller and listener modes
359
Adjust latency and view the SRT stream status
363
Set AES encryption and a passphrase for SRT
366
Set up an HLS (push) stream
368
Set up an MPEG-DASH (push) stream
371
Set up an RTSP announce stream
374
Stream to a CDN using an XML profile
376
Start and stop streaming to a CDN
377
Multicast streaming
380
MPEG-TS streams using RTP/UDP push
380
MPEG-TS streams using UDP push
382
Multicast streaming using RTP/UDP
384
Set up traffic shaping
386
Viewing with Session Announcement Protocol (SAP)
388
Streaming to a media player or smart TV
Stream using UPnP
390
390
Enable UPnP
391
Disable UPnP
394
Viewing with UPnP
395
xi
Play directly to a media player
397
Auto-restart playback to a UPnP device
398
Change UPnP device name
398
Streaming NDI
398
About streaming NDI
399
Start and stop an NDI stream
400
PART 4: Record
402
About recording
403
Record a channel
404
Record using One Touch control
406
Configure recording settings, file size and type
407
Restart recording
410
Recorders
412
Add a recorder
412
Select channels to record
413
Start and stop a recorder
414
Rename a recorder
415
Duplicate a recorder
416
Delete a recorder
416
Manage recorded files
418
View list of recorded files
418
Download recorded files manually
419
Join recorded files together
420
Extract tracks from a recording
421
Rename recorded files
423
Delete recorded files
423
FTP and automatic file transfers
425
About Automatic File Upload (AFU)
425
Choose Channels and recorders to include in AFU
426
Enable AFU, schedule, and set options
428
Configure AFU to FTP server parameters
430
Configure AFU to RSync server parameters
432
Configure AFU to CIFS server parameters
433
Configure AFU to SCP client parameters
435
Configure AFU to SFTP server parameters
437
Configure AFU to AWS S3 parameters
439
Configure AFU to WebDav server parameters
441
AFU or copy to USB
443
xii
AFU to a USB storage device
443
Do a one-time copy/move all recordings to USB storage device
444
Manually copy recordings to USB storage device
446
View available USB storage space
448
Safely eject USB storage device
448
Add recordings to an AFU queue
450
View the AFU log
451
Manage the AFU queue
452
Local FTP server
454
PART 5: Integration
458
Kaltura registration
459
Enable CMS and register with Kaltura
459
Disable or deregister from Kaltura
462
Change the resource name used for Kaltura
464
Reassign a registered resource
465
Kaltura recording and webcasting setup
468
About Kaltura recording and webcasting
468
Select channels for Kaltura VOD events
471
Select channel for Kaltura webcasting events
472
Set Kaltura ad hoc event parameters
474
Change the events schedule refresh interval
476
Use RTMPS for a Kaltura webcasting event
477
Panopto registration
479
Enable CMS and register with Panopto
479
Disable CMS and disconnect from Panopto
481
Panopto recording and webcasting setup
483
About Panopto recording and webcasting
483
Setup Panopto authentication for ad hoc events
486
Set Panopto ad hoc event parameters
489
Disable low disk space alerts
490
CMS recording and webcasting using the Admin panel
492
Start/stop scheduled events using the Admin panel
492
Create ad hoc events using the Admin panel
494
Logout of an ad hoc session
497
Recover channel backup recordings
498
xiii
PART 6: Maintenance
501
Power down and system restart
502
Backup your Pearl-2 setup
504
Perform a factory reset
505
Firmware upgrade
506
Support
511
Register your device
515
Storage capacity maintenance
517
PART 7: Troubleshooting
Diagnostic tools
Connectivity status diagnostics
520
520
522
Run diagnostic tests using the Admin panel
523
Run diagnostic tests using the touchscreen
525
Troubleshooting Quick Reference
527
Remove black bars (matte) from the video
533
Use a specific EDID for the video input port
536
Unstretch the output video
538
Remove the combing effect on images
539
Previous releases and features
540
Software license
545
xiv
Pearl-2 User Guide
Start here
Start here
Welcome, and thank you for buying Epiphan Pearl-2™, Pearl-2 Rackmount™ or Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin™.
You'll find information on how to set up and use all three models in this user guide. When you see the name
Pearl-2 used in this guide, it means that the content applies to all three models. Differences are explicitly called
out. For a product description, see What is Pearl-2?.
See the Quick start for basic steps to get a single video source (and optional audio) set up so you can stream
and record some output right away. The rest of the guide shows you how to tweak the system exactly how
you want it so you can take advantage of the many advanced features.
Pearl-2 is fully integrated with Kaltura and Panopto Content Management Systems (CMSs) and is easily setup
using the Admin panel. The Integration section of this guide details how to register and set up Pearl-2 as a
remote recording and streaming device for Kaltura and Panopto.
For information about using Pearl-2's RS-232 API, HTTP API, and HTTPS API with third-party applications, refer
to the Pearl System API Guide.
About this Guide
After the introductory section and quick start, the next chapter describes the main user interfaces that are
used to operate and configure Pearl-2. You'll find everything that you need to use and setup these interfaces :
l
Touch screen
l
Admin Panel
l
Epiphan Live
The rest of the user guide covers setting up and operating your Pearl-2 system for a successful video
switching, recording, and live streaming experience. The chapters are organized into these main categories:
Setup, Capture, Stream, Record, Integration, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting.
1
Pearl-2 User Guide
What is Pearl-2?
This guide assumes that all feature add-ons for Pearl-2 are activated. If a documented feature or task is only
available when a specific feature add-on is activated, it is indicated by a link to the activation page for that
feature add-on. For the 4K add-on, the link is 4K .
What is Pearl-2?
Pearl-2 is a versatile live video production device that's a video encoder, video streamer, live switcher, and
video recorder all in one. Pearl-2 comes in three models.
Pearl-2
A small, silent, portable
system that comes with a
hard-shell carry case.
Pearl-2 Rackmount
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin
A 2U rackmount system with all the
same functionality as the portable
Pearl-2, but designed for installation
A high density 2U rack mount
variation that contains two complete
and operation in a rack.
(and independent) Pearl-2 systems.
With Pearl-2, you can capture, record, and stream from computer monitors, radar displays, or almost or
anything with a wide variety of supported video input signals, including:
2
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
SDI (up to 12G)
l
HDMI™
l
HDMI 4K4K
l
DVI-I (single link)
l
USB
l
SRT and RTSP
l
NDI® and NDI|HX (Alpha channel supported)
What is Pearl-2?
Capture audio from XLR, RCA, USB, SDI, HDMI, and network sources (SRT, NDI, and RTSP).
Simultaneously capture up to six full HD video sources or up to four 4K sources if you have the 4K feature
add on installed. You can create up to five simultaneous channels for live switching, or a single 4K channel.
Have separate ISOs or create custom layouts with multiple video sources and picture in picture. You can do all
that with Pearl-2.
Stream to Content Distribution Networks (CDNs) using modern protocols SRT, HLS, and MPEG-DASH. At the
same time, stream to other destinations using RTMP/RTMPS, RSTP, or NDI.
Easily multistream directly to viewers on your LAN so they can watch the live channel broadcast using a web
browser or media player on smart devices connected to the same private network as Pearl-2.
Recordings can be downloaded via FTP or set to automatically upload via FTP, RSYNC, or CIFS and can be
integrated into your Content Management System (CMS). Pearl-2 is also fully integrated with Kaltura and
Panopto Content Management Systems (CMSs) and can be registered as a video remote recorder resource for
seamless lecture capture plus user authentication directly from Pearl-2's touch screen.
Network security compliance with 802.1x protocols, passwords, and certificate authentication means an
easier setup for IT friendly live streaming over enterprise networks. HTTPS enabled for secure administration
and control over the LAN, and RTMPS support for secure, encrypted live streaming.
Pearl-2 does not capture from HDCP encrypted sources.
3
Pearl-2 User Guide
Feature add-ons
Feature add-ons
Pearl-2 offers add-on features so you can do even more with your system. Start from the base model of Pearl2 and add feature add-ons for extra functionality.
See Add-ons overview for details about the availability of add-ons for your system, as well as instructions to
purchase and install add-ons.
Where you see this symbol 4K in the guide, that means the feature or function applies only if you
have activated the 4K feature add-on.
4
Pearl-2 User Guide
Front and back view Pearl-2
Front and back view Pearl-2
Table 1 Pearl-2 front panel descriptions
Label Name
Description
Used for confidence monitoring and simple configuration, obtaining
Touch screen front panel
display
system information, and starting/stopping recordings and streams.
Users can also authenticate with one of the integrated Content
Management Systems (CMSs) to create unscheduled ad hoc
recordings and webcasts.
For connection of external hard drives, flash drives, USB keyboards,
and supported USB status light indicators.
USB 3.0 port
Can be used to connect a USB mouse or keyboard when the local
console feature is enabled.
A web camera or USB microphone cannot be connected to this port,
only to the ports on the rear panel.
3.5 mm audio jack
Power button
For audio confidence monitoring. Plays the audio for the currently
visible channel.
Press once to power on. Double-press to initiate a graceful system
shutdown.
5
Pearl-2 User Guide
Front and back view Pearl-2
Table 2 Pearl-2 back panel descriptions
Label Name
Description
The four XLR ports can function as two, professional line level
left/right stereo pairs (XLR A pair and XLR B pair) or as four mono
XLR audio in
inputs, see AV inputs.
The XLR ports are professional line-level inputs and are calibrated for
+ 4.0 dBu signals.
Four HDMI 1.4 ports that connect HDMI and DVI signals to Pearl-2.
HDMI in
The first two ports allow for any signal up to full HD, and the second
two inputs allow for any input resolution up to 4K4K .
12G SDI in
RCA audio in
RS-232 port
HDMI output ports
Connects SDI signals to Pearl-2, including 3G-SDI; 6G-SDI; 12G-SDI;
4K-SDI; HD-SDI; SD-SDI
The RCA ports are consumer line level, left/right stereo pair and are
calibrated for - 10 dBV signals.
For connection to a control computer terminal.
HDMI output for connection to a display or projector (up to 4K1). Port
1 is HDMI 2.0, and Port 2 is HDMI 1.4, see Video output ports.
For connection of external hard drives, flash drives, USB web cameras,
USB 3.0 ports
USB microphones, keyboards, or supported USB status light
indicators.
6
Pearl-2 User Guide
Label Name
Front and back view Pearl-2
Description
Can be used to connect a USB mouse or keyboard when the local
console feature is enabled.
Auto-sensing gigabit Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T network port with
RJ-45 Ethernet
support for RTSP, SRT, NDI and NDI|HX (Tx/Rx) networked video
inputs. See Configure network settings for setup instructions.
Power jack
Plug the supplied 120/240 V AC power cable in here.
1
Requires 4K feature add on
The SDI ports on the back of Pearl-2 can be delicate. Be careful to avoid sharp impacts or pressure
such as balancing the system on its back with the SDI ports against a hard surface. Rough
treatment of the SDI ports could result in loss of functionality for that port.
7
Pearl-2 User Guide
Front and back view Pearl-2
Pearl-2 Rackmount and Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin consists of two completely independent Pearl-2 systems, each with identical sets of
controls and ports.
Table 3 Pearl-2 Rackmount front panel descriptions
Label Name
Description
Used for confidence monitoring and simple configuration, obtaining
Touch screen front panel
display
system information, and starting/stopping recordings and streams.
User can also authenticate with one of the integrated Content
Management Systems (CMSs) to create unscheduled ad hoc
recordings and webcasts.
USB 3.0 port
For connection of external hard drives, flash drives, keyboards, or
supported USB status light indicators.
8
Pearl-2 User Guide
Label Name
Front and back view Pearl-2
Description
Can be used to connect a USB mouse or keyboard when the local
console feature is enabled.
A web camera or USB microphone cannot be connected to this port,
only to the ports on the rear panel.
3.5 mm audio jack
Power button and LED
For audio confidence monitoring. Plays the audio for the currently
visible channel.
Press once to power on. Double-press to initiate a graceful system
shutdown.
9
Pearl-2 User Guide
Front and back view Pearl-2
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin consists of two completely independent Pearl-2 systems, each with identical sets of
controls and ports.
Table 4 Pearl-2 Rackmount and Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin back panel descriptions
Label Name
Description
Power jack
Plug the power supply in here. Always use the provided power supply.
HDMI in
Connect HDMI and DVI signals.
4K HDMI in
Connect up to 4K1 HDMI signals.
SDI in
Connect SDI signals.
The four XLR ports can function as two, professional line level
left/right stereo pairs (XLR A pair and XLR B pair) or as four mono
XLR audio in
inputs, see AV inputs.
The XLR ports are professional line-level inputs and are calibrated for
+ 4.0 dBu signals.
RCA audio in
The RCA ports are consumer line level, left/right stereo pair and are
calibrated for - 10 dBV signals.
10
Pearl-2 User Guide
Label Name
HDMI Out
Front and back view Pearl-2
Description
For displaying a source or channel on an external display (up to 4K1).
For connection of external hard drives, flash drives, USB web cameras,
USB microphones, keyboards, or supported USB status light
USB 3.0 ports
indicators.
Can be used to connect a USB mouse or keyboard when the local
console feature is enabled.
Auto-sensing gigabit Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T network port with
RJ-45 Ethernet
support for RTSP, SRT, NDI and NDI|HX (Tx/Rx) networked video
inputs. See Configure network settings for setup instructions.
1
Requires 4K feature add on
The SDI ports on the back of Pearl-2 can be delicate. Be careful to avoid sharp impacts or pressure
such as balancing the system on its back with the SDI ports against a hard surface. Rough
treatment of the SDI ports could result in loss of functionality for that port.
11
Pearl-2 User Guide
What's in the Box?
What's in the Box?
Pearl-2
Pearl-2 Rackmount
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin
The standalone Pearl-2 model is shipped in a hard shell case that you can re-use for storing or moving the
system between jobs. Cable storage is located under the custom foam tray that holds Pearl-2 in the case.
Inside the box with your Pearl-2 system, you'll find the power cable and the following items. Pearl-2
Rackmount Twin comes with two sets of cables:
1. One SDI cable (3 feet / 1 meter in length)
2. One HDMI cable (3 feet / 1 meter in length)
3. One HDMI to DVI adapter
4. One Ethernet cable
5. One region-specific power supply cable (6 feet / 1.8 meters in length)
12
Pearl-2 User Guide
What's in the Box?
Table 5 Cables (power cable not shown)
Image
Name
SDI cable
HDMI cable
Description
Connect SDI sources to the SDI ports
(12G-SDI capable).
Connect HDMI or DVI (using adapter)
sources to the HDMI ports.
DVI (female) to
HDMI (male)
Connect DVI sources to the HDMI port.
adapter
RJ-45 Ethernet
cable
Connect Pearl-2 to your network.
13
Pearl-2 User Guide
Quick start
Quick start
This quick start uses the default settings where possible so you can quickly start using your Pearl-2. The
instructions apply to all Pearl-2 models; however, rackmount installation is not included here, see Rackmount
installation.
For the Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin , you cannot plug a source into one system and use it from the
other.
Before you start, make sure you have:
l
A video source such as a camera or a computer and cables to connect them to Pearl-2. For HDMI, the
source must not be HDCP protected.
l
An audio source coming from either your SDI , USB videoor HDMI video source (must not be
encrypted). Optionally, audio from a different source, such as an audio mixer that you connect to the
audio input ports can be used.
l
Local area network that uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is preferable.
l
Computer with a web browser connected to the same network. We'll call it the “admin” computer.
Starting up!
Pearl-2 is pre-configured with two plug and play channels: Auto A and Auto B. Auto channels are used for this
quick start. They have automatic video sensing, which detects the video signal you connect to the video input
ports on Pearl-2.
The first video source you connect while Pearl-2 is powered on is automatically assigned to the Auto channel
(either Auto A or Auto B, depending in which labeled port you connect the video source). For example, when
you first start Pearl-2, the video sources you connect to the HDMI-A and HDMI-B input ports appear
automatically in Auto A and Auto B channels (respectively). If no video source is connected, a standard No
Signal screen displays.
With auto channels, audio from the connected SDI, HDMI, or USB video source is automatically applied to the
channel without needing any additional configuration. For SDI or HDMI audio, just make sure it's
unencrypted.
The Auto channel's frame size is set to match the video source by default and the best bitrate for the default
frame rate of 30 fps is applied automatically.
For details about Auto channel defaults, behavior, and audio source priorities, see About automatic channels
Auto A and Auto B.
To get started quickly with auto channels:
14
Pearl-2 User Guide
Quick start
1. Turn on your camera or video source and connect the output to one of the video input ports labeled
"A" on the back panel of Pearl-2.
2. (Optional) Connect a second video source to one of the video input ports labeled "B".
3. (Optional) Connect audio to the XLR left/right stereo pair audio input ports on the back of Pearl-2 or to
the RCA stereo pair audio input ports.
4. Connect the Ethernet cable to Pearl-2 and to your network.
5. Connect the power cable and plug it into a power source.
6. Press the power button on the front panel to turn on the system. Wait for the power-up cycle to
complete.
The Grid view showing both channels appears on the touch screen. The video source you connected to
the "A" row appears in the Auto A channel, and the video source connected to the "B" row appears in
the Auto B channel.
7. Use the touch screen on Pearl-2 for confidence monitoring. To display the single Channel view, simply
tap on one of the channels that you see in the Grid view. From the Channel view, you can do things like
stop and start recording for the
8. (Optional) Plug headphones or speakers into the 3.5 mm stereo audio jack on the front of Pearl-2 to
monitor the audio.
My network IP address and channel monitoring
You can get the network IP address of your Pearl-2 from the touch screen so that you can do things like view
the channels using a web browser or access the configuration Admin panel. Just make sure that your admin
computer is connected to the same network as Pearl-2.
1. To find the system’s IP address using the touch screen, tap the gear icon in the bottom right corner of
the screen and select System Status.
15
Pearl-2 User Guide
Quick start
2. Using a browser on the admin computer, go to one of the following URLs to preview the channel.
For Auto A: http://<IP Address for Pearl-2>/preview.cgi?channel=1
For Auto B: http://<IP Address for Pearl-2>/preview.cgi?channel=2
For example:http://192.1.10.100/preview.cgi?channel=2
1. (Optional) Open a new tab in your browser and enter the URL to login to the Admin panel.
http://<IP Address for Pearl-2>/admin
For example:http://192.1.10.100/admin
The default user name admin has no password set by default. If a password has been set, consult with your
system administrator for the login credentials, see What is streaming?
16
Pearl-2 User Guide
Quick start
Record the channel
The channel is set up and streaming. This may be all you need, but if you like, you can also record the stream.
You can choose to initiate and control channel recording from either the touch screen or the Admin panel.
To control recording from the touch screen:
1. From the Grid view, tap the channel you want to record. The Channel view appears.
2. Tap the red dot to start recording. The record timer starts and continues for as long as the system is
recording. Tap the red dot again to stop recording. If the control icons aren't visible, tap the screen
once.
To control recording using the Admin panel:
1. From the Channels menu in the Admin panel, click Recording for your channel. The Recording page
opens.
2. Click Start to start recording the channel and click Stop to stop recording.
17
Pearl-2 User Guide
Quick start
3. Refresh the page. Click Recording again in the Channels menu or reload the browser page. The page
reloads and a file list appears that shows your newly recorded content.
4. Click the file name to download and view your recording.
What’s Next?
Now that you have a source setup and are ready to stream, you can fine-tune the system to your exact
requirements. Take a look at topics such as:
l
What is a channel?
l
Live video mixing / switching
l
Custom layout configuration
l
What is streaming?
l
Selecting an audio source
l
Video output ports
l
FTP and automatic file transfers
For higher security, we recommend setting admin, operator and viewer-level passwords on Pearl2, see Set or change user passwords.
When you're done setting up Pearl-2, make sure you back up the system configuration using the procedure
described in Create a configuration preset
18
Pearl-2 User Guide
Live video mixing / switching
Register Pearl-2 to get firmware updates
Keep Pearl-2 up-to-date and get all the latest features and firmware updates. Registering your Pearl-2 is free
and only needs to be done once. You can register anytime from the Firmware update page using the Admin
panel, see Register your device
Live video mixing / switching
Create dynamic content for your viewers to watch while you record and stream your program using Pearl-2.
Using the custom layout editor, you can create different layouts, like picture in picture or side-by-side views of
a camera and slides, then easily switch between layouts with either a tap on the touch screen, using Epiphan
Live on a mobile device, or from the Admin panel.
Your program stream with switched layouts could look like this:
To create a program channel with custom layouts using the custom layout editor that you can switch, see
What is a channel?
For instructions on how to live switch, see:
l
Switching / mixing using the touch screen
l
Switching / mixing using Epiphan Live
l
Switching / mixing using the Admin panel
19
Pearl-2 User Guide
Monitoring audio
Monitoring audio
Pearl-2's front panel includes a 3.5 mm audio jack for monitoring audio. You can plug external speakers or
headphones into the 3.5 mm audio jack. To monitor the audio for a channel, just select the channel using the
touch screen. The audio you hear depends on which layout is currently live because different layouts can have
different audio sources configured.
Adjust the volume
Tap the headphones icon on the touch screen to adjust the volume. Each tap increases the volume by 25% to
a maximum volume of 100%. Tapping the headphones icon when the volume is at 100% mutes the volume.
You can also long press the headphones icon to mute and unmute the volume.
Volume is muted.
25%
50%
75%
100%
volume.
volume.
volume.
volume.
At 75% volume, what you hear corresponds to the nominal audio level in the VU meter at approximately
where the green bars change to yellow. Increasing the volume to 100% may cause you to hear distortion that
is not actually present in the audio signal being recorded and streamed.
20
Pearl-2 User Guide
Monitoring audio
Audio VU meter
A VU meter on the touch screen shows the audio levels for the selected channel. The value is displayed in
dBFS (decibels relative to full scale). Colored bars represent the audio level.
Channels that have stereo audio display two bars. The top bar is the left audio channel and the bottom bar is
the right audio channel.
VU meter (mono)
VU meter (stereo)
Table 6 Audio VU meter levels
Color
Decibel range
Red
0 to -9 dBFS
Yellow
-9 to -18 dBFS
Green
-18 dBFS and lower
The VU meter appears in several different places so you can visually check audio levels:
l
Touch screen: On the individual channel view and the grid view. If the audio meter isn't showing, tap
anywhere on the touch screen to turn on the control icons.
21
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Selecting an audio source
Admin Panel: On the audio input source's configuration page when you select the input source from
the Inputs menu. You can also add the VU meter to appear on the video output ports, see Disable or
enable audio and output port volume.
l
Epiphan Live: See Monitor video and audio input sources
Selecting an audio source
You can choose the audio source for a channel using the Admin panel and can have a mix of several different
audio sources. Select your audio sources from connected video sources (SDI, HDMI, USB videoUVC, SRT, NDI,
and RTSP), as well as from the dedicated analog audio input ports. The USB (UVC/UAC) ports on the rear panel
of Pearl-2 will accept a USB microphone (UAC).
Dedicated analog audio inputs ports are:
l
Four XLR professional line-level inputs + 4.0 dBu up to 12.3 V RMS, (+24 dBu) that support balanced
and unbalanced signals.
l
One stereo pair RCA consumer line-level input (-10 dBV)
l
Two USB video/audio ports
l
Four HDMI ports
l
Two SDI ports
The four XLR audio inputs are configured as two stereo pairs by default: XLR A (left/right) and XLR B
(left/right), see Configure audio ports for stereo or mono. The XLR B audio ports and the RCA audio ports are
linked. You can configure Pearl-2 to use both or just one of the audio sources using the Admin panel, see
Assign audio sources to an input.
Audio for Auto channels are selected automatically.
This table offers some guidelines for adjusting the gain of the XLR and RCA analog audio input ports, as well as
the USB ports. Add the suggested gain to the audio input to get an average signal to register at a nominal level
in the VU meter (i.e. where the green bars change to yellow). The actual amount of gain needed depends on
the strength of the original audio signal. See Adjust audio gain and delay for details.
Table 7 Audio input port gain guidelines
Audio source
Input
Gain
port
Mobile phone or other
XLR
Add +6 to +12 dB gain to the audio input port.
consumer line level device
RCA1
Nominal
22
Pearl-2 User Guide
Selecting an audio source
Audio source
Input
Professional mixer
USB microphone
Gain
port
XLR
Nominal
RCA1
Not recommended.
USB
Nominal
Not recommended.
Dynamic, condenser, or
electret microphones
To connect microphones to the pro line level XLR inputs, you must
XLR
use an external preamp to boost the microphone signal enough to
provide the proper line level signal at the XLR input port, see
Connecting microphones to the XLR line level inputs.
1To avoid unwanted signal noise on the RCA ports,
we recommend adding no more than 12dB of gain to the RCA
port or when XLR B/RCA is used.
To choose a different audio device for the channel:
1. Using a web browser on the admin computer, go to the IP address of your Pearl-2 and log in, see
Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select your channel (i.e. Auto A or Auto B) and click Layouts. The custom
channel layout editor page opens.
Audio for Auto channels are selected automatically.
3. Check the audio source that you want to use for the layout and click Save.
23
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connecting microphones to the XLR line level inputs
4. (Optional) Adjust the gain for an audio input source. Select the input port from the Inputs menu and
adjust the amount of gain on the configuration page for the audio input port. Click Save when you're
done. For more details, see Adjust audio gain and delay.
Connecting microphones to the XLR line
level inputs
The four XLR analog audio input ports on Pearl-2 are professional line level inputs rated at + 4.0 dBu up to
12.3 V RMS, (+24 dBu). You can't connect microphones directly to the XLR ports because the microphone
signal is too low. If you want to connect microphones to the line-level XLR ports on Pearl-2, you must use an
external preamp and boost the mic level signal to the appropriate line level before connecting it to the XLR
port.
24
Pearl-2 User Guide
Specifications
Specifications
Topics include:
l
AV inputs
l
Tech specs
l
Optimum CPU performance
l
International character support
AV inputs
For best performance, we recommend using a maximum of six 1920×[email protected] fps sources in up to six full
HD channels simultaneously. Up to three of those [email protected] inputs can be from NDI 4.1 sources. Or you can
have up to four 4K sources4K simultaneously in a single channel. One of those 4K inputs can be from a
networked source (SRT, RTSP, or NDI).
Only content that is not HDCP-protected is captured from HDMI and USB video sources.
Pearl-2 supports the following AV inputs. However, Pearl-2 does support common signal converters and input
adapters.
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin has two complete sets of these inputs.
Table 8 Inputs for Pearl-2
Input port
Qty
SDI1
2
HDMI™
2
4K HDMI2
2
Details
Linear PCM audio/video input. Supports up to 12G-SDI signals.
Linear PMC audio/video input, non-HDCP protected. DVI-I (using
an adapter) is single link.
Linear PMC audio/video input, non-HDCP protected. DVI-I (using
an adapter) is single link.
Linear PCM audio/video input accepts non-HDCP protected
USB 3.0
2
content. Use to connect UAC or UVC devices, such as USB
microphones and web cameras. Can also connect to external hard
drives, flash drives, and control interfaces.
RJ-45 3
1
Up to six SRT sources over Ethernet at 1920×[email protected] fps or one
4K4K SRT input.
25
Pearl-2 User Guide
Tech specs
Input port
Qty
Details
Up to six RTSP sources over Ethernet at 1920×[email protected] fps or
one 4K4K RTSP input.
Up to three NDI sources over Ethernet at 1920×[email protected] fps or
one 4K4K NDI input.
RCA consumer line-level audio inputs function as a stereo pair (-10
dBV).
4
RCA
2
l
White = left
l
Red = right
The XLR inputs accept balanced and unbalanced, pro line level
signals (+4.0 dBu) up to to 12.3 VRMS , +24 dBu.
XLR4
4
By default, the four XLR ports operate as two stereo left/right
audio pairs (XLR A pair and XLR B pair). You can configure the
ports to operate as independent mono inputs using the Admin
panel, see Configure audio ports for stereo or mono.
1
SD-SDI audio is not supported
2
Requires 4K feature add on
3
A mix of video over Ethernet sources are supported. Just ensure that total system loading is within
acceptable levels, see Optimum CPU performance.
4
In the Admin panel, Analog audio B includes audio signals from the XLR B audio pair and the RCA audio pair
by default. You can disable one or the other using the Admin panel, see Assign audio sources to an input.
If you are using DVI2PCIe cards with your Pearl-2, DVI2PCIe cards do not support audio over
HDMI.
Tech specs
The input and output connectors are listed for Pearl-2 and Pearl-2 Rackmount. Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin is
made up of two completely independent Pearl-2 systems, therefore it has double the number of inputs and
outputs that are listed in this table.
For the most up-to-date product specifications and information, go to www.epiphan.com/pearl-2.
Table 9 Specifications for Pearl-2
Video Inputs
Local video inputs
(2) 12G SDI
26
Pearl-2 User Guide
Tech specs
(2) HDMI™ 1.4a¹ / DVI2
(2) 4K HDMI 1.4a (UHD/DCI)3 / DVI2
(2) USB 3.0 (UVC) - rear panel
RTSP4
Video over
Ethernet5
NDI® 4.1 and NDI HX6 4.1 (Alpha channel support)
SRT (push)6
(4) HDMI type A (female)
(2) BNC (female)
Connectors
(2) USB-A (female) - rear panel
(1) RJ-45
Aspect ratios
Standard
resolutions
Input resolution
range
3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 16:10, and custom aspect ratios
PAL, PAL wide, NTSC, NTSC wide
640×480 to 4096×2160
Frame rate
Up to 60 fps7
Video input color
HDMI: RGB 4:4:4, YCRCB 4:2:2, YCRCB 4:4:4
spaces
SDI: RGB 4:4:4, YCRCB 4:2:2
Deinterlacing
Yes
Maximum cable
length for SDI
Maximum cable
length for USB 3.0
300 ft
6 ft
(4) XLR pro line level (+ 4.0 dBu) up to 12.3 VRMS, +24 dBu
Analog audio inputs
(balanced/unbalanced, mono or two L/R stereo pairs)
(1) RCA consumer line level - 10 dBV (L/R stereo pair)
Audio Inputs
(4) XLR (female)
Connectors
(2) RCA (female)
27
Pearl-2 User Guide
Tech specs
(2) SDI8
(4) HDMI
Digital audio inputs9
(3) USB (rear panel)
(6) RTSP (embedded from RTSP input over Ethernet)
(3) NDI (embedded from NDI input over Ethernet)
(6) SRT (embedded from SRT input over Ethernet)
(2) SDI (female)
(4) HDMI (female)
Connectors
(2) USB (female) - rear panel
(1) RJ-45 (female)
Audio gain control
0 dB to +30 dB
Audio mute
Yes
Configurable audio
delay
Video output color
space
-300 ms to +300 ms
4:2:0, 8 bits per color
H.264/AVC (ITU H.264, ISO/IEC 14496-10) 4:2:0, 8 bit
color
Video codec
l
Encoding profile: High, Main, Baseline
l
Profile levels: 3.0, 3.1,3.2,4.0,4.1, 5.1
Motion JPEG
Video processing
NDI, NDI|HX
Bitrate
1 to 50 Mbps (selectable)
Bitrate control
Constant
Hardware
accelerated video
Optional
encoding
Video scaling
Software and hardware
28
Pearl-2 User Guide
Tech specs
Chroma keying
Upstream/downstream keying
Key frames
1/2 s, and 1 s up to 5 s in 1 second intervals
Compression
MP3, AAC, and PCM
MP3: 22 kHz, 44 kHz, 48 kHz
Audio processing
Sampling rate
AAC: 16 kHz, 22 kHz, 44 kHz, 48 kHz
PCM: 22 kHz, 44 kHz, 48 kHz
Bitrate
64 to 320 kbps (MP3 and AAC)
(2) HDMI (port 1 HDMI 2.0, port 2 HDMI 1.4a)
(3) H.264/AVC digital video over Ethernet
(2) NDI (unicast)
Signal types
(6) RTSP
(6) SRT (push)
(6) HLS (push)
(6) MPEG-DASH (push)
(2) HDMI
Connectors
(1) RJ-45 (female)
MPEG-TS and FLV
Video output
RTSP over TCP/UDP
SRT (push) over UDP
HLS (push) over HTTP/HTTPS
Streaming protocols
MPEG-DASH (push) over over HTTP/HTTPS
Multi-Publish to Streaming Server / CDN (SRT, RTSP,
RTMP, RTMPS)
HLS (pull) - Native Apple HTTP/HTTPS stream for iPad,
iPhone and iPod Touch
RTP/UDP, MPEG-TS & RTP, and MPEG-TS over UDP
Multicast streams
UPnP and SAP
29
Pearl-2 User Guide
Tech specs
SRT: 128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits AES encryption
(negotiated) and configurable passphrase
Stream encryption
HLS (push): MD5, SHA-256, and SHA-512
and authentication
MPEG-DASH: MD5, SHA-256, and SHA-512
RTMPS: encryption plus CA certificate negotiation
Recorded: 480p to 2160p
Streamed H.264: 480p to 2160p
Resolution ranges
NDI streamed: 480p to 1080p
HDMI output ports: 480p to 2160p
Frame rate
Up to 60 fps
H.264/AVC (ITU H.264, ISO/IEC 14496-10) 4:2:0, 8 bit
color
Formats
l
Encoding profile: High, Main, Baseline
l
Profile levels: 3.0, 3.1,3.2,4.0,4.1
Motion JPEG
NDI
Network traffic
shaping (multicast
4 Mbps to 95 Mbps (configurable)
streams)
Analog audio
output
(1) 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack - front panel
RTSP, SRT, and NDI audio over Ethernet
Audio output
Digital audio
outputs
HLS and MPEG-DASH over HTTP/HTTPS
HDMI audio (embedded)
Touch screen
Monitor and control
USB keyboard
USB status light
4.3 inch touch screen monitor (built in) resolution:
800x480
Connect a standard USB keyboard (optional)
Connect a single USB status light (optional), supported
models:
30
Pearl-2 User Guide
Tech specs
-Kuando BusyLight models: UC Alpha and UC Omega
-Delcom Products USB HID single color and multi-color
signal indicators
Record formats
Upload image
formats
Internal hard drive
File transfer
protocols
Recording and storage
Network file share
protocols
File system for USB
storage
AVI, MOV, MP4, and MPEG-TS
JPEG, PNG
512 GB SSD10
FTP, SFTP, SCP, AWS S3 client, and WebDAV client RSync
CIFS/SMB
FAT16, FAT32, XFS, EXT2, EXT3, EXT4, NTFS
(1) USB 3.0 - front panel
External USB ports
(2) USB 3.0 (UAV/UAC) - rear panel
Bitrate
Up to 50 Mbps
31
Pearl-2 User Guide
Tech specs
USB standards
USB 1.1, USB 2.0, and USB 3.0 HDCP compliant
Serial port
(1) Bidirectional RS-232 (female)
Data bits: 7 or 8 (default)
Stop bits: 1
Serial port protocols
Parity: None
Flow control: None, Hardware or Software
Serial port baud rate 19200 bps
Communication
Ethernet host port
(1) RJ-45 (female)
Ethernet data rate
10/100/1000 Base-T, half/full duplex with autodetect
Maximum
Transmission Unit
68 to 1500 MTU, configurable
DHCP Option 81, TLS 1.2, LDAP, mDNS, DDNS, UPnP,
Protocols
SAP, RTP, MPEG-TS & RTP and MPEG-TS/UDP, 802.1x,
EAPOL, EAP-TTLS, EAP-TLS, PEAP, HTTP, HTTPS, NTP, PTP,
FTP, SFTP, SCP AWS S3
Network discovery /
Announce
Network security
802.1x EAP
methods
UPnP, SAP
PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS
Local web UI for full administration. On-screen display
and mobile UI for confidence monitoring, administration,
and control.
Admin panel
Local Admin panel access using a USB mouse, keyboard,
and monitor connected directly to Pearl-2 with built-in
virtual keyboard and touch-screen monitor support.
Administration and
control
Epiphan Live
Local web-based UI to easily control streaming, recording,
and switching.
Cloud-based platform to remotely manage and control
Epiphan Cloud
Pearl-2 devices. Start and stop recording/streaming,
monitor channels and alert dashboard, remotely login to
Admin panel for rescue troubleshooting, update firmware
32
Pearl-2 User Guide
Tech specs
and more from the Internet.
Multiple user accounts and passwords.
Secure access
HTTPS for secure Admin panel and Epiphan Live access, as
well as local network access to the live channel broadcast.
Remote access:
API
Remote login11 to cloud versions of the Admin panel and
Epiphan Live.
Yes (HTTP/HTTPS or RS-232)
Yes
Crestron driver
See https://applicationmarket.crestron.com/epiphan/
Content
Kaltura
Management
Integrations
Systems
Cloud access and
management
Panopto
Epiphan Cloud
33
Pearl-2 User Guide
Tech specs
Power supply
Internal: 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz
Power use
0.8 A, 100-240 V ac
Operating
temperature
32° to 122° F (0° to 50° Celsius)
Cooling
Fan air flow: Bottom front to back
Enclosure
Metal
Portable desktop model
Form factor
19" rack mountable model
19" Rackmount Twin model
General
Pearl-2: 11.81″ × 9.45″ × 3.54″ (300mm × 240mm ×
90mm)
Dimensions (W x D
x H)
Pearl-2 Rackmount: 19 ⅛" × 3½" × 10 ⅞" (485 mm × 89
mm × 276 mm) - dimensions include mounting tabs
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin: 19 ⅛" × 3½" × 10 ⅞" (485
mm × 89 mm × 276 mm) - dimensions include mounting
tabs
Pearl-2: 8.38 lbs (3.8 kg)
Weight
Pearl-2 Rackmount: 12.1 lbs (5.5 kg)
Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin: 14.6 lbs (6.6 kg)
FCC compliance: Part 15
CE compliance:
Regulatory compliance
Directive 2014/30/EU - Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive 2014/35/EU - Low Voltage Directive
Directive 2011/65/EU - RoHS
Time Synchronization
NTP, TIME (RFC 868), PTP v1 (IEEE-1588-2002 V1)
Country of Origin
Made in Taiwan
¹ HDCP compliant.
2
Using HDMI port with adapter.
3
Requires 4K feature add on.
4
Up to six [email protected] inputs can be from RTSP sources or up to one 4K source4K can be from an RTSP source.
34
Pearl-2 User Guide
Optimum CPU performance
5
A mix of video over Ethernet sources are supported. Just ensure that total system loading is within
acceptable levels, see Optimum CPU performance.
6
Up to three [email protected] inputs or up to one 4K input source4K .
7
Except the HDMI 4K input ports, which support up to 30 fps.
8
Digital audio is de-embedded from the digital source.
9
SD-SDI audio is not supported.
10
Approximately 100 MB of the hard drive space is reserved for system use. Recording space can be virtually
unlimited with offload to networked storage.
11
Requires an Epiphan Cloud Pro account.
Optimum CPU performance
Pearl-2, Pearl-2 Rackmount and Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin are powerful live video production systems;
however, there's a limit to the number of concurrent tasks the onboard CPU can perform efficiently.
The number of concurrent tasks depends on many factors, like: how many channels you have, how many
layouts you have per channel, how often you switch layouts, is the system resizing (scaling) video sources,
what frame rate and bitrate is used per channel, are the video output ports used, etc. Keep in mind that
connecting a live monitor to the HDMI output port consumes about the equivalent of an encoded
1920×[email protected] fps channel.
Streaming an NDI output consumes about the equivalent of an encoded 1920×[email protected] fps
channel on Pearl-2.
For best results, we recommend keeping Pearl-2's CPU usage under 70%.
You can check the Overall system load from the Info page using the Admin panel.
35
Pearl-2 User Guide
Optimum CPU performance
To check the CPU usage from the touch screen, tap the gear icon and select System Status.
If the system load is higher than recommended, you can:
l
Disable the video output port (if unused).
l
Remove unused channels or layouts.
l
Reduce the number of channels created.
36
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
International character support
Ensure video sources come in at the right resolution so that Pearl-2 doesn't have to up scale or down
scale the video source.
International character support
You can include certain international characters in channel names, layout names, video and audio input
names, text overlays, and in the name of recorded files. Common character sets for the following languages
are approved:
l
Western European/Nordic languages: Danish, Dutch, English, French, German, Icelandic, Italian,
Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish, and Swedish.
l
Central/Eastern European languages: Bosnian, Croatian, Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Romanian,
Slovak, and Russian.
Important considerations
l
Use only alphanumeric and diacritic characters in metadata descriptions. The whole metadata string is
refused if any special currency or mathematical symbol appears in the description. You must remove
the offending characters before Pearl-2 will accept the description, see Add or remove channel
metadata.
l
Do not include any special currency, mathematical symbols, and other special characters such as
slashes or spaces in the channel name. Pearl-2 replaces special characters with an underscore.
37
Pearl-2 User Guide
User interfaces and remote access
User interfaces and remote
access
Pearl-2 has three user interfaces:
l
Touch screen: Easily accessible on the front panel of Pearl-2, the touch screen is primarily used for
confidence monitoring, live switching, and one-touch recording and streaming control, see About the
touch screen. For instructions to use the touch screen to start/stop scheduled events or to
authenticate with a Content Management System (CMS) and create unscheduled ad hoc recordings and
webcasts, see CMS event controls using the touch screen.
l
Admin Panel: A web-based user interface that's primarily used to perform system set up and
administrative tasks for your Pearl-2. You can access the Admin Panel using an internet browser on a
computer or tablet that's connected to the same local Ethernet network as your Pearl-2, or locally using
a USB mouse, keyboard, and monitor connected directly to Pearl-2. See About the Admin panel.
l
Epiphan Live: A web-based user interface that's primarily used for confidence monitoring, statistics,
live switching, and recording control, see Epiphan Live.
Start and stop recording/streaming, monitor video sources, view status and alerts, remote rescue
troubleshooting and more over the Internet using Epiphan Cloud, see Cloud-based device management. For
remote login access to your Pearl-2 using cloud versions of the Admin panel and Epiphan Live, see Remote
login to the Admin panel and Epiphan Live.
38
Pearl-2 User Guide
The touch screen
The touch screen
Use the touch screen to switch layouts, start and stop recording and streaming, configure network settings,
load configuration presets, and to view configured channels, audio meters, and system information.
Topics include:
l
About the touch screen
l
Record a channel using the touch screen
l
Stream a channel using the touch screen
l
Switching / mixing using the touch screen
l
One Touch streaming and recording control
l
CMS event controls using the touch screen
l
Configure the touch screen
To view system information using the touch screen, see View system information using the touch screen
To select the video source for the output port using the touch screen when local console is enabled, see Select
the video output source using the touch screen.
About the touch screen
Pearl-2's convenient touch screen has many uses, including: confidence monitoring, basic configuration and
diagnostics, one-touch streaming and recording control, easy start/stop of scheduled events, and
authentication with a Content Management System (CMS) to create unscheduled ad hoc recordings and
webcasts.
The touch screen is capacitive. Use your finger or a specially designed soft-tipped capacitive stylus
with firm but gentle pressure. Pressing too hard or using something other than a fingertip or
capacitive stylus can result in damage to the screen.
When you power on Pearl-2, a grid view appears. The grid view displays all channels that are configured for
your system. If you haven't created any channels yet, the grid view shows only the two default auto channels:
Auto-A and Auto-B.
In this example, the grid view shows two video sources, which are plugged into video input ports A and B on
Pearl-2 and are displayed in auto channels Auto-A and Auto-B, respectively.
39
Pearl-2 User Guide
About the touch screen
If no video sources are connected, or your sources aren't sending a signal, the grid view shows no
signal images. See About automatic channels Auto A and Auto B for more details about auto
channels.
Tap a channel on the grid view to select it and go to that channel's view. You can tap the grid icon to return to
the grid view. Tap the gear icon at any time to go to system settings.
Grid icon
A No Channels screen appears if there are no channels configured on your Pearl-2 and the automatic channels
Auto A and Auto B have been deleted. Tap anywhere on this screen to go to the system settings screen.
By default, the touch screen and all features except viewing the CMS Events screen are enabled. You can
disable the touch screen and define which features are enabled on the touch screen. If the touch screen is
40
Pearl-2 User Guide
The Channel view
configured to not show channel previews, tap anywhere on the screen to go to the system settings screen.
See Configure the touch screen for details. For information about the CMS Events screen and icon, see CMS
event controls using the touch screen.
When setting some features, a pop-up virtual keyboard appears. To enable using an external keyboard that
you connect to one of Pearl-2's USB ports instead, see Connect an external keyboard.
The Channel view
Each channel you configure on Pearl-2 can be monitored and controlled using the touch screen. After you
power on Pearl-2 and the grid view opens, you can select a channel and open the channel view. Just tap the
channel you want in the grid view and the channel view opens.
41
Pearl-2 User Guide
The Channel view
Table 10 Parts of the touch screen for the individual channel view
Item
Description
1
2
3
4
5
Channel name.
Streaming status. Gray means streaming is stopped, flashing
blue means streaming is in progress.
The streaming timer shows the length of time that streaming
has been in progress.
Recording status. Bright red and flashing means recording is
in progress.
The recording timer shows the length of time that recording
has been in progress.
Controls to switch between channels. Tap the arrow to view
6 and 7
the next (or previous) channel. The arrow icons fade when
the touch screen is idle (i.e. untouched) for several seconds.
Tap the touch screen and the icons reappear.
Audio VU meter uses quasi-peak ballistics with samples
averaged every 10 ms. The maximum average audio level in
each 100 ms period is displayed using colored bars.
8
9
l
RED = 0 to -9 dBFS
l
Yellow = -9 to -18 dBFS
l
Green = -18 dBFS and lower
Audio monitoring volume control icon. Tap to change volume
level. See Monitoring audio for more information.
Live Switcher view icon. Tap to view the live switcher, which
10
lets you live switch between different custom layouts that are
configured for the channel.
CMS Events screen icon. Tap to view the status of scheduled
11
Kaltura or Panopto CMS events or to authenticate with your
CMS and create an unscheduled ad hoc event, see Create ad
hoc events using the Admin panel.
12
Grid view icon. Tap to view all the configured channels in a
grid.
42
Pearl-2 User Guide
Record a channel using the touch screen
Item
Description
13
14
Single touch streaming and recording control icon. See One
Touch streaming and recording control
System settings icon. See View system information using the
touch screen.
Record a channel using the touch screen
Use Pearl-2's touch screen to easily start and stop recording of a channel. Simply tap the recording control
button that appears in the channel view.
If the red Record icon doesn't appear in the top right corner of the screen, recording is
disabled. See Disable or enable recording, streaming and switching from the
touch screen to enable recording.
To start and stop recording a channel using the touch screen:
1. From the grid view, select the channel you want to record. The channel view opens. If necessary, tap
the screen once to display the controls.
2. Tap the red Record icon at the top right of the screen to start recording. The red dot flashes and the
record timer increments when recording is in progress.
3. Tap the red Record icon again to stop recording. The dot stops flashing and the record timer resets to
00:00:00.
43
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream a channel using the touch screen
Pearl-2 also features One Touch, which lets you control recording and streaming of multiple channels and
recorders at the same time with the touch of a button. See One Touch streaming and recording control
for more information.
Stream a channel using the touch screen
Use Pearl-2's touch screen to easily start and stop streaming a channel. Simply tap the streaming control
button that appears in the channel view.
If the gray (or blue) Stream icon doesn't appear in the top left corner of the screen,
streaming is disabled. See Disable or enable recording, streaming and switching
from the touch screen to enable streaming.
To start and stop streaming a channel using the touch screen:
1. From the grid view, select the channel you want to record. The channel view opens. If necessary, tap
the screen once to display the controls.
2. Tap the gray Stream icon at the top left of the screen to start streaming. The Stream icon turns blue
and the timer increments when streaming is in progress.
3. Tap the Stream icon again to stop streaming. The dot turns gray and the timer resets to 00:00:00.
If an error occurs when you start streaming, a yellow circle with an exclamation mark
appears in the left top corner of the touch screen. Check your networking and streaming
settings.
Pearl-2 also features One Touch, which lets you control recording and streaming of multiple channels and
recorders at the same time with the touch of a button. See One Touch streaming and recording control
for more information.
44
Pearl-2 User Guide
Switching / mixing using the touch screen
Switching / mixing using the touch screen
Switching live video inputs, or video mixing, is simple and intuitive using Pearl-2's touch screen.
After you select the channel you want to live switch, tap the Live Switcher icon along the bottom of the touch
screen to open the live switcher. All custom layouts that are configured for the channel display in the carousel.
Simply tap a layout to load it in to the standby panel and you're ready to start live switching.
Performing live switching using one interface, like the touch screen, does not dynamically
update the visuals in the other interfaces (e.g. the Admin panel and Epiphan Live). The
other interfaces must be manually refreshed to accurately reflect the current live switching
layout information.
If the live switching controls don't appear on the touch screen, they may have been disabled, see Disable or
enable recording, streaming and switching from the touch screen.
To switch custom layouts for a channel using the touch screen:
1. Tap the Live Switcher icon to open the live switcher view for the channel. If the control icons aren't
showing, tap anywhere on the touch screen.
2. The Live Switcher view opens.
45
Pearl-2 User Guide
Switching / mixing using the touch screen
3. Tap any layout that appears in the carousel to load it in to the Preview panel.
4. Tap Apply or double tap inside the Preview panel to switch that layout to the Live panel. The layout
that was in the Live panel moves to the Preview panel so that it's ready for the next time you switch.
5. To load a different layout into the Preview panel, tap another layout in the carousel.
46
Pearl-2 User Guide
One Touch streaming and recording control
6. Tap Back to exit the Live Switcher view.
One Touch streaming and recording control
You can easily control streaming and recording from the touch screen on Pearl-2 with the press of a single
button.
Topics include:
l
About One Touch streaming and recording
l
Specify channels and recorders for One Touch recording
l
Specify channels for One Touch streaming
l
Customize the One Touch control display
About One Touch streaming and recording
The One Touch feature lets you control the recording and streaming of multiple channels and recorders with
the touch of a single button on the touch screen of Pearl-2. You simply specify which channels and recorders
to include for One Touch control using the Admin panel.
To open the One Touch control screen from the touch screen on Pearl-2, simply tap the One Touch control
icon.
47
Pearl-2 User Guide
About One Touch streaming and recording
Table 11 One Touch control screen components
Label
Description
Start/stop button: Press the One Touch control button to start
1
or stop streaming and recording for all specified channels and
recorders.
The number of recorders and/or channels that are actively
2
recording (the first number) over the total number of channels
that are configured for One Touch recording (the second
number).
The number of channels that are actively streaming (the first
3
number) over the total number of channels that are configured
for One Touch streaming (the second number).
When you press the start button to activate One Touch recording and streaming, a blue Stop button appears,
the Recording values update to show the number of channels and recorders that are actively recording, and
the Streaming values update to show the number of channels that are actively streaming.
48
Pearl-2 User Guide
Customize the One Touch control display
In the example above, One Touch control has been activated and all six out of the six total
channels and/or recorders are recording successfully. There is no streaming activity because
there are no channels configured for One Touch streaming.
An error icon displays if there's a problem with the streaming and/or recording settings for one or more of the
channels and recorders. All other channels and recorders that are working correctly continue to stream and
record normally.
In this example, after pressing Start, both recorders/channels are recording properly but the
one channel configured for streaming is not streaming correctly.
To troubleshoot, investigate each channel's streaming configuration page using the Admin panel
and identify which channel isn't streaming. Then correct any streaming configuration errors.
See Specify channels for One Touch streaming and Specify channels and recorders for One Touch recording
for more information about configuring channels and recorders for One Touch control.
Customize the One Touch control display
You can use the Admin panel to customize how One Touch Control is displayed on the touch screen of Pearl-2:
l
Default: The One Touch control screen is accessed by tapping the One Touch control icon at the
bottom of the touch screen.
l
Start Screen: The One Touch control screen displays automatically on the touch screen when you
power on Pearl-2. Operators can still navigate to other screens from the One Touch control screen.
l
Locked: The One Touch control screen is the only screen that displays on the touch screen of Pearl-2.
Operators cannot navigate to other screens from the One Touch control screen.
To configure how the One Touch control screen displays on the touch screen:
49
Specify channels and recorders for One Touch
Pearl-2 User Guide
recording
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Touch Screen. The Touch screen configuration page opens.
3. Click Single touch control and select either Default, Start Screen or Locked.
4. Click Apply.
If you chose Start Screen or Locked, the touch screen automatically refreshes to
display the One Touch control screen.
Specify channels and recorders for One Touch recording
All channels and recorders are enabled for One Touch recording by default. You can enable and disable One
Touch recording control for individual channels and recorders using the Admin panel.
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. To enable or disable Single touch control for a channel.
a. From the Channels menu, select the channel you want and click Recording. The Recording page
opens.
50
Pearl-2 User Guide
Specify channels and recorders for One Touch
recording
b. Click change, and then check Single touch control on the options page to enable the channel
for One Touch control. Uncheck the check box if you don't want to include that channel for One
Touch control.
c. Click Apply.
3. To enable or disable Single touch control for a recorder.
51
Pearl-2 User Guide
Specify channels and recorders for One Touch
recording
a. From the Recorders menu, select the recorder you want. The Recorder Setup page opens.
b. Click change, and then check Single touch control on the options page to enable the recorder
for One Touch control. Uncheck Single touch control if you don't want to include that
recorder for One Touch control.
c. Click Apply.
To learn how to configure your channels for recording, see Record. To learn how to configure
recorders, see Recorders
52
Pearl-2 User Guide
Specify channels for One Touch streaming
Specify channels for One Touch streaming
Channels are not enabled for One Touch streaming by default. You can enable and disable One Touch
streaming control for individual channels using the Admin panel.
To specify channels for One Touch streaming:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select the channel you want and click Streaming. The Streaming page
opens.
3. Click New stream and select a publishing method, for example, RTMP push.
4. Check Single touch control to enable this channel's stream for One Touch control. Uncheck Single
touch control if you don't want to include this channel's stream for One Touch control.
53
Pearl-2 User Guide
CMS event controls using the touch screen
5. Click Apply.
To learn how to configure your channels for streaming, see Stream.
CMS event controls using the touch screen
Pearl-2 starts recording scheduled events automatically; however, you can use the touch screen to start and
stop scheduled events sooner. The touch screen can also be used to authenticate with your Content
Management System (CMS) to create unscheduled ad hoc recordings and webcasts. For detailed instructions,
see:
l
Stop/start scheduled events using the touch screen
l
Create ad hoc events using the touch screen
For important considerations before recording or webcasting to a CMS, see About Kaltura recording and
webcasting and About Panopto recording and webcasting.
Table 12 Events screens using Pearl-2 for scheduled Kaltura and Panopto events
Events screens
Description
The Calendar icon appears on the touch screen of Pearl-2
when CMS is setup using the Admin panel.
54
Pearl-2 User Guide
Events screens
CMS event controls using the touch screen
Description
Tap the calendar icon to display the Events screen.
For example: From the Channel view, the calendar icon
appears along the bottom of the screen.
This Events screen displays when no scheduled events are
configured.
To create an ad hoc recording or webcast, tap Create
event and authenticate using your CMS credentials.
Note: Pearl-2 must be registered with the CMS to create
ad hoc events.
This Events screen displays when a scheduled event is
configured and it's 30 minutes or more before the event
start time. Notice that this is a recurring event with the
date appended to the event name.
To create an ad hoc recording or webcast, tap Create
event and authenticate using your CMS credentials.
Tap the channel thumbnail to go to the Channel view and
see a live preview of that channel with an audio VU meter
for confidence monitoring.
This Events screen displays when a scheduled event is set
to start within 30 minutes.
To start the scheduled event early, tap Start event.
To create an ad hoc recording or webcast, tap Create
event and authenticate using your CMS credentials.
Note: Scheduled events override ad hoc events. Pearl-2
stops the ad hoc event and starts the scheduled event
when it's time for the scheduled event to start.
55
Pearl-2 User Guide
Events screens
CMS event controls using the touch screen
Description
This Events screen displays when a scheduled event is set
to start in five minutes or less.
To start the scheduled event early, tap Start event.
Note: For Panopto, the video quality you select for the
session overrides the channel encoding settings in Pearl-2.
Notice the lower resolution of HDMI-B for the slides with
the inserted black bars. Video quality encoding settings
applied to the channel by Panopto persist for that channel
after the scheduled event ends.
This Events screen displays while a scheduled or an ad hoc
session is in progress.
To stop the event early, tap Stop event.
Authenticating using the touch screen lets you create unscheduled ad hoc recordings and webcasts.
56
Pearl-2 User Guide
CMS event controls using the touch screen
Table 13 Unscheduled ad hoc event screens
Unscheduled ad hoc event screens
Description
Panopto login screen:
When Pearl-2 is registered with Panopto, this authentication
screen appears when you tap Create event from the
Events screen.
Tap in a field and enter your credentials, then tap Sign in.
Kaltura login screen:
When Pearl-2 is registered with Kaltura, this authentication
screen appears when you tap Create event from the
Events screen.
Tap in the Event owner field and enter your Kaltura user ID
or a valid Kaltura email address as your login credentials,
then tap Next.
This screen displays after a successful authentication.
To create an ad hoc event, tap Next to go to the next
screen and set the event title and details.
Tapping Logout logs you out of your CMS session and you
return to the Events screen.
57
Pearl-2 User Guide
Unscheduled ad hoc event screens
Stop/start scheduled events using the touch screen
Description
Now enter your event details.
For Panopto, you can change the ad hoc session title,
duration, choose the type of event (VOD or Live Stream),
and select the folder in Panopto to upload the file. My
Folder is the default. Swipe to scroll down the list. Double
tap and use the Back button to navigate nested folders. Tap
Start when you're ready to start the ad hoc event.
For Kaltura, you can change the ad hoc session title,
duration, choose the type of event (VOD, Live Stream, or
VOD + Live Stream), and add a description. Swipe to scroll
down to add Kaltura categories and tags. Tap Start when
you're ready to start the ad hoc event.
This Events screen displays after you have started the ad
hoc event.
To stop the ad hoc event, tap Stop event.
Note: To log out after stopping an ad hoc event, tap Create
event from the Events screen and re-enter your User ID to
return to this logout screen.
Stop/start scheduled events using the touch screen
You can use Pearl-2's touch screen to manually start scheduled events up to thirty minutes before the
scheduled start time. A calendar icon appears when CMS is setup on Pearl-2.
From the touch screen, tap the calendar icon to display the Events screen or wait for the Events screen to
appear automatically about five minutes before the event starts.
58
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stop/start scheduled events using the touch screen
Tap Start event to start recording or webcasting right away. The button changes to Stop event. When
you're done, tap Stop event or just wait for the event to stop automatically at the scheduled time.
Recordings upload automatically to your CMS.
If there's more than five minutes before the next scheduled event, a Create event button for ad hoc events
appears beside the Start event button. For more about the different Events screens, see CMS event controls
using the touch screen.
Important information
l
Pearl-2 must already be registered with your CMS to appear listed as a remote recorder resource in
Kaltura or Panopto. Contact your CMS administrator responsible for setting up hardware encoders for
your organization if Pearl-2 isn't listed as a resource or the calendar icon does not appear on the touch
screen.
l
For Kaltura, each channel on Pearl-2 corresponds to a separate video source, which are treated as
separate views for multi-view recordings.
l
For Kaltura, the channel used for live streaming is pre-configured by the Pearl-2 administrator.
l
The number of channels on Pearl-2 are pre-configured by the Pearl-2 administrator. However, you can
physically connect different video sources to the video inputs on Pearl-2.
l
Panopto users can choose which channels on Pearl-2 to include when scheduling a multiple source
recording or webcast in Panopto.
l
Only Pearl-2 administrators can create or delete channels on Pearl-2.
59
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Create ad hoc events using the touch screen
The primary and secondary video sources you select in Panopto correspond to individual channels
configured on Pearl-2. Panopto users select the resolution for each video source in Panopto when a
new scheduled or recurring session is created. The encoding settings are applied automatically to the
channels on Pearl-2.
l
After the event ends, recordings automatically upload to the CMS. It may take a while for content to
show up in Kaltura's media lists, depending on how busy the Kaltura CMS system is at that time.
Recordings are associated with the user account that scheduled the event.
l
If network connectivity is lost during a scheduled VOD event, Pearl-2 continues to record the event
locally. When network connectivity re-establishes and the event ends, the recording uploads to the
CMS as expected.
l
See your Pearl-2 administrator if you need to add or remove channels on Pearl-2. For information
about Pearl-2 administration and control using the Admin panel, see Integration.
For Panopto VOD events, if you manually stop a scheduled VOD event before the
scheduled end time when Pearl-2 doesn't have network connectivity, Pearl-2 uploads the
completed event's recording when network connectivity resumes. However, Panopto does
not recognize that the event has ended. The event remains in the In Progress state in
Panopto and you must wait until the original event's scheduled end time before creating a
new event using that Pearl-2.
Create ad hoc events using the touch screen
You can create unscheduled ad hoc recordings and webcasts directly from Pearl-2's touch screen using the
Events screen. To manually display the Events screen, just tap the Calendar icon that appears along the
bottom of the Channel view. Tapping a thumbnail takes you back to the Channel view where you can monitor
a live preview of the video source and check the audio VU meters. For more about the Channel view, see The
Channel view.
In this example, the scheduled event Math 200 starts in about 13 minutes. To create an ad hoc event, tap
Create event and login using your CMS login credentials.
60
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create ad hoc events using the touch screen
If you get the login error that your account is not active, your CMS has blocked your
account. If login to the CMS is denied, the account you entered may not exist or may not
have access rights to create an ad hoc event using Pearl-2. Contact your CMS administrator
for CMS related login and account issues.
Once you're logged in, you can choose to either log out and return to the Events screen or continue. Tap Next
to continue.
On the next screen, tap in any field to change the title and event details. The current date and time is the
default session title. Depending on which CMS you use, different fields are visible. Swipe the screen to see
more event details.
Kaltura event details screen
Panopto event details screen
Tap Start when you're ready to start the event. When you're done, tap Stop event. The recording
automatically uploads to your CMS.
After your event ends, you remain logged in for one hour. To prevent someone else from starting an ad hoc
event using your account, you should manually logout using the touch screen. Tap Create event from the
Events screen to return to the Logout screen.
61
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create ad hoc events using the touch screen
Important considerations
l
Authentication credentials must be set up by your CMS administrator before you can login to your
CMS and create ad hoc events from the touch screen on Pearl-2.
l
For Kaltura, you can use your Kaltura user ID or a valid Kaltura email address to authenticate and create
ad hoc events from the touch screen on Pearl-2.
l
If tapping Next or Start on the touch screen isn't working for your Kaltura ad hoc event, ensure that
no previously edited text field is still highlighted.
l
You cannot start an ad hoc event if it's within five minutes of a scheduled event's start time. The Create
event button does not display.
l
Scheduled events have priority over ad hoc events. If an ad hoc event is still in progress when it's time
to start a scheduled event, Pearl-2 gracefully stops the ad hoc event and automatically starts the
scheduled event. The ad hoc recording automatically uploads to the CMS.
l
For ad hoc events to work, the user must have an account with their Content Management System
(CMS) so they can login using Pearl-2's touch screen. CMS must also be set up on Pearl-2 and Pearl-2
must be registered with the CMS. If you don't see a calendar icon in the Channel view of the touch
screen, contact your CMS administrator responsible for setting up hardware encoders to confirm that
Pearl-2 is properly registered as a remote recorder resource.
l
For Kaltura, only Pearl administrators can configure channels for ad hoc events using the Admin panel,
see Integration.
l
For Panopto, each channel that is configure on Pearl-2 is treated as a separate video source for multisource ad hoc events.
l
For Panopto ad hoc events, Pearl-2 ignores a user's presets that are set in Panopto. As a result, ad hoc
recordings automatically upload to the user's default folder as originally assigned by Panopto.
l
The maximum event duration using the touch screen is 600 minutes (10 hours); however, do not enter
a duration that produces a recording that's larger than the capacity of the local storage available on
Pearl-2.
l
Separate back up recordings of each channel are automatically saved on Pearl-2. Contact your Pearl-2
administrator for the availability of back up recordings.
62
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure the touch screen
Configure the touch screen
The touch screen on Pearl-2 is enabled by default and all its features are available. You can disable the entire
screen or some of its features using the Admin panel. For information about how to connect to and use the
Admin panel, see The Admin panel.
Topics include:
l
Disable or enable the touch screen
l
Hide or show channel previews on the touch screen
l
Disable or enable the system status screen
l
Disable or enable configuration using the touch screen
l
Disable or enable recording, streaming and switching from the touch screen
l
Set the touch screen timeout
l
Set a 4-digit PIN security code
Disable or enable the touch screen
You can enable or disable Pearl-2 from displaying anything on the touch screen. The touch screen remains
touch-sensitive even when the display is disabled.
To disable or enable the touch screen display:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Touch Screen. The touch screen configuration page opens.
63
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure the touch screen
3. Uncheck Enable display to disable the touch screen display. Check Enable display if you want the
touch screen display enabled.
4. Click Apply.
Hide or show channel previews on the touch screen
Previews of your configured channels display on the touch screen of Pearl-2 by default. You can disable
channel previews using the Admin panel.
A message displays on the touch screen when channel previews are disabled. If you have configured system
status or settings and configuration preset changes to be allowed, then tapping anywhere on the touch
screen opens the settings page.
To hide or show the channel previews on the touch screen:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Touch Screen. The touch screen configuration page opens.
64
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure the touch screen
3. Uncheck Show preview to disable channel previews from displaying on the touch screen. Check Show
preview if you want to enable channel previews on the touch screen.
4. Click Apply.
Disable or enable the system status screen
The system status screen displays network and system related information, such as the IP address needed to
access Pearl-2. You may not want this information visible on the touch screen after you've configured Pearl-2.
You can use the Admin panel to disable the system status screen from displaying on the touch screen.
To disable or enable the system status screen from displaying on the touch screen:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Touch Screen. The touch screen configuration page opens.
3. Uncheck Show system status to prevent the system status screen from opening on the touch
screen. Check Show system status if you want to enable the system status screen to open on the
touch screen.
4. Click Apply.
Disable or enable configuration using the touch screen
You can apply configuration presets and configure network settings using the touch screen on Pearl-2 by
default. You can disable this ability using the Admin panel.
65
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure the touch screen
If configuration is blocked and system status is permitted, touch screen users see an i icon instead of the
configuration gears icon in the lower right corner of the touch screen.
To disable or enable configuration using the touch screen:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Select the Touch Screen link in the Configuration menu. The touch screen configuration page opens.
3. Uncheck Allow settings and configuration preset changes to disable configuration from the
touch screen. Check the check box if you want to enable configuration from the touch screen.
4. Click Apply.
Disable or enable recording, streaming and switching from the
touch screen
Recording, streaming, and live switching control using the touch screen on Pearl-2 is enabled by default. You
can disable this function using the Admin panel to stop users from switching layouts and from starting or
stopping live streams and recordings.
Channel preview must be enabled for the touch screen for recording, streaming, and live switching
control to work. See Hide or show channel previews on the touch screen
To disable or enable recording, streaming, and switching control using the touch screen:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Touch Screen. The touch screen configuration page opens.
66
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure the touch screen
3. Uncheck Allow start/stop recording and streaming to disable recording, streaming, and live
switching control from the touch screen. Check the check box to enable recording, streaming, and live
switching control.
4. Click Apply.
Set the touch screen timeout
Initially, the touch screen is always on for easy monitoring. However, you can set the touch screen to shut off
after a given amount of time. To re-enable the touch screen after it times out and shuts off, simply tap
anywhere on the screen.
To set a timeout for the touch screen:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Touch Screen. The touch screen configuration page opens.
67
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure the touch screen
3. Enter the number of seconds before the touch screen automatically shuts off in the Timeout field. A
value of 0 keeps the touch screen on at all times when the system is on.
4. Click Apply.
Set a 4-digit PIN security code
You can set a 4-digit PIN code to protect the touch screen of Pearl-2 from unauthorized access. By default, the
PIN is not set.
If a PIN is configured, users are prompted to enter the PIN code whenever:
l
When you power on or restart Pearl-2.
l
When Pearl-2 recovers from timeout mode, see Set the touch screen timeout.
To configure a 4-digit PIN code:
68
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure the touch screen
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Touch Screen. The touch screen configuration page opens.
3. Enter a 4-digit PIN code in the PIN field.
Record the PIN code in a safe location for future reference. You need this PIN to
access the touch screen of your Pearl-2.
4. Click Apply.
69
Pearl-2 User Guide
The Admin panel
The Admin panel
The Admin panel is used primarily to set up your Pearl-2 and perform administrative tasks. Most tasks in this
user guide are performed using the Admin panel.This section contains what you need to get started using the
Admin panel.
Topics include:
l
About the Admin panel
l
Connect to Admin panel
l
Admin panel access using local console
l
Connect using a DNS-based service discovery
l
Connect using persistent static IP address
l
Switching / mixing using the Admin panel
For information about remote access to the cloud version of the Admin panel, see Remote login to the Admin
panel and Epiphan Live.
For information about integrating Pearl-2 with Content Management Systems (CMSs) like Panopto and
related administrator tasks, see Integration.
About the Admin panel
The Admin panel is a web-based user interface that's used primarily to set up your Pearl-2 and perform
administrative tasks.
70
Pearl-2 User Guide
About the Admin panel
Table 14 The Admin panel
Label Name
Description
The channels that are available for the current configuration of your
Pearl-2 are listed. Select a channel to access the drop down list of
1
Channels menu
options that are available to configure channel encoding, add video
and audio source, create layouts, perform confidence monitoring,
record the channel, and more.
71
Pearl-2 User Guide
Label Name
Connect to Admin panel
Description
Recorders you add to your Pearl-2 are listed. Select a recorder to open
2
Recorders menu
the status page and list of related recordings for that recorder. You
can start and stop recording, as well as configure the recorder settings
from this page.
3
Inputs menu
4
Output ports menu
The available video and audio input ports on your Pearl-2 are listed.
Select a port to open the configuration and status page for that port.
The output ports available on your Pearl-2 are listed. Select a port to
open the configuration and status page for that port.
Access the Content Management System (CMS) events list containing
5
Events menu
up to three months of scheduled Kaltura events, in progress events,
and completed ah hoc and scheduled events.
6
7
Configuration menu
A list of all the available configuration options.
Internal storage and
System details are displayed in this area, such as the total amount of
system information
internal storage, how much space is currently used, and how much
menu
free space is available.
The main panel is where the all the related information displays. What
8
Main panel
gets displayed in the main panel depends on which menu item you
select.
9
Link to Epiphan Live
Click to open Epiphan Live in a new tab.
Click to log out of Pearl-2. Click icon again to display the log in
10
Log out
window. The role of the currently logged in user displays beside the
icon.
You can access the Admin panel using these methods:
l
Any web browser, see Connect to Admin panel.
l
Using a connected USB mouse, keyboard, and monitor, see Admin panel access using local console.
l
Remotely using Epiphan Cloud, see Remote login to the Admin panel and Epiphan Live.
Connect to Admin panel
You can access the Admin panel several ways. The most common way is using an internet browser on a
computer or tablet that's connected to the same local Ethernet network as Pearl-2. All you need is the IP
72
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect to Admin panel
address of the system, which you can get from the settings using Pearl-2's touch screen.
Another way to access the Admin panel is to remotely login over the Internet. An Epiphan Cloud Pro plan is
required for remote login, see Remote login to the Admin panel and Epiphan Live.
To get the IP address of Pearl-2 using the touch screen and login to the Admin panel:
1. Get the IP address of Pearl-2. Do one of the following:
a. From a single channel view or grid view, tap the system settings (gears) icon, then tap System
Status, or
b. If your system doesn't have any channels showing, tap the touch screen anywhere to go to the
system settings screen, then tap System Status.
c.
1. When you have the IP address of Pearl-2, enter the following into the address bar of your web browser
to launch the Admin panel.
http://<IP Address of Pearl-2>/admin
If HTTPS is enabled on Pearl-2, replace http with https in the URL.
2. Enter your user name and password when prompted. The administrative user name is admin. Initially,
no password is set so you can leave that blank and click OK.
We recommend setting an admin password for higher security, see User
administration.
If you don't know the IP address, you can do one of the following:
For networks with DHCP, you can:
l
Connect using a DNS-based service discovery
For networks without DHCP, you can:
73
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Admin panel access using local console
Connect using persistent static IP address
Admin panel access using local console
Operators and administrators can access the Admin panel locally to reconfigure Pearl-2 without needing a
laptop. When you enable the local console feature, you can connect a USB mouse, keyboard, and a monitor
directly to Pearl-2. Or connect a touch screen monitor. A built-in virtual keyboard is readily available.
Local console is enabled for a video output port using either the touch screen or the web-based Admin panel.
When enabled, simply connect your USB mouse and keyboard directly to any USB port on Pearl-2 and
connect your HDMI monitor to the video output port that has local console enabled.
Using the Admin panel, you can disable whether or not users must login to the Admin panel when they access
the local console. Login is enabled by default. You can also change the keyboard layout to any of the
supported languages and toggle between languages if you select multiple languages (using Ctrl+Shift or
Ctrl+Alt).
l
American English
l
Dutch
l
French
l
German
l
Italian
l
Netherlands
l
Portuguese (European)
l
Spanish (Spain)
l
Swiss
l
Norwegian (Bokmal)
l
Russian
Important considerations
l
Epiphan Live is not accessible from the local console.
l
The live preview link is not accessible from the Channel Status page using the local console.
l
You cannot upload/download the following types of media using the local console:
l
Images
l
Channel recordings
l
EDID files
74
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Configuration files
l
Firmware update files
Enable local console using the Admin panel
Use the web-based Admin panel from your administration computer for access to all Admin panel
functions.
You can enable local console using the Admin panel or the touch screen on Pearl-2. Once enabled, you can
connect your USB mouse, USB keyboard, and connect an HDMI monitor to the output port that has local
console enabled to access the local console directly from Pearl-2.
Enable local console using the Admin panel
To enable local console using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Admin panel access using local console.
2. From the Output ports menu, click the output port (HDMI 1 or HDMI 2). The video output port
configuration page opens.
3. Under Settings, select Local console in the Source drop-down menu.
4. (Optional) Check Disable authentication.
75
Pearl-2 User Guide
Enable local console using the touch screen
5. (Optional) Check a different keyboard language layout or multiple language layouts. The default layout
is American English.
6. (Optional) Choose the keyboard key combination to toggle between keyboard layouts if multiple
languages are selected: Ctrl+Shift or Alt+Shift.
7. Click Apply.
Enable local console using the touch screen
To enable local console using the touch screen:
1. Tap the gear icon to open the System settings screen. If the control icons aren't showing, tap anywhere
on the touch screen.
2. Tap the arrow icon in the lower-right corner of the screen to go to the second Settings page.
3. Tap Output ports and select an output port.
4. From the Output port's screen, select Local console as the Source and tap Apply.
76
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect using a DNS-based service discovery
What's next?
Connect your USB mouse, keyboard, and connect an HDMI monitor to the output port that has local console
enabled to access the local console directly from Pearl-2.
Connect using a DNS-based service discovery
Pearl-2 uses DNS-based messages to advertise details about itself, including its host name. With a compatible
utility installed on your computer, you can access the system simply by typing its serial number and the suffix
".local" into the address bar of your browser.
The following table lists the compatible systems and Bonjour Print Services software needed.
Table 15 Install Bonjour Print Services
System
Action Needed
You must install Bonjour Print Services:
1. Use the following URL http://support.apple.com/kb/DL999
Microsoft Windows
2. Click Download.
3. Follow the system prompts to download and install the application.
Mac OS X
The Bonjour software used for service discovery is built into the Mac OS. No special
actions are needed.
The Avahi implementation used for DNS-based discovery is shipped with most Linux
Linux
distributions. If necessary, check with your administrator to ensure you have the
Avahi package installed.
To access the Admin panel of Pearl-2 using DNS discovery:
1. Find the system’s serial number that's printed on a label attached to the device.
TIP: The serial number also appears on the System information screen from the touch screen of Pearl2. Tap the system information gear icon to display the System information screen. If needed, tap the
screen once to display the control icons.
2. Enter the following string into the address bar of your web browser on your admin computer, where
<serial> is the serial number of your Pearl-2:
77
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect using persistent static IP address
http://<serial>.local/admin
For example: http://95dd40d5.local/admin
If HTTPS is enabled on Pearl-2, replace http with https in the URL.
3. Enter your user name and password when prompted, then click OK. The administrative user name is
admin. Initially no password is set. To set a password, see User administration.
4. (Optional) From the Configuration menu, click Network and note the IP address of the system from
the network configuration page.
Connect using persistent static IP address
Pearl-2 has a default persistent static IP address, also known as the recovery IP address. If ever you need to
set up Pearl-2 on a network that does not support DHCP, or you need to recover from a previous static IP
address setting, you can use this procedure to connect directly to the system for configuration.
A workstation computer with access rights to modify your network settings is required.
Pearl-2 static IP address defaults are:
l
IP Address:
192.168.255.250
l
Netmask:
255.255.255.252
l
Username:
admin
l
Password:
your admin password (by default set to no password)
To access the Admin panel using the persistent static IP address:
78
Pearl-2 User Guide
Switching / mixing using the Admin panel
1. Establish an Ethernet connection between Pearl-2 and the workstation using one of the following
methods:
a. Connect Pearl-2 to a local Ethernet network shared with the workstation.
b. Connect Pearl-2 directly to the workstation’s Ethernet port using either a regular or a crossover
Ethernet cable.
2. Record the network settings of the workstation that are used to connect to Pearl-2 so that they can be
restored later.
3. Temporarily change the network configuration on the workstation to the following:
a. Use Static IP assignment
b. IP address: 192.168.255.249
c. Subnet mask: 255.255.255.252
4. Start a web browser on the workstation and go to: http://192.168.255.250/admin/
If HTTPS is enabled on Pearl-2, replace http with https in the URL.
5. Log in as the administrator user with the user name admin and enter the admin password (by default
there is no password assigned). The Admin panel opens.
6. From the Configuration menu, click Networking.
7. Click use a static address and enter a static IP address and network settings you want for Pearl-2.
For more information, see Configure network settings.
8. Restore the previously saved network configurations on the workstation.
Switching / mixing using the Admin panel
Switching live video inputs, or video mixing, is fast and easy using the Admin panel. For best results, you may
wish to be in a location where you can see the live action, and have a solid understanding idea of what is in
each of your layouts. Good layout names can help with this. See Rename a layout.
Performing live switching using one interface, like the Admin panel, does not dynamically
update the visuals in the other interfaces (e.g. the touch screen and Epiphan Live). The
other interfaces must be manually refreshed to accurately reflect the current live switching
layout information.
To do live video mixing:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
79
Pearl-2 User Guide
Switching / mixing using the Admin panel
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Layouts. The layout editor page opens.
3. In the layouts list, the layout with the big red circle beside it is the currently chosen "live" layout.
4. To switch to a different layout as the active "live" layout, click the gray circle beside the layout you want
to make go live. The circle turns red to indicate that it's now the active "live" layout.
80
Pearl-2 User Guide
Epiphan Live
Epiphan Live
Epiphan Live is a friendly and easy to use web and tablet interface designed for confidence monitoring of
channels and sources, switching between layouts while recording and streaming, and to easily stop or start
streaming and recording.
Topics include:
l
About Epiphan Live
l
The Dashboard interface
l
Access Epiphan Live using a web browser or mobile device
l
Access Epiphan Live from the Admin panel
l
Stream, record, and monitor using the Dashboard interface
l
Switching / mixing using Epiphan Live
l
Your recordings
For information about remote access to the cloud version of Epiphan Live, see Remote login to the Admin
panel and Epiphan Live.
About Epiphan Live
The Epiphan Live interface lets you easily operate your Pearl-2 using a computer or mobile device such as a
tablet. You can:
l
Control streaming and recording of channels and recorders.
l
Do live switching between sources and layouts while streaming and recording.
l
Perform video, audio and system confidence monitoring.
You need administrator or operator-level privileges to use Epiphan Live. See User administration for more
information about user privileges.
Epiphan Live is supported on the following operating systems on mobile devices and web browsers:
81
Pearl-2 User Guide
The Dashboard interface
Operating system
or mobile device
Supported web browser(s)
l
Google Chrome
l
Microsoft Edge
l
Google Chrome
l
Safari
l
Google Chrome
l
Google Chrome
l
Google Chrome
l
Safari
Windows
Mac
Linux
Android phone or
tablet
iPhone or iPad
Most instructions assume that a touch screen device is used; however, you can tap or click, depending on your
device.
Text scaling using Google Chrome for Android is not supported.
The Dashboard interface
The Dashboard interface is the first page you see when you open Epiphan Live. You'll find helpful tools for
confidence monitoring, as well as streaming and recording control.
82
Pearl-2 User Guide
The Dashboard interface
Table 16 Elements in the Dashboard interface
Number
Title
Description
l
Warning – This icon displays only if there are any
configuration errors in your channels, sources, streams or
recordings. Clicking the icon displays more detail about the
1
errors.
Dashboard header
icons
l
Save – Save the current Dashboard layout.
Tap Save to preserve the current layout. Logged
in operators and administrators will see the
83
Access Epiphan Live using a web browser or mobile
Pearl-2 User Guide
Number
Title
device
Description
latest Dashboard layout when they refresh their
Epiphan Live page. The latest saved layout
displays the next time you log in.
l
Menu – Access links to the Switcher view, Recordings, and
Admin panel.
2
3
Dashboard
monitoring panels
Configurable panels for confidence monitoring. You can set each
panel to display a source, channel, output, or basic system
information. Panels are empty by default.
Dashboard panel
Each dot represents a set of panels. Select a dot to navigate
navigation icons
between the three different sets of Dashboard monitoring panels.
l
4
Dashboard panel set
(as in the screen shot above).
quantity icons
l
5
2x – Changes the quantity of Dashboard panels per set to 2
Video inputs
4x – Changes the quantity of Dashboard panels per set to 4.
Displays a list of your video inputs configured in the Admin panel
and includes basic status information for each input.
Displays a list of your channels configured in the Admin panel and
6
Channels
includes streaming and recording control buttons for each channel,
as well as individual control buttons for each stream when you set
up multiple streams in a channel.
7
Audio inputs
8
Recorders
Displays a list of your audio inputs configured in the Admin panel.
Includes basic status information and a VU meter for each input.
Displays a list of your recorders configured in the Admin panel and
includes a recording control button for each recorder.
Access Epiphan Live using a web browser or mobile device
You can open Epiphan Live using a web browser on your Windows, Mac, or Linux computer. You can also use
Epiphan Live on an Android phone or tablet, an iPhone, or an iPad.
You need the IP address of your Pearl-2 to connect to Epiphan Live, see Connect to Admin panel.
84
Pearl-2 User Guide
Access Epiphan Live from the Admin panel
1. Enter the following into the address bar of your web browser.
a. For a web browser on a computer, enter:
http://<IP address of your Pearl-2>/admin/m
b. For a web browser on a mobile device, enter:
http://<IP address of your Pearl-2>
2. Enter your administrator or operator credentials when prompted.
Some versions of Chrome and Microsoft Edge don't display channel previews from the
Dashboard if you're on an HTTPs network and your website has an insecure or invalid security
certificate, even after you update the security certificate. Use a different web browser such as
Firefox or update the version of your web browser, then add the security certificate for the
website to the exceptions list.
Access Epiphan Live from the Admin panel
You need the IP address of your Pearl-2 to log in to the Admin panel for this procedure, see Connect to Admin
panel.
1. Log in to the Admin panel using your credentials. In your web browser, enter:
http://<IP address of your Pearl-2>
2. Click Epiphan Live in the upper-right corner of the Status page for the channel. The Epiphan Live
dashboard opens in a new tab.
To open the Admin panel from Epiphan Live, click the Menu icon in the upper-right corner of the Dashboard
or Switcher interface, and then click Admin panel.
85
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream, record, and monitor using the Dashboard
interface
Stream, record, and monitor using the Dashboard interface
The Dashboard interface in Epiphan Live is where you can do confidence monitoring, as well as start and stop
streaming and recording for your channels.
Topics include:
l
Configure Dashboard panels
l
Monitor video and audio input sources
l
Monitor and setup the output port source and audio
l
Control streaming and recording
Configure Dashboard panels
You can customize each Dashboard panel to display a specific channel, input source, or video output for live
confidence monitoring. Panels can also be set up to display system information:
l
CPU load (%)
l
Quantity of streaming connections
l
The current streaming bandwidth (bitrate)
l
Automatic file upload status (enabled or disabled). See FTP and automatic file transfers.
l
Storage available on your Pearl-2.
Other logged in operators and admins must refresh their web browsers to see the latest changes to the
Dashboard.
86
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream, record, and monitor using the Dashboard
interface
Up to 8 Epiphan Live preview panels can be open at the same time. The limit of 8 live preview
panels applies across all open instances of Epiphan Live, including multiple users
accessing Epiphan Live simultaneously from different web browsers, or duplicate instances of
the same Epiphan Live interface open on multiple browser tabs at the same time.
To configure Dashboard panels:
1. Log in to Epiphan Live (see Access Epiphan Live using a web browser or mobile device).
2. Tap the drop down menu that appears below the panel and select the channel, source, or output to
display. The label says "None" if the panel is not yet configured.
When a channel is selected, streaming and recording control buttons appear below the
panel. You can control streaming and recording of that channel using those buttons.
3. (Optional) To choose between displaying 2 or 4 panels, tap the 2x|4x icon that appears in the upperright corner of the panels area.
4. Tap Save.
87
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream, record, and monitor using the Dashboard
interface
You can navigate between 3 separate sets of Dashboard panels by selecting the circle
icons along the top of the first row of panels.
Monitor video and audio input sources
Use the Dashboard to monitor your video and audio inputs. The video inputs section of the Dashboard lists
all inputs configured on your Pearl-2 and displays the video resolution.
l
A green dot means that the video source is connected and a signal is received.
l
A yellow dot means that a signal is not being receiving from the source.
l
A triangular warning icon means there is a source configuration issue that needs attention.
Tap the name of a video input to open the source details in a thumbnail view, including warning
information if applicable.
The audio inputs configured on your Pearl-2 appear in the Audio inputs section of the Dashboard.
88
Stream, record, and monitor using the Dashboard
Pearl-2 User Guide
interface
l
A grayed-out audio source means that the audio source is not used in any channels.
l
A triangular warning icon means there is a source configuration issue that needs attention. Click the
audio source name to display the warning message.
l
A green dot means the source is connected and the accompanying VU meter shows the audio level.
The audio VU meter uses quasi-peak ballistics with samples averaged every 10 ms. The maximum average in
each 100 ms period is displayed as a series of colored bars. The following table describes the levels at which
the meter changes from green to yellow and red.
Table 17 Audio VU meter levels
Color
Decibel range
Red
0 to -9 dBFS
Yellow
-9 to -18 dBFS
Green
-18 dBFS and lower
Show or hide video inputs in the list
You can pick which video inputs display in the Dashboard view. Just tap the Video inputs header and then
check the checkbox next to the name of each source you want showing in the Dashboard view. Tap Save
when you're done. The Dashboard video input list updates automatically.
89
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream, record, and monitor using the Dashboard
interface
Show or hide audio inputs
You can pick which audio inputs display in the Dashboard view. Just tap the Audio inputs header and then
check the checkbox next to the name of each source you want showing in the Dashboard view. Tap Save
when you're done. The Dashboard audio input list updates automatically.
Monitor and setup the output port source and audio
The Dashboard lists the output ports along with the resolution and frame rate. You can enable and disable a
video output port, as well as choose if you want to display a channel or a video source. You can also enable or
disable the audio volume for the output port. However, you cannot hide video output ports from displaying
on the Dashboard.
To configure the output port audio using the Admin panel, see Disable or enable audio and output port
volume.
l
Green text means your output is connected and transmitting to your external display.
l
Grayed-out text means the output port is disabled.
l
White text means the output port is enabled but is not connected to an external display.
Click the name of a video output to open the port's details in a thumbnail view.
90
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream, record, and monitor using the Dashboard
interface
By default, video output ports are configured to maintain aspect ratio, use the display's
default resolution, include audio at 100% and they don't include the audio VU meter. You
can change these defaults in the Admin panel. See Video output ports to learn more
about advanced-level video output configuration using the Admin panel.
To configure a video output port and enable or disable the audio:
1. Tap Video outputs to display the video output configuration menu.
2. Tap the text field beside the output port and select a channel or source from the list.
91
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream, record, and monitor using the Dashboard
interface
3. To enable or disable audio for the output port, tap the speaker icon to toggle audio On and Off for
the port. A green icon means audio is enabled. A gray icon means audio is disabled.
Control streaming and recording
From the Epiphan Live Dashboard, you can control streaming and recording for channels using the buttons in
the Channels section. When a channel is not currently streaming or recording, the buttons are gray and their
respective timers are set to 00:00:00. If streaming isn't configured for a channel, the streaming button
displays as "Not set". See Streaming a channel direct to viewers to learn how to configure streaming for a
channel using the Admin panel.
l
The left-most button with the "signal" icon starts and stops streaming for the channel.
l
The right-most button with the circle icon starts and stops recording for the channel.
92
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream, record, and monitor using the Dashboard
interface
If multiple streams are configured for a channel, a pair of control buttons is displayed for each
stream.
Click the channel name to open a preview thumbnail view.
When you're ready to start streaming and recording the channel, tap the streaming and recording control
buttons. Tap the buttons a second time to stop streaming and recording.
l
The streaming button turns blue when the channel is streaming and the timer's clock increments.
l
The recording button turns red when the channel is recording and the timer's clock increments.
Streaming and recording control buttons also appear below the Dashboard monitoring panels when they're
configure to display a channel. You can use those control buttons to start and stop streaming or recording for
a channel too.
If the stream fails to publish, the streaming button flashes blue and displays "ERROR". Check the streaming
settings for your channel using the Admin panel, see Streaming a channel direct to viewers.
93
Pearl-2 User Guide
Switching / mixing using Epiphan Live
Recording using multi-track recorders
From the Admin panel, you can create multi-track Recorders to capture multiple channels and audio sources in
a single recording. You can then select which combination of video and audio sources to extract from the
recording. This feature is useful when you're capturing a video source and multiple languages from different
audio sources. Multi-track recorders appear on the Dashboard if they are configured on your Pearl-2.
Each multi-track recorder has a recording control button to start and stop recording. When a Recorder is not
recording, the button is gray and the timer is set to 00:00:00. See Add a recorder to learn more about
configuring multi-track recorders using the Admin panel.
To start recording, simply tap the recording control button for that multi-track recorder. The button turns red
when the multi-track recorder is recording and the timer's counter increments. Tap the button a second time
to stop recording.
Switching / mixing using Epiphan Live
The Live Switcher view in Epiphan Live is a simple interface that lets you live switch between layouts while
streaming and recording. To learn how to create different layouts for a channel using the Admin panel, see
Add or edit a custom layout.
Switching between layouts using one of the switcher interfaces, such as the touch screen,
does not dynamically update what you see in the other switching interfaces (i.e. Epiphan
Live and the Admin Panel). You must manually refresh the other interfaces separately to
reflect the current state.
Topics include:
l
About the Switcher interface
l
Switching / mixing using Epiphan Live
94
Pearl-2 User Guide
Switching / mixing using Epiphan Live
About the Switcher interface
The Switcher interface is accessed from the Menu button in the top right corner of the Dashboard interface.
See The Dashboard interface.
Table 18 Elements in the Switcher view
Number Title
Description
A list of channels configured on your Pearl-2. When a channel is selected,
1
Channel selector
you can switch between the different layouts that are configured for
that channel.
2
Menu icon
Displays links to the Dashboard view and the Admin panel when clicked.
Displays a preview of a selected layout, which is outlined with a green
3
Preview panel
border. When you click the Switch button, this preview layout becomes
the live layout. See Switching while live streaming and recording using
Epiphan Live for more information.
Displays the active "live" layout that is currently being streamed or
4
Live view panel
recorded. The live layout is outlined with a red border. When you select
the Switch button, this live layout is replaced with the layout that's
loaded in to the Preview panel.
5
Layout carousel
Displays small previews for all layouts contained within your selected
channel. Select a layout from the carousel to add it to the Preview
95
Pearl-2 User Guide
Number Title
Switching / mixing using Epiphan Live
Description
panel.
Note that the layout selected for the Preview panel has a green border
and the layout in the Live panel has a red border.
When selected, the layout in the Preview panel replaces the layout in
6
Switch button
the Live panel and is immediately reflected in your active stream and
recordings.
Switching while live streaming and recording using Epiphan Live
The Switcher interface lets you easily live switch between custom layouts with the simple press of a button.
To switch layouts while live streaming and recording:
1. Log in to Epiphan Live. The Dashboard view opens by default. See Access Epiphan Live using a web
browser or mobile device.
2. Tap the Menu icon in the upper-right corner of the Dashboard screen and tap Switcher to open the
Switcher interface.
3. Tap the field beside the "Switcher" header and select a channel. The field is blank if this is your first time
configuring the Switcher. Channels with only one layout are grayed-out and cannot be selected for
switching.
96
Pearl-2 User Guide
Switching / mixing using Epiphan Live
All the layouts for the selected channel are displayed in a carousel along the bottom of the screen. The
layout that is live is displayed in the Live panel on the right side of the interface, see About the
Switcher interface.
4. In the carousel, tap the layout that you want to switch to next. That layout is loaded into the Preview
panel.
97
Pearl-2 User Guide
Your recordings
5. Tap the Switch button to switch the layout that is currently in the Preview panel to the Live panel.
The layout that was in the Live panel moves to the Preview panel so that it's ready for the next time
you switch.
6. To load a different layout into the Preview panel, tap another layout in the carousel.
Your recordings
All recordings made using Epiphan Live are saved to the Your recordings panel.
98
Pearl-2 User Guide
Your recordings
After recoding a file, you can manage it and any other files using the following tools on the page:
Number Title
Description
Select a From and a To date from the pop-up calendar to create a date
1
Date selector
range. Then tap Apply. Only recordings that were recorded within that
time frame appear in the list below.
2
File details
Each heading in the list gives information about that category. Selecting
Date organizes the list chronologically by the date the recording began.
Each recorded file that falls within the search parameters appears in this
list, including important metadata about the file. Tap or click on the file
3
Files
selects it so that it can be managed through the other tools on the page.
You may also download or delete an individual file by using the action
items at the end of the file line. Tap the file name to rename the file.
The page number indicates which page of results you are currently
viewing, and how many pages of results are there. The buttons allow
4
Page indicators
you to move between pages one at a time, or straight to the beginning
or end of the list. You can also change which page you are on by typing a
valid page number into the text box.
5
Select all
6
Delete all
7
Delete
8
Download
Tap to select all files on the page.
Tap to delete all files on the list. Warning: Deleted files can not be
recovered.
Tap to delete all selected files. Warning: Deleted files can not be
recovered.
Click this button to download all selected files to your local hard drive.
99
Pearl-2 User Guide
Cloud-based device management
Cloud-based device management
Epiphan Cloud is where remote teams can conveniently manage and control all Pearl-2 devices together in one
place. An Internet connection and a free Epiphan Cloud account is all you need to get started.
When Pearl-2 is paired with your Epiphan Cloud account, you can start/stop video recording and streaming,
monitor the health of your Pearl-2 with status alerts and a diagnostics dashboard, monitor video feeds,
update firmware remotely, and even remotely configure channel encoding.
Topics include:
l
About device management with Epiphan Cloud
l
Enable or disable Epiphan Cloud access
l
Pair and unpair from Epiphan Cloud
l
Remote login to the Admin panel and Epiphan Live
For more information about Epiphan Cloud, see the Epiphan Cloud User Guide.
About device management with Epiphan Cloud
Epiphan Cloud is your remote management and control center for all your Pearl-2 devices. All you need is a
free Epiphan Cloud account.
After you pair Pearl-2 with your Epiphan Cloud account, you can access Pearl-2 from anywhere there's an
Internet connection. You can even invite others to join your team for easy remote access.
Using Epiphan Cloud you can:
l
Preview video sources and audio.
l
Start/stop channel recording and streaming remotely.
l
Remotely configure channel encoding.
l
Create live streams.
l
Monitor performance statistics and system alerts 24/7.
l
Set up custom email alerts.
l
Set up remote teams and assign team members access and control levels.
l
Perform updates and batch operations for efficient fleet management.
l
Remotely login to cloud versions of the Admin panel and Epiphan Live for remote rescue
troubleshooting, full administration access, and control switching, recording, and streaming.
For more information about Epiphan Cloud features and functions, see the online Epiphan Cloud User Guide.
100
Pearl-2 User Guide
Enable or disable Epiphan Cloud access
Important considerations
l
The following actions cause Pearl-2's device entry in Epiphan Cloud to permanently go offline. You
must pair Pearl-2 again to remotely control, monitor, or configure Pearl-2 using Epiphan Cloud.
l
Unpairing Pearl-2 in Epiphan Cloud.
l
Using the Admin panel to disable the Epiphan Cloud feature on Pearl while the device is paired to
Epiphan Cloud.
l
If you pair Pearl-2 again after you have successfully unpaired from Epiphan Cloud, a new device
instance is created in Epiphan Cloud. The previous instance for Pearl-2 remains permanently offline.
l
Some features like batch operations and remote login require the Epiphan Cloud Pro plan.
Enable or disable Epiphan Cloud access
Epiphan Cloud is where you go to remotely manage and control all your Pearl-2 devices. Access is enabled on
Pearl-2 by default. All you need to do is pair Pearl-2 to your free Epiphan Cloud account for access to your
device over the Internet. You can disable Epiphan Cloud access on Pearl-2 from the touch screen or using the
Admin panel and enable it again later. Access is enabled by default.
Important considerations
l
Unpair Pearl-2 from Epiphan Cloud before disabling Epiphan Cloud access on Pearl-2 using the Admin
panel.
l
If you disable Epiphan Cloud access while Pearl-2 is paired, the device instance in Epiphan Cloud goes
permanently offline. For more information, see Pair and unpair from Epiphan Cloud.
To enable or disable Epiphan Cloud access:
1. Using the Admin panel, do the following:
a. Login as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
b. From the Configuration menu, click Maintenance. The Maintenance page opens.
c. Uncheck Enable Epiphan Cloud to disable the feature or leave it checked to allow Pearl-2 to
101
Pearl-2 User Guide
Enable or disable Epiphan Cloud access
access Epiphan Cloud. Click Apply to save your changes.
2. From the touch screen on Pearl-2, do the following:
a. Tap the gear icon to open the System settings screen. If the control icons aren't showing, tap
anywhere on the touch screen.
b. Tap the arrow icon in the lower-right corner of the screen to go to the second Settings page.
c. Tap Epiphan Cloud. The Epiphan Cloud settings page shows the status as enabled and displays
a pairing code by default.
d. Uncheck Enable Epiphan Cloud to disable the feature or leave it checked to allow Pearl-2 to
102
Pearl-2 User Guide
Pair and unpair from Epiphan Cloud
access Epiphan Cloud.
Pair and unpair from Epiphan Cloud
To manage your Pearl-2 devices from the cloud or access the remote login feature, Pearl-2 must be paired to
your Epiphan Cloud account.
Easily pair Pearl-2 directly from the Admin panel or add Pearl-2 as a new device in Epiphan Cloud using Pearl2's device ID paring code. To manually pair Pearl-2 in Epiphan Cloud using Pearl-2's pairing code, see the
Epiphan Cloud online user guide.
You can easily see if Pearl-2 is currently paired using the touch screen when you tap the Settings
gear icon and select Epiphan Cloud from the second page of options. A pairing code displays if
Epiphan Cloud access is enabled and the device is not paired. To enable Epiphan Cloud access, see
Enable or disable Epiphan Cloud access.
You can unpair Pearl-2 from the Pearl-2's touch screen, the Admin panel, or directly within Epiphan Cloud.
Each time you unpair Pearl-2, the device ID pairing code changes value. When you pair Pearl-2 again, a new
instance of the Pearl-2 with a different device ID is created in Epiphan Cloud .
Important considerations
l
Pearl-2's device entry in Epiphan Cloud permanently goes offline when you unpair. You must pair Pearl2 again to use Epiphan Cloud to remotely manage or login to Pearl-2.
l
If you pair Pearl-2 again after you have successfully unpaired from Epiphan Cloud, a new device
instance is created in Epiphan Cloud. The previous instance for Pearl-2 remains permanently offline,
which you can delete at any time.
You can still access information about permanently offline device instances in Epiphan
Cloud.
To pair and unpair Pearl-2:
103
Pearl-2 User Guide
Pair and unpair from Epiphan Cloud
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Epiphan Cloud. The Epiphan Cloud status page opens. The
pairing code device ID for Pearl-2 is shown, as well as a link to pair the device.
3. Select Click to pair. The Epiphan Cloud login page opens in a new tab (https://go.epiphan.cloud)
4. Login to your existing Epiphan Cloud account or sign up for a free account.
5. After you've logged in to Epiphan Cloud, your Pearl-2 automatically pairs to your default Epiphan Cloud
team and the Device Details page opens in Epiphan Cloud. If you have multiple teams associated with
your account, you're prompted to select a team.
6. In the Admin panel, the status of Pearl-2 updates to paired on the Epiphan Cloud status page.
104
Pearl-2 User Guide
Pair and unpair from Epiphan Cloud
7. To unpair Pearl-2 using the Admin panel, select Unpair on the Epiphan Cloud status page.
8. To unpair Pearl-2 using the touch screen, do the following:
a. Tap the gear icon to open the System settings screen. If the control icons aren't showing, tap
anywhere on the touch screen.
b. Tap the arrow icon in the lower-right corner of the screen to go to the second Settings page.
c. Tap Epiphan Cloud to open the Epiphan Cloud settings page.
d. From the Epiphan Cloud settings page, tap Unpair.
105
Pearl-2 User Guide
Remote login to the Admin panel and Epiphan Live
Remote login to the Admin panel and Epiphan Live
You can remotely login to Pearl-2 using cloud versions of the Admin panel and Epiphan Live for full
administration access to configure and operate Pearl-2 over the Internet. You just need to pair Pearl-2 with an
Epiphan Cloud account and purchase a Pro plan to remotely login to the cloud version of the Admin panel.
With an Epiphan Cloud Pro plan, administrative access to your Pearl-2 for setup and rescue troubleshooting is
fast and convenient. And anyone on your team can remotely control live switching and recording using the
cloud version of Epihan Live. Cloud versions of the Admin panel and Epiphan Live use the same login
credentials as the locally accessed web versions.
The URL of the local web versions of the Admin panel and Epiphan Live are not the same as the
URL of the cloud versions. An Epiphan Cloud Pro plan is only required to access the cloud
versions.
Before you begin
l
Make sure Pearl-2 is paired to your Epiphan Cloud account, see Pair and unpair from Epiphan Cloud.
l
Upgrade to one of the Epiphan Cloud Pro plans.
To access the cloud versions of the Admin panel and Epiphan Live:
1. Login to your Epiphan Cloud account at https://go.epiphan.cloud
2. In the left navigation pane, click Devices to open the All Devices page.
3. Click the device name in the list to open the details page for that device.
106
Pearl-2 User Guide
Remote login to the Admin panel and Epiphan Live
From the All Devices page, you can also click the three dots at the far right in the device's
row and select Remote login.
4. From the Device Details page, click Remote login in the header bar. A new tab with the cloud Admin
panel login opens in your browser.
5. Enter your Admin panel login credentials to login to the cloud version of the Admin panel for that
device. The default administrator user name is admin.
6. Click Epiphan Live in the upper-right corner to open the Epiphan Live dashboard in a new tab.
See The Admin panel and Epiphan Live for details about how to use these interfaces or how to access the local
web versions.
107
PART 1: Setup
This section contains tasks that are needed to get your Pearl-2 configured to connect to your local network,
make system settings, add passwords, make backups of your configuration, and covers how to access status
information and monitor the performance of your Pearl-2.
Topics include:
l
Rackmount installation
l
Configure network settings
l
Configure network security
l
Configure date and time
l
Configure device info, name, description, and location
l
Audio input ports
l
Video output ports
l
Feature add-ons
l
Connect an external keyboard
l
Connect a USB status light
l
Configuration presets
l
User administration
l
Status and monitoring
For information about integrating Pearl-2 with Content Management Systems (CMSs) like Panopto and
related administrator tasks, see Integration.
108
Pearl-2 User Guide
Rackmount installation
Rackmount installation
All Pearl-2 models can be used in desktop mode, with the system placed on any flat, stable surface. They are
also all rackmountable into fixed racks or portable rack cases like the one depicted below.
If you purchased Pearl-2 Rackmount or Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin, you can install your system directly into a
19-inch rack. For the smaller, portable Pearl-2 model, you can purchase our optional rackmount shelf for
installation in a rack. (Instructions for the rackmount shelf are included with the shelf.)
To install Pearl-2 Rackmount or Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin in a 19-inch rack:
1. Ensure you have the correct bolts needed for your rack (not included). Pearl-2's rackmount holes are
sized to work with both threaded and non-threaded mounting systems.
2. Carefully slide the system into and available 2U space in your 19-inch rack.
3. Attach four bolts as shown below.
109
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure network settings
Configure network settings
Pearl-2 uses DHCP to obtain an IP Address over an Ethernet-based network by default; however, you can
easily change the network settings.
Topics include:
l
Network ports used by Pearl-2
l
Verify IP address and MAC address of Pearl-2
l
Configure a static IP address
l
Configure DHCP
l
Configure DHCP Option 81
l
Configure Dynamic DNS
l
Change the HTTP/HTTPS port values
l
Perform network diagnostics
To monitor network status information, see View network status
To set up traffic shaping for multicast streams, see Set up traffic shaping.
Network ports used by Pearl-2
The following table lists the default incoming and outgoing network ports that Pearl-2 uses.
Do not block traffic over these ports. If you want Pearl-2 to operate properly, make sure that your firewall is
configured to open these ports. Blocking a port will cause the service that uses that port to fail. It is possible
to use the Admin panel to change the default ports that are used for some services.
Table 19 Default incoming network ports for Pearl-2
Port (or range)
Protocol
Description
21
TCP
FTP server, if enabled. See Local FTP server.
22
TCP
SSH for remote support. See Support.
HTTP/HTTPS for web-based access to the Admin panel and Epiphan Live,
HTTP/HTTPS API, REST API, HLS streaming (if enabled) and the live channel
80
TCP
preview.
You can change the default HTTP port value using the Admin panel, see
Configure HTTPS.
110
Pearl-2 User Guide
Network ports used by Pearl-2
Port (or range)
Protocol
Description
123
TCP/UDP NTP server, if enabled. See Configure a time server.
319 and 320
UDP
PTP server, if enabled. See Configure a time server.
HTTPS for the Admin panel and HLS streaming if enabled. Port is open
443
TCP
only when HTTPS is enabled. You can change the default HTTPS port value
using the Admin panel, see Configure HTTPS.
For RTSP/TCP and RTSP/HTTP streaming on your network (where x is the
number of channels configured). The number of ports used depends on
how many channels you have with RTSP streaming enabled. See Share a
live broadcast stream (HTTP, HTTPS or RTSP). Note that client video
554 to 554+(x-1)
TCP
players choose whether they are using RTSP/TCP, RTSP/HTTP
or RTSP/UDP.
Ports 554 and 555 are also used for internal communications. If
streaming is disabled, these ports remain open but refuse all external
connection requests.
If the client video player chooses RTSP/UDP, it will negotiate 4 random
Random in range
32768 - 61000
UDP
UDP ports (two for audio and two for video). The port range is dependent
on the OS of the client video player and can change with updates to that
OS.
1900
Random in range
50000 to 65000
5353
UDP
UPnP server for UPnP discovery, if enabled. See Stream using UPnP.
UPnP media server, if enabled. Each time the UPnP server is started, a
TCP
random TCP port in this range is used to enable connections with other
UPnP devices.
UDP
For multicast DNS discovery. See Connect using a DNS-based service
discovery.
For Flash (FLV) live stream and MPEG-TS streaming on your network
(where x is the number of channels configured). The number of ports
used depends on how many channels you have with streaming enabled.
8000 to 8000+(x-1) TCP
See Share a live broadcast stream (HTTP, HTTPS or RTSP).
Ports 8000 and 8001 are also used for internal communications. If
streaming is disabled for the channel from the Channel > Streaming ,
these ports remain open but refuse all external connection requests.
In addition to the incoming ports, Pearl-2 uses some outgoing connections as follows:
111
Pearl-2 User Guide
Verify IP address and MAC address of Pearl-2
l
Port 80 - used for firmware update checks and downloads.
l
Publishing/streaming port - the actual ports used for streaming to a server depends on the server
and protocol used. See Streaming to servers, CDNs, and other devices
l
AFU file recording transfer port - the actual ports used for AFU depends on your configuration. See
FTP and automatic file transfers.
Verify IP address and MAC address of Pearl-2
There are two ways to view the current IP address and MAC address of your Pearl-2:
l
From the Network configuration page using the Admin panel.
l
From the Settings menu using the touch screen on Pearl-2.
Table 20 Network Information
Item
Description/Options
A media access control address (MAC address) is a unique identifier for the
MAC Address
network interface. The value is read-only and cannot be changed. You may need
to share this value with your system administrator.
Reflects the current internet protocol address (IP address) of the system. This
Current IP Address
value is either obtained from the DHCP server (if using DHCP) or is the configured
static IP address. Pearl-2 supports IPv4 addresses. It does not support IPv6
addresses.
To view network information using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Network. The network configuration page opens.
To view network information using the touch screen:
1. Tap the gear icon to open the System settings screen. If the control icons aren't showing, tap anywhere
on the touch screen.
112
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure a static IP address
2. Tap System Status to see the System Status page.
3. Tap Back to return to the System Settings screen, or the Home icon to return to the channel view.
If the system settings control icon won't appear when you tap the touch screen, it may be
disabled. See Configure the touch screen to enable system information.
Configure a static IP address
There are two ways you can set up Pearl-2 to use a static IP address:
l
From the Network configuration page using the Admin panel.
l
From the Settings menu using the touch screen on Pearl-2
TIP: Using the touch screen, you can choose to apply a configuration preset that contains a static network IP.
See Configuration presets.
Only IPv4 addresses are supported. Pearl-2 does not support IPv6.
To configure a static IP address using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
113
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure a static IP address
2. From the Configuration menu, select Network . The Network configuration page opens.
3. Choose No from the Use DHCP drop-down and enter your networking information in to the required
fields. Click Apply when you're done.
Table 21 Static IP Address Fields
Label
Use DHCP
IP Address
Description
Select Yes to dynamically obtain an IP address at boot up or select No to use the
configured static IP address.
The internet protocol address (IP Address) to assign. Obtain this from your network
administrator. Pearl-2 supports IPv4 addresses. It does not support IPv6 addresses.
Also called the subnet mask, this value denotes a range of IP addresses. Obtain this
Network Mask
from your network administrator, from another computer on the same subnet, or
calculate the value using an online subnet calculator.
The network node that serves as an access point to the rest of the network. This value
Default gateway
cannot be blank unless you are using DCHP. Specify the system’s IP address if you
don’t have a default gateway on your network.
The domain name system server (DNS server) translates human-readable hostnames
DNS Server
into corresponding IP addresses. Specify the system’s IP address if you don’t have a
DNS server on your network. This value cannot be blank unless you are using DHCP.
MTU Size
The maximum transmission unit (MTU) specifies the maximum packet size for
transfer on the network. The default value is 1500, which is the largest value allowed
114
Pearl-2 User Guide
Label
Configure a static IP address
Description
by Ethernet at the network layer. It’s best for all nodes in your network to use the
same value. Only change the MTU value if you know that other nodes use a different
value.
The default gateway and DNS Server fields cannot be left blank. If you do not have a default
gateway or a DNS server for your network, enter the static IP address in those fields.
4. Reboot Pearl-2 when prompted. From the Configuration menu, select Maintenance and click Reboot
Now on the Maintenance page.
5. After the system has finished rebooting, use the new IP address to log back in to the Admin panel as
admin and verify that all changes were applied.
To configure a static IP address using the touch screen:
1. Tap the gear icon to open the System settings screen. If the control icons aren't showing, tap anywhere
on the touch screen.
2. Tap Network. The Network settings page opens. The currently enabled network type (DHCP or static)
is highlighted green.
3. Tap Static IP Address. The Static IP Address configuration page opens.
4. Tap a segment of the IP Address (e.g. 192) to select it and use the keypad to enter a new static IP
address. Continue to enter your Network Mask, Default Gateway, and DNS server information. Tap
115
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure DHCP
Apply when you're done.
The default gateway and DNS Server fields cannot be left blank. If you do not have a default
gateway or a DNS server for your network, enter the static IP address in those fields.
Configure DHCP
If you need to switch Pearl-2 from using static IP address allocation to using dynamic allocation with DHCP,
you can do this three different ways:
l
Restore factory settings, which clear all your custom settings. See Perform a factory reset.
l
Load a configuration preset file that uses DHCP networking. See Apply a configuration preset using the
Admin panel or Apply a configuration preset using the touch screen.
l
Change the network settings manually using either the touch screen or the Admin panel.
To manually select DHCP as the network type using the touch screen:
1. Tap the gear icon to open the System settings screen. If the control icons aren't showing, tap anywhere
on the touch screen.
2. Tap Network. The Network settings page appears. The currently enabled network type (DHCP or
static) is highlighted green.
3. Tap DHCP, and then tap OK to confirm.
116
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure DHCP
To manually select DHCP as the network type using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Network. The Network configuration page opens.
3. Choose Yes from the Use DHCP drop-down and change the MTU Size if needed, then click Apply.
Table 22 DHCP Fields
Label
Description/Options
Use DHCP
Select this option to dynamically obtain an IP address at boot up using DHCP
Use static
address
Only select this option if you ant to use the configured static IP address instead.
The maximum transmission unit (MTU) specifies the maximum packet size for
transfer on the network. The default value is 1500, which is the largest value
MTU Size
allowed by Ethernet at the network layer. It’s best for all nodes in your network to
use the same value. Only change this value if you know that other nodes use a
different value.
4. Reboot Pearl-2 when prompted. From the Configuration menu, select Maintenance and click Reboot
Now on the maintenance page.
5. After the system has finished rebooting, log back in to the Admin panel as admin and verify that all
changes were applied.
117
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure DHCP Option 81
Configure DHCP Option 81
Ensure your Domain Name Server (DNS) always has Pearl-2's most up-to-date IP address mapped to Pearl-2's
Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN). Option 81 support means you can keep using Pearl's FQDN no matter
how many times the DHCP server may change Pearl's IP address. Pearl-2 automatically asks the DHCP server
to tell the Domain Name Server (DNS) to update Pearl-2's record with any changes to Pearl-2's IP address or
FQDN. DHCP Option 81 is disabled by default.
Important considerations
l
The DHCP server must support Option 81 for this feature to work.
l
DHCP should be enabled and setup before enabling DHCP Option 81, see Configure DHCP.
l
You need the FQDN of your Pearl system for this procedure. Consult your network administrator if you
don't have that information.
To configure DHCP Option 81 using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Network. The Network configuration page opens.
3. Under Settings, check Send FQDN (DHCP Option 81).
4. In the DNS FQDN field, enter the FQDN of your Pearl-2, for example: mypearl.mydomain.com
5. Click Apply.
118
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure Dynamic DNS
6. Reboot Pearl-2 when prompted.
7. After the system has finished rebooting, log back in to the Admin panel as admin and verify that all
changes were applied.
Configure Dynamic DNS
You can use Dynamic Domain Name Server (DDNS) to ensure that whenever the DHCP server changes Pearl2's IP address, Pearl-2 informs the DDNS to update it's domain name records. That way, you can keep using
Pearl-2's FQDN without worry.
The DDNS feature is useful if your DHCP server doesn't support Option 81. Custom, dyndns.org, and
noip.com DDNS servers are supported.
Table 23 DDNS Fields
Label
Provider
DDNS server name
DDNS server path
Use SSL
Description/Options
Choose if the DDNS provider is dyndns.com, noip.com, or a custom DDNS
server of your choice.
If you are using a custom DDNS provider, you must enter the DDNS server
name. If dyndns.com or noip.com are used, you can leave this field blank.
If you are using a custom DDNS provider, you must enter the DDNS server
path. If dyndns.com or noip.com are used, you can leave this field blank.
Choose if you will use Secure Socket Layer (SSL) encryption for
communications with the DDNS server. This is enabled by default.
Enter how often Pearl-2 updates the DDNS server with Pearl-2's new IP
Update period
address when the DHCP server changes it. Enter the update period in
seconds from 30 to 864000 seconds (i.e. up to a maximum period of 10
days). The default is 600 seconds.
Username
Enter your user name for the DDNS provider.
Password
Enter your password for the DDNS provider.
Hostname
Enter the hostname to use for this Pearl-2 in the DDNS server records. Pearl2's serial number is the default hostname.
External IP detection server
If your DDNS provider uses an external IP detection server, you must
name
provide that server's name.
119
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure Dynamic DNS
Label
Description/Options
External IP detection server
If your DDNS provider uses an external IP detection server, you must
path
provide that server's path.
Use SSL for external
Choose if you will use SSL encryption for communications with the external
IP detection
IP detection. This is enabled by default.
The status of the connection to the DDNS server, the last external IP address of Pearl-2 that was reported to
the DDNS server, and the time when the IP address was reported is shown.
To configure DDNS using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Network. The Network configuration page opens.
3. Under Dynamic DNS, check Enabled and in the Provider field, choose either Custom, dyndns.com, or
noip.com in the drop-down menu.
120
Pearl-2 User Guide
Change the HTTP/HTTPS port values
4. If you selected Custom as the provider, enter the DDNS server name and DDNS server path. If
dyndns.com or noip.com were selected as the provider, you can leave those fields blank.
5. Enter the Username and Password for your DDNS server.
6. In the Hostname field, enter the hostname of your Pearl-2, for example: mypearl. The default
hostname is the serial number of Pearl-2.
7. If your DDNS provider uses an external IP detection server, enter the External IP detection server
name and External IP detection server path.
8. Check User SSL for external IP detection if you want to use that feature with an external IP
detection server.
9. (Optional) Change the Update period in seconds.
10. Click Apply.
11. Reboot Pearl-2 when prompted.
12. After the system has finished rebooting, log back in to the Admin panel as admin and verify that all
changes were applied.
Change the HTTP/HTTPS port values
On Pearl-2, the default HTTP port is 80 and the default HTTPS port is 443. If the default ports used by Pearl-2
are not available on your network, you can change them using the Admin panel. Consult your system
administrator for the correct port values to use for HTTP and HTTPS traffic.
Ensure that the port value you choose is unique and is not currently assigned on Pearl-2, see
Network ports used by Pearl-2.
To change the HTTP/HTTPS port values using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Security. The Security configuration page opens.
3. Under HTTPS configuration, change the default HTTP and HTTPS port numbers. Click Apply when
you're done.
121
Pearl-2 User Guide
Perform network diagnostics
Secure connection (HTTPS) must be checked before you can change the HTTPS port.
4. Reboot Pearl-2 when prompted. After the system has finished rebooting, log back in to the Admin
panel as admin and verify that all changes were applied.
Perform network diagnostics
Network diagnostic tools are available to help you troubleshoot your setup. You can access Pearl-2's
diagnostic tools from the touch screen or using the Admin panel. You can also run network diagnostics from
Epiphan Cloud, see the online Epiphan Cloud User Guide.
Using the Admin panel, network diagnostics like ping and traceroute are available from the Network
configuration page.
122
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable the network discovery port
Using the touch screen, network diagnostic tests ping and traceroute are available from Settings > Network
when you navigate to the second page of Network options and choose Network Tools.
For more details, see Diagnostic tools.
If you are unable to resolve your networking issues, contact your network administrator and provide them
with the IP address and MAC address of your Pearl-2; otherwise, contact Epiphan Video support for
assistance.
Disable the network discovery port
You can disable the network discovery port on Pearl-2 using the Admin panel so that services can no longer
discover Pearl-2 systems using multicast DNS (mDNS). The network discovery port on Pearl-2 is port 5557
and is enabled by default.
Important considerations
l
You cannot connect to the Admin panel using a DNS-based service discovery if you disable the network
discovery port, see Connect using a DNS-based service discovery.
l
The network discovery port must be enabled to use the NDI feature on Pearl-2.
To disable the network discovery port using the Admin panel:
123
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable the network discovery port
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Network. The Network configuration page opens.
3. Uncheck Make this device discoverable on the network as <uniqueID.local>, then click Apply.
124
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure network security
Configure network security
Pearl-2 supports 802.1x network security. You can choose the authentication method, upload user
certificates and private key, as well as manage signed CA certificates using the Admin panel. You can also
configure Pearl-2 to use HTTPS.
Topics include:
l
Configure 802.1x network security and manage user certificates
l
Manage CA and self-signed certificates
l
Configure HTTPS
For higher security, we recommend setting admin, operator and viewer-level passwords on Pearl-2, see Set or
change user passwords.
Configure 802.1x network security and manage user certificates
You can enable 802.1x security and configure the EAP method for Pearl-2 to use for secure network access
using the Admin panel. Supported EAP methods include:
l
PEAP (default)
l
EAP-TLS
l
EAP-TTLS
Important considerations
l
If TLS authentication is used on the network, then you need to get a user certificate and a user private
key from the network administrator and upload those to Pearl-2 as part of this procedure.
l
Before you proceed with this setup, check that the network server's signed CA certificate appears in the
list of CA certificates on Pearl-2 and is valid, see Manage CA and self-signed certificates.
l
If the network server's CA certificate doesn't appear in the list of signed CA certificates and you can't
obtain a valid signed CA certificate for network server authentication, do not check Verify server's
identity when performing this setup.
l
Security certificates must be PEM encoded.
To configure 802.1x and upload the user certificate and user private key using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Network. The Network configuration page opens.
3. Under IEEE 802.1x, check Enabled and select an EAP method: PEAP, EAP-TLS, or EAP-TTLS.
125
Configure 802.1x network security and manage user
Pearl-2 User Guide
certificates
4. (Optional) Check Verify server's identity.
5. Choose an Authentication method if you selected EAP-TTLS as the EAP method. The authentication
method is automatically selected if PEAP or EAP-TLS is the EAP method.
Table 24 Authentication methods
EAP method
Authentication method
PEAP
EAP-MSCHAPv2
EAP-TLS
TLS
EAP-MSCHAPv2
EAP-TTLS
TLS
PAP
6. Enter the network access User name and Password to use for this device. Available fields depend on
the EAP method that is selected.
7. If TLS is chosen as the Authentication method, upload a user certificate and a user private key. You can
request those from your network administrator.
126
Pearl-2 User Guide
Manage CA and self-signed certificates
8. Click Apply when you're done.
9. Reboot Pearl-2 when prompted. After the system has finished rebooting, log back in to the Admin
panel as admin and verify that all changes were applied.
If you need to delete the user certificate or private key, click Delete certificate.
Manage CA and self-signed certificates
You can view the list of CA and self-signed certificates that come preloaded on Pearl-2. CA and self-signed
certificates are used for server authentication if Verify server's identity is selected when 802.1x network
security is configured, see Configure 802.1x network security and manage user certificates.
You can add more CA signed and self-signed certificates using the Admin panel, as well as delete any
certificates that you've uploaded. You cannot delete any of the built-in CA certificates that came preloaded on
Pearl-2. Security certificates must be PEM encoded.
To manage CA and self-signed certificates on Pearl-2 using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Security. The Security configuration page opens.
3. Under CA certificates, click the arrow head to expand the list of built-in CA and self-signed certificates
that came preloaded on Pearl-2.
4. To upload a new CA or self-signed certificate, click Choose File and select the certificate you want to
upload. Then click Apply. The uploaded certificate is added to a list of user uploaded CA certificates.
127
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure HTTPS
5. To delete a CA or self-signed certificate that you've uploaded, click Choose File and select the
certificate you want to delete from the list. Then click Delete. When you're done, click Apply.
6. Reboot Pearl-2 when prompted. After the system has finished rebooting, log back in to the Admin
panel as admin and verify that all changes were applied.
Configure HTTPS
You can configure Pearl-2 to use HTTPS for secure, local network access to the Admin panel, as well as for
viewing the live channel preview stream on the local network using the Live broadcast URL.
Custom applications that use the Pearl-2 HTTP API should continue to work if you configure Pearl2 for HTTPS.
A default, self-signed certificate from Epiphan Video comes preloaded on Pearl-2. You can upload and delete
your own certificate and private key. However, you cannot delete the default, self-signed certificate that
comes preloaded onPearl-2.
If you upload your own self-signed certificate and private key, ensure they're PEM encoded. Certificates can
either include the private key or be separate files.
If you attempt to access the web-based Admin panel using a web browser and the required security certificate
isn't found in the list of certificates loaded on Pearl-2, a warning message appears stating that the device isn't
trusted. You can choose whether to proceed and connect to Pearl-2's web-based Admin panel without the
security certificate authentication or cancel the connection.
128
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure HTTPS
The default HTTP port 80 redirects traffic to the default HTTPS port 443 when HTTPS is enabled.
If the default ports used by Pearl-2 are not available on your network, you can change them using
the Admin panel, see Change the HTTP/HTTPS port values.
To configure HTTPS and upload a self-signed certificate using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Security. The Security configuration page opens.
3. Under HTTPS configuration, check Secure connection (HTTPS).
4. (Optional) Change the default HTTP and the HTTPS port numbers. Consult your network administrator.
5. (Optional) Upload a new certificate and private key as required. You can request those from your
network administrator.
If the required certificate isn't included in the list of certificates on Pearl-2 when you
try and connect to Pearl-2 using a web-browser, you'll receive a warning that the
device isn't trusted.
6. Click Apply when you're done.
7. Reboot Pearl-2 when prompted. After the system has finished rebooting, log back in to the Admin
panel as admin and verify that all changes were applied.
If you need to delete the certificate you uploaded and the private key, click Delete
certificate, or click Restore default certificate.
129
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure date and time
Configure date and time
Pearl-2 uses the current date and time in naming recorded files and when synchronizing and timestamping
inputs from multiple sources (i.e. when synchronizing an audio and a video source). The Admin panel lets you
specify date and time settings to ensure they are correctly configured for your time zone and your network.
Topics include:
l
View the current date and time settings
l
Configure a time server
l
Manually set the date, time, and zone
View the current date and time settings
There are two ways to view the current date and time settings of Pearl-2:
l
From the Date and Time page using the Admin panel.
l
From the Settings menu using the touch screen on Pearl-2.
You can manually set the date and time, change the time zone, and set up for a local Network Time Protocol
(NTP) server from the Date and Time page using the Admin panel.
To view the current Date and Time configuration page using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Date and Time. The Date and Time configuration page opens.
130
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure date and time
Table 25 Date and Time configuration options
Label
Description/Options
Time Zone
The currently selected time zone.
Enable time
Whether or not a time synchronization protocol is being used for setting time. If not
synchronization
selected, time is set manually.
Protocol
The time synchronization protocol.
Service IP Address The time synchronization server address.
Set time manually
Date
Time
Whether or not time is set manually. If time is not being set manually, a time
synchronization protocol is used.
The current date. This is the current date even if the radio button Set time manually is
not selected.
The current time. This is the current time even if the radio button Set time manually is
not selected.
To view the current date and time using the touch screen:
1. Tap the gear icon to open the System settings screen. If the control icons aren't showing, tap anywhere
on the touch screen.
2. Tap System Status to see the System Status page.
3. Tap Back to return to the System Settings screen, or the Home icon to return to the channel view.
131
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure date and time
If the system settings control icon won't appear when you tap the touch screen, it may be
disabled. See Configure the touch screen to enable system information.
Configure a time server
Pearl-2 uses the Network Time Protocol (NTP) server from the National Research Council of Canada by
default. You can change to a different time server using the Admin panel. Contact your system administrator
for the time synchronization server settings you should use.
The following table lists the time server types that Pearl-2 supports.
Table 26 Supported time servers
Label
Description/Options
Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers are used to synchronize system time. Many
NTP servers are available on the Internet. Or your company may have its own
NTP
local NTP server. All you need is the IP address of the NTP server and network
access to the server to use that as the time synchronization source for Pearl-2.
For more information about NTP and to find NTP servers, refer to
http://support.ntp.org/bin/view/Servers/WebHome.
RDATE is a tool for querying the current time from the network. It is generally
RDATE
considered obsolete and has been replaced by NTP. It's offered here for
backwards compatibility purposes.
The Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is used for clock synchronization over the
PTP v1
Internet. It has clock accuracy in the sub-microsecond range, making it more
granular than NTP.
NTP sends UDP packets over port 123 on Pearl-2 and PTP sends UDP packets over ports 319 and
320. If Pearl-2 is behind a firewall, you must open these ports to allow traffic when Pearl-2 is
configured to use either an NTP or a PTP server to obtain its time and date information.
To set the time synchronization method for Pearl-2:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Date and Time . The Date and Time configuration page opens.
3. For local NTP servers, check Enable local NTP server. Otherwise, skip this step.
132
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure date and time
4. Select Enable time synchronization and choose the time synchronization protocol from the
Protocols drop down.
a. If NTP is selected, enter the IP address or server name for the NTP server in the Server IP
Address field.
b. If RDATE is selected, enter the IP address or server name for the RDATE server in the Server IP
Address field and select an Update interval.
c. If PTP v1 is selected, choose a multicast address for the PTP v1 server from the PTP domain
field.
Table 27 PTP multicast addresses
PTP Domain
Description
Default
PTP at multicast address 224.0.1.129
Alternative 1
PTP at multicast address 224.0.1.130
Alternative 2
PTP at multicast address 224.0.1.131
Alternative 3
PTP at multicast address 224.0.1.132
5. Click Apply.
Manually set the date, time, and zone
Pearl-2 uses NTP for time synchronization by default. However, you can manually set the date and time for
Pearl-2 using the Admin panel. You can also set the time zone. Pearl-2 uses the Eastern (Canada) time zone by
default.
To manually set the date, time, and zone:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Date and Time. The Date and Time configuration page opens.
3. Enter the current date in the Date field using the format yyyy-mm-dd and enter the current time in the
Time field using the format hh:mm:ss.
4. Select a time zone from the Time Zone field.
5. Click Apply.
133
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure date and time
Configure device info, name, description, and location
You can assign Pearl-2 a unique device name using the Admin panel and add information such as a description
and location. Alphanumeric characters and hyphens are supported. The serial number of Pearl-2 is the default
device name.
For AFU and USB file transfers that are configured to create a folder upon file upload, the device name you set
for Pearl-2 is used for the folder name instead of Pearl's serial number.
For Kaltura and Panopto, the device name you set here for Pearl-2 appears as the registered name for this
device.
To configure the device name, description, and location using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Info. The system information page opens.
3. Under Device info, do any of the following and then click Apply:
a. Enter a name using alphanumeric characters including hyphens up to a maximum of 64
characters.
b. Enter a description using alphanumeric characters including hyphens up to a maximum of 50
characters.
c. Enter a locaion using alphanumeric characters including hyphens up to a maximum of 50
characters. alphanumerical characters and hyphens.
134
Pearl-2 User Guide
Audio input ports
Audio input ports
You can connect external audio devices like audio mixers directly to the audio input ports on Pearl-2. There
are:
l
Four XLR professional line-level inputs + 4.0 dBu up to 12.3 V RMS, (+24 dBu) that support balanced
and unbalanced signals.
l
One stereo pair RCA consumer line-level input (-10 dBV)
l
Two USB video/audio ports
l
Four HDMI ports
l
Two SDI ports
The four XLR audio inputs are configured as two stereo pairs by default: XLR A (left/right) and XLR B
(left/right). The XLR B audio ports and the RCA audio ports are linked. You can configure Pearl-2 to use both or
just one of the audio sources using the Admin panel.
Topics include:
l
Configure audio ports for stereo or mono
l
Assign audio sources to an input
l
Adjust audio gain and delay
l
Mute audio
For details about the audio inputs, see AV inputs.
Configure audio ports for stereo or mono
The four XLR professional line-level inputs are configured as two stereo pairs by default: XLR A (left and right
stereo pair) and XLR B (left and right stereo pair).
Using the Admin panel, you can configure these ports to function as a stereo pair (left/right) or as separate
mono ports.
To configure audio ports as stereo or mono:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Inputs menu, click Analog-A Audio for the XLR A ports or click Analog-B Audio for the XLR B
ports. The configuration page for the audio ports opens.
135
Pearl-2 User Guide
Assign audio sources to an input
3. Do one of the following.
a. To make the ports function as a stereo pair, check Stereo pair and click Apply.
b. To make the ports function as separate mono ports, uncheck Stereo pair and click Apply.
When mono is selected, two sets of parameters and two audio VU meters appear on the
configuration page - one for each audio input port on Pearl-2. Parameters that are listed only
once on the page applies to both ports.
Assign audio sources to an input
Some audio input ports share internal audio processing resources in Pearl-2. These shared audio sources
appear in the same configuration menus in the Admin panel and appear under the same audio input label in
the user interfaces.
The audio sources that share resources are:
l
XLR-B (left and right ports)
l
RCA (left and right ports)
Both the XLR-B (left/right) and RCA (left/right) audio sources appear under the label Analog-B Audio. You can
assign one or both audio sources to Analog-B Audio. Choosing one audio source for the shared input
disables the other audio source. This means that when you select Analog-B Audio as the audio source for a
layout using the custom layout editor, only the audio source you assign to Analog-B Audio is used. Both audio
sources are assigned by default.
136
Pearl-2 User Guide
Adjust audio gain and delay
To avoid unwanted signal noise on the RCA ports, we recommend adding no more than 12dB of
gain when RCA or XLR+RCA is selected.
To assign the audio source to an input:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Inputs menu, select the shared audio source. The audio configuration page opens.
3. From the Input menu, select the audio source and click Apply.
Adjust audio gain and delay
Pearl-2 does not introduce audio delay and has near-zero latency when capturing. However, other external
factors can cause audio to become de-synchronized, such as the length of audio cables or the configuration of
your equipment. The audio delay feature helps you adjust audio coming from external sources so that your
video and audio sources are synchronized when captured, streamed, and recorded.
By default, there's 0 ms of delay applied to your audio sources. You can set the amount of delay for any audio
source using the Admin panel and apply from -300 ms and +300 ms of delay.
137
Pearl-2 User Guide
Adjust audio gain and delay
The analog audio input ports on Pearl-2 are calibrated for +4.0 dBu XLR or -10.0 dBV RCA audio signals and
provide moderate to significant signal headroom. For the analog audio inputs, you can add up to +30 dB of
gain using the Admin panel.
If the gain of your analog audio signal needs adjustment, monitor the audio levels using the VU meter and
headphones, then add some gain using the Admin panel. As a rule, each 10 dB of gain doubles the perceived
loudness of the audio signal.
Adjusting the Input Gain for an analog audio source affects the volume for that audio source in recordings,
streamed output, video output ports, and in the headphone jack. Be aware that excessive amounts of gain
can increase the perception of any noise that may be present in the audio signal.
Microphones typically have low audio signals (less than -30 dBu) and are not supported directly as
inputs to Pearl-2. Use an audio mixing board or preamp to amplify microphones and supply the
appropriate line level input. See Connecting microphones to the XLR line level inputs.
This table offers some guidelines for adjusting the gain at the audio input port of Pearl-2 for common types of
audio input devices. You should add the suggested gain to the audio input to get an average signal to register
at a nominal level in the VU meter (i.e. where the green bars change to yellow). The actual amount of gain
needed depends on the strength of the original audio signal.
Table 28 Audio input port gains guidelines
Audio source
Input
Gain
port
Mobile phone or other
XLR
Add +6 to +12 dB gain to the audio input port.
consumer line level device
RCA1
Nominal
XLR
Nominal
RCA1
Not recommended.
USB
Nominal
Professional mixer
USB microphone
Not recommended.
Dynamic, condenser, or
electret microphones
To connect microphones to the pro line level XLR inputs, you must
XLR
use an external preamp to boost the microphone signal enough to
provide the proper line level signal at the XLR input port, see
Connecting microphones to the XLR line level inputs.
1 To avoid unwanted signal noise on the RCA ports, we recommend adding no more than 12dB of gain to the RCA port or
when XLR B/RCA is used, see Assign audio sources to an input.
138
Pearl-2 User Guide
Mute audio
Ensure the audio input source is connected to an analog audio input port on Pearl-2 before proceeding.
To adjust the gain and delay for an audio source:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin. See Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Inputs menu, select an audio source. The audio configuration page for the audio source
opens.
3. In the Input Gain field, select the amount of gain to apply to the audio source.
4. In the Audio delay field, enter a value between 300 and -300. A positive value adds delay to the audio
signal. A negative value adjusts the audio to start earlier.
5. Click Apply.
Mute audio
You can mute any audio input port using the Admin panel. For analog audio ports that are configured as
mono inputs, you can mute each port separately.
Some audio input ports share internal audio processing resources in Pearl-2. Muting an audio input that
shares internal resources mutes all the associated audio sources. The following table lists the audio input
ports that share internal processing and the results of applying mute.
Table 29 Muting audio inputs that share resources
Audio input
Shared audio
(Admin panel)
input resources
Analog-B Audio
XLR-B (left/right)
Results
In stereo mode:
139
Pearl-2 User Guide
Mute audio
Audio input
Shared audio
(Admin panel)
input resources
Results
Both XLR-B ports (left and right) are muted.
Both RCA ports (left and right) are muted
In mono mode (Analog B audio Left muted):
Both the XLR-B left and RCA left ports are muted.
RCA (left/right)
The XLR-A right and RCA right ports are not muted.
In mono mode (Analog B audio Right muted):
Both the XLR-B right and RCA right ports are muted.
The XLR-A left and RCA left ports are not muted.
To mute an audio source:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Inputs menu, select an audio source. The audio configuration page for the audio source
opens.
3. Check Mute to mute the audio source or uncheck Mute if you no longer want the audio source
muted.
140
Pearl-2 User Guide
Mute audio
4. Click Apply.
141
Pearl-2 User Guide
Video output ports
Video output ports
Video output ports on Pearl-2 let you connect external displays for confidence monitoring. You can use the
Admin panel or the touch screen on Pearl-2 to send any video source or channel to the video output port with
(or without) the audio.
Topics include:
l
About video output ports
l
Video output port resolution
l
Show a channel or video source on the output port
l
Select the video output source using the touch screen
l
Preview the video output port
l
Disable the video output port
l
Disable or enable audio and output port volume
l
Display and reposition the audio VU meter
l
Rename a video output port
l
Mirror the video output port display
About video output ports
Pearl-2's rear panel includes two HDMI video output ports. HDMI 1 is set to show Auto A and HDMI 2 is set to
show Auto B by default. Both video output ports are configured to maintain aspect ratio, use the display's
default resolution, and include audio at 100% volume. However, the audio meter is not shown by default.
142
Pearl-2 User Guide
Video output port resolution
Using the video output port takes CPU cycles and adds to the overall load on your Pearl-2. For
optimum performance, keep displays disconnected from the video output port if you're not using
them. Setups that already put a heavy load on the system's CPU may be negatively impacted if
the external video output port is used.
You can use the Admin panel to configure the video output port parameters, see Show a channel or video
source on the output port. If you're simply selecting a video source or channel and enabling/disabling audio
for the output port, you can use your choice of either the Admin panel, the touch screen on Pearl-2, or
Epiphan Live. For channels that have audio, the audio is enabled by default.
To select the video output port source using the touch screen, see Select the video output source using the
touch screen. To select the video output port source using Epiphan Live, see Monitor and setup the output
port source and audio.
Important considerations
l
When changing encoding parameters for a channel that's displayed on the video output port, it may
revert to the display's default resolution if the output resolution is set to "Same as source". To resolve
this, change the video output to a different resolution then back to "Same as source".
l
When using the video output port for confidence monitoring, some delay can be expected. For a
1080p video source, the average delay on the video output port is approximately 100 ms. For a 1080p
channel, the average delay on the video output port is approximately 300 ms. The actual amount can
vary, depending on the setup.
l
Using the video output ports adds to the overall system load on Pearl-2. If your system has a high
system load and you're using the video outputs, monitor the frame rate of your channels on Pearl-2
and adjust your setup if there's an unacceptable drop in the frame rate. Remedial measures you can
take include eliminating video scaling at the inputs, adjusting the encoding bitrates, and deleting extra
layouts and channels that are no longer being used.
Video output port resolution
The video output port's resolution (also known as frame size or display mode) defines the number of pixels
displayed horizontally and vertically. For example, the resolution 1920×1080 (1080p) produces an image that
is 1920 pixels wide by 1080 pixels tall.
Pearl-2 always assumes that the output display uses square pixels.
The aspect ratio (eg. 4:3 or 16:9) describes the proportional relationship between the video output's pixel
width and height. The resolution 1920×1080 (1080p), for example, is quite a bit wider than it is tall. The ratio
of its width to height is 16 to 9, which has an aspect ratio that is 16:9.
143
Pearl-2 User Guide
Show a channel or video source on the output port
By default, you can choose from the following output resolutions for your video output ports, but you can
also change settings to allow a variety of other resolutions through.
Aspect ratio legend
Aspect Ratio
4:3
16:9
16:10 (8:5)
5:4
1.90:1
Common Use
Standard TV (NTSC/PAL) display and non-widescreen computer displays
Widescreen (HD) TV displays (1080p, 1080i, 720p etc), and 4K-capable displays
Widescreen computer displays, and 4K-capable displays
Sometimes used in larger format computer monitors
Digital Cinema Initiatives standard resolution for 4K or 2K video projection
Resolutions
640×360
640×480
960×540
1024×768
1280×720
1280×1024
1600×1200
1920×1080
1920×1200
2560×1440
3840×2160
4K
4096×2160
4K
Show a channel or video source on the output port
You can send any channel or video source to the video output port and adjust the video output resolution,
aspect ratio, and choose to send the audio using the Admin panel. The video output port frame rate is set
automatically to the channel's configured frame rate for that video source.
For channels with audio, you can configure whether or not audio is included and adjust the volume. You can
also choose to include the audio meter. The audio meter is set to a fixed size of 15% of the width (or height if
displayed horizontally) of the display. Audio is not supported when sending a video source to the video
output port.
To set up the video output port using Epiphan Live, see Monitor and setup the output port source and audio.
144
Pearl-2 User Guide
Show a channel or video source on the output port
Important considerations
l
If an SDI or HDMI video input source that is selected to display at the HDMI output port also appears in
a custom layout for a channel, then the channel's encoding settings are used at the HDMI output.
Changing the channel's frame rate will change the frame rate used at the output port for that video
input. If the video source appears in multiple layouts in different channels, the one with the highest
frame rate set in the encoding settings is used.
l
Default auto channels have the related HDMI (or SDI) port selected by default. As soon as you connect
your video source to the port, it appears automatically in the auto channel's custom layout. Changing
the auto channel's frame rate or deleting the auto channel will change the frame rate used at the
output port for that video input. Deleting the auto channel forces the video output port to use the
original frame rate of the video input source.
To display channel or video source on the video output port:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Output ports menu, click the output port (HDMI 1 or HDMI 2). The video output port
configuration page opens.
3. In the Source field, select a channel (prefixed by the word Channel) or a video source (prefixed by the
word Input).
4. In the Resolution field, select the resolution for the video output port.
145
Pearl-2 User Guide
Show a channel or video source on the output port
Value
Description
Set the output to the same resolution as the channel or
video source. If that resolution is not supported by the
Same as source
display, the video output port will negotiate a new
resolution with the display (generally this ends up being the
display's default resolution).
This is the default value. Each display has a preferred
Destination default
resolution, and when you choose this setting, the video
output port will use the display's default resolution.
640×360, 640×480, 960×540,
1024×768, 1280×720, 1280×960,
Choose a specific resolution for the output port. For an
1360×768, 1400×1050, 1920×1080,
explanation of the different choices, see Show a channel or
1920×1200, 2560×1440,
video source on the output port.
3840×2160 4K , 4096×2160 4K
5. Do one of the following:
a. Check Keep aspect ratio check to have the system maintain the correct aspect ratio. If the
aspect ratio is different between the source and the chosen display aspect ratio, black bars are
automatically inserted at the top and bottom or left and right sides of the video.
b. Uncheck Keep aspect ratio check to have the system stretch the source to fit the aspect ratio
of the display.
6. For channels, do the following:
a. Check Enable audio to include audio in the output. Leave this unchecked for no audio with the
video.
b. (Optional) For channels with audio enabled, adjust the volume. Enter a value from 0 to 100
percent in the Audio volume field.
c. (Optional) For channels with audio enabled, choose whether or not to display the audio meter
from the Audio meter drop down.
d. If displaying the audio meter, select horizontal or vertical from the Audio meter orientation
drop down to change the orientation of the displayed audio meter.
7. For input sources, do the following:
a. Select an Audio source from the drop down list.
b. (Optional) Adjust the volume. Enter a value from 0 to 100 percent in the Audio volume field.
146
Pearl-2 User Guide
Select the video output source using the touch screen
c. (Optional) Choose whether or not to display the audio meter from the Audio meter drop
down.
d. If displaying the audio meter, select horizontal or vertical from the Audio meter orientation
drop down to change the orientation of the displayed audio meter.
Decoupled audio sources appear as a single, stereo audio source. You cannot
select individually decoupled audio sources.
8. Click Apply.
The audio meter can be displayed even if you are not playing audio over the video output
port (i.e. even when the Enable audio check box is not checked).
Select the video output source using the touch screen
When local console is enabled, it's easy to change the video source that appears at the video output port using
the touch screen on Pearl-2. For video sources that have audio, you can enable and disable the audio as well.
Audio is enabled by default.
To configure the video output port parameters, use the Admin panel. See Video output ports.
To select the video output source using Pearl-2's touch screen:
1. From Pearl-2's touch screen, tap the gear icon to open the System settings screen. If the control icons
aren't showing, tap anywhere on the touch screen.
2. Tap the arrow icon in the lower-right corner of the screen to go to the second Settings page.
3. Tap Output ports and select an output port.
147
Pearl-2 User Guide
Preview the video output port
4. From the Output port's screen, select the source you want displayed on the video output port and tap
Apply.
Preview the video output port
You can preview the video signal that is shared over your video output port by looking at the preview window
at the bottom of the video output configuration page in the Admin panel.
The preview is updated every few seconds and always maintains the same aspect ratio as the
source it is copying. It doesn't reflect black bars, the audio meter or actual aspect ratio/resolution
on the display.
If the video output port is showing a source and that source has no signal, the source's no signal image is
displayed.
If the video output port is showing a channel and that channel is unavailable or has no signal, a no signal
message is shown for 2.5 seconds, then the display output is changed to a black screen.
148
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable the video output port
You can also preview video output ports using the Epiphan Live control interface. See Monitor
and setup the output port source and audio for more information.
Disable the video output port
You can use the Admin panel to disable a video output port so that even if a display is connected, nothing is
shown.
To disable video output ports using the Epiphan Live, see Monitor and setup the output port source and
audio.
To disable the video output port using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Output ports menu, click the output port (HDMI 1 or HDMI 2). The video output port
configuration page opens.
3. In the Source field, select none to disable the video output port and then click Apply.
Disable or enable audio and output port volume
If you're displaying a channel as the source for your video output port, audio for that channel is also encoded
and sent over the port by default. You can disable the audio on the output port using the Admin panel. You
149
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable or enable audio and output port volume
can also adjust the volume of the audio on the video output port using the Admin panel. Disabling the audio
on the video output port improves latency for the port.
If you're displaying a video input as the source for your video output port, you can select an audio source and
adjust the volume. Audio is taken from the video input source you've selected for the video output port by
default.
Decoupled audio sources appear as a single, stereo audio source. You cannot select individually
decoupled audio sources.
To disable the audio for a channel on the video output port and adjust the volume using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Output ports menu, click the output port (HDMI 1 or HDMI 2). The video output port
configuration page opens.
3. For channels, do the following:
a. Check Enable audio to include audio in the output. Leave this unchecked for no audio with the
video.
b. (Optional) For channels with audio enabled, adjust the volume. Enter a value from 0 to 100
percent in the Audio volume field.
c. (Optional) For channels with audio enabled, choose whether or not to display the audio meter
from the Audio meter drop down.
d. If displaying the audio meter, select horizontal or vertical from the Audio meter orientation
drop down to change the orientation of the displayed audio meter.
150
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable or enable audio and output port volume
4. For input sources, do the following:
a. Select an Audio source from the drop down list.
b. (Optional) Adjust the volume. Enter a value from 0 to 100 percent in the Audio volume field.
c. (Optional) Choose whether or not to display the audio meter from the Audio meter drop
down.
d. If displaying the audio meter, select horizontal or vertical from the Audio meter orientation
drop down to change the orientation of the displayed audio meter.
151
Pearl-2 User Guide
Display and reposition the audio VU meter
5. Click Apply.
You can also disable or enable audio on the video output port and adjust the volume using
Epiphan Live, see Monitor and setup the output port source and audio.
Display and reposition the audio VU meter
When sending a channel with audio over the video output port, you can choose whether or not to display the
audio VU meter using the Admin panel. You can also determine the position and orientation of the audio
meter.
Audio pass-through, adjusting the volume, and displaying an audio meter are only supported
when a channel is the selected video source.
To configure the audio meter for the video output port:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Output ports menu, click the output port (HDMI 1 or HDMI 2). The video output port
configuration page opens.
3. In the Audio meter field, choose an option.
Value
Description
do not display
No audio meter is displayed.
152
Pearl-2 User Guide
Rename a video output port
Value
Description
left top corner
Audio meter is displayed at the top left side of the display.
right top corner
Audio meter is displayed at the top right side of the display.
left bottom corner
right bottom corner
Audio meter is displayed at the bottom left side of the
display.
Audio meter is displayed at the bottom right side of the
display.
4. If you've selected a location for the audio meter, you can also select an orientation (horizontal or
vertical) in the Audio meter orientation field.
5. Click Apply.
Rename a video output port
Using the Admin panel or Epiphan Live, you can easily change the video output port default name from HDMI
1 and HDMI 2 to something more suitable. For example, Projector Output or Confidence Monitor.
To change a video output port name:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Output ports menu, click the video output port. The video output port configuration page
opens.
3. Click the video output port name at the top of the page and enter a new name using your keyboard.
The text turns red when it's selected for editing.
153
Pearl-2 User Guide
Mirror the video output port display
4. Press Enter using your keyboard to save the changes.
You must press Enter to save the new name. The Apply button does not save the source
name change.
Mirror the video output port display
You can use the Admin panel to mirror the original video source on the output port so that it appears reversed
on the connected display.
To mirror the video source on the video output port:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Output ports menu, click the output port you want to mirror. The video output port
configuration page opens.
3. Check Mirrored to flip the video source's orientation on the display port. Uncheck Mirrored to
display the video source in it's original orientation, then click Apply
154
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect an external keyboard
Connect an external keyboard
Instead of using the built-in virtual keyboard when using Pearl-2's touch screen, you can connect a USB
keyboard directly to any of the USB ports on Pearl-2. Simply enable the external keyboard feature using the
Admin panel.
You can also change the keyboard layout to any of the supported languages and toggle between languages if
you select multiple languages (using Ctrl+Shift or Ctrl+Alt).
l
American English (default)
l
Dutch
l
French
l
German
l
Italian
l
Netherlands
l
Norwegian (Bokmal)
l
Portuguese (European)
l
Spanish (Spain)
l
Swiss
l
Russian
When an external keyboard is connected to the USB port, the Lock Caps key on the external keyboard
controls both the external keyboard and the virtual keyboard.
To enable the external keyboard feature using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect an external keyboard.
155
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect a USB status light
2. From the Configuration menu, select External keyboard. The External keyboard configuration page
opens.
3. In the Keyboard application drop-down menu, select Touch screen.
4. (Optional) Check a different keyboard language layout or multiple language layouts. The default layout
is American English.
5. (Optional) Choose the keyboard key combination to toggle between keyboard layouts if multiple
languages are selected: Ctrl+Shift or Alt+Shift.
6. Click Apply.
What's next?
Connect your USB keyboard to any of the USB ports on Pearl-2.
Connect a USB status light
Pearl supports connection of an external USB status light to visually indicate the status of recording and
streaming. You can connect a single USB status light directly to any of the USB ports on Pearl-2.
The following USB status lights are supported:
156
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect a USB status light
l
Kuando BusyLight models: UC Alpha and UC Omega
l
Delcom Products USB HID single color and multi-color signal indicators
The status light is activated as soon as it is connected to a USB port on Pearl-2 and flashes once.
Table 30 Status light indicator
Light
Description
Solid off
Pearl-2 is not currently recording or streaming.
Solid on
Recording or streaming is in progress.
Rapid flashing (approximately five blinks per second)
commences five minutes before a scheduled event begins.
Flashing
Slow flashing (approximately two blinks per second) indicates
that an error occurred during recording or live streaming.
157
Pearl-2 User Guide
Feature add-ons
Feature add-ons
Pearl-2 offers add-on features so you can do even more with your system. Start from the base model of Pearl2 and add feature add-ons for extra functionality.
See Add-ons overview for details about the availability of add-ons for your system, as well as instructions to
purchase and install add-ons.
Where you see this symbol 4K in the guide, that means the feature or function applies only if you
have activated the 4K feature add-on.
Add-ons overview
Pearl-2 add-ons are listed in the Admin panel when you click Firmware upgrade from the Configuration menu.
A 4K feature add-on shows the name and description for each feature add-on that is available for purchase
and installation.
Add-ons must be purchased, installed, and activated before their features can be used. If you have already
purchased an add-on either on our site at epiphan.com/add-ons or have purchased the full version of Pearl-2,
you can go ahead and click Install purchased add-ons to activate the feature. A system reboot is required.
If you want to purchase an add-on, follow the process outlined below.
158
Pearl-2 User Guide
Feature add-ons
Shop now
You can go to the add-ons store page on the Epiphan website at epiphan.com/add-ons to purchase feature
add-ons or navigate there from the Admin panel.
From the Firmware Upgrade page in the Admin panel, click Shop now to go to the add-ons store page to
select and purchase available add-ons.
You can also click Purchase beside any feature add-on that's listed on the Firmware Upgrade page to go to
the epiphan.com website and purchase that specific feature.
Install purchased add-ons
The 4K feature add-on is required to enable that feature on Pearl-2. Your purchased add-on can be installed
and activated on only one Pearl-2 system. Pearl-2 Rackmount Twin requires a separate 4K add-on for each
Pearl-2 system.
To install purchased add-ons:
Click Install purchased add-ons from the Firmware Upgrade page to start the installation process. A system
reboot is necessary to activate add-ons. Click OK when prompted. If you click Cancel, Pearl-2 installs the addon but does not reboot. The add-on is not activated until Pearl-2 is rebooted.
159
Pearl-2 User Guide
Feature add-ons
Even if you have already purchased a feature, the Purchase button remains next to the feature
until you have activated the feature and the system is rebooted. To determine if a feature with a
Purchase button next to it has already been purchased, click Install purchased add-ons. If no
add-ons are ready to be activated and installed, a message appears.
After you've activated your feature add-ons and the system reboots, the Purchase button beside those
features is replaced by an Activated indicator.
Current list of add-ons
As of firmware 4.0.1, the 4K feature add-on is the only add on available for Pearl-2.
160
Pearl-2 User Guide
4K feature add-on
4K feature add-on
If you have the base model of Pearl-2, you can add the 4K feature add-on.
The base model of Pearl-2 supports:
l
Six simultaneous full HD video inputs (4 x HDMI and 2 x 3G-SDI)
l
6 x 1080p 30 fps encoding (or equivalent)
l
XLR and RCA audio inputs with built-in attenuation
The 4K feature add-on gives you access to the base model features, plus:
l
4 x 4K video inputs (2 x 4K HDMI and 2 X 4K SDI)
l
4 x 4K hardware scaling (4K down to full HD)
l
2 x 4K video outputs (HDMI)
l
1 x 4K video encoding
You can find more details on the add-on, along with installation instructions and the add-on itself, at
www.epiphan.com/add-ons.
Activating your 4K add-on might not be necessary, depending on the version of Pearl-2 you
purchased. As the first Feature Add-on, the 4K add-on was included automatically in some
systems. If you purchased the full version of Pearl-2 or an early copy with firmware 4.0.0, the 4K
add-on was included with your purchase and is automatically activated, so in those cases no
action is required.
About 4K on Pearl-2
Pearl-2 supports resolutions from low-res SD to 4K, which means that you can use Pearl-2 to capture both DCI
4K and 4K UHD digital signals. You need the 4K feature add-on to access this feature, see Add-ons overview.
DCI 4K and 4K UHD are just different definitions of a 4K resolution. 4K UHD (3840×2160) is the standard 4K
resolution available on televisions and other common display screens. The 4K resolution of 4096×2160 is
referred to as Digital Cinema Initiatives (DCI) 4K, and is the resolution used almost exclusively for cinema-scale
film production. It is rare to find this resolution outside of a cinematic context. Pearl-2 is capable of
supporting input and output at either definition with the Feature add-ons.
161
Pearl-2 User Guide
4K feature add-on
162
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuration presets
Configuration presets
Configuration presets are the perfect solution for backing up your system configuration and if you have
changing configuration requirements for your Pearl-2 or are managing multiple systems and you want them
to have similar configurations.
Topics include:
l
About configuration presets
l
Configuration preset considerations
l
Configuration groups
l
The Factory default configuration preset and Factory reset
l
Create a configuration preset
l
Apply a configuration preset using the Admin panel
l
Apply a configuration preset using the touch screen
l
Export and import configuration presets
l
Update a configuration preset
l
Delete a configuration preset
About configuration presets
Configuration presets are groups of settings that get applied to the system, leaving other important settings
intact. They make it easy to manage multiple Pearl-2 systems and shared spaces, like a studio, a breeze to set
up and maintain a consistent setup each time you go to use your Pearl-2.
Configuration presets let you quickly apply settings to your Pearl-2 so you can reconfigure it on the fly and get
a consistent set up each time. You can even download a configuration preset and upload it to other Pearl-2
systems.
The system's settings are divided into the following configuration groups. You can choose to include any
number and combination of configuration groups in a preset and create as many different configuration
presets as you need. For a complete list of individual settings that are included in each configuration group,
see About configuration presets.
System
Inputs
Automatic file
uploads
163
Pearl-2 User Guide
About configuration presets
Network
Channels
EDID
Output ports
Touch screen
CMS
Epiphan Cloud
You can create and apply any saved configuration preset from the Configuration menu when you select
Maintenance using the Admin panel. A special Factory default configuration preset, which cannot be
erased, is included in the list of configuration presets. Use that to return to the factory setup without
destructively erasing any saved recordings or media files you've uploaded.
It's important to note that configuration presets are applied over existing settings. They affect only the
settings groups included in the preset. All other settings are unaffected. Read the Configuration preset
considerations section carefully to understand caveats around using configuration presets.
Example of presets in action
You could upload custom background images to Pearl-2 in advance of a conference and create custom
channel configuration presets for several different keynote speakers, each with a different setup, and then
apply them later when you need them.
For example, you could create two configuration presets called Session 1 and Session 2. Each session could
include things like custom backgrounds, images and logos, channels and layouts, metadata, streaming
settings, network settings, and automatic file upload (AFU) locations. Then download those presets to your
local computer so you can upload them to your entire fleet of Pearl-2 systems.
Channel configuration includes any applied backgrounds and image files. If these files aren't
present when the configuration preset is saved, the save function will fail. Be careful when
deleting background images and logo files.
At the conference, simply apply the configuration preset that you need for the appropriate session using
either the Admin panel or the touch screen on Pearl-2. When applying the configuration preset, all other
preset groups remain unchanged. The preset only affects channels and their configuration.
164
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuration preset considerations
Session 1 preset
Session 1 presenter data
plus the conference IP
and background image
address
Session 2 presenter data
plus the conference IP
and background image
address
Session 2 preset
After applying a configuration preset, recorded files from the previous session remain present on the system.
If AFU is configured, the recorded files continue to upload even after the new configuration preset is applied
(if AFU is not yet complete), but the channels reflect the newly loaded session's background file name and
presenter name.
Configuration preset considerations
There are important considerations that you should know before you start using configuration presets,
including:
l
Access to presets and privacy considerations
l
The potential to lock the touch screen
l
Channel and recorder index number behavior
l
Recording and streaming states
l
Recorded files in channels and recorders
l
Deleting channels and recorders
l
Orphaned Kaltura resource registrations and duplicate resources
165
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuration preset considerations
Access to presets and privacy considerations
l
Recorded files are not removed when you apply a configuration preset. Any user with access to Pearl-2
has access to all the saved recordings, channel layouts, etc that are associated with an applied
configuration preset.
l
Configuration presets can be overwritten and deleted without a password. Users who are logged in to
the Admin panel can remove or change an existing configuration preset.
l
Applying a configuration presets does not clear the settings from groups that aren't a part of the
preset, which means user information is not private.
l
Media and recorded files can be deleted, affecting more than just the currently applied configuration
preset. Users can erase uploaded media or recordings that belong to other users.
Media files that you've uploaded to Pearl-2 (logos, background images, etc) are included in the
configuration preset and must be present on the system when creating a preset that includes the
Channels group; otherwise, a failure is reported.
Locking out the touch screen
The touch screen configuration group includes all the security settings for the touch screen. It's possible to
apply a preset that effectively locks out all further use of the touch screen. If this happens, use the Admin
panel to re-enable the touch screen, see Configure the touch screen.
Channel and recorder index number behavior
Each channel and recorder has an index number. The first channel created on a system is channel 1,
subsequently channel 2, 3, 4, etc. Recorders are also created starting at index 1 with numbers incrementing as
new recorders are created. The channel (or recorder) index number is found to the left of the channel or
recorder name in the Admin panel:
166
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuration preset considerations
Configuration presets that contain the channels configuration group specify the channels in the preset by
their index number. This means if you have channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 when you save your preset, applying that
preset will overwrite the configuration of your current channels with indexes 1, 2, 3 and 4. If prior to applying
that preset you also had channels with indexes 5 and 6, the configuration settings for those two channels are
erased when the preset is applied (because the preset only has 4 channels).
There are three areas where channel (and recorder) index numbers affect what happens when applying
configuration presets. Read Recording and streaming statesRecorded files in channels and recorders and
Deleting channels and recordings for more information.
Recording and streaming states
The Configuration groups section of this chapter shows that each channel and recorder's recording and
streaming state is included in the channels configuration group. This means that if a channel is streaming or
a channel (or recorder) is recording at the time you create a configuration preset, it will immediately start
recording (or streaming) when you apply that preset. Similarly, if a configuration preset is saved when
channels or recorders are not recording (or streaming), those channels and recorders will not be recording
(streaming) when the preset is applied.
This means a channel or recorder may stop recording or streaming as a result of applying the
preset.
For example, when applying a preset with channel 3 set to record (the same example applies for streaming):
l
If channel 3 exists prior to applying the preset and is already recording, the file will continue recording
uninterrupted unless the recording file type is different in the preset (in which case a new file is started).
l
If channel 3 exists prior to applying the preset and is not already recording, it immediately begins
recording.
l
If no channel with index 3 exists prior to applying the preset, the channel is created and it immediately
begins recording.
Recorded files in channels and recorders
Channels and recorders keep a list of files recorded in their Recordings section of the Admin panel. These
files remain on the system even if the channel or recorder configuration is changed or removed as a result of
applying a configuration preset.
For example, prior to applying your configuration preset, you have channels with indexes 1, 2 and 3; each of
these has five recording files. When you apply a configuration preset that has channels with index 1 and 2
only, you'll notice those channels each still have the same 5 recording files. Channel with index 3 is no longer
present, but the files are not lost!
167
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuration preset considerations
Overwritten channel files are still available. To access and download/delete these recorded files, enter the
following into the address bar:
http://<deviceIP>/admin/channelN/archive or
http://<deviceIP>/admin/recorderN/archive, where N is the index of the removed channel/recorder.
For example, if a Channel with index 3 is no longer present, its corresponding files can be accessed by
entering the following into the address bar:
http://192.168.0.183/admin/channel3/archive
If you now create a new channel with index 3 (or load a preset that contains a channel with index 3), you'll find
it starts with five recorded files in the Recordings section. These are the same recorded files that existed at
the start of this example.
Furthermore, if you delete any of the recordings, you are deleting the only instance of those files. Using our
previous example, if you delete one of the five recordings from channel index 1, you'll find that even after
applying different presets channel 1 will have only four recorded files.
Deleting channels and recordings
Recorded files are stored on the system based on their channel or recorder number. All files saved for channel
index 1 are in one folder, and all files for recorder index 2 are in another. When you delete a channel (or
recorder), you permanently delete all recordings for that channel (or recorder) even if those recordings were
made while a different preset is applied.
Applying a configuration preset with a different set of channels or recorders is not the same as
deleting a channel.
When deleting a channel or recorder that has recorded files, the Admin panel warns you of other
configuration presets that use the same channel or recorder index numbers. When you see this prompt, we
recommend you take a moment to look through the Recordings list to make sure you're OK to proceed with
permanently deleting all the recorded files.
168
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configuration groups
Orphaned Kaltura resource registrations and duplicate resources
Returning Pearl-2 to the factory defaults using the factory default configuration preset or performing a
factory reset does not delete the registered resource instance in Kaltura CMS. In that case, you can reregister
your Pearl-2 using the same resource name and take over for the resource instance that is still registered in
Kaltura, see Reassign a registered resource.
If you apply a configuration preset to set up a replacement Pearl-2 with the settings from a Pearl-2 that is
currently registered with Kaltura, the replacement Pearl-2 assumes the identity of the registered resource.
However, you risk having two active Pearl-2 resources with the same identity, which can effect recording and
the content that's uploaded to Kaltura for scheduled events.
To remove the risk of having two active devices with the same registered resource identity in Kaltura, we
recommend powering down one of the Pearl-2 resources, then disconnect it from the network and consider
performing a factory reset or applying the factory default configuration preset.
Configuration groups
The following table describes what settings are saved with each configuration group.
Table 31 Configuration group definitions
Group Name Symbol
Settings included in the configuration group
Date and time settings, serial port settings, remote support settings, custom
System
disk check schedule, access passwords, deny/allow lists and LDAP configuration
settings.
Network
Network settings.
169
Pearl-2 User Guide
Group Name Symbol
Inputs
EDID
The Factory default configuration preset and Factory
reset
Settings included in the configuration group
All audio and video source configuration settings (including no signal images)
except EDID settings, which are in their own group.
EDID settings for sources. Applying configuration presets with this group
automatically applies the included EDIDs. This process can take a while.
All channel configuration data and current recording state, all layouts, images
Channels
used in layouts, streaming state, all recorder configuration data and current
recording state, individual and global UPnP settings.
Automatic file upload type, parameters and schedules.
AFU
SFTP/SCP private keys are included (in encrypted format) in the automatic file
upload preset.
CMS
Epiphan
Cloud
Include CMS settings for integrations (i.e. Kaltura and Panopto).
Epiphan Cloud pairing and encoder selection information.
Touch screen
Permitted touch screen use settings.
Output ports
All configuration settings for the output ports.
The Factory default configuration preset and Factory reset
Administrators can apply the default factory configuration preset to Pearl-2, which resets most of the settings
in each of the main configuration groups. Applying the factory default configuration preset is similar to a
factory reset, but a Factory reset is more invasive. This table describes the differences.
170
The Factory default configuration preset and Factory
Pearl-2 User Guide
reset
Table 32 Factory default configuration preset vs a factory reset
Item
Factory default
configuration preset
Deletes all created channels
Factory reset function
ü
ü
Deletes all recorded files in channels
Deletes all created recorders
ü
ü
ü
ü
Deletes all recorded files in recorders
Resets network configuration
ü
ü
Resets touch screen configuration
ü
ü
Resets user passwords
ü
ü
ü
Deletes all created configuration presets
Removes Kaltura and Panopto CMS
registration information
Removes records for all scheduled and
completed CMS events
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Deletes all branding files
Resets all Source settings
ü
ü
Resets EDID to factory
ü
ü
Deletes all SCP/SFTP identities
ü
ü
Deletes all LDAP settings
ü
ü
Deletes all Automatic file upload settings
ü
ü
To apply the factory default configuration preset, you can Apply a configuration preset using the Admin panel
or Apply a configuration preset using the touch screen and select the Factory default configuration preset
using either of these procedures. A reboot is required.
To do a factory reset, see Perform a factory reset.
Operators who are assigned certain administrative-level privileges can apply the Factory default configuration
preset and perform a factory reset, see Assign administrator privileges to operators.
171
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create a configuration preset
Returning Pearl-2 to the factory defaults or performing a factory reset does not delete the
registered resource instance in Kaltura CMS. You can reregister your Pearl-2 using the same
resource name and take over for the resource instance that is still registered in Kaltura, see
Reassign a registered resource.
Create a configuration preset
You can create as many configuration presets as you need; however, there's a limit to the amount of space
available for configuration presets. A maximum of 256 MB is available for configuration presets and the
maximum size of a single configuration preset is 128 MB.
Before creating and using a configuration preset, read Configuration preset considerations.
For each configuration preset you create, you get to name the preset and choose which groups of settings to
include. See Configuration groups for which settings are included in each group.
After you're finished configuring your Pearl-2, it's good practice to save a full backup with all groups selected
so that you can restore your full configuration at a later date.
Configuration presets that include network or system settings require a system reboot when applied.
Important considerations
l
If you try to save a configuration preset but one or more of the related image files is missing, an error
message is displayed. You'll be unable to save the preset until the missing files are restored or the
layouts referencing the missing files are modified to remove the bad references.
l
If you try to save a configuration preset but there isn't enough space, an error message is
displayed. You'll need to delete some presets before proceeding.
To create a configuration preset:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Maintenance . The maintenance page opens.
3. In the Configuration presets section, enter a name for your configuration preset in the Name field.
172
Pearl-2 User Guide
Apply a configuration preset using the Admin panel
4. Check the configuration groups you want to include in the preset. For a full system backup, select all
groups.
5. Click Save. Your configuration preset appears in the list.
What's next?
You can export the configuration preset to your admin computer and then import it to another Pearl-2, see
Export and import configuration presets, and you can Apply a configuration preset using the Admin panel
Apply a configuration preset using the Admin panel
When you apply a configuration preset, the system settings for all included configuration groups are updated.
Other settings on the system are not affected. For example if you apply a preset that includes the
configuration groups channels and automatic file upload, your network settings, passwords, time server,
173
Pearl-2 User Guide
Apply a configuration preset using the Admin panel
source configurations, etc are not modified. Similarly, if you apply a configuration preset that has only
network settings included, only the network settings change.
If you apply a preset that has the network or system configuration group, a reboot is required. If you apply
a preset that has the EDID configuration group, the system may appear unresponsive for a short time while it
applies these EDIDs to the video grabbers.
You can verify which configuration groups are included in a preset by looking at the list to the right of the
configuration preset name. The term 'all' means all groups are included. Otherwise groups are listed
individually.
You may apply multiple presets one after another. If you apply two (or more) configuration
presets that include a particular configuration group, the settings (for that group) from the last
applied preset are the active settings. In short, last in wins.
To apply a configuration preset using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Maintenance. The maintenance page opens.
3. In the Configuration presets section, click the Apply button next to the configuration preset you
want to apply. Click OK when prompted. Pearl-2 reboots automatically if the configuration preset
includes the network or system configuration groups.
174
Pearl-2 User Guide
Apply a configuration preset using the touch screen
Apply a configuration preset using the touch screen
You can use Pearl-2's touch screen to apply configuration presets. Configuration presets that only contain the
network configuration group can also be applied using an alternative method, which is also described in this
procedure.
If you apply a preset that has the EDID configuration group, the system may appear unresponsive for a short
time while it applies these EDIDs to the video grabbers.
To apply a configuration preset using the touch screen:
1. Tap the gear icon to open the System settings screen. If the control icons aren't showing, tap anywhere
on the touch screen.
2. Tap Configuration Presets. A list of all the saved presets appears. The configuration preset to reset
Pearl-2 to the Factory defaults is always listed first.
3. Use the arrows at the bottom of the page to navigate through the list and tap the name of the preset
you want to apply.
175
Pearl-2 User Guide
Export and import configuration presets
4. Click OK when prompted to apply the configuration preset. If the configuration preset includes the
network or system configuration groups, a reboot is required.
Alternatively, you can apply a configuration preset from the Settings when you select Network and go to the
second page of Network options. Then tap Network Presets to display the list of saved configuration
presets. Only configuration presets that contain the network configuration group are listed when you use this
method.
Export and import configuration presets
You can download configuration presets to your local computer, then upload and apply the preset to other
Pearl-2 systems or save the configuration preset as a backup of your current configuration. Either way, it's a
simple two-step process to download the preset from one system and upload it to another.
176
Pearl-2 User Guide
Export and import configuration presets
You cannot download/upload configuration presets using the local console on Pearl-2. Use the
web-based Admin panel instead.
Before you begin
Read Configuration preset considerations.
Download a configuration preset
To download or export a configuration preset:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, Click Maintenance . The maintenance page opens.
3. In the Configuration presets section, click the Download button next to the configuration preset
you want to export. The configuration preset file (with extension .preset) is saved to your admin
workstation (in your browser's download folder).
Import a configuration preset
To import a configuration a preset:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
177
Pearl-2 User Guide
Update a configuration preset
2. From the Configuration menu, click Maintenance. The maintenance page opens.
3. In the Import configuration preset section, click Choose file and browse to select the file you want
to upload (with the extension .preset), then click OK.
4. Click Import.
5. If your system already has a configuration preset with the same name as the one you're loading, a
warning is shown. Click OK to overwrite the existing preset or Cancel to cancel the upload.
What's next
After you upload a configuration preset file, you must apply the configuration preset to Pearl-2. To apply the
configuration preset, see Apply a configuration preset using the Admin panel or Apply a configuration preset
using the touch screen.
Update a configuration preset
To update a configuration preset and add or remove different configuration groups using the Admin panel,
you simply creating a new configuration preset with the same name so that it overwrites the existing one.
To update a configuration preset:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Maintenance . The maintenance page opens. All existing
configuration presets are listed in the Configuration presets section.
178
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete a configuration preset
3. Copy the name of the preset you want into the Name field and select the configuration groups to
include, then click Save.
4. Click OK when prompted to overwrite the existing configuration preset with the new one.
Delete a configuration preset
You can delete all configuration presets at once by doing a factory reset, or you can delete individual
configuration presets from the Maintenance page. You cannot delete the Factory default configuration
preset.
To delete a configuration preset:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Maintenance. The maintenance page opens.
3. Click Delete beside the configuration preset that you want to delete, and then click OK when
prompted.
179
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete a configuration preset
180
Pearl-2 User Guide
User administration
User administration
Pearl-2 has three configured users: admin, operator, and viewer. By default, none of these users have
passwords assigned. For higher security, we recommend setting admin, operator and viewer-level passwords
on Pearl-2.
Topics include:
l
User types and privileges
l
Assign administrator privileges to operators
l
Set or change user passwords
l
Remove user passwords
l
Overcome lost passwords
l
Configure LDAP user authentication
l
Change the logged-in user
l
Restrict viewers by IP address
User types and privileges
There are three Pearl-2 user levels:
l
Administrator
l
Operator
l
Viewer
No password is assigned to these user levels by default and you cannot change the default user names or
disable these user levels. When you log in to Pearl-2, you must log in as one of these three user levels. Private
profiles with individually set passwords are not used.
You can set an access password for each user level using the Admin panel.
For higher security, we recommend assigning passwords to at least the Administrator and
Operator levels because those have access to the Admin panel and can reconfigure Pearl-2, see
Set or change user passwords.
When logged in to the Admin panel, the user level is displayed at the top right corner of the screen.
181
Pearl-2 User Guide
User types and privileges
Administrator
The admin account is used for all system configuration and has full access to all configuration features with
full access to the web-based Admin panel, local console, and Pearl-2 remote login access. The default user
name used to log in to Pearl-2 is admin.
Operator
The operator account allows users limited Pearl-2 configuration control with limited access to the web-based
Admin panel, local console, and Pearl-2 remote login access. The default user name used to log in to Pearl-2 is
operator.
Operators can to do the following:
l
Configure inputs
l
Control recordings (start and stop)
l
Rename, download and delete recordings
l
Switch layouts while live streaming
l
Perform network diagnostics
If an operator does not have the privileges to apply a particular configuration in the Admin panel, the Apply
button appears grayed-out in color and is not clickable. Administrators can grant operators permission to
perform some administrator tasks, see Assign administrator privileges to operators.
182
Pearl-2 User Guide
User types and privileges
Viewer
The viewer account is for all users who are permitted to view the streamed channels. The default user name
used to log in to Pearl-2 is viewer. If no password is assigned, then viewers are not prompted for a user name
and password to view a channel. The viewer user name and password prompt appears only if a viewer
password is set.
In addition to the global viewer account, each channel can set a viewer password that overrides the global
value, see Restrict viewer access to channel streams.
User privileges
The following table outlines the default privileges for each user level. For administrator-level privileges that
can be assign to operators, see Assign administrator privileges to operators.
Table 33 User privileges in the Admin panel
Action or Menu Option
View Channel Output
viewer
operator
admin
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Channel Operations
View Channel Configuration
Rename a Channel
ü
Configure Stream Channel
ü
Configure Stream Sources
ü
183
Pearl-2 User Guide
Action or Menu Option
User types and privileges
viewer
operator
admin
Publish a Stream
ü
Configure Channel Metadata
ü
ü
Switch Layouts while Streaming/Recording
Add, Duplicate, Configure and Delete
ü
ü
Recorders
Start the Stream Recorder
ü
ü
Stop the Stream Recorder
ü
ü
View Recorded Files List
ü
ü
Rename Recorded Files
ü
ü
Download Recorded Files
ü
ü
Delete Recorded Files
ü
ü
ü
ü
Input Source Operations
View Input Source Configuration
ü
Rename Input
Configure Input
ü
ü
View Input Snapshot
ü
ü
Network & security
ü
Configure static IP address
Configure DHCP (including Option 81) and
ü
DDNS
Change HTTP/HTTPS port values
ü
Configure 802.1x
ü
Configure HTTPS
ü
CMS Operations
Start/stop scheduled events (touch screen)
ü
ü
ü
184
Pearl-2 User Guide
Action or Menu Option
Create ad hoc events (touch screen)
User types and privileges
viewer
operator
admin
ü
ü
ü
Enable CMS and register
ü
Disable CMS or deregister
ü
Configure CMS settings and default event
ü
parameters
Start/stop scheduled events (Admin panel)
ü
ü
Create ad hoc events (Admin panel)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
View the Events page
System Configuration Operations
View System Configuration
Configure Automatic File Upload (AFU)
ü
Select External USB Drive Behavior
ü
Cancel USB file transfers
ü
ü
Configure FTP Server
ü
Configure UPnP Sharing
ü
Configure Network Address
ü
Configure Date and Time preferences
ü
Set or Change User Passwords
ü
Configure the Touch Screen
ü
Configure Serial Port Flow Control
ü
Upload Media
ü
Select Branding Template
ü
Enable Remote Support
ü
Backup Device Configuration
ü
185
Pearl-2 User Guide
Action or Menu Option
Assign administrator privileges to operators
viewer
operator
admin
Restore Device Configuration
ü
Restore Factory Configuration
ü
Reboot Device (via Admin panel)
ü
Shutdown Device (via Admin panel)
ü
Configure Time Until Next Disk Check
ü
Perform Disk Check
ü
View Disk Information
ü
ü
Enable/disable Epiphan Cloud feature
ü
Upgrade Firmware
ü
ü
ü
Bandwidth test
ü
ü
Connectivity status
ü
ü
Domain name resolution
ü
ü
Ping
ü
ü
Probe
ü
ü
Trace route
ü
ü
View System Information
Network Diagnostics
Assign administrator privileges to operators
Pearl-2 administrators can assign additional administrative-level privileges to operators from the Security
menu in the Admin panel. The following table lists the available options and their associated privileges.
186
Pearl-2 User Guide
Assign administrator privileges to operators
Table 34 Options with additional operator privileges
Option
Operator admin functions
Add, remove, and rename a channel
Configure channel encoder settings
Create and configure custom layouts for a channel
Channel configuration
Configure, remove, rename, and publish a stream for a
channel
Configure channel metadata
Add, duplicate, configure, and delete recorders
Upload, download, and delete media files
Input configuration
Add and rename video and audio inputs
Configure network address
Configure 802.1x and manage CA certificates
Network configuration
Enable and disable DHCP Option 81
Configure Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
Reboot Pearl-2
Configuration presets control1
Create, delete, and apply configuration presets
187
Pearl-2 User Guide
Option
Assign administrator privileges to operators
Operator admin functions
Configure the video output settings
Enable CMS and register
Disable CMS or deregister
Configure CMS settings and default event parameters
Configure Automatic File Upload (AFU)
Select external USB drive behavior
System configuration
Configure Pearl-2 as an FTP server
Configure UPnP sharing
Configure the date and time preferences
Configure the touch screen
Configure the serial port flow control
Enable/disable AV Studio feature for remote control, pairing,
and selecting channels
Video output configuration
Upgrade firmware
Apply configuration presets2
Enable remote support
Reboot device (via Admin panel)
Maintenance configuration
Shutdown device (via Admin panel)
Restore factory configuration
Configure the device name, location, and description
Perform disk check
Config time until next disk check
188
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set or change user passwords
1
Only configuration presets that don't include the System group are allowed.
2
Allow operators to apply configuration presets that include the System group, as well as apply the factory
default configuration preset.
To assign administrative privileges to operators:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Security. The Security configuration page opens.
3. Under Additional operator privileges, check the options to assign those administrator privileges to
operators, and then click Apply.
Set or change user passwords
The admin, operator and viewer-level users have no assigned password by default. For higher security, we
recommend that you assign a password for at least the admin and operator-level viewers as soon as possible.
Admin and operator-level users have access to the Admin panel to control Pearl-2.
If the admin password is defined and the operator password is undefined, by default the operator
must use the admin password.
Passwords are case sensitive and can use all alphanumeric keys in the ASCII range. Your password can be up to
255 characters long, but should not include any spaces. Contact your system administrator for your
organization’s specific password requirements.
189
Pearl-2 User Guide
Remove user passwords
In addition to setting global passwords for viewers, you can also set access passwords and IP restrictions on a
per channel basis from the channel's Streaming page, see Restrict viewers by IP address.
If you lose the admin password, see Overcome lost passwords.
Setting a user’s password causes the user to be logged out. Be ready to log back in with the new
admin password or have operators and viewers log in with the appropriate new password.
Viewers may need to refresh their browser window or press play in their media player.
Changing the admin password while live streaming disrupts the view of the stream for viewer-level
users. Complete any admin password changes when there is no live stream in progress.
To set a user password:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Security. The Security configuration page opens.
3. Highlight and delete the current password for your selected user. Eight dots mask the password
regardless of the password's actual length (and appears even if no password is set).
4. Highlight and delete the confirmation password for the selected user.
5. Select the user’s password field and type a new password for the user. The new password must have
between 1-255 alphanumeric characters or special characters with no spaces. Passwords are case
sensitive.
6. Select the user’s password confirmation field and confirm the new password.
7. Click Apply.
8. If you were logged in as the user whose password you just changed, you are logged out and must log
back in with the new password. If you added or changed the viewer’s password, all viewer’s stream will
pause until they log in with the new password.
You can specify multiple account passwords before clicking Apply.
Remove user passwords
You can remove passwords for one or more of the user levels using the Admin panel. If you don’t remember
the admin password, refer to the section Overcome lost passwords. Note that viewer passwords can be set on
a per-channel basis.
190
Pearl-2 User Guide
Overcome lost passwords
Clearing a user’s password will cause that user to be logged out. Be ready to log back in with the
new admin password. If viewers are watching the broadcast when the viewer password is cleared
they will be logged out. Viewers may need to refresh their browser window or press play in their
media player to trigger the login prompt.
To clear a user’s password:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Security. The Security configuration page opens.
3. Highlight and delete the current password for the selected user level. Eight dots mask the password
regardless of the password's actual length (and appears even if no password is set).
4. Highlight and delete the confirmation password for the selected user, then click Apply.
5. If you were logged in as the user whose password you just cleared, you are logged out and must log
back in without a password. If you cleared the viewer’s password, all viewer streams will pause until
they log in without a password.
To clear a user’s password on a specific channel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channel menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The channel's Streaming configuration
page opens.
3. From the Access control section, do one of the following:
a. Clear the viewer password field.
b. Select Use global settings from the access control drop down.
4. Click Apply.
Overcome lost passwords
If you have lost the password for the operator or viewer account, you can log in to the Admin panel and reset
the password using the procedure described in Set or change user passwords.
If you have lost the admin password and you have remote support enabled on the system, contact Epiphan
Support to request a remote password reset. If remote support is disabled, you must return the system
to Epiphan for password recovery. Contact Epiphan Support.
Alternatively, you can regain access to Pearl-2 if you apply the factory default configuration preset using the
touch screen, Apply a configuration preset using the touch screen. The factory default configuration will
change the current settings on Pearl-2, see The Factory default configuration preset and Factory reset.
191
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure LDAP user authentication
Configure LDAP user authentication
You can use the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) to authenticate users. Specify user roles by
using group DNs for users who log in as an Administrator, Operator, or as a Viewer.
The system has only one admin user and one operator. LDAP users must log in as either an admin or an
operator and do not have their own private profiles. Any LDAP users with the name admin, operator, or
viewer are ignored and the local accounts are used instead.
When enabled, LDAP authentication is an alternative to the regular system user names and passwords. You
may still login as admin, operator or viewer using the passwords for those accounts.
LDAP replaces the local viewer account instead of working side-by-side with it when LDAP is
enabled and the viewer account has no password (either there is no global viewer password
configured or the channel overrides the global password with a blank password). In this case, the
viewer must authenticate with LDAP and cannot use the default viewer account with a blank
password to log in.
For security reasons, you should configure passwords for the local accounts. See Configure
LDAP user authentication.
These instructions assume you have a pre-configured LDAP server. The server must support anonymous
binding or have a special bind account with search access privileges. Note that Active Directory does not
support anonymous binding. LDAP referrals, restrictions and failovers are not supported.
To configure LDAP authentication:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Security. The Security configuration page opens.
3. In the LDAP authentication section, check Enable LDAP authentication. Uncheck the check box
to disable LDAP authentication.
192
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure LDAP user authentication
4. In the Server address[:port] field, enter the server IP address and (optional) port for your
LDAP server. For example, 192.168.1.101:389.
5. In the Connection encryption drop-down, choose the type of encryption used by your LDAP server
(if any is used).
Connection
encryption
Description/Default port used
No Encryption
No encryption is used to connect to the LDAP server. The default port is 389.
SSL
SSL encryption is used to connect to the LDAP server. The default port is 636.
TLS/STARTTLS
The connection is initially unencrypted then upgraded to TLS encryption is
used. The default port is 389.
6. In the Bind DN and Bind password fields, specify the fully qualified DN and password for LDAP bind.
These fields are only needed if your LDAP server does not support anonymous binding.
7. In the Base DN field, specify the baseObject to search for entries. The system will search this object
and the whole subtree starting at the base DN.
8. (Optional) By default the search attribute is uid, which is suitable for a unix environment. You can
specify a different value in the Search attribute field, if needed. For Active Directory environments,
specify userPrincipalName. The value of this attribute must be unique in the Base DN.
9. In the Administrators (group DN) field, specify the distinguished name of the group users must be
part of to be logged in as the administrator. Users must have the member or unqueMember attribute
for the specified group to be granted Administrator access.
If left blank, LDAP is not supported for Administrators (but can still be used for Operators and Viewers).
10. In the Operators (group DN) field, specify the distinguished name of the group users must be part of
to be logged in as the operator. Users must have the member or unqueMember attribute for the
specified group to be granted Operator access.
If left blank, LDAP is not supported for Operators (but can still be used for Administrators and Viewers).
193
Pearl-2 User Guide
Change the logged-in user
11. In the Viewers (group DN) field, specify the distinguished name of the group users must be part of to
be logged in as a viewer. Users must have the member or unqueMember attribute for the specified
group to be granted Viewer access.
If left blank, LDAP is not supported for Viewers (but can still be used for Administrators and Operators).
12. Click Apply.
13. Reboot Pearl-2. From the Configuration menu, select Maintenance and click Reboot Now on the
maintenance page.
14. After the system has finished rebooting, log back in to the Admin panel as admin and verify that all
changes were applied.
When a user of the LDAP server next visits the admin or viewer page for the system, the system prompts for
use the username and password. For ActiveDirectory servers, the user needs to enter his fully qualified
username (i.e. [email protected]) in addition to his LDAP password.
Users are required to authenticate once to the system and one time per channel they view.
Therefore users see a prompt to log in to the system (the system name is shown) and a second
time to log in to the channel (the channel name is shown).
Change the logged-in user
After you log in to the Admin panel as an Administrator or Operator, your browser remembers this
configuration and automatically logs you in using the same user account the next time you log in to Pearl-2.
To log in using a different user account:
1. In the Admin panel, click the logout icon at the top right corner of the screen. A new login screen
appears.
Some browsers may require you to click twice before the you are logged out.
2. Enter the credentials that you want to use to log in to the Admin panel.
194
Pearl-2 User Guide
Restrict viewers by IP address
Restrict viewers by IP address
Pearl-2 permits you to restrict which computers can access broadcasts by building a list of allowed and denied
IP addresses. You can do this at a global level for the system and can also override these settings on a perchannel basis. Both global and per-channel configuration procedures are described.
The following table describes what happens when an IP address is added to the allowed and denied IP address
lists.
Item
Description
Users connecting from addresses in this list are permitted to view broadcasts from the
system, provided their IP address is not in the Deny IP’s list.
Allow IP's
To allow all except IP addresses in the deny list, if any, leave the field blank.
You can use the Allow list by itself, or in conjunction with the Deny IP’s list as an exception
to a rule in the allow list.
Users connecting from addresses in this list are not allowed to view broadcasts from the
system, unless their IP address is in the Allow IP’s list. If a specific IP address is in both lists,
Deny IP's
access to the stream is denied.
You can use the Deny list by itself, or in conjunction with the Allow IP’s list as an exception
to a rule in the allow list.
If your viewer account has a password, your viewers must connect to the system from a computer (or
gateway) with a permitted IP address and must also supply the user name (viewer) and password before they
can view the broadcast.
To restrict access by IP address, you need to know the IP addresses or range of addresses for your viewers. By
default, all IP addresses are allowed to connect to the broadcast.
If a user attempts to connect to the stream from a disallowed IP address, access is denied. If there's an
attempt to connect using a web browser, the message "IP address rejected" is displayed.
Table 35 IP Based Restriction Options
If you’re not familiar with creating allow/deny lists, see IP restriction examples.
IP address restriction is valid for the viewer only and does not affect the Admin panel or the
mobile configuration interface.
To restrict viewer access to watch streams for all channels by their IP address:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
195
Pearl-2 User Guide
IP restriction examples
2. From the Configuration menu, select Security. The Security configuration page opens.
3. Enter the allowed IP addresses or address ranges in the Allow IP’s field and enter denied IP addresses
or address ranges in the Deny IP's field. Separate addresses with a comma. To specify a range, use a
hyphen (-). Optional spaces improve readability.
4. Click Apply.
To restrict viewer access to watch streams on a specific channel by their IP address:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The channel's streaming configuration
page opens.
3. From the Stream access control drop-down, select Use these Settings to enable local password
and Allow/Deny IP lists are enabled.
4. (Optional) Enter a password for the viewer in the Viewer Password field.
5. Enter the allowed IP addresses or address ranges in the Allow IP’s field and enter denied IP addresses
or address ranges in the Deny IP's field. Separate addresses with a comma. To specify a range, use a
hyphen (-). Optional spaces improve readability.
6. Click Apply.
IP restriction examples
The following table lists some example allow lists.
Table 36 Example allow lists
Example
Description
The simplest allow/deny list is to use the list of known IP addresses to craft a
list of allowed IP addresses. All other addresses are denied access to the
broadcast.
For example if your system is accessible on your local area network (LAN) and
Allow list with distinct IP
you want to make sure only the CEO’s specific desktop, laptop and tablet
addresses
computers (with IP Addresses 192.168.1.50, 192.168.1.51, and
192.165.1.75, respectively) can connect to the broadcast, construct the
following allow list:
Allow: 192.168.1.50, 192.168.1.51, 192.168.1.75
Allow list with a range of IP
Sometimes you’ll want a range of computer IP addresses to connect to your
196
Pearl-2 User Guide
Example
IP restriction examples
Description
system. This may happen when you have one range of IP addresses assigned
to desktop computers (i.e. in the range 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.100) and
another range assigned to boardroom computers (i.e. the range
192.168.1.200 to 192.168.1.250). If you only want the boardroom
computers to connect to broadcasts from the system you can specify the
addresses
range of boardroom IP addresses rather than needing to type in each
individual address. The allow list looks as follows:
Allow: 192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250
Note that we could have specified two of the IP addresses in the previous
example as a range.
Putting the first two examples together, we want to permit access to IP
addresses in the range of boardroom computers (192.168.1.200192.168.1.250) and also want to add the desktop, laptop and tablet
computers of the CEO (IP addresses 192.168.1.50, 192.168.1.51, and
192.168.1.75, respectively). Note the first two IP addresses are consecutive,
Allow list with a range of IP
so they can be added as a second range. Add these IP addresses to the list as
addresses and one or more
follows:
specific IP addresses
Allow: 192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250, 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.51,
192.168.1.75
Your list can have multiple ranges and multiple distinct IP addresses,
provided they are separated by commas.
Building on the previous examples, consider a situation where you want the
CEO’s computers (192.168.1.50, 192.168.1.51, 192.168.75) and all
boardroom computers (192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250) to access the
Allow list with a range of
IP addresses, distinct
broadcast, with the exception of the public boardroom computer
(192.168.1.211). Use both allow and deny lists to create the rule as follows:
IP addresses, and an
exception
Allow: 192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250, 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.51,
192.168.1.75
Deny: 192.168.1.211
197
Pearl-2 User Guide
Example
IP restriction examples
Description
Both lists can have multiple ranges and multiple distinct IP addresses,
provided they are separated by commas.
The following table lists some example deny lists.
Table 37 Example deny lists
Example
Description
Another simple allow/deny list is to use the list of known IP addresses to list
specific denied IP addresses. All other addresses are allowed access to the
broadcast.
For example imagine your system is accessible on your local area network
(LAN) and you want to allow any computer on the LAN can access the stream
Deny list with distinct IP
addresses
except your publicly-accessible boardroom (with IP address 192.168.1.211).
You can use the following deny list (leave the allow list empty) to permit all
computers except the boardroom computer:
Deny: 192.168.1.211
As with allow lists, your deny list can specify a range of IP addresses, and can
specify multiple ranges or distinct IP addresses in a comma-separated list.
Consider a situation where you want every computer on the network to
access the broadcast, with the exception of the CEO’s desktop, laptop and
tablet computers. Additionally, boardroom computers should not be
permitted with the exception of the cafeteria computer (IP address
192.168.1.222).
The deny list is an "exception" list for the allow list. So to craft the rule
Deny list with a range of IP
described above we need to allow all the computers in the local subnet, then
addresses
deny specific sub-ranges including two groups of boardroom computers
ensuring the cafeteria computer's IP address is not in the deny list:
Allow: 192.168.1.1-192.168.1.250
Deny: 192.168.1.200-192.168.1.221, 192.168.1.223192.168.1.250, 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.51, 192.168.1.75
198
Pearl-2 User Guide
Status and monitoring
Status and monitoring
Pearl-2 lets you monitor audio and check the status of your channels, live streams, and recordings.
Topics include:
l
Monitoring audio
l
Channel monitoring using the touch screen
l
View system information using the touch screen
l
View system information using the Admin panel
l
View device information using the touch screen
l
View network status
l
View 802.1x network connection status messages
l
View channel status and stream information
l
View the video output port status
l
View AFU and file transfer progress
l
View scheduled events and history
Monitoring audio and VU sensitivity
You can connect headphones or external speakers to the 3.5 mm audio jack on the front panel of Pearl-2. To
monitor the audio for a specific channel, just select the channel using the touch screen. The audio you hear
depends on which layout is currently live because different layouts can have different audio sources
configured. To adjust the volume, tap the headphones icon using the touch screen. See Monitoring audio for
details.
A VU meter on the touch screen shows the audio levels for the selected channel. The value is displayed in
dBFS (decibels relative to full scale). Colored bars represent the audio level.
199
Pearl-2 User Guide
Channel monitoring using the touch screen
Table 38 Audio VU meter levels
Color
Decibel range
Red
0 to -9 dBFS
Yellow
-9 to -18 dBFS
Green
-18 dBFS and lower
Channel monitoring using the touch screen
Have complete confidence about what you're capturing, streaming, and recording. Up to 6 channels are
displayed in the grid view, depending on how many channels you have configured.
The grid view opens by default when you turn on Pearl-2. If necessary, tap the touch screen once to turn it on
and tap again to display the controls.
Table 39 Grid view indicators
Item
Description
Streaming (left) and recording (right) indicators appear in the top-right corner for
each channel:
(no dots)
Streaming and
recording indicators
Streaming is disabled and recording is stopped.
Streaming is stopped and recording is stopped.
Streaming is started and recording is stopped.
Streaming has an error and recording is stopped.
Streaming is stopped and recording is started.
Streaming is started and recording is started.
200
Pearl-2 User Guide
Item
Channel monitoring using the touch screen
Description
Streaming has an error and recording is started.
Streaming is disabled and recording is started.
TIP: You stop and start recording from the individual channel view.
Each channel has an audio VU meter that uses quasi-peak ballistics with samples
averaged every 10 ms. The maximum average audio level in each 100 ms period is
displayed using colored bars.
Audio VU meter
l
RED = 0 to -9 dBFS
l
Yellow = -9 to -18 dBFS
l
Green = -18 dBFS and lower
You can do more monitoring for a specific channel when you select a channel from the grid view. Just tap the
channel you want to monitor from the grid view and the channel view opens.
Table 40 Individual channel view indicators
Item
Description
Streaming indicator appears in the top-left corner:
Streaming status
(no dot)
Streaming is disabled.
201
Pearl-2 User Guide
Item
View system information using the touch screen
Description
Gray means streaming is stopped.
Flashing blue means streaming is in progress.
Streaming has an error.
Streaming timer
The streaming timer shows the length of time that streaming
has been in progress.
Recording indicator appears in the top-right corner:
(no dot)
Recording is disabled.
Gray means recording is stopped.
Recording status
Flashing red means recording is in progress.
Recording has an error.
Recording timer
The recording timer shows the length of time that recording
has been in progress.
Audio VU meter for the channel uses quasi-peak ballistics
with samples averaged every 10 ms. The maximum average
audio level in each 100 ms period is displayed using colored
Audio VU meter
bars.
l
RED = 0 to -9 dBFS
l
Yellow = -9 to -18 dBFS
l
Green = -18 dBFS and lower
To monitor a different channel, tap the right or left arrows on the channel view to see the next (or previous)
channel. If the touch screen controls aren't showing, tap anywhere on the touch screen to make them
reappear.
To get back to the grid view, tap the grid icon
.
View system information using the touch screen
Find the serial number, check the installed firmware version of your Pearl-2 and more on the System Status
screen using the touch screen.
The System Status screen displays basic system information that's useful when first setting up your Pearl-2.
202
Pearl-2 User Guide
View system information using the touch screen
.
Label
Description
Device Information
l
Serial number
l
Video grabber number
l
Firmware version
Network Information
l
IP Address
l
MAC Address
Device Status
l
System date
l
System time
l
Uptime
l
CPU load (%) and Temperature (°Celsius)
Storage Information (when available)
l
Disk space available
l
Pictogram of available disk space
To open the System Status screen:
203
Pearl-2 User Guide
View system information using the touch screen
1. Tap the gear icon. If the control icons aren't showing, tap anywhere on the touch screen.
2. Tap System Status to see the System Status page.
3. Tap CPU load to toggle between the operating temperature (°Celsius) and CPU load (%).
4. Tap Back to return to the System Settings screen, or the Home icon to return to the channel view.
If the system settings control icon won't appear when you tap the touch screen, it may be
disabled. See Configure the touch screen to enable system information.
204
Pearl-2 User Guide
View system information using the Admin panel
View system information using the Admin panel
Get useful information about your Pearl-2 and configured channels on the Info page from the Configuration
menu. You can view your current firmware level, the system hardware version (if available), and currently
configured channels.
To view system information using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Info. The system information page opens.
The Bitrate / Actual bitrate values show the total of the video bitrate plus audio bitrate.
View device information using the touch screen
View Pearl-2's device name, location, and description from the System Status screen using the touch screen.
To view the device information from the touch screen:
205
Pearl-2 User Guide
View device information using the touch screen
1. Tap the gear icon. If the control icons aren't showing, tap anywhere on the touch screen.
2. Tap System Status to see the System Status page.
3. Tap below Device to show the device information. Tap a second time to show the serial number,
grabber, and firmware values again.
4. Tap Back to return to the System Settings screen, or the Home icon to return to the channel view.
206
Pearl-2 User Guide
View network status
If the system settings control icon won't appear when you tap the touch screen, it may be
disabled. See Configure the touch screen to enable system information.
View network status
Get useful status information about your Pearl-2 network connection from the Network configuration page
using the Admin panel, including:
l
MAC address
l
Current IP address
l
802.1x status
l
Rated Ethernet link speed (Mbps)
l
Sending and receiving speed (Mbps)
To view the network status using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Network. The Network configuration page opens.
View 802.1x network connection status messages
When you first connect your Pearl-2 to a network, the status of the connection is displayed on the System
Status touch screen, see View system information using the touch screen. You can also check the network
status from the Network menu using the Admin panel.
Network status messages display in the IP Address field on the touchscreen of Pearl-2 while negotiating
network authentication. After network connectivity is established, the IP address of Pearl-2 is displayed.
207
Pearl-2 User Guide
View channel status and stream information
.
Table 41 Network status messages
Status Message
Description
Pearl-2's IP address is unavailable,
DISCONNECTED
for example when 802.1x is not
enabled on Pearl-2.
802.1x: PROGRESS
Connection to the 802.1x network is
in progress.
Pearl-2 has successfully
802.1x: PASSED
authenticated on the 802.1x
network.
802.1x: FAILED
Authentication on the 802.1x
network failed.
If you attempt to connect to a network that isn't 802.1x enabled when 802.1x is configured on Pearl-2, a
consistent 802.1x: FAILED status message appears on the Network Configuration page in the Admin panel.
View channel status and stream information
You can see information about the status of a channel on Pearl-2 from the channel's status page using the
Admin panel, including:
l
The status and uptime of encoder services
l
Stream information and URLs
208
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Channel preview
l
Active network connections
View channel status and stream information
More encoder information can be found on the Info page from the Configuration menu, see View system
information using the Admin panel
To view the status information for a channel using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
3. From the Channels menu, click a channel to open the status page for that channel.
Active unicast and multicast stream information displays under Connections.
209
Pearl-2 User Guide
View the video output port status
NDI connections aren't currently displayed on the channel's status page under Connections.
View the video output port status
The current status of the video output port and attached video display appears at the top of the video output
port configuration page. You can view the status using the Admin panel.
To view the video output port status:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Output ports menu, click the output port (HDMI 1 or HDMI 2). The video output port
configuration page opens.
Table 42 Possible video output status messages
Message
Description
Disabled
This video output port is disabled in the configuration. See View the video
210
Pearl-2 User Guide
Message
View AFU and file transfer progress
Description
output port status.
Display is not connected
Source is currently unavailable
Starting ...
Running at w×h
There is no display connected to the video output port or the connected
display is not powered on or not functioning.
The video output port is configured to display a channel that no longer
exists. Change the source. See View the video output port status.
The video output port is configuring the display and will shortly output the
first frame.
The video output port is functioning at the specified resolution.
You can also view video output status using the Epiphan Live control interface. See Monitor and
setup the output port source and audio for more information.
View AFU and file transfer progress
You can view basic Automatic File Upload (AFU) and file transfer information from Pearl-2's touch screen.
Information like how many files are in the queue, the total size of the queue, the AFU type, and status are
shown.
In this example, AFU is scheduled to occur at specified time intervals so the start of the next scheduled file
transfer is shown.
If the Pearl-2 is configured to allow copying recordings to a connected USB drive instead of AFU, the USB drive
status displays. If AFU is not enabled, the screen displays AFU File upload is disabled.
211
Pearl-2 User Guide
View AFU and file transfer progress
The Admin panel displays the status plus a history of uploaded files, which displays until either Pearl-2 is
restarted or the list is manually cleared. You can also cancel file uploads manually using the Admin panel.
To view file transfer status using the Admin panel, see Manage the AFU queue and Manage USB file transfer
queue.
To view file transfer status using the touch screen:
1. Tap the gear icon. If the control icons aren't showing, tap anywhere on the touch screen.
212
Pearl-2 User Guide
View AFU and file transfer progress
If the gear icon is not visible on the touch screen, tap the screen once to activate the
control buttons. If the system settings button is still not visible, it is disabled in the system's
touch screen configuration. See Configure the touch screen to enable system
information.
2. Tap the arrow icon in the lower-right corner of the screen to go to the second Settings page.
3. Tap File transfers to display the AFU Status page.
213
Pearl-2 User Guide
View scheduled events and history
To close the system information screen, tap Back in the upper-left corner of the screen to return to the
System Settings view. Tap the Home icon to return to the channel view.
View scheduled events and history
Using the Admin panel, select the Events menu to see up to 90 days of upcoming scheduled events and up to
90 days of ongoing and completed events for this Pearl-2 resource. Click the page arrows at the bottom of
each list to navigate through multiple pages.
214
Pearl-2 User Guide
View scheduled events and history
The Events page updates to show new events every hour. Click Refresh schedule at any time to manually
update the Events page. The Events page only displays when Kaltura or Panopto CMS is enabled on Pearl-2.
If the time and zone settings of Pearl-2 are out of synchronization with Kaltura's scheduling
server, an error appears on the Events page when you refresh the schedule. Configure the time
settings on Pearl-2 to match the time and zone of Kaltura's scheduling server, see Configure
date and time.
From the touch screen on Pearl-2, you can tap the Scheduled events icon at any time to display the Events
screen. The icon only appears when Kaltura or Panopto CMS is enabled on Pearl-2.
The Events screen displays automatically on the touch screen of Pearl-2 about five minutes before a
scheduled event starts.
For events with more channels than can be previewed at the same time on the touch screen, an arrow appears
so you can scroll through a carousel of channel previews.
215
PART 2: Capture
Capturing is the process of taking the signals from your video and audio sources and encoding them so
they're ready for streaming and recording. You add the captured video and audio to channels, which you
customize for live streaming, switching, and recording.
This section covers how to create channels and add custom layouts so that you can capture, stream, and
record exactly what you want - how you want! Whether that's a simple channel with a single video and audio
source or channels that have multiple video and audio sources and custom layouts like picture in picture.
Topics include:
l
What is a channel?
l
Channel layout examples
l
About automatic channels Auto A and Auto B
l
Channel configuration
l
Custom layout configuration
l
Video and audio input sources
216
Pearl-2 User Guide
What is a channel?
What is a channel?
Your video and audio sources that are connected to the input ports on Pearl-2 can be combined and added to
channels, which you can stream and record. A channel is essentially an encoding instance that you associate
with your video and audio inputs to produce outputs such as video recordings and streaming destinations.
And you can create multiple channels. For Pearl-2, we recommend a maximum of six 1080p sources in up to
six full HD channels or having up to four 4K sources4K in a single channel for best performance.
You can pick and choose which channels to record, stream, or do both at the same time! You can even choose
the output from one channel as the video input source for another channel.
Channels with multiple layouts
There are many creative ways to customize your channels in Pearl-2. Easily combine multiple video sources to
the same layout for picture in picture or side-by-side layouts using the convenient custom layout editor. You
can add text overlays and effects, like transparent logos and lower thirds. Customize your channels with
images, company information, corporate colors, and time stamps just to name a few possibilities. You can
even apply chroma key effects to either one or to all your input video sources at the same time.
When you use the custom layout editor to create multiple layouts in a channel, you can live switch between
the different layouts while recording, streaming, and displaying the channel on a confidence monitor. You're
not limited to creating single-source Channels that are a one-to-one reflection of your video inputs. And if
you need to output your switched program using multiple encoding settings, you can use the output from
one channel as the input source for another channel, then stream and record each channel at different
encoding settings.
Each channel can include some or all of your video and audio sources. And you can add the same source to as
many different layouts as you want in a channel.
For example, you could use the same source in all of these situations at the same time:
- in Channel 1 as part of a multi-source layout with picture in picture at 1080p, 30 fps, 6,000 kbps
- as the only source in Channel 2 at 720p, 30 fps, 2,000 kbps
- as the only source in Channel 3 at 1080p, 60 fps, 2,000 kbps
To create custom layouts, see Custom layout configuration and About the custom layout editor.
217
Pearl-2 User Guide
Channel layout examples
Important note for channels with multiple layouts
When a channel has only one layout and that layout has only one video source, the default channel name is
the same as the name of the video source. So for example, a channel with one layout that has HDMI-A in it is
named HDMI-A by default.
When you add a second layout to the channel, the channel name automatically changes to a generic name
Channel X, where X is the channel index number. For example, HDMI-A changes to Channel 1.
Changing the channel name affects system operation.
l
If the channel is streaming, the stream is stopped and restarted.
l
If the channel's recorder is recording, then recording is stopped and a new file is started.
If you delete all the layouts in a channel until there is only one layout left and that layout has only one video
source assigned, then the channel name changes back to the name of the video source. For example, Channel
1 changes to HDMI-A
To avoid channel name changes, we recommend that you rename the channel to a custom name. Changing
the channel name to a custom name ensures that no automatic channel renaming happens, see Rename a
channel.
Channel layout examples
Here are some examples of different layouts you can create using the custom layout editor with just two
video input sources and two media image files.
Layout example
Description
One video source (a slideshow presentation
in this case), at the full size of the channel.
To get this look: Using the custom layout
editor, add one video source to the layout,
select keep aspect ratio and stretch to fill
the entire layout area.
218
Pearl-2 User Guide
Layout example
Channel layout examples
Description
One video source (a slideshow presentation
in this case), with a green background
matte.
To get this look: Using the custom layout
editor, select a background color. Add a
video source to the layout and size
appropriately, leaving the background
matte visible.
One video source with a logo (.png with
transparency) in the bottom left corner.
To get this look: Upload an image with
transparency. Using the custom layout
editor, add one video source to the layout,
select keep aspect ratio and stretch to fill
the entire layout area. Then, add the image
to the layout and drag it where you want it
to appear on screen.
One source with a text overlay in the
bottom right corner.
To get this look: Using the custom layout
editor, add one video source to the layout,
select keep aspect ratio and stretch to fill
the entire layout area. Then, add a text
overlay to the layout and drag it where you
want it to appear on screen.
219
Pearl-2 User Guide
Layout example
Channel layout examples
Description
Two video sources (one cropped to a new
aspect ratioCrop a video source), a
background image, and a logo. Make sure
the background image has the correct
aspect ratio.
To get this look: Upload your background
and logo images (you can do this from the
Media page or the Layouts page for the
channel). Using the custom layout editor,
add the background image to the layout
and stretch it to fill the entire layout area.
Then add your two video sources to the
layout, adjusting their size and position as
needed. Lastly, add the logo to the layout
and move it in to position. For the second
video source, use the Crop tool to crop the
second source to a square aspect ratio.
Examples including a 4x3 video source.
Layout example
Description
One 4x3 video source at the full size of the
channel.
To get this look: Using the custom layout
editor, add one video source to the layout,
select keep aspect ratio and stretch to fill
the entire layout area.
The channel broadcasts in 4x3 if you have
Use current signal resolution as frame
size selected on the encoding page.
220
Pearl-2 User Guide
About automatic channels Auto A and Auto B
Layout example
Description
One 4x3 video source in a 16x9 frame with
a green background matte.
To get this look: From the Encoding page
for the channel, make sure that the 16x9
frame size is selected. Then using the
custom layout editor, select a background
color. Add a video source to the layout and
stretch to the full height of the screen,
leaving the background matte visible.
One 4x3 video source and a cropped 16x9
video source together with a background
image. Make sure the background image
has the correct aspect ratio.
To get this look: Upload your background
image (you can do this from the Media
page or the Layouts page for the channel).
Follow the steps from the first 4x3 example
to add the video sources, then use the Crop
tool to crop the second source to a square
aspect ratio.
About automatic channels Auto A and Auto B
To get you started as quickly as possible, Pearl-2 comes pre-configured with two channels: Auto A and Auto B.
Simply plug a source into one of the "A" inputs and a second source into one of the "B" inputs. Pearl-2
automatically configures the channel's frame size to match the source resolution and configures a frame rate
and bitrate. Audio, if present, is automatically added to the channel.
Default audio setup for the auto channels is always as follows:
Video Source
Audio Source
SDI
SDI Audio
HDMI (DVI)
HDMI Audio (no audio for DVI)
USB video
USB audio
221
Pearl-2 User Guide
About automatic channels Auto A and Auto B
You can start viewing the channel immediately on the touch screen or using an web browser on the same LAN
or network as Pearl-2. Browse to the following URL:
For Auto A: http://<serial>.local/preview.cgi?channel=1
For Auto B: http://<serial>.local/preview.cgi?channel=2
For example:http://d560515f.local/preview.cgi?channel=2
If Bonjour services, which permits browsing by serial number, are not installed on your admin computer, you
can get the IP address of Pearl-2 from the touch screen display and browse to:
For Auto A: http://<IP Address for Pearl-2>/preview.cgi?channel=1
You find alternate connection streams (i.e. RTSP or MPEG-TS) and can further configure these channels by
logging into the Admin panel and accessing Auto A and Auto B using the links under the Channels menu.
Important considerations
l
Default auto channels have the related HDMI (or SDI) port selected by default. As soon as you connect
your video source to the port, it appears automatically in the auto channel's custom layout. Changing
the auto channel's frame rate or deleting the auto channel will change the frame rate used at the
output port for that video input. Deleting the auto channel forces the video output port to use the
original frame rate of the video input source.
l
You can delete the Auto A and Auto B channels, but they will re-appear upon factory reset or when
loading the default configuration profile.
Which signal is used for Auto-A or Auto-B?
Pearl-2 has video input sensing, which means that it knows when a video signal is received from an attached
source.
If you attach more than one video source to the "A" inputs while Pearl-2 is powered on, the first source you
attach has the highest priority. If you attach more than one source to inputs that are labeled with the same
letter (A or B) before powering on Pearl-2, the following priority is used:
Priority
Connector Type
1
HDMI (with HDMI Audio)
2
HDMI 4K4K (with HDMI Audio)
3
SDI (with SDI Audio)
222
Pearl-2 User Guide
About automatic channels Auto A and Auto B
Priority
4
Connector Type
USB video (with USB audio)
The auto channel uses a source until that source no longer has a signal. Then, it switches to the next highest
priority signal.
For example, if you attach an SDI source to the "SDI-A" slot and then HDMI into the "HDMI-A" slot,
Auto A will show HDMI and use HDMI audio. If the HDMI video signal is lost or you manually select the
SDI audio source using the custom layout editor, Auto A will switch to SDI video with SDI audio.
If all the connected sources lose signal at the same time (i.e. for the example above when SDI loses video
signal, and no other video signal is found on the HDMI source) no change is made and the auto channel
continues to use the current source. In this case, a no signal image is displayed for viewers.
You can see which video and audio sources are configured for the channel from the Info page, see View
system information using the Admin panel
223
Pearl-2 User Guide
Channel configuration
Channel configuration
Channels let you encode your video and audio sources so they can be live streamed, recorded, and switched if
you create multiple layouts using the custom layout editor. Before using a channel, you should check the
channel settings. You can fine-tune your channel to maximize the quality of your live streams, minimize the
amount of bandwidth used, and ensure your video and audio encoding settings are optimized for your event.
You can control exactly how the video is presented and streamed to shared destinations and multiple viewers.
If you're planning to do live switching with your channel, we recommend you set the frame size to a fixed size
instead of using the default setting. The default setting automatically sets the channel frame size to match the
frame size of the video source. Changing the frame size to a fixed value ensures that you don't experience any
stream interruptions if the frame size of the video source changes, like when switching between different
layouts that contain a single video source with different frame sizes.
Channel encoding settings may be automatically overwritten when using Pearl-2 with a Content
Management System, see About Panopto recording and webcasting
Topics include:
l
Configure auto channels
l
Create a channel
l
Add video sources or a channel as a source
l
Add an audio source to a layout
l
Duplicate a channel
l
Rename a channel
l
Delete a channel
l
Preview channel
l
Add or remove channel metadata
l
Configure encoding
l
Codecs and file format compatibility
l
Configure video encoding
l
Configure audio encoding
l
Multi-encoding and channel as a source
224
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure auto channels
Configure auto channels
Auto channels are included with Pearl-2 to make setup quick and simple. However if you want to set custom
encoding or streaming configuration for the channel, you can configure it like any other channel.
To further configure automatic channels Auto A and Auto B:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
3. From the Channels menu, click Auto A or Auto B. The channel's status page opens
4. Configure the automatic channel as you would any other channel.
To change the video source for the two auto channels, just select a different video source using
the custom layout editor, see Add video sources or a channel as a source. The channel name
automatically changes to the name of the selected video source if there's only one source in that
channel. For important information about changing the channel name, see Rename a channel.
Create a channel
You create channels on Pearl-2 using the Admin panel. New channels automatically use the same aspect ratio
as the default frame size setting for the channel, which is 16:9. You can change the encoding settings for a
channel after the channel is created.
225
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create a channel
The default encoding settings for a channel are:
l
l
Video: H.264, [email protected] fps, auto bitrate
Audio: AAC, 48kHz stereo, 320 kbps
If the channel's video source doesn't have a 16:9 aspect ratio, the system automatically detects
the correct aspect ratio and updates the layout after you leave and return to the custom layout
editor page. This happens because the channel's encoding page has Use current signal
resolution as frame size selected by default. If you want to change the aspect ratio for your
channel, see Configure encoding.
Each additional channel and layout consumes additional CPU processing capacity of Pearl-2, see Optimum
CPU performance.
When you create a channel, it's convenient to add your video and audio sources at that time. Channels can
have one or more video and audio sources. This procedure includes basic steps to add a single video and
audio source.
To create a channel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, click Add channel. The custom layout editor for the new channel opens
and the default layout is selected.
A 16:9 workspace appears in the layout area.
226
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create a channel
3. Click Add new item and select Video Source.
4. From the Source settings, select a video source in the Source drop down.
227
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create a channel
For best results, Keep aspect ratio when scaling should be checked under Source
settings.
The selected video source appears in the layout area.
5. Click and drag the red and white handles on the corners of the source to re-size it in the layout editor
area. For a single source channel, it should fill the entire layout area. Alternatively, you could enter a
value in the percentage boxes that are along the side and bottom of the layout editor area to resize the
video source.
6. Select an audio source from the list of audio sources.
228
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add video sources or a channel as a source
If a channel is selected as a video source, the corresponding audio for that channel is
selected by default.
7. Click Save. Your channel is ready for basic streaming and recording.
Because this is a single-source channel with only one layout, the channel's name is updated
to display the source’s name next time you view the channel. Click the channel name to
refresh. Rename the channel and choose a custom name if you don't want the channel
name to change, see Rename a channel.
What's next?
The default channel encoding setting should work fine in most cases. To check the encoding settings for the
channel, see Configure encoding. There are a lot of creative things you can do next with your channel,
including creating more layouts, adding multiple video and audio sources, and customizing layouts to add
images and backgrounds, see Custom layout configuration.
Add video sources or a channel as a source
You can add one or multiple video sources to any of the layouts for your channel using the custom layout
editor. You can even add the output from another channel as a video input source.
When you add a channel as a video source in another channel, whatever is displaying live in that channel also
displays in the other channel. This is useful when you need to stream the same switched program to multiple
destinations that have different encoding settings. That's because the encoding settings are set at the channel
level.
For example, to stream your switched program to YouTube at 1920×1080 and to Facebook at 1280×720, you
could:
1. Set up Channel 1 as your switched program channel. Add all your custom layouts to Channel 1 and
stream this channel to YouTube at 1920×1080.
2. Set up Channel 2 as your Facebook streaming channel. Configure Channel 2 with a single layout that
uses Channel 1 as the video source, and then stream Channel 2 to Facebook at 1280×720.
For instructions to set up multi-encoded channels using the channel as a source feature, see Multi-encoding
and channel as a source.
229
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add video sources or a channel as a source
If more than one video source is added to a channel, we recommend configuring the channel
encoding to use a fixed resolution as the frame size instead of automatically using the
resolution of the video source as the frame size (default). A fixed channel resolution ensures
that your channel displays properly at a fixed resolution. Using a fixed channel resolution also
avoids unintended resolution changes when switching between multiple layouts if the
different layouts happen to have different video sources with different resolutions, see
Configure encoding.
To add a video source or a channel as a source:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channel menu, select a channel and click Layouts. The custom layout editor opens.
3. In the Layouts list that appears at the top of the page, click a layout's row to select that layout or click
Add new layout.
4. Below the Layout editing area, click Add new item and select Video Source. The Source settings
appear.
5. From the Source settings, select either a video input or a channel in the Source drop down.
230
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add video sources or a channel as a source
For best results, check Keep aspect ratio when scaling in the Source settings.
The selected video source appears in the layout editing area.
When adding an RTSP network source, a preview image may not display in the layout area until
you Save the layout. The preview can also appear to have no signal if the RTSP source is not
currently sending content.
6. Click and drag the red and white handles on the corners of the source to re-size it in the layout editor
area. Alternatively, enter a value in the fields along the side and bottom of the layout editing area to
resize the selected item. For a channel with only a single video source, it should fill the entire layout
area. For a layout that includes multiple video sources, you can move, resize, or crop each video source
to exactly how you want them to appear.
231
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add video sources or a channel as a source
To layer video sources over top of each other, like for picture in picture, you can click
and drag the video sources that appear in the item list beneath Add new item and
change their order. Items that are higher up the list appear over top items that are
lower down the list.
7. Select an audio source from the list of audio sources.
If a channel is selected as the video source, the corresponding audio for that channel
is selected automatically by default.
8. Click Save.
A note about item positioning and sizing
There are four ways to position and size items in the layout area
1.
using the mouse
2.
using the keyboard
3.
using the manual positioning values with percents
4.
using the manual positioning values with pixels
To use the mouse:
Click and drag to move the item. Click and drag the round, red and white handles to resize an image or
video source (for text overlays, just use the padding settings). Using this method you can make quick
changes that are in increments of approximately 5% of the width or height of your layout area. For
more refined movements, press the Ctrl key on your keyboard while dragging the item with the mouse.
To use the keyboard:
Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the item up, down, left or right in the layout. Changes are
in increments of approximately 5% of the height or width of the layout area. Press the Ctrl key while
using the arrow keys to make more refined movements. To change the size of an image or video
source, press the Shift key while using the arrow keys (for text overlays, just use the padding settings).
Press both Ctrl and Shift for fine-grained size control.
Using percents:
Specify a whole number, followed by a percent sign (e.g. 4%) in any of the manual positioning fields.
See Resize and position items using percents or pixels for more information.
232
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add an audio source to a layout
Using pixels:
If you need to specify an exact amount in pixels (rather than percent) you can type a pixel value in any
of the positioning value squares followed by the characters px (e.g. 56px). You can mix and match
pixels and percents changing only the boxes you want to use pixel values. At any time you can switch
back to percents by typing a percent. See Resize and position items using percents or pixels for more
information.
Add an audio source to a layout
You can add multiple audio sources to the layouts for a channel using the Admin panel. Each layout can have
the same audio sources in them or you can choose different audio sources. By default, audio is enabled for
the channel on the channel's encoding page.
An audio source has the same gain no matter how may layouts the audio source is added to, or if you've
added just the one audio source or several audio sources to the same layout.
Important considerations
l
For NDI, SRT and RTSP input sources, there's no need to manually add the audio sources separately to
your channel. When the stream is connected to your Pearl-2 as an input source, a corresponding audio
source is automatically added to the list of audio sources for your channels, even if there is no audio in
the stream.
l
The right-most XLR audio input and the RCA audio input are linked within Pearl-2. If you use both at the
same time, their audio is mixed. If the two audio sources share the same audio signals, the common
audio signals are amplified. To avoid this, you can turn disable one or the other audio port, see Assign
audio sources to an input.
l
If a channel is selected as the video source for a layout, the corresponding audio for that channel is
added automatically.
l
You can add multiple audio sources to the same layout. However, if the two audio sources share all or
some of the same audio signals, then the common audio signals are amplified.
l
Selecting multiple loud audio sources in the same layout may cause audio clipping on that layout.
Before going live, always check volume levels for the layouts that have a large number of audio sources
and adjust the volumes at source to avoid clipping, see Adjust audio gain and delay.
l
If audio encoding is not configured for a channel, no audio signal is processed or sent with the video
content when recording, streaming, or confidence monitoring, see Configure audio encoding.
l
If an audio source is added to a layout and then the audio device is disconnected from the input port
on Pearl-2, some residual noise may be detected in the layout. Remove the audio source from the
layout.
233
Pearl-2 User Guide
Duplicate a channel
To add an audio source to a layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channel menu, select a channel and click Layouts. The custom layout editor opens.
3. In the Layouts list that appears at the top of the page, click a layout's row to select that layout.
4. Check the audio source that you want to use for the layout and click Save.
What's Next
You can check the audio encoding settings for your channel and ensure that audio is enabled, see Configure
encoding.
To adjust the gain for an audio input source, see Adjust audio gain and delay.
Duplicate a channel
You can duplicate any channel you've created. All settings in the channel you duplicate are recreated.
To duplicate a channel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
234
Pearl-2 User Guide
Rename a channel
2. From the Admin panel, scroll to the Channels menu option.
3. From the Channels menu, click Status. The Status page opens.
4. Click Duplicate this channel. The duplicate channel is created and assigned the next sequential
number in the Channel menu.
5. Click Save.
Rename a channel
Channels are created with the same name as their video source by default. When a second layout or a second
video source is added to the channel, the channel name changes to Channel X, where X is the index number
for the channel. To stop a channel name from automatically changing, you should assign the channel a
custom name using the Admin panel.
You can change a channel's name from any of the channel configuration pages or using the custom layout
editor.
Auto channels initially have the channel name Auto A and Auto B, but if you change the source to
something other than an automatic source, the name of the channel changes to reflect the new
source.
235
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete a channel
You can include certain international characters in channel names. Pearl-2 supports common character sets
for Western and Central European languages, Nordic languages, and Russian. Channel names should not
include special characters, slashes, or spaces. For a complete list, see International character support.
Do not include any special currency, mathematical symbols, and other special characters such as
slashes or spaces in the channel name. Pearl-2 replaces special characters with an underscore.
To rename a channel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click any of menu options for the channel. For example,
click Metadata.
3. Click on the channel name that appears at the top of the page. The text turns red.
4. Enter the new name using alphanumeric characters. We recommend using underscores to separate
words rather than using spaces.
5. Press Enter using your keyboard to save the new name.
Delete a channel
You can delete a channel using the Admin panel. Deleting a channel removes all recorded files that are
associated with that channel. You cannot recover recordings for a channel after the channel is deleted. We
recommend that you stop recording or streaming for the channel before deleting the channel.
If you have multiple configuration presets, deleting a channel removes all recorded files that are
related to that channel across all presets. For important information about how channels are
236
Pearl-2 User Guide
Preview channel
indexed in Pearl-2 and how that affects deleting channels when configuration presets are used,
see Configuration preset considerations.
To delete a channel, follow the steps below.
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channel menu, select a channel and click Status. The Status page for the channel opens.
3. Click Delete this channel and click OK when prompted to delete the channel, or click Cancel.
Preview channel
You can open a live preview of a channel in your web browser to see any configuration changes you make to
the channel as you make them. Web browsers that support HTML5 and Flash are supported.
There are several ways to preview channels:
l
Preview a channel from the Info page
l
Preview a channel from the Status page
l
Preview all channels at the same time
237
Pearl-2 User Guide
Preview channel
You can also preview channels using Epiphan Live, see Configure Dashboard panels for
more information.
Important considerations
l
Some web browsers disable auto playback of videos with audio. In those cases, the audio for the
channel being previewed is muted by default.
l
HTML5 does not support PCM audio encoding. If PCM audio encoding is configured for a channel,
audio does not play in the preview link for the channel.
l
PCM audio encoding at 48 kHz is not supported. A live broadcast preview link is not provided for a
channel that is configured for PCM audio encoding with a sampling bitrate of 48 kHz.
l
If HTTPS is configured for Pearl-2, the live broadcast URL will start with https instead of http.
Preview a channel from the Info page
The Info page has preview links for all the channels that are configured on Pearl-2.
To preview a channel from the Info page:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Info. The information window opens .
238
Pearl-2 User Guide
Preview channel
3. Click View for the channel that you want to preview. A preview window opens.
Preview a channel from the Status page
You can use the Admin panel to open a preview link for a channel from the Status page. The Live broadcast
preview can be viewed using web browsers that support HTML5 or Flash. You can also see a preview of the
channel directly from the Status page itself.
The Status page lists information about the channel, including stream information such as the bitrate, frame
size, streaming and preview links, as well the state of the services on Pearl-2.
This feature is not available using the local console on Pearl-2.
To preview a channel from the Status page:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Status. The Status page opens and a live preview
snapshot appears below the Stream info.
3. Right-click the Live Broadcast link and select Open in a new Tab or Open in a new Window.
Preview all channels at the same time
Pearl-2 has a special preview mode that lets you see all configured channels at once.
239
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add or remove channel metadata
The resulting web page can be very large. You can use your keyboard's zoom keys or the zoom
buttons for your web browser to adjust the screen view. Plus many browsers support short cuts,
like Ctrl- (control minus) to zoom out and Ctrl+ (control plus) to zoom in.
To preview all channels at the same time:
1. Open a new tab in your web browser on the Admin computer.
2. Go to the following URL to open the preview web page for your Pearl-2, where <ip address> is the IP
address of Pearl-2. To find the IP address of your system, see View system information using the Admin
panel or View system information using the touch screen
http://<ip address>/preview.cgi?channels
For example: http://172.1.1.10/preview.cgi?channels
To preview a single channel, you can enter the following URL: http://<ip address>/preview.cgi?channel=X
where<ip address> is the IP address of Pearl Mini and X is the channel's index number.
Add or remove channel metadata
When you configure metadata for a channel, that metadata is embedded in all channel recordings and
streams. You can specify the following metadata that the media player displays for your viewers:
l
title of the presentation
l
company website
l
presenter’s name
l
copyright date or other labels such as proprietary information, preliminary etc.
l
additional information about the broadcast, such as time of the broadcast, or change to the schedule
How metadata is displayed depends largely on the media player. For example VLC, stores the metadata in a
media information file, while other media players scroll the text horizontally from right to left across the
bottom of the media player window.
Use only alphanumeric and diacritic characters in metadata descriptions. The whole metadata
string is refused if any special currency or mathematical symbol appears in the description. You
must remove the offending characters before Pearl-2 will accept the description.
To add or remove channel meta data:
240
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add or remove channel metadata
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Metadata. The Metadata configuration page
opens.
3. Do one of the following:
a. To add metadata, simply enter the information in to the fields, such as: title, author (or authors),
copyright information, and descriptive comments.
b. To remove metadata, simply delete the information that appears in the fields.
4. Click Apply.
241
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure encoding
Configure encoding
You can modify the encoding settings for each channel. The encoding settings let you fine tune your channel
recording or live stream. You can select a specific frame size, bitrate, audio or video codec, and more.
Channel encoding settings may be automatically overwritten when using Pearl-2 with a Content
Management System, see About Panopto recording and webcasting
Topics include:
l
Codecs and file format compatibility
l
Configure video encoding
l
Configure audio encoding
l
Multi-encoding and channel as a source
Codecs and file format compatibility
Pearl-2 supports the following video and audio codecs.
Table 43 Supported video codes
Value
Description
H.264 is the default video codec configured for the channels on Pearl-2. This codec
H.264
provides high quality video while using low bandwidth and is the preferred codec to
use with the system.
Motion JPEG
Motion JPEG is suitable for live streaming and video; however, you can experience low
quality images while using high bandwidth. Motion JPEG does not support audio.
Table 44 Supported audio codecs and bitrate guidance
Value
Description
AAC is comparable to MP3 and may even provide better sound quality at a similar
sample bitrate. Supported sampling bitrate values are: 16, 22, 44 and 48K kHz.
AAC
Setting the channel bitrate to match the audio source's bitrate provides the best
sound quality and avoids audio resampling. Most digital signals (HDMI
or SDI sources) use 48 kHz. Most digital signals (HDMI or SDI sources) use 48 kHz
audio. For analog signals, 44 kHz provides a good quality audio sample.
242
Pearl-2 User Guide
Value
Codecs and file format compatibility
Description
The maximum bitrate for mono encoding of a 44 kHz signal is 264 kbps. For stereo,
320 kbps is supported. Note that lower bitrates (e.g. 32 kbps) with a 44 kHz signal
may result in distorted audio.
MP3 provides a common audio format for audio storage. Supported sampling
bitrate values are: 22 kHz, 44 kHz and 48 kHz.
Setting the channel bitrate to match the audio source's bitrate provides the best
sound quality and avoids audio resampling. Most digital signals (HDMI
or SDI sources) use 48 kHz. For analog signals, 44 kHz provides a good quality
MP3
audio sample.
Web browsers that use Flash (FLV) do not support 48 kHz MP3 audio.
When selecting this encoding, you must use a web browser that
supports HTML5 or a media player to preview your channel.
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) is a standard for digital audio in computer and other
devices such as, digital telephone systems.
Setting the level to match the audio source's level provides the best sound quality
and avoids audio resampling. Most digital signals (HDMI or SDI sources) use 48 kHz
PCM
audio. For analog signals, 44 kHz provides a good quality audio sample.
The Flash (FLV) plugin must be installed for your web browser to play
back audio that's encoded as PCM. Web browsers that use Flash (FLV)
do not support 48 kHz PCM audio.
Format compatibility
Not all streaming and recording protocols support all combinations of video and audio codecs. The following
table lists any video/audio codec compatibility considerations for the supported streaming formats on Pearl2.
243
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure video encoding
Table 45 Video/audio codecs and formats for streaming
Video Codec selected
Audio Codec selected
RTSP
FLV
MPEG-TS
H.264
No audio codec
ü
ü
ü
H.264
PCM
ü
ü
H.264
MP3
ü
ü
ü
H.264
AAC
ü
ü
ü
MJPEG
No audio codec
MJPEG
ü
The following table displays the compatibility between the video/audio codecs and the supported recording
formats.
Table 46 Video/audio codecs and formats for recording
Video Codec
Audio Codec selec-
selected
ted
H.264
No audio codec
H.264
MP4 and
MP4-Frag-
AVI
MOV
MPEG-TS
ü
ü
ü
ü
PCM
ü
ü
ü
H.264
MP3
ü
ü
ü
ü
H.264
AAC
ü
ü
ü
ü
MJPEG
No audio codec
ü
ü
ü
ü
mented
Configure video encoding
You can configure the video encoding settings for each channel using the Admin panel. Video encoding
settings include:
l
Video codec: The video codec determines the type of compression and decompression, and also
affects the video quality. Options are H.264 (default) and Motion JPEG.
l
Hardware or software encoding: Hardware encoding is the default setting and is the recommended
encoding for use with Pearl-2.
l
Encoding level: This can be set to High, Main, or Baseline.
244
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Configure video encoding
Frame size: The resolution applied to the channel when you stream, record, or output video to a
confidence monitor. This can be set to automatically match the input video's resolution or set to a fixed
resolution.
l
Key frame interval: How often a key frame that contains all the pixels is sent when streaming. The
longer the key frame interval, the smaller the video file size (and vice versa).
l
Bitrate: If using the H.264 video codec, you can increase or decrease image quality by increasing or
decreasing the channel's Bitrate value. Video with a high level of motion and high resolution, such as
sporting events, requires a higher bitrate.
By default, Pearl-2 automatically uses the incoming video source frame size as the frame size for
streaming and recording when the channel has only one layout with a single video source. If
you're channel has multiple video sources or layouts, you must manually set a frame size for the
channel.
If you plan to switch layouts during a live stream, a fixed frame rate is recommended. This avoids
the stream from stopping and restarting due to frame size changes when switching between
single-source layouts that use different frame sizes.
Important considerations
l
For optimum system performance, the frame size of the channel should be set to match the frame size
of your video input source to avoid scaling, see Optimum CPU performance.
l
If you have unchecked all the manual resizing and positioning boxes in the custom layout editor and
you downscale the video source using the frame size setting on the Encoding tab (for example, select
1280×720 frame size for a full HD video source), then the source appears cropped within the frame
instead of scaling to fit the frame.
l
If your channel has a custom layout with only one source and your source and stream aspect ratios
differ, then your source appears centered in the frame and matte bars are added automatically to the
top and bottom (or left and right sides) of the frame to make up the difference. See Remove black bars
(matte) from the video.
l
If an SDI or HDMI video input source that is selected to display at the HDMI output port also appears in
a custom layout for a channel, then the channel's encoding settings are used at the HDMI output.
Changing the channel's frame rate will change the frame rate used at the output port for that video
input. If the video source appears in multiple layouts in different channels, the one with the highest
frame rate set in the encoding settings is used.
l
The larger the channel's frame size, the more bandwidth is needed for streaming and the recorded files
are bigger. Instead of using the same frame size as the original video source, you can configure a
smaller frame size for the channel and let Pearl-2 downscale the video. For example, if the input video
245
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure video encoding
signal resolution is 1920×1080 (a 16:9 aspect ratio) and the channel's frame size is set to 1280×720,
Pearl-2 downscales the video and streams/records the channel at the lower frame size, using less
bandwidth and producing smaller recorded files.
You can add black bars around your video source by adjusting the frame size. For example, if your video
source has a 16:9 widescreen/HD format but you need a 4:3 frame size on your output, Pearl-2 automatically
adds black bars to the top and bottom of the frame if you choose a frame size for the channel that has a 4:3
aspect ratio.
There is some trade off between video quality and bandwidth size, depending on the encoding settings you
choose. The following table lists some additional considerations when choosing video encoding settings.
Table 47 Video encoding settings
Setting
H.264
Description
H.264 is the default codec and provides high quality video while using low
bandwidth. This is the preferred codec for the system.
This codec is suitable for streaming and recording video, however you get
Motion JPEG
lower quality images and it requires a large amount of bandwidth. Motion
JPEG does not support audio.
The key frame interval feature specifies how often a key frame (a frame
that contains all the pixels) is sent when streaming the video. This setting
also impacts how quickly a video moves through the frames when a
viewer uses the search function of their media player.
Increasing the number of seconds between key frames can significantly
Key frame interval
reduce your bandwidth and system resource usage with minor impact to
your video quality. A good rule of thumb is to keep the interval between 2
to 3 seconds and decrease the key frame interval as the motion increases.
Try different settings and note changes in the video quality. If your video
quality is poor and jittery you may need to decrease the interval between
key frames. If you have unlimited bandwidth and system resources you
can choose an option to stream key frames only.
Frame rate reflects the number of images that are encoded per second.
Reducing the frame rate for a channel reduces bandwidth usage, and vice
versa.
Frame rate
The system's ability to maintain a set frame rate is based on several
factors, for example:
l
overall system load affects the ability for the device to process
pixels;
246
Pearl-2 User Guide
Setting
Configure video encoding
Description
l
available network bandwidth;
l
the source and stream frame size (resolution);
l
the type of motion that is captured; and
l
number of users accessing the stream.
When adjusting the frame rate, you may need to try different values to
achieve the best outcome.
In general, higher bitrates mean higher image quality, but more bandwidth
is needed for streaming and video recordings are larger. If you're using
H.264, then you can set the bitrate to improve the image quality.
Bitrate
For example, an HD Blu-ray video is typically in the range of 20 Mbps,
whereas a standard-definition DVD is usually 6 Mbps.
If you're unsure what bitrate value to use, start at 5000 kbps (slightly less
than a typical DVD) and test to see how this looks for your viewers.
To configure video encoding for a channel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
1. From the Channel menu, select a channel and click Encoding. The encoding configuration page opens.
2. Select a video Codec and do one of the following:
a. If JPEG is selected, click Page refresh time and enter a time in seconds.
b. If H.264 is selected, select a Video encoding preset and a Video encoding profile.
247
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure video encoding
Item
Options
Hardware Accelerated: This is the default H.264 encoding preset. Choose
this setting for best performance.
Video encoding
Software: This matches the default from previous generations of Epiphan
preset
products. Only select this if you need software encoding or X.264 encoding
to match results created with previous generations of Epiphan products or
firmware
Baseline: Choose this option when streaming to an application that
requires robustness and cannot tolerate data loss, for example videoconferencing.
Video encoding
profile
Main: Choose this option for standard-definition broadcasts.
High: This is the default. Choose this option when video is viewed for
broadcast and disk storage applications, particularly for high definition
television application such as Blu-ray disk storage format and HDTV
broadcast service.
3. Configure the frame size, do the following:
a. Uncheck Use current signal resolution as the frame size.
Enabling Use current signal resolution as the frame size is not
recommended if the video input resolution changes frequently. An unstable
cable or other disturbance that causes the resolution of the video input signal
to change during a live stream can cause the stream to drop. Unchecking this
feature helps prevent that.
248
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure audio encoding
b. Select a Frame size from the list of options or enter a custom frame size in pixels.
4. Change the Limit frame rate. The default should be adequate in most applications. While decreasing
the limit may improve system performance, you may need to test different values to balance video
smoothness and processing power
5. Change the Bitrate. If using H.264 video codec, you can increase or decrease image quality by
increasing or decreasing the target Bitrate value. Video with a high level of motion and high resolution,
such as a sporting event, requires a high bitrate.
6. Click Apply.
Configure audio encoding
If your channel includes audio sources in any of the layouts, then AAC 48 kHz is set as the default audio
codec for the channel. You can choose a different audio codec for a channel using the Admin panel. The
following table lists the supported audio codecs and bitrates.
Table 48 Supported Audio codecs and bitrates
Value
Description
The AAC (default) audio codec is comparable to MP3 and may produce better
sound quality with a similar bitrate. Supported values are 16, 22, 44 and 48K kHz.
Most digital signals (HDMI or SDI sources) use 48 kHz audio. Matching the encoded
level with the source level provides the best sound quality by avoiding audio
AAC
resampling. For analog signals, 44 kHz provides higher sampling.
The maximum bitrate for mono encoding of a 44 kHz signal is 264 kbps. For stereo,
320 kbps is supported. Note that lower bitrates (e.g. 32 kbps) with a 44 kHz signal
may result in distorted audio.
MP3
MP3 provides a common audio format for audio storage. Supported values are 22
kHz, 44 kHz and 48 kHz.
249
Pearl-2 User Guide
Value
Configure audio encoding
Description
Most digital signals (HDMI or SDI sources) use 48 kHz audio. Matching the encoded
level with the source level provides the best sound quality by avoiding audio
resampling. For analog signals, 44 kHz provides higher sampling.
Flash (FLV) doesn't support 48 kHz MP3 audio. When selecting this
value you'll need to use a media player to preview your channel.
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) is a standard for digital audio in computer and other
devices such as, digital telephone systems.
Most digital signals (HDMI or SDI sources) use 48 kHz audio. Matching the encoded
level with the source level provides the best sound quality by avoiding audio
PCM
resampling.
Flash (FLV) doesn't support 48 kHz PCM audio. When selecting this
value you'll need to use a media player to preview your channel.
To change the audio codec for a channel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channel menu, select a channel and click Encoding. The encoding configuration page opens.
3. In the Audio settings, ensure that Enable audio is checked to include audio in the channel.
4. From the Audio format drop down, select an audio codec (AAC, MP3, or PCM).
5. From the Audio channels drop down, choose mono or stereo (default).
250
Pearl-2 User Guide
Multi-encoding and channel as a source
Choose Mono to have left and right stereo channels combined so that when you listen to
the streamed or recorded audio, the same blended sound comes through both the left and
right channels.
If you have only one mono analog input, use the left XLR / RCA jack and select mono
encoding to have the same sound come from both the left and right channels. (If stereo
sound is chosen, the sound will only come through on the left channel.)
6. From the Audio bitrate drop down, choose a birtrate. For guidance, see audio bitrates. For stereo
audio, we recommend 256 kbps or 320 kbps.
7. Click Apply.
Multi-encoding and channel as a source
Pearl-2 lets you easily do multi-encoding so you can record and stream the same content at different
encoding settings. This is useful when you want to:
l
Record a video at a high bitrate and frame size and live stream the same content at lower encoding
settings.
l
Record the channel while also sending two (or more) streams of that channel using different encoding
settings for CDNs that don't use adaptive bitrates.
l
Or record the same channel simultaneously at different resolutions, like 4K and full HD.
For example, take a scenario where you want to record a video at 1080p and 8 Mbps, while simultaneously
live stream the same video online 720p and 1 Mbps. You can create your custom layouts and do all your
switching in one channel (i.e. Channel 1) and then configure Channel 2 to use Channel 1 as a source. That way,
both channel's have the identical program. All you need to do now is configure each channel for the encoding
settings you want.
251
Pearl-2 User Guide
Multi-encoding and channel as a source
Follow these steps:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Create Channel 1 with your video and audio inputs. Add all your live switching layouts.
3. Set the encoding and streaming settings for channel 1.
4. Create Channel 2 for your recording with just one layout and add Channel 1 as the video source.
Stretch it to fill the full screen.
5. For Channel 2's audio source, choose Channel 1 if not already selected by default.
6. Set encoding and streaming settings for channel 2.
Using this process, you can again use the same video you’re recording on Channel 2, and stream it at a
different bitrate and frame size.
For alternative ways to set up multi-publishing, see Stream
252
Pearl-2 User Guide
Custom layout configuration
Custom layout configuration
Using the custom layout editor, you can create multiple layouts for your channel for completely different
looks, like picture in picture or side-by-side video sources. You can add media like transparent images and
custom backgrounds to a layout, and then resize and arrange all the different video and media elements the
way you want. When you're ready to stream or record, you can switch between the different layouts for a
more interesting and dynamic presentation.
Each layout you add to your channel adds overhead to Pearl-2, and more complex layouts consume more of
the system's resources. So, it's a good idea to delete any layouts you're not using.
Topics include:
l
About the custom layout editor
l
Add or edit a custom layout
l
Upload or remove an image using the Media page
l
Add an image to a layout
l
Crop a video source
l
Add a text overlay
l
Custom system variables for text overlays
l
Set the background color
l
Resize and position items using percents or pixels
l
Rename a layout
l
Delete, move, or duplicate a layout
l
Configure chroma keying
About the custom layout editor
Easily edit existing channel layouts or create new ones. The custom layout editor gives you full control of the
size and position of images, video sources, and text overlays.
You access the custom layout editor using the Admin panel when you select your channel from the Channels
menu and click Layouts. To add or delete a layout, see Add or edit a custom layout.
253
Pearl-2 User Guide
About the custom layout editor
Layout selector
When you open the custom layout editor for a channel, a list of layouts appears at the top. You can create and
delete layouts, duplicate layouts, choose which layout to preview and edit, and select the active live layout for
live switching.
Layout editing
Below the layout list is the layout editing area where you can add images, add and edit video sources, and add
text overlays to your layout. You can also choose the background matte as well as crop the images and video.
254
Pearl-2 User Guide
Move and size items in the layout editing area
The main layout area has the same frame size and aspect ratio as the encoding setting of the channel. As you
add items to the layout, they appear in the layout editing area. The currently selected item is presented in full
color. Unselected items appear transparent.
To change the settings for an item, click an item in the item list that appears below the layout editing area. The
settings for that item appears.
Move and size items in the layout editing area
To position the items in the layout editing area, you can use the mouse to click and drag an item in to
position, or you can type values into the fields along the side and bottom of the layout area and manually
position the selected item. You can enter values as a percentage of the full layout area (for example, enter 4%)
or in pixels (for example, enter 16px).
You can resize items by clicking and dragging the red and white handles at the corners of an item or by
entering values into the fields along the side and bottom of the layout area. To maintain the aspect ratio when
resizing an item, make sure you've checked the Keep aspect ratio when scaling box for that item.
A note about item positioning and sizing
There are four ways to position and size items in the layout area
1.
using the mouse
2.
using the keyboard
3.
using the manual positioning values with percents
4.
using the manual positioning values with pixels
To use the mouse:
Click and drag to move the item. Click and drag the round, red and white handles to resize an image or
video source (for text overlays, just use the padding settings). Using this method you can make quick
changes that are in increments of approximately 5% of the width or height of your layout area. For
more refined movements, press the Ctrl key on your keyboard while dragging the item with the mouse.
To use the keyboard:
Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the item up, down, left or right in the layout. Changes are
in increments of approximately 5% of the height or width of the layout area. Press the Ctrl key while
using the arrow keys to make more refined movements. To change the size of an image or video
source, press the Shift key while using the arrow keys (for text overlays, just use the padding settings).
Press both Ctrl and Shift for fine-grained size control.
255
Pearl-2 User Guide
Audio source selection and saving edits
Using percents:
Specify a whole number, followed by a percent sign (e.g. 4%) in any of the manual positioning fields.
See Resize and position items using percents or pixels for more information.
Using pixels:
If you need to specify an exact amount in pixels (rather than percent) you can type a pixel value in any
of the positioning value squares followed by the characters px (e.g. 56px). You can mix and match
pixels and percents changing only the boxes you want to use pixel values. At any time you can switch
back to percents by typing a percent. See Resize and position items using percents or pixels for more
information.
Audio source selection and saving edits
Select audio source(s) for your channel by adding them to your layouts. The bottom section of the custom
layout editor is where you select the audio source for the currently selected layout. It's also where you'll find
the Save button.
If a layout doesn't have an audio source selected, there will be silence when that layout is selected during live
switching, recording, and confidence monitoring.
If an Auto channel is selected as a video source, then Auto A or Auto B audio is selected by default.
256
Pearl-2 User Guide
Resize and position items using percents or pixels
You can have multiple audio sources in a layout. The audio sources are mixed together at the same volume
level as one another.
When setting the audio gain for your channel, add all your audio sources to your layout first, then set level of
gain for your audio sources appropriately. When you're done all your changes, click Save.
Resize and position items using percents or pixels
You can position and resize layout items (images, overlay text, sources) using the percent/pixel adjustment
boxes in a layout using the custom layout editor. See Resize layout items and Position layout items.
There are 3 adjustment boxes along your layout's horizontal axis and another 3 boxes along the vertical axis.
You can enter percent or pixel values into checked adjustment boxes (bordered with red) to position and
resize your item(s).
Percent values are used in adjustment boxes by default, and can be converted to pixels by simply overwriting
the percent value in a given adjustment box and replacing it with a pixel value.
When entering percent values, ensure the suffix "%" is added to your value (i.e. "20%").
When entering pixel values, ensure the suffix "px" is added to your value (i.e. "200px"). A
layout item's total pixel dimensions are a reflection of your channel's frame size, as
configured in your encoding settings (see Configure encoding).
Unchecked boxes are grayed-out in color and are not directly editable but dynamically change their values to
reflect a 100% total of either the horizontal or vertical axis, depending on values entered in adjacent
adjustment boxes. See the Adjustment boxes for item resizing and positioning table below for more
information.
The values contained in checked boxes (bordered with red) are anchored and do not dynamically adjust their
values.
257
Pearl-2 User Guide
Resize and position items using percents or pixels
Table 49 Adjustment boxes for item resizing and positioning
Item
Description
The area of your layout item. The 4 red/white dots represent the boundaries of your layout item.
1
There may be some black space between your item and its boundaries if Keep aspect ratio
when scaling is enabled (see Add an image to a layout).
2
The percentage of blank space (or number of pixels) from left to right on the layout's horizontal
axis. (I.e. the item is displaced 20%, or 200px, to the right).
If using percents, this value is the item's percentage of total width on the layout's horizontal
axis. (I.e. the item takes up 60% of the layout's width – represented by a thin red bar above the
3
percent box).
If using pixels, this value is the item's width, in pixels, with a maximum pixel width (i.e. frame
size) identified in your channel's encoding settings Configure encoding.
4
5
The percentage of blank space (or number of pixels) from right to left on the layout's horizontal
axis. (I.e. the item is displaced 20%, or 200px, to the left).
The percentage of blank space (or number of pixels) from the bottom upward on the layout's
258
Pearl-2 User Guide
Item
Resize and position items using percents or pixels
Description
horizontal axis. (I.e. the item is displaced 10%, or 100px, from the bottom up).
If using percents, this is the items percentage of total height on the layout's vertical axis.
(I.e. the item takes up 80% of the layout's height – represented by a thin red bar to the left of the
6
percent box).
If using pixels, this value is the item's height, in pixels, with a maximum pixel width (i.e. frame
size) identified in your channel's encoding settings Configure encoding.
7
The percentage of blank space (or number of pixels) from the top downward on the layout's
vertical axis. (I.e. the item is displaced 10%, or 200px, from the top down).
Resize layout items
The easiest way to resize a layout item is to use the center adjustment boxes (annotated as #3 and #6 in
the image above) on each of the horizontal and vertical axes to set your item's width and height respectively.
You can also use your mouse cursor to select the corners and manipulate them into the size you want. Hold
the shift key while doing so to keep the frame size constant. If you need to crop your image, see Crop a video
source.
259
Pearl-2 User Guide
Resize and position items using percents or pixels
In the example above, the presenter video source is resized to 60% of the layout's width and 70% of the
layout's height (with aspect ratio maintained). (Alternatively, pixels could be used to resize the layout item in a
similar fashion.)
An important consideration when resizing layout items
Your item will resize automatically if both left and right (or top and bottom) adjustment boxes contain values
(percents or pixels) that exceed the total of 100% (if using percents), or maximum pixel count (if using pixels)
for the corresponding horizontal (or vertical) axis.
For example, if you originally set the width of an item to 50% of the layout area (or 960 pixels, assuming your
item has a maximum width of 1920 pixels in this example) with no values entered in the left and right
adjustment boxes (i.e. the left and right boxes are deselected), the item automatically centers itself in the
layout area with the left and right percents at 25% each (remember – percents are used by default in the
layout editor, even if pixels are used in adjacent boxes). Combined with the 50% (960px) width of the image,
these two 25% (480px) values total 100% (1920px) of the layout's horizontal axis.
If you instead decide to enable the left and right percent boxes and change their values to 30% each (instead
of the current 25%), then the image's width shrinks from 50% (960px) to 40% (750px) to accommodate the
change and maintain a total layout width of 100% (1920px).
Setting the left and right (or top and bottom) percent values so the axis total among the
three percent boxes exceeds 100% will always result in the center percent box value
automatically reducing itself to maintain the 100% total, shrinking your selected layout
item in the process.
Position layout items
Items are positioned in a custom layout by entering values into the left/right and top/bottom adjustment
boxes (identified as #2/4 and #5/7 respectively in the Adjustment boxes for item resizing and positioning
table above). The values entered into these boxes represent a portion of the total percentage (or pixels) of the
layout's width or height.
260
Pearl-2 User Guide
Resize and position items using percents or pixels
Alternatively, you can position your layout items using the keyboard by selecting the item
with your mouse cursor, and pressing the arrow keys to move the selected item by 5% in
any direction.
You can also position your item with additional keyboard precision by holding Ctrl and
pressing the arrow keys to nudge your item by a very small fraction in the direction of
your choice.
Note that there is no one way to move and resize your layout items. The examples below are simply
descriptions of one or two ways you might resize and/or position layout items.
Example 1: horizontal positioning using percents
To position your item along the horizontal axis, first resize your items if desired (as described in Resize layout
items), then enter a percent or pixel value into either the left or the right adjustment box to shift your layout
item.
For example, using percents to move a layout item with a 60% width as far to the right of the
layout area as possible, you would need to enter 40% into the left percent box to push the item
to the right. The layout item originally takes up 60% of the layout width, so this added 40% shift
pushes the item as far to the right as possible (I.e. 100% of the horizontal axis).
The right adjustment box automatically sets itself to 0% to reflect that there is no more room remaining to
maneuver the image along the horizontal axis any further. Alternatively, you could reposition the image in the
exact same way by instead setting the right percent box to 0%.
261
Pearl-2 User Guide
Resize and position items using percents or pixels
Example 2: vertical positioning using pixels
To position your layout item along the vertical axis, enter a percent or pixel value into either the top or the
bottom adjustment box to shift your layout item downward or upward, respectively.
For example, using pixels to move a layout item that is set to 756px in height to the top of the
layout while leaving a small margin of background (say 25px), you could either enter "25px" into
the top percent box (to specify the small margin from the top down) or enter 27% into the
bottom percent box (to specify a 27% margin from the bottom up – added to the item's 70%
height this leaves a 3% margin above your layout item.)
You can manipulate elements to get the custom look that you want using percents, pixels, your keyboard, or
any combination. Here's an example of using pixels and percents to created a custom layout with two video
sources and a background image.
262
Pearl-2 User Guide
Open the custom layout editor for a channel
Open the custom layout editor for a channel
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Layouts. The custom layout editor opens.
3. From the Layouts list, select the layout you want to edit. The layout editor updates to display the
selected layout and the row for the selected layout is highlighted in green.
If this is a new or an unformatted layout, the layout area is empty and a black background matte
appears.
263
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add or edit a custom layout
Add or edit a custom layout
If you want to do live switching on your channel for a more dynamic video presentation, then you need to add
different layouts that you can switch between. We recommend that you rename your channel and layouts to
something more intuitive rather than using the default names, see Rename a channel and Rename a layout.
Creating layouts gives you full control over what's presented to your viewers. You can do things like change
the size and position of images, add custom backgrounds, up scale and downscale your video sources, add
multiple audio source and text overlays to mention just a few.
Important considerations:
If you're live switching your channel, we recommend that you set the frame size to a fixed size instead of using
the default automatic detection of source frame size. Setting the frame size to a fixed value ensures you don't
experience any stream interruptions if the source frame size changes due to layouts that contain a single
video source that has a different frame size than those in other layouts, see Configure video encoding.
To add or edit a custom layout for a channel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Layouts. The custom layout editor page opens.
264
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add or edit a custom layout
3. Select a layout from the layout list or click Add Layout to create a new layout. If this is a new channel
or layout, the layout area is empty and you see a black background matte. See Add video sources or a
channel as a source
4. Click and drag the red and white handles on the corners of the video source to re-size it in the layout
editor area.
265
Pearl-2 User Guide
Rename a layout
5. Click Save when you're done or continue to add additional video sources to the layout, resize and crop
each video source to exactly how you want them to appear.
Rename a layout
You can rename any layout, even the currently active layout. Layouts you create are automatically given a
default name. The first layout is called Default. You can change the name using the custom layout editor.
If you're using the touch screen for live switching, consider using shortened names for layouts.
Long names get truncated on the touch screen.
You can include certain international characters in layout names. Pearl-2 supports common character sets for
Western and Central European languages, Nordic languages, and Russian. For a complete list, see International
character support.
To rename a layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Layouts. The custom layout editor opens.
3. From the layout list at the top of the page, click on the row to select a layout. The layout appears in the
layout area.
266
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete, move, or duplicate a layout
4. Click the name of the layout. The name turns red.
5. Enter a new name and press Enter.
Delete, move, or duplicate a layout
Layouts appear listed in the layouts list in the same order that they are presented on the touch screen. It's
simple to re-order, remove, and duplicate layouts using the custom layout editor.
Reorder layouts
To move a layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Layouts. The custom layout editor opens.
3. In the layouts list, click and drag the icon with the three horizontal bars at the left side of the row to
rearrange the order of your layouts.
Delete layouts
You can delete any layout except the currently active layout.
To delete a layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Layouts. The custom layout editor opens.
3. Click the X at the right side of the row for the layout you want to delete. The system prompts you to
make sure you want to delete the layout.
267
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete, move, or duplicate a layout
4. Click OK.
When using the switcher on Epiphan Live, refresh your browser if you still see a layout that was
deleted. The deleted layout should disappear.
Duplicate layouts
If you're planning to use live switching, we strongly recommend you rename the channel rather than using the
default channel name, see Rename a channel.
To duplicate a layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Layouts. The custom layout editor opens.
3. Click the double folder icon at the right side of the row for the layout you want to duplicate. A duplicate
of the layout is added at the bottom of the list.
4. Click OK.
Important note for channels with multiple layouts
When a channel has only one layout and that layout has only one video source, the default channel name is
the same as the name of the video source. So for example, a channel with one layout that has HDMI-A in it is
named HDMI-A by default.
When you add a second layout to the channel, the channel name automatically changes to a generic name
Channel X, where X is the channel index number. For example, HDMI-A changes to Channel 1.
Changing the channel name affects system operation.
268
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set the background color
l
If the channel is streaming, the stream is stopped and restarted.
l
If the channel's recorder is recording, then recording is stopped and a new file is started.
If you delete all the layouts in a channel until there is only one layout left and that layout has only one video
source assigned, then the channel name changes back to the name of the video source. For example, Channel
1 changes to HDMI-A
To avoid channel name changes, we recommend that you rename the channel to a custom name. Changing
the channel name to a custom name ensures that no automatic channel renaming happens, see Rename a
channel.
Set the background color
You can select the background color to fill any unused space in a layout using the custom layout editor. For
example you can add a color from your corporate color scheme.
To set a background color matte for a layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Layout. The custom layout editor opens.
3. Click the drop down arrow next to the existing (by default black) background color field. The color
picker opens.
4. Pick a new color or type in an RGB value in the field; the color is updated in the layout area.
5. Click anywhere off the color picker to close the picker.
6. Click Save.
269
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add an image to a layout
Add an image to a layout
You can add images to a layout using the custom layout editor. Use images to create a background for your
source, to add your corporate logo, or to add relevant information about the event you're streaming.
Pearl-2 supports png (PNG) and .jpg (JPEG) images. You can upload images that are 16×16 pixels to a
maximum image size of 4096×4096; however it's strongly recommended that you upload exactly the size you
need to avoid image scaling.
Images can be uploaded in advance from the Media page, see Upload or remove an image using the Media
page. Otherwise, you can drag and drop to upload an image using the custom layout editor. Note that no
warning is displayed if the image is too large or if an image exists with the same name using drag and drop.
The file will be replaced with the new image you upload.
Any image without the proper file extension appears in the layout editor but doesn't display in the actual
video output. For instance, a PNG image with the file extension .bmp or an invalid file extension such as .png2
are examples of improper file extensions.
If your uploaded image does not appear in the list, ensure it doesn't exceed the maximum
image size of 4096×4096.
To add an image to your layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Layouts. The custom layout editor opens.
3. Click Add item and choose Picture from the drop down. The picture settings appears.
4. Select an image from the Use image drop down. To upload the image, drag and drop it from your
desktop to the gray Please select picture area. For best results, keep the Keep aspect ratio when
scaling check box selected (default).
270
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add an image to a layout
For best results, check Keep aspect ratio when scaling in the Source settings.
5. Your picture appears in the Picture settings preview and is added to the layout area.
6. In the layout area, use the mouse, the keyboard or the manual position value fields to position and
resize your image. For background images, click and drag to fill the full layout area. For more details, see
About the custom layout editor.
271
Pearl-2 User Guide
Upload or remove an image using the Media page
7. Re-order the items in your layout by clicking and dragging items in the item list.
To layer video sources over top of each other, like for background images or a transparent
logo, you can click and drag elements that appear in the item list beneath Add new item
and change their order. Items that are higher up the list appear over top items that are
lower down the list.
8. Click Save.
Upload or remove an image using the Media page
You can customize your channels by adding pictures as backgrounds, overlays, or transparent overlays. Image
files formats supported include: PNG and JPEG.
The maximum supported image size is 3840×2160. No warning or error message is displayed if your image is
too large. Files that exceed the maximum size won't appear in the drop-down list.
272
Pearl-2 User Guide
Upload or remove an image using the Media page
For best results always upload images that are already the correct size needed in your layout.
Background images should match the frame size of your channel (frame size is set in the
Encoding configuration page).
There are two ways to upload images. You can upload images using the Media page or drag and drop your
image in to a layout using the custom layout editor, see Add an image to a layout.
Important considerations
l
Media file names should not include special characters, slashes, or spaces.
l
Uploading an image of the same name overwrites the existing image.
l
Any image without the proper file extension appears in the layout editor but doesn't display in the
actual video output. For instance, a PNG image with the file extension .bmp or an invalid file extension
such as .png2 are examples of improper file extensions.
To upload or remove an image using the Media page:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Media. The Media page opens.
3. To upload a file, click Choose File and browse to select the file to upload, then click Upload.
4. To remove a file, click Remove beside the file name and click OK when prompted.
273
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add a text overlay
If you delete an image that is used as part of the layout for any channel, select a different image
or no image by using the drop-down list in the Picture settings box within that channel's layout
before deleting the file using the steps below.
Add a text overlay
Text overlays are useful to add information like a title, location, or the date and time in to layouts in your
channel. You can add text to any layout using the custom layout editor. The following tables lists shortcut
codes that you can enter and the resulting content that appears on screen.
Table 50 Overlay text shortcut codes
Item
date format: yyyy-
Shortcut code
Example
%F
2019-01-26
%D
01/26/19
year
%G
2019
month (01)
%m
01
month (Jan)
%b
Jan
month (January)
%B
January
day of the month
%d
26
weekday (Thu)
%a
Thu
weekday (Thursday)
%A
Thursday
time
%T
08:40:45
hour
%k
08
minute
%M
40
second
%S
45
millisecond
%#m
378
channel name
%c
Camera Feed 1
mm-dd
date format:
mm/dd/yy
274
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add a text overlay
If you use a non-monospaced font, the size of the text overlay changes as the letters, numbers,
and the length of words change. Use a monospaced font to maintain a consistent size for the text
overlay (assuming the total number of characters in the text string doesn't change).
You can include certain international characters in text overlays. Pearl-2 supports common character sets for
Western and Central European languages, Nordic languages, and Russian. For a complete list, see International
character support.
To add a text overlay to your layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Layouts. The custom layout editor opens.
3. Click Add new item and select Text. The new item is added to the layout editing area and to the top of
the list of items. The Text settings also appear.
275
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add a text overlay
You can change the order in which items appear on the layout editing area by re-arranging
the order the items appear in the list beneath Add new item. Items at the top of the list
appear in front, and items lower down the list appear behind.
4. In the Text field, type what you want to appear in the text overlay. Include Overlay text shortcut
codes as needed. Press Tab or click outside the text field to refresh the preview in the custom layout
editor.
For example, if you enter:
%A %B %d, %G. Live streaming channel Auto A.
The resulting text is displayed:
5. Select the Font, Font size, and Text color. You can also change the default Line spacing in
percentages. For a mono-spaced font, use Droid Sans Mono.
Limitations: The maximum supported text size is 500 px. Padding values must not
exceed the frame size. Do not enter negative padding values.
276
Pearl-2 User Guide
Custom system variables for text overlays
6. Resize the overlay text box using the padding settings.
The handles on the corner of the overlay text box are not click-and-drag and do not
resize the text box. To resize the text box, use the padding fields to add space above,
below, and on either side of the text.
7. In the layout editing area, click and drag to move the overlay text box or enter values in the manual
position value fields along the side and bottom of the layout area.
8. Click Save.
Custom system variables for text overlays
Using HTTP or RS-232 APIs, you can create your own custom system variables for use in text overlays. This is
useful to add custom overlay text that changes throughout the course of your live stream or recorded
program.
For example, using the HTTP API you can create a system variable for the current GPS co-ordinates, then use a
script to update the GPS co-ordinates in your custom variable as the physical location in your stream changes.
Here's an example custom variable called gpsvar1 that has a value of N103 68201 W765 29712. To insert
the custom system variable into a text overlay, simply type %(gpsvar1) into the Text field.
If you use a non-monospaced font, the size of the text overlay changes depending on the characters in the
content and the number of characters. To maintain a consistent size for the text overlay in the layout area,
use a monospaced font and make sure the number of characters doesn't change.
The RS-232 SET command syntax in this case is VAR.SET.<name>=<value>, for example:
VAR.SET.gpsvar1=N103 68201 W765 29712
277
Pearl-2 User Guide
Crop a video source
where <name> is gpsvar1 and <value> is N103 68201 W765 29712.
There are no limits for the frequency of system variable commands using RS-232. However, only one
command can be issued at a time.
HTTP system variable commands are issued at a frequency of 5 per second. You can include up to six
variables in a single HTTP SET command. After issuing a SET command, all channels using the specified
variables are updated.
System variables are considered volatile and are deleted when the system reboots.
To learn more about global variable command syntax and important considerations when using them, see the
Pearl System API Guide for details.
For more information about sizing and positioning elements in the custom layout editor area, see About the
custom layout editor.
Crop a video source
You can crop a video source to change the size and shape of your video as it appears on screen using the
custom layout editor. Cropping a source gives you a lot of advantages and can help to conserve the overall
amount of processing CPU usage for your Pearl-2. You can capture a 1080p section from a 4K source, a
specific aspect ratio or size from a source, or select a crop that fits into your layout better than the full area of
your video.
To crop a source in your layout:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Layouts. The custom layout editor opens.
3. Select a video source from the items list. The Source settings appears.
278
Pearl-2 User Guide
Crop a video source
4. Click Crop. Your video source appears in a pop-up editing window.
5. The Crop window has several tools for creating the best crop possible.
l
Free form is the default crop mode. In this mode, you can change the size, aspect ratio, and
position of the crop with minimal restrictions.
l
The red box with click-and-drag circular handles in the corners shows the cropped area that
appears in the final layout. Only the content inside the box shows in the layout. In Free form
mode, you can click and drag the red handles to change the size and ratio of the box, and you
can click and drag the box itself to change its position. When you have selected an aspect ratio,
279
Pearl-2 User Guide
Crop a video source
you can alter the size by dragging the red handles. When you have selected a size, you can
change its position by dragging the box.
l
The number boxes allow you to make precise crops. Click the text boxes and enter a number to
determine how many pixels of distance from the edge that line is drawn. You can also erase the
"px" after the number and type in "%" to manipulate the box using percentages. For more details
on how these boxes work, see Resize and position items using percents or pixels.
l
To create a crop with a specific resolution, choose a Size from the available list. This creates a
box with that exact resolution. Click and drag the box to move it into position. The size cannot
be changed except by selecting a different size, or by selecting Free form or Aspect Ratio.
l
Selecting an aspect ratio allows you to create a crop box of almost any size in a particular ratio.
After selecting a ratio, you can manipulate the crop area's size and position without changing its
shape.
6. Click OK to close the crop window.
7. Click Save.
You can also manipulate the crop-box using keyboard controls. You can move the crop box using
the arrow keys, and holding Ctrl or Shift while resizing the box keeps the aspect ratio of the box
constant. Hold Shift and use the arrow keys to move one side of the box while leaving the other
in the same location.
280
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure chroma keying
Configure chroma keying
Pearl-2 supports chroma keying so you can add special effects to any video source in a custom channel. Add
great looking effects such as animated lower thirds using a titler software or add a custom background using
green screen. It's easy to get creative.
With chroma keying, you can choose a specific color in your video scene and replace everything of that color
with a different image or video.
The most common color used for chroma keying is green. In this example, the original video source shows
someone standing in front of a green screen. Using chroma key in Pearl-2, an image of an office space
replaces the green background.
White, grey, and black are not recommended colors for chroma keying. Those are treated
as the same color with a different luminance value. The result in Pearl-2 is that the chroma
keying affect gets applied to all shades ranging from white to black.
You configure chroma keying using the custom layout editor, see About the custom layout editor.
Topics include:
l
Performance considerations
l
What is upstream chroma keying?
l
What is downstream chroma keying?
l
Set up chroma key for a green screen video source
l
Add external titler software effects to Pearl-2
l
Add chroma key titler effects using Microsoft Powerpoint slides
281
Pearl-2 User Guide
Performance considerations
Performance considerations
Chroma keying can impact the performance of Pearl-2 depending on factors such as how many chroma key
sources you add, if you scale the chroma key video source using the custom layout editor, and your frame
rate.
For best performance, avoid excessive scaling of video sources that have chroma keying enabled. Cropping
video sources that have chroma keying enabled helps reduce processing and optimizes the performance of
Pearl-2.
You can monitor the performance of Pearl-2 from the Info tab using the Admin panel for the custom channel
that has chroma keying enabled. For more information about performance monitoring, see What is Pearl-2?.
Observe the following:
l
For Pearl-2, the maximum resolution is 1920×1080 at 30 fps for chroma keying.
l
Avoid scaling a video source that has chroma key enabled.
l
Where possible, crop the video source that has the chroma key enabled to minimize the area that Pearl2 must process for the chroma key effect.
l
Overloading the Pearl-2 processor can cause frame drops.
What is upstream chroma keying?
Upstream chroma keying applies the chroma key effect to a specific video source before it's processed,
switched, and broadcast.
For example, you could display the name of a guest using titler software on only the camera that is dedicated
for close ups of that person but not on any of your other video sources.
282
Pearl-2 User Guide
What is downstream chroma keying?
To get an upstream key effect using Pearl-2, you can create custom layouts for each video source using the
custom layout editor. Then set up chroma keying on just one custom layout. Only the video source that
appears in the custom layout with chroma key enabled has the chroma key effect applied to it.
If you want to apply the chroma key effect to a video source that appears in several different
custom layouts, you must enable the chroma key effect in each custom layout where that
particular video source appears.
What is downstream chroma keying?
Downstream chroma keying applies the chroma key effect to all video sources you broadcast after they're
processed and switched.
283
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up chroma key for a green screen video source
A common use of downstream keying is to display a persistent image, like a company logo, so that it always
appears on screen.
To get a downstream key effect using Pearl-2, you can enable the same chroma key effect on all your custom
layouts. This way, the same chroma key effect gets applied to everything you stream or record.
Set up chroma key for a green screen video source
A common use of chroma keying is to use a green screen and then replace the green background with another
video or still image.
284
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up chroma key for a green screen video source
Your chroma key source can come from a video camera or an effects computer connected to Pearl-2. The
background you use can be from another video source, a still image that you've uploaded to Pearl-2, or from
an effects computer.
This example shows two camera sources connected to Pearl-2. The green screen appears in the video source
connected to HDMI-A and the office background is from HDMI-B.
To configure chroma keying for a green screen video source:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Follow the steps in Add or edit a custom layout to create a custom channel.
3. From the custom layout editor, click Add new item and select Video Source.
285
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up chroma key for a green screen video source
4. Click Source and select the video source that you want showing through the background of your
chroma key colored areas. For detailed steps, see Add video sources or a channel as a source.
5. In the layout editing area, click and drag to position the video. See the note after this procedure for
positioning techniques.
For best results, select the Keep aspect ratio when scaling checkbox from the Source
settings box.
6. Click Add new Item again and add the video source that has the green screen image.
7. Click the Crop button and crop your green screen video source in the pop-up crop editing window. For
detailed steps, see Crop a video source. Click OK when your done to return to the custom layout editor.
Cropping the green screen video source helps optimize the performance of Pearl-2.
8. In the layout area, position the green screen video source over top the other video source. To optimize
performance, avoid scaling the green screen video source if you can.
286
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up chroma key for a green screen video source
9. With the green screen video source selected, check Enable Chroma keying in the custom layout
editor. The chroma keying options appear.
287
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up chroma key for a green screen video source
White, grey, and black are not recommended colors for chroma keying. Pearl-2 treats them
as the same color with different luminance values. As such, chroma keying affects all
shades ranging from white to black.
10. Click the eye dropper and then click on a color in the thumbnail image to choose the chroma key color.
The background video image shows through all the colored areas on the chroma key video
layer that match the color you select as the chroma key.
11. Adjust the chroma color selection and blend the edges to remove unwanted chroma effects or residual
color.
a. Enter a number in the Key threshold field to adjust the color selection. A value of 0 equals the
original color you selected. A higher value widens the range of the selected chroma color. A lower
number narrows the range of the selected chroma color.
b. Enter a number in the Edge blend field to smooth out and adjust the color around the edges in
your image.
288
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up chroma key for a green screen video source
12. Click Save when you're done.
A note about item positioning and sizing
There are four ways to position and size items in the layout area
1.
using the mouse
2.
using the keyboard
3.
using the manual positioning values with percents
4.
using the manual positioning values with pixels
To use the mouse:
Click and drag to move the item. Click and drag the round, red and white handles to resize an image or
video source (for text overlays, just use the padding settings). Using this method you can make quick
changes that are in increments of approximately 5% of the width or height of your layout area. For
more refined movements, press the Ctrl key on your keyboard while dragging the item with the mouse.
To use the keyboard:
Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the item up, down, left or right in the layout. Changes are
in increments of approximately 5% of the height or width of the layout area. Press the Ctrl key while
using the arrow keys to make more refined movements. To change the size of an image or video
source, press the Shift key while using the arrow keys (for text overlays, just use the padding settings).
Press both Ctrl and Shift for fine-grained size control.
Using percents:
Specify a whole number, followed by a percent sign (e.g. 4%) in any of the manual positioning fields.
See Resize and position items using percents or pixels for more information.
Using pixels:
If you need to specify an exact amount in pixels (rather than percent) you can type a pixel value in any
of the positioning value squares followed by the characters px (e.g. 56px). You can mix and match
pixels and percents changing only the boxes you want to use pixel values. At any time you can switch
back to percents by typing a percent. See Resize and position items using percents or pixels for more
information.
289
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add chroma key titler effects using Microsoft
Powerpoint slides
Add chroma key titler effects using Microsoft Powerpoint slides
You can use the chroma key feature on Pearl-2 with Microsoft Powerpoint slides to add animated titles and
other Powerpoint effects. The setup is really the same as using a dedicated titling software on an effects
computer with Pearl-2.
This example shows an HDMI camera connected to the HDMI-A port on Pearl-2 and an effects computer that
has a Powerpoint presentation loaded on it connected to the HDMI-B port. To the computer, Pearl-2 is
treated just like an external display.
You can connect the effects computer with the Powerpoint file to any supported port that is
available on Pearl-2.
To apply the chroma key effect to a single video source using Pearl-2:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
290
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add chroma key titler effects using Microsoft
Powerpoint slides
2. Follow the steps in Add or edit a custom layout to create a custom channel.
3. From the custom layout editor, click Add new item and select Video Source from the drop down box.
4. Click Source and select the video source that you want showing in the background. For detailed steps,
see Add video sources or a channel as a source.
5. In the layout editing area, click and drag to position the video. See the note after this procedure for
positioning techniques.
For best results, select the Keep aspect ratio when scaling checkbox from the Source
settings box.
6. Click Add new Item again and add the video source from your effects computer.
7. Click the Crop button and crop your Powerpoint video source in the pop-up crop editing window. For
detailed steps, see Crop a video source. Click OK when your done to return to the custom layout editor.
291
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add chroma key titler effects using Microsoft
Powerpoint slides
Cropping the Powerpoint computer video source helps optimize the performance of Pearl2.
8. In the layout area, position the Powerpoint video source over top the other video source. To optimize
performance, avoid scaling the Powerpoint video source if you can.
292
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add chroma key titler effects using Microsoft
Powerpoint slides
9. With the Powerpoint video source selected, check Enable Chroma keying in the custom layout editor.
The chroma keying options appear.
293
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add chroma key titler effects using Microsoft
Powerpoint slides
10. Click the eye dropper and then click on a color in the thumbnail image to choose the chroma key color.
The background video image shows through all the colored areas on the chroma key video
layer that match the color you select as the chroma key.
11. Adjust the chroma color selection and blend the edges to remove unwanted chroma effects or residual
color.
a. Enter a number in the Key threshold field to adjust the color selection. A value of 0 equals the
original color you selected. A higher value widens the range of the selected chroma color. A lower
number narrows the range of the selected chroma color.
b. Enter a number in the Edge blend field to smooth out and adjust the color around the edges in
your image.
12. Click Save when you're done.
294
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add external titler software effects to Pearl-2
A note about item positioning and sizing
There are four ways to position and size items in the layout area
1.
using the mouse
2.
using the keyboard
3.
using the manual positioning values with percents
4.
using the manual positioning values with pixels
To use the mouse:
Click and drag to move the item. Click and drag the round, red and white handles to resize an image or
video source (for text overlays, just use the padding settings). Using this method you can make quick
changes that are in increments of approximately 5% of the width or height of your layout area. For
more refined movements, press the Ctrl key on your keyboard while dragging the item with the mouse.
To use the keyboard:
Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the item up, down, left or right in the layout. Changes are
in increments of approximately 5% of the height or width of the layout area. Press the Ctrl key while
using the arrow keys to make more refined movements. To change the size of an image or video
source, press the Shift key while using the arrow keys (for text overlays, just use the padding settings).
Press both Ctrl and Shift for fine-grained size control.
Using percents:
Specify a whole number, followed by a percent sign (e.g. 4%) in any of the manual positioning fields.
See Resize and position items using percents or pixels for more information.
Using pixels:
If you need to specify an exact amount in pixels (rather than percent) you can type a pixel value in any
of the positioning value squares followed by the characters px (e.g. 56px). You can mix and match
pixels and percents changing only the boxes you want to use pixel values. At any time you can switch
back to percents by typing a percent. See Resize and position items using percents or pixels for more
information.
Add external titler software effects to Pearl-2
You can use Pearl-2 with titling software that provides chroma key output to add effects like animated lower
thirds.
295
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add external titler software effects to Pearl-2
This example shows an HDMI camera connected to the HDMI-A port on Pearl-2 and an effects computer with
titler software connected to the HDMI-B port. To the computer, Pearl-2 is treated just like an external display.
You can connect the effects computer with the titling software to any supported port that is
available on Pearl-2.
To apply the chroma key effect to a single video source using Pearl-2:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Follow the steps in Add or edit a custom layout to create a custom channel.
3. From the custom layout editor, click Add new item and select Video Source from the drop down box.
296
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add external titler software effects to Pearl-2
4. Click Source and select the video source that you want showing in the background. For detailed steps,
see Add video sources or a channel as a source.
5. In the layout editing area, click and drag to position the video. See the note after this procedure for
positioning techniques.
For best results, select the Keep aspect ratio when scaling checkbox from the Source
settings box.
6. Click Add new Item again and add the video source from your effects computer.
7. Click the Crop button and crop your effects video source in the pop-up crop editing window. For
detailed steps, see Crop a video source. Click OK when your done to return to the custom layout editor.
297
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add external titler software effects to Pearl-2
Cropping the effects computer video source helps optimize the performance of Pearl-2.
8. In the layout area, position the effects video source over top the other video source. To optimize
performance, avoid scaling the effects video source if you can.
298
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add external titler software effects to Pearl-2
9. With the effects video source selected, check Enable Chroma keying in the custom layout editor. The
chroma keying options appear.
299
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add external titler software effects to Pearl-2
10. Click the eye dropper and then click on a color in the thumbnail image to choose the chroma key color.
The background video image shows through all the colored areas on the chroma key video
layer that match the color you select as the chroma key.
11. Adjust the chroma color selection and blend the edges to remove unwanted chroma effects or residual
color.
a. Enter a number in the Key threshold field to adjust the color selection. A value of 0 equals the
original color you selected. A higher value widens the range of the selected chroma color. A lower
number narrows the range of the selected chroma color.
b. Enter a number in the Edge blend field to smooth out and adjust the color around the edges in
your image.
12. Click Save when you're done.
300
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add external titler software effects to Pearl-2
A note about item positioning and sizing
There are four ways to position and size items in the layout area
1.
using the mouse
2.
using the keyboard
3.
using the manual positioning values with percents
4.
using the manual positioning values with pixels
To use the mouse:
Click and drag to move the item. Click and drag the round, red and white handles to resize an image or
video source (for text overlays, just use the padding settings). Using this method you can make quick
changes that are in increments of approximately 5% of the width or height of your layout area. For
more refined movements, press the Ctrl key on your keyboard while dragging the item with the mouse.
To use the keyboard:
Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the item up, down, left or right in the layout. Changes are
in increments of approximately 5% of the height or width of the layout area. Press the Ctrl key while
using the arrow keys to make more refined movements. To change the size of an image or video
source, press the Shift key while using the arrow keys (for text overlays, just use the padding settings).
Press both Ctrl and Shift for fine-grained size control.
Using percents:
Specify a whole number, followed by a percent sign (e.g. 4%) in any of the manual positioning fields.
See Resize and position items using percents or pixels for more information.
Using pixels:
If you need to specify an exact amount in pixels (rather than percent) you can type a pixel value in any
of the positioning value squares followed by the characters px (e.g. 56px). You can mix and match
pixels and percents changing only the boxes you want to use pixel values. At any time you can switch
back to percents by typing a percent. See Resize and position items using percents or pixels for more
information.
301
Pearl-2 User Guide
Video and audio input sources
Video and audio input sources
The Admin panel automatically discovers all video and audio sources that you connect to the input ports on
Pearl-2 and lists them in the Inputs menu of the Admin panel. You can also configure a video source's settings
using the Admin panel.
Networked video sources like RTSP, NDI, and SRT need to be manually added before they display in the
Inputs menu. A corresponding audio source.s is always added to your custom layout editor when you add a
networked video source, even if the video stream contains no audio, see Add an audio source to a layout.
An input source's content can be video, a picture, or music from a connected audio mixer. Content can
originate from a camera, computer screen, an imported image in Pearl-2, and even another Pearl-2 device.
Video sources are also displayed on the Epiphan Live control interface. See Monitor video
and audio input sources for more information.
Topics include:
l
About connecting video and audio sources
l
Tested RTSP-based IP cameras
l
Supported web cameras
l
Connect an RTSP source
l
Connect an SRT stream as an input
l
Connect an NDI source
l
Connect an AV.io video grabber
l
Preview a video source using the Admin Panel
l
Rename an input port
l
Configure a video input source
l
Add a custom No Signal image
For instructions to configure an audio input and adjust audio gain or delay, see Audio input ports.
About connecting video and audio sources
You can connect and disconnect video and audio sources while Pearl-2 is powered on and when it is powered
off. However, for network video sources connecting via the Ethernet port, the source device sending the
stream and Pearl-2 must both be powered on to make the connection.
Connect your video and audio sources to the following input ports on your system:
302
Pearl-2 User Guide
About connecting video and audio sources
Table 51 Cable and port connections
Source type
Input port
SDI
SDI port
HDMI (HDCP-protected) or DVI
HDMI port
USB video
USB 3.0 port (rear)
Ethernet
Audio
RJ-45 port. NDI, SRT and RTSP are digital sources you
connect to your Pearl-2 via the Ethernet network port.
Audio input port: XLR or RCA
Changing the video or audio source that is streamed or recorded can cause the recording to stop or the
stream frame size to change depending on how your channel is configured. If the frame size changes, viewers
may be disconnected and need to re-connect to the stream.
When a video source is connected, the system automatically detects and adjusts the image capture settings
every 60 seconds. The interval is configurable. Generally no further configuration is needed; however you can
fine tune some settings using the Admin panel.
If no video source is connected to an input port or no stream is being transmitted from a source over the
Ethernet connection, "No Signal" displays wherever that input is used in your channels and layouts. You can
change that to display the default "No Signal" image for Pearl-2 or create your own custom no signal image.
See Add a custom No Signal image .
The Admin panel automatically discovers all video and audio sources that you connect to the input ports on
Pearl-2 and lists them in the Inputs menu of the Admin panel. Sources coming from the Ethernet network
such as NDI, SRT and RTSP need to be added manually to appear in the Inputs menu. When a network source
is added as an input, a corresponding audio source is automatically added to the list of audio sources for your
channels, even if there is no audio. See Add an audio source to a layout.
You can also connect RTSP sources such as IP cameras and even other Pearl-2 systems to your Pearl-2 over
the network using the Admin panel.
303
Pearl-2 User Guide
Tested RTSP-based IP cameras
Audio mixers and other line level devices can be connected to the XLR and RCA audio input ports on Pearl-2.
Audio from sources connected to the HDMI, SDI, and USB video ports is also supported.
Tested RTSP-based IP cameras
Pearl-2 is compatible with all Ethernet-based IP cameras and other RTSP sources. The cameras listed in the
following table represent a sample of common third-party cameras that have been tested to work with Pearl2. Information such as URL syntax, default credentials and audio streaming capability specific to each camera
is included.
The URL syntax refers to the additional piece of text that needs to be included in the source URL to connect
your IP camera to Pearl-2, see Connect an RTSP source to learn how to connect an RTSP source like an IP
camera using the Admin panel.
For example, to connect a Sony SRG300SE camera with an IP address of "192.168.0.160", your source
URL needs to be entered as:
"rtsp://192.168.0.160/video1"
304
Pearl-2 User Guide
Tested RTSP-based IP cameras
Or, if using a Q-See QCN8029Z camera, your source URL needs to be entered as:
"rtsp://192.168.0.160/"
Table 52 List of tested IP cameras
Default
Brand
Model
Image
URL syntax
Audio?
username
and
password
admin
Q-See
QCN8029Z
/
No
admin
admin
Sony
SRG300SE
/video1
Yes
admin
/MediaInput/h264/stream_
1
Panasonic
AWHE40HPK⁑
(To add a second URL, use:
admin
Yes
12345
"/MediaInput/h264/stream_
2")
root
Axis
P1428-E
/axis-media/media.amp
No
root
root
Axis
M1034-W
/axis-media/media.amp
Yes
admin
⁑
During testing, the Panasonic AW-HE40 did not consistently synchronize its time with Pearl-2.
305
Pearl-2 User Guide
Supported web cameras
Supported web cameras
Pearl-2 supports most webcams and USB audio sources, such as USB microphones. The following list of web
cameras have been tested for compatibility with Pearl-2. If your web camera doesn't appear in the list, that
just means your model hasn't been tested. It's likely that it will work without any issues.
Table 53 List of tested Web cameras
l
Logitech HD Pro Webcam C920 (Max video mode: [email protected])
l
Logitech C925e (Max video mode: [email protected])
l
Microsoft LifeCam Studio (Max video mode: [email protected])
l
Microsoft LifeCam HD-3000 (Max video mode: [email protected])
l
IPEVO Ziggi-HD Plus
For the Ziggi-HD Plus web camera, enable the power line frequency setting in the web camera
before connecting the camera to Pearl-2.
When you Configure a video input source, the Default video mode is not necessarily achievable for that
web camera. For instance, a camera might have a default mode of 1080p but have a Maximum video mode
of 720p. If no settings are changed, the camera simply outputs video at 720p in this case.
Connect an RTSP source
You can connect RTSP sources such as IP cameras and other Pearl-2 systems to your Pearl-2 over a network
using the Admin panel. For a list of tested cameras and their URL syntax, see Tested RTSP-based IP cameras.
RTSP video encoding is supported with H.264 video codec and MP3 or AAC audio formats. We recommend
using the hardware acceleration option for improved performance (enabled by default).
Important considerations
l
If an RTSP source is connected but unused in any channel, Pearl-2 decodes only key frames to preserve
CPU resources.
l
To synchronize timestamps between your RTSP source and your Pearl-2, the same time
synchronization server should be used for both devices. We recommend that you configure an NTP
server on your Pearl-2 and use Pearl-2 as a time synchronization server for your RTSP source. See
Configure a time server.
306
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect an RTSP source
The timestamps of an RTSP source and Pearl-2 tend to gradually go out of sync. If there's a
2500 –3000 ms difference between the timestamp of your RTSP source and Pearl-2, a "no
signal" image displays and your RTSP source won't stream audio. Re-connect your RTSP
source to reset any time synchronization issues.
To connect an RTSP source to Pearl-2:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Inputs menu, click Add input, and then click Add RTSP input The RTSP input page opens.
3. Enter the Input URL, Username and Password for your RTSP source and select either UDP or TCP as
the Preferred transport. If you're using another Pearl-2 as an RTSP source, see Share a live broadcast
stream (HTTP, HTTPS or RTSP).
307
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect an RTSP source
4. (Optional) Select Use hardware acceleration for improved performance (default).
5. (Optional) Rename the RTSP source, see Rename an input port.
6. (Optional) Configure a custom "No signal" image, see Add a custom No Signal image .
7. Click Apply to save your settings and connect your RTSP source.
After your RTSP source is connected, you can view basic video and audio signal information and packet loss
statistics for the source under the Status header at the top of the page. Any warnings or errors associated
with your RTSP stream are also displayed on this page.
308
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect an SRT stream as an input
Alternatively, you can view stream connection information when you click check at the bottom of the page.
Connect an SRT stream as an input
Secure Reliable Transport (SRT) is a low-latency protocol used to stream over the Internet to SRT destinations
(decoders), such as CDNs and other SRT decoders such as a Pearl-2.
You can configure Pearl-2 as an SRT destination (decoder) and ingest SRT streams as video inputs that you can
add to custom layouts for switching, recording, and streaming.
309
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect an SRT stream as an input
Up to six of the video inputs configured for Pearl-2 can come from SRT sources (or one 4K SRT input).
When adding an SRT input on Pearl-2, be sure to select the correct SRT mode. For example, if the SRT source
stream is using rendezvous mode, ensure you set the SRT input on Pearl-2 to rendezvous mode. If the SRT
source stream is using caller mode, then set the SRT input on Pearl-2 to listener mode. For more information
about SRT modes, see About streaming using SRT.
What's needed for this setup
l
The IP address and SRT port of the SRT source (encoder) is needed for caller mode and rendezvous
mode.
l
For rendezvous mode, you must configure the SRT input on Pearl-2 to use the same port value as the
SRT source. For an example SRT stream using rendezvous mode, see Set up an SRT stream using
rendezvous mode.
l
For caller/listener modes, you must know which mode the SRT source uses and configure the SRT input
on Pearl-2 to use the corresponding mode. For example, if the SRT source is in caller mode, then the
input must be in listener mode. For an example SRT stream using caller/listener modes, see Set up an
SRT stream using caller and listener modes.
l
If AES encryption and a passphrase is required. Consult your IT administrator for this information.
Pearl-2 supports 128 bits, 192 bits, and 256 bits AES encryption. Special characters are not supported
in the passphrase.
If AES encryption and a passphrase is configured, ensure this information is provided to the SRT
source. The SRT stream from the source must use the same AES and passphrase values, see Set
AES encryption and a passphrase for SRT.
To add an SRT stream as an input using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
310
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect an SRT stream as an input
2. From the Inputs menu, select Add input and select Add SRT input. The SRT input configuration page
opens.
3. In the Connection mode field, select the SRT mode to use for this input.
a. If Caller mode is selected, do the following:
i. Enter the URL of the SRT source (encoder) using the format srt://<encoder-ipaddress>:<port>, where the <encoder-ip-address> and <port> could be another Pearl-2
device sending an SRT stream.
ii. (Optional) In the Source port field, enter the port number for this device to use for SRT
traffic.
b. If Listener mode is selected, enter the Port number for this device to use for SRT traffic. See
Network ports used by Pearl-2 to determine available ports.
c. If Rendezvous mode is selected, enter the URL of the SRT source (encoder) using the format
srt://<encoder-ip-address>:<port>, where the <encoder-ip-address> and <port> values are
provided by the SRT encoder device such as a second Pearl-2.
311
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect an NDI source
4. (Optional) Check Encryption and choose the AES key length if the SRT destination requires AES
encryption. These settings must match the encryption settings of the destination device.
5. (Optional) If a security Passphrase is required along with AES encryption, you can enter that here.
6. Click Apply.
We recommend using the default latency value for an initial test stream. After you perform a test stream, you
can determine the Quality of Service (QoS) and calculate the latency requirements. To set the SRT stream
latency, see Adjust latency and view the SRT stream status.
Connect an NDI source
NDI® lets you to transmit and receive low latency video over Gigabit Ethernet networks. Pearl-2 accepts
multicast and unicast NDI video content, high efficiency NDI|HX, and supports Alpha channel.
Video and audio can come from a variety of NDI sources, including:
312
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect an NDI source
l
Remote NDI enabled PTZ cameras
l
Any NDI unaware HDMI/SDI source using an NDI converter
l
Webcams connected to remote computers using the NewTek Connect application
l
NDI output from IOS and Android mobile devices running the NewTek NDI camera app
Pearl-2 discovers and lists all available NDI resources on the same network. Simply choose which NDI source
you want from a list. Optionally, you can search for specific NDI sources by name and NDI group. You can also
discover specific NDI devices installed on different networks, subnets, and on networks that have mDNS
disabled.
NDI devices that use versions earlier than NDI version 2.0 do not support remote resource
discovery across subnets and are detected only when installed on the same local network as Pearl2.
Pearl-2 shows up on the network as an NDI resource for other NDI devices to access as soon as an NDI stream
is started on Pearl-2, see Start and stop an NDI stream.
Important considerations
l
For NDI to work properly, network ports 49152 to 65535 need to be open for two-way traffic. Contact
your network administrator for assistance.
l
The network discovery port 5557 on Pearl-2 must be enabled (default), see Disable the network
discovery port.
l
Pearl-2 supports up to six 1920×[email protected] fps inputs simultaneously. Up to three of those [email protected]
inputs can be from NDI sources.
l
Pearl-2 supports up to four 4K4K inputs simultaneously. One of those 4K inputs can be from an NDI
source.
l
Pearl-2 accepts multicast and unicast NDI inputs.
l
Streaming an NDI output consumes about the equivalent of an encoded 1920×[email protected] fps channel
on Pearl-2. For best performance, see Optimum CPU performance.
l
You can use NDI on wired and wireless networks; however, NDI video is bandwidth intensive. We
recommend high efficiency NDI|HX for wireless networks, which has H.264 compression to help lower
bandwidth consumption.
l
Depending on the video content, a single 1920×[email protected] fps NDI video source needs about 125
Mbps of dedicated bandwidth. A single 1920×[email protected] fps NDI|HX video source needs from 8 to 20
Mbps of dedicated bandwidth.
To connect an NDI source to Pearl-2:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
313
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect an NDI source
2. From the Inputs menu, click Add input. The Add input page opens with all available NDI resources
listed.
3. Do one of the following:
a. If the NDI resource is listed, select Add beside an NDI resource to select it. The new NDI input
details page opens.
b. If the NDI resource is assigned to an NDI group, enter the group name and then click Discover
to see a list of available NDI resources in that group. Select Add beside an NDI resource to select
it.
c. If a remote NDI resource is on a different network or subnet than Pearl-2, or the network has
mDNS disabled, enter the IP address of the remote NDI resource in the Extra source IP
addresses field, then click Discover. Use a comma to separate multiple IP addresses. Select
Add beside an NDI resource to select it.
d. If you want to add an NDI input to Pearl-2 without selecting an NDI resource, click Add NDI
input. The new NDI input is added and a blank NDI input details page opens. You can search for
and assign an NDI resource to it later.
4. (Optional) On the NDI input details page, check Ignore timecode to configure Pearl-2 to ignore any
timecode information in the NDI signal. This is useful if the NDI source doesn't send a timecode or if
the source's timecode is unstable.
314
Pearl-2 User Guide
Change an NDI input resource
5. Click Apply.
After your NDI source is connected, you can view basic video and audio signal information and packet loss
statistics for the source under the Status header at the top of the page. Any warnings or errors associated
with the NDI signal are also displayed there.
Change an NDI input resource
You can choose an NDI resource when you first create an NDI input on Pearl-2 using the Admin panel. Pearl-2
automatically discovers all the available NDI resources on the same network and lists them for you. You can
also discover specific NDI resources installed on different networks, subnets, and on networks that have
mDNS disabled when you know the IP address of the NDI resource, see Connect an NDI source.
NDI devices that use versions earlier than NDI version 2.0 do not support remote resource
discovery across subnets.
If you created an NDI input on Pearl-2 without assigning an NDI resource to it, you can go back later and
assign one. You can also change the assigned NDI resource at any time from the NDI input configuration page
using the Admin panel.
You must know the exact NDI name and NDI group (if applicable) or the NDI resource's IP address to assign a
resource using this method.
To change an NDI input resource using the Admin panel:
315
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connect an AV.io video grabber
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Inputs menu, select the NDI input. The configuration page for that input opens.
3. Under Settings, do one of the following and then click Apply.
a. Enter the NDI name and group (if applicable).
b. Enter the IP address of the NDI source in Extra source IP addresses.
Connect an AV.io video grabber
You can connect an Epiphan AV.io frame grabber to a USB input port just the same as you would connect a
web camera.
Pearl-2 treats the video source from the frame grabber just like any other video source.
316
Pearl-2 User Guide
Preview a video source using the Admin Panel
Use AV.io frame grabbers to connect extra HDMI, DVI, or SDI sources. Using AV.io HD, you can add up to two
VGA sources to Pearl-2.
You can set up and operate frame grabbers using the same Configure a video input source
l
AV.io HD: https://www.epiphan.com/userguides/avio-hd/Content/Home-AVioHD.htm
l
AV.io SDI: https://www.epiphan.com/userguides/avio-sdi/Content/Home-AVioSDI.htm
l
AV.io 4K: https://www.epiphan.com/userguides/avio-4k/Content/Home-AVio4K.htm
Preview a video source using the Admin Panel
You can preview the images captured from your video sources in the Admin panel. You can also preview your
sources using the Epiphan Live control interface, see Monitor video and audio input sources.
To preview an input source using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Ensure a source is connected to the input port.
3. From the Inputs menu, click the source name. The configuration page for the source opens. A preview
appears at the bottom of the page.
317
Pearl-2 User Guide
Rename an input port
Rename an input port
The input port names are used when adding your video and audio sources to channels. A channel that has
only one source is automatically assigned the same name as the input source by default. If you change the
name of the input source, the channel name will update automatically to match.
Sometimes it's helpful to configure the input port name to match the data it's capturing so that it's clear what
the channel is capturing. Alternately you can change the channel's name, see Rename a channel.
You can include certain international characters for video and audio input port names. Pearl-2 supports
common character sets for Western and Central European languages, Nordic languages, and Russian. The
name should not include special characters, slashes, or spaces. For a complete list, see International character
support.
To change an input port name:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
318
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure a video input source
2. From the Inputs menu, click the source name. The configuration page for the source opens.
3. Click on the input port's name that appears at the top of the page. The text turns red.
4. Enter the new name using alphanumeric characters. We recommend using underscores to separate
words rather than using spaces.
5. Press Enter using your keyboard to save the new name.
Configure a video input source
Captured video sources don't usually need configuration, but you can change some of the video settings
using the Admin panel, including:
l
HDMI and DVI video settings
l
SDI video settings
l
USB video and web camera settings
For details to configure networked video sources on your Pearl-2 like RTSP, NDI, and SRT, see:
319
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Connect an RTSP source
l
Connect an NDI source
l
Connect an SRT stream as an input
HDMI and DVI video settings
To open the configuration page for an input source:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Ensure a source is connected to the input port, see About connecting video and audio sources.
3. From the Inputs menu, click the source name. The configuration page for the source opens.
HDMI and DVI video settings
The following options are available for HDMI and DVI video input sources connected to the HDMI port:
320
Pearl-2 User Guide
SDI video settings
Value
Description
Enable
Enable this feature to convert an interlaced source signal to a non-interlaced
deinterlacing
signal.
Enable 4K
Selecting this option means that your 4K UHD1 source will be automatically
downscaling4K
downscaled to 1080p using Pearl-2's hardware.
This menu allows you to choose a custom no-signal image for the channel. The
Image
drop-down list gives you the option to choose the default image or any image
you have uploaded through the Add a custom No Signal image
The timeout represents the number of seconds after losing the signal that the no-
Timeout
signal is displayed. You may change this number to adjust how soon you wish the
no-signal image to appear after the signal disappears.
1
Requires 4K feature add on
SDI video settings
The following options are available for signals via the SDI port.
321
Pearl-2 User Guide
Value
USB video and web camera settings
Description
This menu allows you to choose a custom no-signal image for the channel. The
Image
drop-down list gives you the option to choose the default image or any image
you have uploaded through the Add a custom No Signal image
The timeout represents the number of seconds after losing the signal that the no-
Timeout
signal is displayed. You may change this number to adjust how soon you wish the
no-signal image to appear after the signal disappears.
USB video and web camera settings
The following options are all potentially available for video input sources connected to the USB port.
However, some settings apply only to certain types or brands of USB web cameras and not all options are
available or needed for all types of USB video sources.
322
Pearl-2 User Guide
Value
USB video and web camera settings
Description
This feature is useful for simultaneously dictating the resolution and fps at which
Capture mode
the video source is captured. The drop down list of available resolutions and
frame rates changes depending on the attributes of the connected device.
Brightness
The brightness of the video can be adjusted by entering a numerical value from 0
to 100. Estimate values and view the result in the preview area until desired result
323
Pearl-2 User Guide
Value
USB video and web camera settings
Description
is achieved.
The contrast of the video can be adjusted by entering a numerical value from 0 to
Contrast
100. Estimate values and view the result in the preview area until desired result is
achieved.
The vertical positioning of the video can be adjusted by entering a numerical
Vertical shift
value from -64 to 64. Estimate values and view the result in the preview area until
desired result is achieved.
The horizontal positioning of the video can be adjusted by entering a numerical
Horizontal shift
value from -64 to 64. Estimate values and view the result in the preview area until
desired result is achieved.
The saturation of the video can be adjusted by entering a numerical value from 0
Saturation
to 100. Estimate values and view the result in the preview area until desired result
is achieved.
The sharpness of the video can be adjusted by entering a numerical value from 0
Sharpness
to 100. Estimate values and view the result in the preview area until desired result
is achieved.
Powerline
The powerline frequency of the video can be adjusted by selecting the desired
frequency
output from a drop-down list of frequencies available to your source.
This menu allows you to choose a custom no-signal image for the channel. The
Image
drop-down list gives you the option to choose the default image or any image
you have uploaded through the Add a custom No Signal image
The timeout represents the number of seconds after losing the signal that the no-
Timeout
signal is displayed. You may change this number to adjust how soon you wish the
no-signal image to appear after the signal disappears.
You can add audio gain to your source from this page by selecting the % gain
Audio input gain
from the drop-down list. Estimate values and check the result in the preview area
until desired result is achieved.
If your audio is not synchronized with your video, it can be adjusted from -300 to
Audio delay
300 ms. Estimate values and check the result in the preview area until desired
result is achieved.
324
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add a custom No Signal image
Add a custom No Signal image
By default the system displays a No Signal image when there is no video signal coming in to any of the video
input ports on Pearl-2. You can customize this image to display a different message to your viewers. For
example if a viewer logs in early, or if you are experiencing delays you could indicate the start time (or
expected resolution time) using the no signal image.
Before you can specify a custom No Signal image for an input port on Pearl-2, you must upload it, see Upload
or remove an image using the Media page.
To set the no signal image for an input port:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Inputs menu, click the source name. The configuration page for the source opens.
3. In the "No signal" image section, select an image from the Image drop down list.
4. In the Timeout field, enter the number of seconds before the No Signal image is displayed. If no manual
value is entered, the default time to display is 5 seconds.
5. Click Apply.
6. Test that the No Signal image is correctly applied by disconnecting your source and previewing the
channel(s) containing said source, see Preview channel.
325
PART 3: Stream
Streaming is a powerful way to deliver live video content to your viewers. Stream to viewers, servers, and
media players. Using the Admin panel, you can configure streaming in multiple formats to multiple
destinations and devices, such as web browsers, media players, set-top boxes, Smart TVs, and Content
Distribution Networks.
Pearl-2 is flexible, easy to setup, and supports all the standard codecs, as well as the most common media
players. Streaming options include: unicast, multicast, SRT, HLS, MPEG-DASH, RTMP, SAP, UPnP, and more.
Topics include:
l
What is streaming?
l
Viewing a channel's live broadcast stream
l
Directly share channel stream URLs with viewers
l
Suggested stream settings
l
Streaming a channel direct to viewers
l
Streaming to servers, CDNs, and other devices
l
Streaming to a media player or smart TV
For instructions on how to use Pearl-2's touch screen to start/stop scheduled webcasts and authenticate with
a CMS to create unscheduled ad hoc events, see CMS event controls using the touch screen.
For information about streaming to Content Management Systems (CMSs) like Kaltura and Panopto, see CMS
recording and webcasting using the Admin panel.
326
Pearl-2 User Guide
What is streaming?
What is streaming?
After you connect your camera, audio source, and set up a channel with your switched program, it’s time to
stream your content live and share that with your viewers.
Pearl-2 provides many different streaming options and supports a variety of streaming protocols. Probably
the easiest way to stream a single Pearl-2 channel directly to viewers on the same local network is to share the
channel's live broadcast URL. Various stream types are available so users can watch using their favorite
devices, including: HTTP/HTTPS, HTTP FLASH (.FLV), MPEG-TS (HTTP), and RTSP.
At the same time, Pearl-2 can stream to a multicast server or CDN and reach viewers across the globe. Pearl-2
can even stream to smart TVs in overflow rooms using SAP or UPnP. The streaming method you choose
depends on factors like the number of viewers of your stream, are you broadcasting live over a local TCPbased network or streaming to a CDN over the Internet, how much bandwidth do you have available, and is
live streaming security a concern?
Pearl-2 can stream to a CDN or media server using any of the following streaming protocols:
l
SRT (push)
l
HLS (push)
l
MPEG-DASH (push)
l
RTMP/RTMPS (push)
l
RTSP
Each Pearl-2 channel supports multiple streams. That means you can stream a channel to multiple
destinations using different streaming protocols. Unicast and multicast streams are also supported.
Pearl-2 makes it easy to start and stop streaming using One touch control from the touch screen, see Specify
channels for One Touch streaming. You can also control streaming from the Admin panel or using Epiphan
Live from a mobile device or tablet, see Control streaming and recording.
In addition to streaming out from Pearl-2, the following streaming formats are supported as input sources
that Pearl-2 can ingest:
l
SRT
l
RTSP announce
l
RTMP push
Pearl-2 also comes with APIs so you can setup third party tools to control streaming, see the Pearl System API
Guide for details.
Additional considerations
327
Pearl-2 User Guide
Streaming to a CDN, multicasting, and streaming to
multiple destinations
l
Are you streaming live video or recorded video?
l
Do you need to stream the content to one client (peer-to-peer) or deliver a single stream to multiple
clients (multicast)?
l
Do you need to provide web-based streaming that multiple clients can access using a Content
Distribution Network (CDN), such as YouTube or Facebook Live?
l
Do you need to encrypt your live stream for higher security?
l
Streaming to a Content Management System (CMS) like Kaltura or Panopto? See CMS recording and
webcasting using the Admin panel
To start/stop scheduled streams and authenticate with a CMS to create unscheduled ad hoc events using the
touch screen, see CMS event controls using the touch screen.
Streaming to a CDN, multicasting, and streaming to multiple destinations
A Content Delivery Network (CDN) relies on geo-diverse CDN servers to receive and disperse web content to
the CDN server closest to the user. The closer the server is to the user, the faster the content is delivered.
Streaming your content through a CDN allows you to stream any time, anywhere, regardless of the viewing
device and you don't have to worry about maintaining your own video streaming servers on site.
328
Pearl-2 User Guide
Streaming to a CDN, multicasting, and streaming to
multiple destinations
Streaming content to a multicast IP address is different than streaming to a CDN. Multicasting lets you directly
share the stream with multiple viewers on the same LAN. All viewers receive the same stream at the same
time. Similar to turning on a radio station where all listeners hear the same music at the same time.
Multicasting is useful for training sessions when there is a specific time frame for the audience to view the
content live.
Whether you're streaming to CDNs or multicasting across a LAN, Pearl-2 can publish to multiple destinations
at the same time. Streaming a channel to CDNs and multicast streaming at the same time is available only
when the H.264 codec is configured as the channel encoding, see Configure video encoding.
Publishing Options
Use this option to...
Stream web content to many viewers on different Content Delivery
Networks simultaneously to any geographical location. Using a CDN to host
your broadcast is highly scalable and saves you from having to purchase
and maintain your own servers to host and deliver video content.
Using one or more CDNs to stream live content allows you to reach a large
Content Distribution
geographically diverse audience and because CDNs perform format
Network (CDN)
conversion, the stream is platform independent.
Streaming protocols supported include: SRT (push), HLS (push), MPEGDASH (push), RTMP/RTMPS.
For more information about streaming to a CDN, see Streaming to servers,
CDNs, and other devices.
This delivery method relies on network equipment that supports
multicasting and is usually used on high bandwidth corporate LANs and not
on Internet-based architectures.
Multicasting is what's typically used to stream video and audio to an IP TV
or set-top box playlist. If you're streaming over a Gigabit Ethernet network
Multicast Streaming
to a 10/100 Mbps set-top box that is dropping frames, you can limit the
stream's bandwidth, see Set up traffic shaping.
Multicast streaming protocols supported include: MPEG-TS USP, MPEG-TS
RTP/UDP, and RTP/UDP.
For more information about using multicasting for streaming your content,
see Multicast streaming
To stream video outside of your LAN, use a CDN or configure port forwarding on your router.
Consult your Network Administrator to set up port forwarding.
329
Pearl-2 User Guide
Streaming to a CDN, multicasting, and streaming to
multiple destinations
You can even use an XML profile to setup streaming if the CDN supports that. By default, no streaming is
configured for the channels configured on Pearl-2.
In addition to streaming, Pearl-2 can ingest streams as input sources. The following ingest streams formats are
supported:
l
SRT (push)
l
RTSP announce
l
RTMP (push)
l
NDI
Publishing to a CDN
When you publish a stream to a CDN provider, make sure you use a streaming protocol that the CDN
supports. Contact your CDN for a list of supported streaming protocols and audio codecs they support.
To publish content to a CDN provider, ensure you have:
l
the URL (or path) to the mount point or an XML configuration file (provided by the CDN provider)
l
the supported transport protocols, audio codecs, and any other settings like key frame rates and bit
rates recommended by the CDN provider
l
select the H.264 codec from the channel's Encoding page
You can control when streaming to a CDN is enabled by using the Admin panel or the touch screen. See Start
and stop streaming to a CDN.
You can also test how your content is streamed by sending your content to Epiphan’s CDN. For a list of
Epiphan’s preferred CDN providers, see: https://www.epiphan.com/partners/cdn-partners/.
Streaming to multiple destinations
There are a few different ways to stream to multiple destinations using Pearl-2. One option is to configure a
channel on Pearl-2 as your switched program channel, then use the Admin panel to create multiple streaming
destinations for that channel. You can add multiple RTMP streams to different CDNs, configure multicast
streaming, and even share the live broadcast link with viewers on your network all at the same time. But
remember, the more streams you configure, the more network bandwidth you need. To stream to CDNs and
multicast a channel at the same time, the channel must have H.264 configured as the channel encoding
Another option is to set up multiple channels on Pearl-2 and stream those using the Admin panel. That way,
you can configure each channel with different encoding settings. For example, you can configure one channel
with the streaming specifications for YouTube and configure the second channel for streaming to Facebook.
Using one channel as your main switched program, use Pearl-2's channel as a source feature to feed that
330
Pearl-2 User Guide
About streaming using SRT
channel into your second channel. That way, you're streaming the exact same switched program to different
destinations at different encoding settings. For information about using a channel as a source, see Add video
sources or a channel as a source.
As you can see, setting up streaming to multiple destinations is very flexible with Pearl-2.
About streaming using SRT
Secure Reliable Transport (SRT) is an open-source streaming protocol that offers quality, low-latency
streaming to CDNs and other SRT enabled decoders across unreliable Internet connections using User
Datagram Protocol (UDP) transport and additional error checking. Low-latency SRT is particularly good for
real-time, two-way communications between a remote guest and a local on-site host.
You can configure Pearl-2 as an SRT source encoder and stream video using SRT. You can also configure Pearl2 as an SRT decoder and ingest SRT streams as video inputs.
Up to six of the video inputs configured for Pearl-2 can come from SRT sources (or one 4K SRT input) and
Pearl-2 can stream up to six SRT streams.
Before content is streamed between the SRT source and destination, a communication link must be
established between them for SRT control and recovery packets. Any firewalls blocking the path must be
traversed.
331
Pearl-2 User Guide
Secure streaming
SRT streaming modes and firewalls
Streaming through firewalls can be a challenge. With SRT you get easy firewall traversal with little to no IT
involvement.
SRT offers three modes to simplify the process: Rendezvous, Caller, and Listener.
l
Rendezvous mode is the easiest to setup and usually doesn't need any intervention from your IT
administrator for the SRT stream from the source to traverse the firewall to the destination. The SRT
source and destination devices must use the same SRT port value, see Set up an SRT stream using
rendezvous mode.
l
Caller and Listener modes work together to establish the SRT connection between your source and
destination devices when traversing the firewall is difficult. In this case, your IT network administrator
must configure the network to allow traffic that comes in on the port configured for SRT streaming and
forward the traffic to the destination device, see Set up an SRT stream using caller and listener modes.
The device you set as the Caller (or Listener) is arbitrary, as long as one device is a Listener and the
other is a Caller.
SRT latency controls and AES stream encryption
SRT includes latency controls to adjust for poor network quality while maintaining an acceptable amount of
delay. Pearl-2 provides statistics to determine the amount of packet loss. Using the Admin panel, you can
increase or decrease the amount of latency applied to the stream to help mitigate any Quality of Service (QoS)
issues. The default latency values are 125 ms for an SRT stream and 80 ms for an SRT input, see Adjust latency
and view the SRT stream status.
For greater security, you can set the SRT stream to 128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits AES encryption. Encryption
settings must be set to the same values on both the SRT encoder sending the stream and the SRT decoder
that's receiving the stream, see Set AES encryption and a passphrase for SRT.
Secure streaming
Secure streaming is a great option for confidential content, such as corporate meetings or internal employee
training. There are several ways to secure your live stream with Pearl-2.
l
Stream to a CDN or media server over the Internet using Secure Reliable Transport (SRT).
l
Stream to a CDN or media server over the Internet using Real Time Messaging Protocol Secure (RTMPS).
332
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Stream HLS (push) over local HTTPS networks.
l
Stream MPEG-DASH (push) over local HTTPS networks.
Secure streaming
SRT streaming includes additional AES encryption settings for even more security. You can set the SRT stream
for 128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits AES encryption. Encryption settings must be set to the same values on both
the SRT encoder sending the stream and the SRT decoder that's receiving the stream, see Set AES encryption
and a passphrase for SRT.
RTMPS wraps the RTMP stream in TLS/SSL packets before it's transported over a TCP connection between the
network server and Pearl-2 (i.e. the client). To set up secure streaming using RTMPS, see Set up an RTMP or
RTMPS (push) stream
333
Pearl-2 User Guide
Suggested stream settings
Suggested stream settings
When you're setting up your live stream, you would typically consult your CDN or publishing destination for
their recommended settings to use.
Stream setup can be a matter of balancing quality and system resources. When choosing your stream
settings, it's important to consider the type of content you're streaming and the streaming protocol you've
chosen.
For streaming fast moving video, a higher bitrate and frame rate delivers a better image. If you're streaming a
slide presentation, you can save bandwidth and system processing by lowering the bitrate and frame rate
without any noticeable image degradation.
The following table provides suggested settings to maximize your video quality while minimizing system
resource usage when streaming video content from your Pearl-2.
Table 54 Suggested stream settings for video
Option
Setting
Codec
H.264
Video encoding preset
Hardware accelerated
Video encoding profile
High
2 sec1
Key frame interval
301
Limit frame rate
Bitrate
Audio format
4 Mbps for HD; 6 Mbps for Full HD; 12 Mbps for
4K UHD4K
AAC 22 KHz1
1
For HLS streaming, the key frame interval should be set to 2s and the frame rate should be set to 60 fps (or
59.94) for live NTSC content.
The following table provides suggested settings to maximize your stream quality while minimizing system
resource usage when streaming a slide presentation from a PC, Mac, or tablet.
Table 55 Suggested stream settings for slides
Option
Codec
Setting
H.264
334
Pearl-2 User Guide
Suggested stream settings
Option
Setting
Video encoding preset
Hardware accelerated
Video encoding profile
High
Key frame interval
2 sec
Limit frame rate
Bitrate
30
4 Mbps for HD; 6 Mbps for Full HD; 12 Mbps for
Audio format
4K UHD4K
AAC 44 KHz
We recommend the following frame rates (per stream):
l
60 fps at 1920×1080 capturing and streaming 2 sources simultaneously
l
30 fps at 1920×1080 capturing and streaming 6 sources simultaneously
l
30 fps at 4K UHD2, capturing and streaming one source
335
Pearl-2 User Guide
Streaming a channel direct to viewers
Streaming a channel direct to viewers
Pearl-2 is ready to stream content directly to viewers on the local network using the default streaming settings
as soon as you've powered on the system and configured a channel. Just choose the live broadcast method
that's right for your viewers. They can tune into the stream and watch using their favorite web browser or
media player.
Table 56 Publishing options for streaming direct to viewers on the local network
Publishing Options
Use this option to...
Viewers on the same local network as Pearl-2 can access the Live broadcast
URL using a web browser on the local network and are instantly connected.
Viewers can also choose to use their favorite media player to watch the
stream on the local network. They just need the URL for any of the other
HTTP or HTTPS
supported streaming methods (like FLV or MPEG-TS) to watch using their
media player.
Use these direct streaming methods for only a small number of viewers
because each viewer uses the full stream bandwidth and consumes
resources on Pearl-2. For more information about using an HTTP stream, see
Share a live broadcast stream (HTTP, HTTPS or RTSP).
Viewers can copy and paste the URL of the RTSP stream into a media player
RTSP
and watch the stream on the local network. For more information about
using RTSP streaming, see Share a live broadcast stream (HTTP, HTTPS or
RTSP).
Stream live over the standard HTTP port 80, making it possible to cross
firewalls and proxies that are normally accessible to other HTTP traffic and
HTTP Live Streaming
facilitates conte nt delivery to CDNs. If HTTPS is configured on Pearl-2, traffic
(HLS) pull
from port 80 is redirected to port 443. See Enable HLS (pull) for details.
There is approximately a 30 second delay when streaming using HLS.
To stream video outside your LAN using the channel's HTTP/HTTPS or RTSP URLs, you must
configure port forwarding on your router. Consult with your Network Administrator.
To set up Pearl-2 for direct streaming to viewers, see:
o
Disable and enable direct channel streaming
o
Restrict viewer access to channel streams
336
Pearl-2 User Guide
Share a live broadcast stream (HTTP, HTTPS or RTSP)
o
Share a live broadcast stream (HTTP, HTTPS or RTSP)
o
Change HTTP and RTSP streaming port values
o
Enable HLS (pull)
o
Stream using UPnP
Share a live broadcast stream (HTTP, HTTPS or RTSP)
The easiest way to deliver your content to your viewers is to give them the live broadcast URL of the channel.
You can get that using the Admin panel. A separate URL exists for each channel you stream.
The format of the URL depends on the method you used to access Pearl-2, which can be done though
network discovery using Pearl's serial number or IP address. Pearl-2 must be accessible on the viewer's LAN
for them to access and view the stream using serial discovery.
If HTTPS is configured for Pearl-2, the live broadcast URL will start with https instead of http.
If Pearl-2 is behind a firewall and you want to share a stream with remote viewers, you need to set
up port forwarding on your network. Consult with your network administrator.
Table 57 URL options
Access Method
URL Format
http://<serial>.local/preview.cgi?channel=<channel number>
https://<serial>.local/preview.cgi?channel=<channel number>
rtsp://<serial>.local:<port>/stream.sdp
serial discovery
Where serial is the serial number of the system, the port number for the channel
is found on the Info page, and the channel number is provided from the Admin
panel.
You must install Bonjour Print Services on your Windows or Mac computer to
access the live Preview using the serial number.
http://<IP Address>/preview.cgi?channel=2
https://<IP Address>/preview.cgi?channel=2
IP address
rtsp://<IP Address>:<port>/stream.sdp
Where IP address is the IP address of the system, the port number for the
337
Pearl-2 User Guide
Enable HLS (pull)
Access Method
URL Format
channel is found on the Info page, and the channel number is provided from the
Admin panel.
To retrieve the stream URL for your viewers:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channel menu, select a channel and click Status. The Status page appears.
3. Record the Live broadcast, RTSP stream URL or other web streaming address. This is the address
you can send to viewers or use to create a link to your broadcast.
If you're seeing URLs with serial numbers instead of IP addresses and want to change this, log into
the Admin panel by IP address (instead of by Serial number/Bonjour Print Services) to see
URLs with the IP address, see Connect to Admin panel.
Enable HLS (pull)
Stream a live broadcast of a channel directly to viewers on the same local network as Pearl-2 using HTTP over
port 80. This gives viewers with iOS devices convenient access to the channel's live broadcast. If HTTPS is
configured for Pearl-2, the traffic from port 80 is redirected to HTTPS port 443.
HTTP Live Stream (HLS) supports the H.264 codec and MP3 or AAC audio encoding. Audio and video are sent
as a series of small files called media segment files. You can set the segment duration, as well as define the
playlist size using the Admin panel. By default, the segment duration is 9 seconds and the playlist size is 3.
When live broadcasting a channel using HLS (pull), there is approximately a 30 second delay.
To enable HLS (pull):
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
338
Pearl-2 User Guide
Enable HLS (pull)
2. From the Channels menu, select the channel containing video you want to stream and click
Streaming. The Streaming configuration page opens.
3. Under HTTP Live Streaming (HLS), check Enabled.
4. (Optional) Set the Segment duration and Playlist size.
5. Click Apply
6. To share the HLS (pull) URL with viewers, click Status from the Channels menu, then copy the HLS URL
and provide that to your viewers.
339
Pearl-2 User Guide
Restrict viewer access to channel streams
Restrict viewer access to channel streams
Pearl-2 can restrict access to all viewer streams from the channels on Pearl-2 using global viewer passwords
and IP allow/deny lists. See Set or change user passwords and Restrict viewers by IP address.
If LDAP is configured for viewer authentication, the viewer must pass global autentication using
LDAP credentials (or the viewer global password, if there is one) and must meet the local channel
settings (come from an allowed IP address). See Configure LDAP user authentication for
more information on LDAP configuration.
To restrict viewers for a channel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
3. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The streaming configuration page
opens.
4. In the Stream access control section, select Use these settings from the drop down.
To return the channel to the global access control settings, select Use global settings from the drop
down and click Apply. The configuration fields are disabled and any changes to the configuration fields
are not saved.
Global LDAP settings are always enforced. Any local settings are in addition to LDAP sign on.
5. (Optional) Specify a password for viewers of this channel. The password is masked as you enter it.
340
Pearl-2 User Guide
Restrict viewers by IP address
If you have global allow/deny lists or a global user password, you can override the global
settings and remove all access control for a channel by selecting Use these settings and
leaving all the fields blank.
6. (Optional) Enter the allow and deny IP addresses for viewers of this channel. See Restrict viewers by
IP address for details about allow and deny lists.
7. Click Apply.
Restrict viewers by IP address
Pearl-2 permits you to restrict which computers can access broadcasts by building a list of allowed and denied
IP addresses. You can do this at a global level for the system and can also override these settings on a perchannel basis. Both global and per-channel configuration procedures are described.
The following table describes what happens when an IP address is added to the allowed and denied IP address
lists.
Item
Description
Users connecting from addresses in this list are permitted to view broadcasts from the
system, provided their IP address is not in the Deny IP’s list.
Allow IP's
To allow all except IP addresses in the deny list, if any, leave the field blank.
You can use the Allow list by itself, or in conjunction with the Deny IP’s list as an exception
to a rule in the allow list.
Users connecting from addresses in this list are not allowed to view broadcasts from the
system, unless their IP address is in the Allow IP’s list. If a specific IP address is in both lists,
Deny IP's
access to the stream is denied.
You can use the Deny list by itself, or in conjunction with the Allow IP’s list as an exception
to a rule in the allow list.
If your viewer account has a password, your viewers must connect to the system from a computer (or
gateway) with a permitted IP address and must also supply the user name (viewer) and password before they
can view the broadcast.
To restrict access by IP address, you need to know the IP addresses or range of addresses for your viewers. By
default, all IP addresses are allowed to connect to the broadcast.
If a user attempts to connect to the stream from a disallowed IP address, access is denied. If there's an
attempt to connect using a web browser, the message "IP address rejected" is displayed.
341
Pearl-2 User Guide
IP restriction examples
Table 58 IP Based Restriction Options
If you’re not familiar with creating allow/deny lists, see IP restriction examples.
IP address restriction is valid for the viewer only and does not affect the Admin panel or the
mobile configuration interface.
To restrict viewer access to watch streams for all channels by their IP address:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Security. The Security configuration page opens.
3. Enter the allowed IP addresses or address ranges in the Allow IP’s field and enter denied IP addresses
or address ranges in the Deny IP's field. Separate addresses with a comma. To specify a range, use a
hyphen (-). Optional spaces improve readability.
4. Click Apply.
To restrict viewer access to watch streams on a specific channel by their IP address:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The channel's streaming configuration
page opens.
3. From the Stream access control drop-down, select Use these Settings to enable local password
and Allow/Deny IP lists are enabled.
4. (Optional) Enter a password for the viewer in the Viewer Password field.
5. Enter the allowed IP addresses or address ranges in the Allow IP’s field and enter denied IP addresses
or address ranges in the Deny IP's field. Separate addresses with a comma. To specify a range, use a
hyphen (-). Optional spaces improve readability.
6. Click Apply.
IP restriction examples
The following table lists some example allow lists.
Table 59 Example allow lists
Example
Allow list with distinct IP
addresses
Description
The simplest allow/deny list is to use the list of known IP addresses to craft a
list of allowed IP addresses. All other addresses are denied access to the
broadcast.
342
Pearl-2 User Guide
Example
IP restriction examples
Description
For example if your system is accessible on your local area network (LAN) and
you want to make sure only the CEO’s specific desktop, laptop and tablet
computers (with IP Addresses 192.168.1.50, 192.168.1.51, and
192.165.1.75, respectively) can connect to the broadcast, construct the
following allow list:
Allow: 192.168.1.50, 192.168.1.51, 192.168.1.75
Sometimes you’ll want a range of computer IP addresses to connect to your
system. This may happen when you have one range of IP addresses assigned
to desktop computers (i.e. in the range 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.100) and
another range assigned to boardroom computers (i.e. the range
192.168.1.200 to 192.168.1.250). If you only want the boardroom
Allow list with a range of IP
addresses
computers to connect to broadcasts from the system you can specify the
range of boardroom IP addresses rather than needing to type in each
individual address. The allow list looks as follows:
Allow: 192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250
Note that we could have specified two of the IP addresses in the previous
example as a range.
Putting the first two examples together, we want to permit access to IP
addresses in the range of boardroom computers (192.168.1.200192.168.1.250) and also want to add the desktop, laptop and tablet
computers of the CEO (IP addresses 192.168.1.50, 192.168.1.51, and
192.168.1.75, respectively). Note the first two IP addresses are consecutive,
Allow list with a range of IP
so they can be added as a second range. Add these IP addresses to the list as
addresses and one or more
follows:
specific IP addresses
Allow: 192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250, 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.51,
192.168.1.75
Your list can have multiple ranges and multiple distinct IP addresses,
provided they are separated by commas.
Allow list with a range of
Building on the previous examples, consider a situation where you want the
IP addresses, distinct
CEO’s computers (192.168.1.50, 192.168.1.51, 192.168.75) and all
343
Pearl-2 User Guide
Example
IP restriction examples
Description
boardroom computers (192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250) to access the
broadcast, with the exception of the public boardroom computer
(192.168.1.211). Use both allow and deny lists to create the rule as follows:
IP addresses, and an
exception
Allow: 192.168.1.200-192.168.1.250, 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.51,
192.168.1.75
Deny: 192.168.1.211
Both lists can have multiple ranges and multiple distinct IP addresses,
provided they are separated by commas.
The following table lists some example deny lists.
Table 60 Example deny lists
Example
Description
Another simple allow/deny list is to use the list of known IP addresses to list
specific denied IP addresses. All other addresses are allowed access to the
broadcast.
For example imagine your system is accessible on your local area network
(LAN) and you want to allow any computer on the LAN can access the stream
Deny list with distinct IP
addresses
except your publicly-accessible boardroom (with IP address 192.168.1.211).
You can use the following deny list (leave the allow list empty) to permit all
computers except the boardroom computer:
Deny: 192.168.1.211
As with allow lists, your deny list can specify a range of IP addresses, and can
specify multiple ranges or distinct IP addresses in a comma-separated list.
Consider a situation where you want every computer on the network to
access the broadcast, with the exception of the CEO’s desktop, laptop and
tablet computers. Additionally, boardroom computers should not be
Deny list with a range of IP
permitted with the exception of the cafeteria computer (IP address
addresses
192.168.1.222).
The deny list is an "exception" list for the allow list. So to craft the rule
described above we need to allow all the computers in the local subnet, then
344
Pearl-2 User Guide
Example
Change HTTP and RTSP streaming port values
Description
deny specific sub-ranges including two groups of boardroom computers
ensuring the cafeteria computer's IP address is not in the deny list:
Allow: 192.168.1.1-192.168.1.250
Deny: 192.168.1.200-192.168.1.221, 192.168.1.223192.168.1.250, 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.51, 192.168.1.75
Change HTTP and RTSP streaming port values
By default, each channel you create is assigned a unique HTTP and RTSP port number. You can use the Admin
panel to configure a specific streaming port value for the channel. Ensure that each channel has unique
streaming port values that are not currently assigned to any other process, see Network ports used by Pearl2.
For RTSP streaming directly to users on your LAN, the only information that's needed to view the broadcast is
the URL and the RTSP port number used to stream the broadcast.
HTTP port numbers are used for FLV and MPEG-TS streaming methods.
To set the HTTP and RTSP streaming ports for streaming to viewers on the local network:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The Streaming page opens.
345
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable and enable direct channel streaming
3. Set the HTTP Streaming port to specify the port used to stream the HTTP broadcast. This value along
with the URL is used by viewers to access the FLV and MPEG-TS streams.
The port number must be higher than 500 for HTTP. In the case of RTSP streaming this
value is ignored.
4. Set the RTSP Streaming port to specify which port to use when you are streaming live video via RTSP.
This value along with the URL is used by viewers to access the broadcast. The default for channel one is
554.
5. Click Apply.
Disable and enable direct channel streaming
When you create a channel, the channel's streaming URLs are enabled by default. The channel streaming URLs
are listed on the Status page for the channel, which you can share with viewers. You can disable channel
streaming using the channel's streaming URLs from the Streaming configuration page using the Admin panel.
346
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable and enable direct channel streaming
Disabling channel streaming for viewers using their web browser or media player does not disable live
streaming to a CDN.
Disabling streams for viewers does disable all viewer formats, including: HTTP/HTTPS, RTSP, HLS
and UPnP.
To disable or enable the channel streaming URLs:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The streaming page opens.
3. Beneath Streams for viewers, uncheck Enabled to disable direct streaming of channels to viewers
using the channel's streaming URLs. Leave Enable checked to allow direct streaming using the
channel's URLs.
4. Click Apply.
347
Pearl-2 User Guide
Directly share channel stream URLs with viewers
Directly share channel stream URLs with viewers
People on the same local network as Pearl-2 can easily view a channel's live broadcast stream. All you need to
do is provide them the channel's stream URL and log in credentials if you've set one for viewers, see Set or
change user passwords.
You can provide people separate URLs for streams coming from each channel, or one URL that includes all the
streams for the channel. Choose the right type of URL for the type of device the person will use to watch the
stream. For more information on compatibility between codec and file formats, see Viewing a channel's live
broadcast stream.
To share the channel's stream URL directly with viewers:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select the channel and click Status. The Status page opens.
3. Copy the URL and provide that to viewers.
348
Pearl-2 User Guide
Viewing a channel's live broadcast stream
Viewers can now watch the stream using a digital media player or browser, see View the live broadcast URL
using a web browser and View the streaming URL using a media player.
HTTP only is used for MPEG-TS and FLV streaming. HTTPS is not supported.
Viewing a channel's live broadcast stream
When you set up a channel, the system automatically generates and displays a list of available live broadcast
streams. You can share the channel's stream URLs with people on the same local network as Pearl-2 so they
can watch a live broadcast of the channel. All you need to do is provide them the channel's stream URL and
log in credentials if you've set one for viewers, see Set or change user passwords.
To stream video outside your LAN using the channel's live broadcast streams, you must configure
port forwarding on your router. Consult with your Network Administrator.
The live broadcast stream URLs for a channel are available from the Channel menu in the Admin panel when
you select Status. The audio and video codecs configured for the channel affect which live broadcast formats
are listed.
Just copy the live broadcast URL and share that with viewers so they can watch the channel stream using a
web browser, see View the live broadcast URL using a web browser.
Or choose one of the other channel stream URLs if your viewers prefer to watch using a media player, see
View the streaming URL using a media player.
349
Pearl-2 User Guide
View the live broadcast URL using a web browser
If the channel is configured with 48 kHz audio, some web browsers may not work. In this case, we
recommend using one of the channel's other URL formats and viewing the channel steam using a
media player instead.
View the live broadcast URL using a web browser
You can share a channel's live broadcast URL with viewers so they can watch your live stream using their
favorite web browser. Your viewers must be on the same network as Pearl-2 to watch a live broadcast using
the channel's live broadcast URL.
If the channel you're streaming is configured with 48 kHz audio, some web browsers may not
work. In this case, we recommend viewing the channel steam using a media player instead.
350
Pearl-2 User Guide
View the live broadcast URL using a web browser
The live broadcast URL appears in two places in the Admin panel:
l
On the channel's status page.
l
On the Info page from the Configuration menu.
To locate the IP address for the broadcast, see Directly share channel stream URLs with viewers.
If a viewer password is configured, provide participants with the password to log in, along with the URL of the
stream. To set a viewer password, see Set or change user passwords.
If HTTPS is enabled on Pearl-2, replace http with https in the URL of the stream.
To share the live broadcast URL with viewers :
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Open the channel's status page and copy the live broadcast URL. From the Channels menu, select a
channel and click Status. You can copy the Live broadcast URL and share that with your viewers.
3. Alternatively, open the Info page to get the live broadcast URL. From the Configuration menu, click
Info and then click View for the channel you want to share the broadcast URL.
A page opens displaying the live broadcast and the broadcast URL. Copy the URL and share that with
your viewers.
351
Pearl-2 User Guide
View the streaming URL using a media player
To watch a stream using a web browser and the live broadcast URL:
1. From your web browser, enter the IP address of the live broadcast stream.
If the IP address of the broadcast is 172.20.1.33, then browse to:
http:// 172.20.1.33/preview.cgi?channel=<channel number>
2. Enter viewer as the user name and the password when prompted and press Enter. The stream plays
in a new tab in your web browser.
View the streaming URL using a media player
You can share a channel's streaming URL with viewers so they can watch your live stream using their favorite
media player, like VLC. Your viewers must be on the same network as Pearl-2 to watch a channel stream using
a stream URL.
The different stream types available for channels include: RTSP, MPEG-TS, and Flash streams, see Viewing a
channel's live broadcast stream. The URL contains either the IP address of Pearl-2 or the serial number, see
The type of stream URL you provide to your viewers can affect their choice of media player needed to watch
the stream.
This procedure assumes that the VLC media player is used.
If a viewer password is configured, provide participants with the password to log in, along with the URL of the
stream. To set a viewer password, see Set or change user passwords.
To share the channel's stream URL with viewers:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator, see Connect to Admin panel.
352
Pearl-2 User Guide
View the streaming URL using a media player
2. Open the channel's status page and copy the channel's stream URL. From the Channels menu, select a
channel and click Status. You can copy the Live broadcast URL and share that with your viewers.
To view the channel's stream URL using a VLC:
1. Launch a media player.
2. Click the Media tab and select Open Network Stream from the drop-down menu.
3. Enter the stream URL. In this example, the serial number method is shown.
rtsp://49E7B8E4.local:554/stream.sdp
4. Press Play to watch the stream in the media player window.
353
Pearl-2 User Guide
Streaming to servers, CDNs, and other devices
Streaming to servers, CDNs, and other
devices
Pearl-2 can stream to CDNs, local media servers, and even to other Pearl-2 devices that are acting as a
streaming ingestion point. Pearl-2 supports many streaming protocols, including: SRT (push), HLS (push),
MPEG-DASH (push), RTMP/RTMPS, and RTSP. Use the Admin panel to set up individual channels configured
on Pearl-2 for streaming.
Topics include:
l
Set up an RTMP or RTMPS (push) stream
l
Set up an SRT stream using caller and listener modes
l
Set up an SRT stream using rendezvous mode
l
Adjust latency and view the SRT stream status
l
Set AES encryption and a passphrase for SRT
l
Set up an RTSP announce stream
l
Stream to a CDN using an XML profile
For details to configure multicast streaming, see Multicast streaming. Streaming a channel to CDNs and
multicast streaming is available only when the H.264 codec is configured as the channel encoding, see
Configure video encoding.
Set up an RTMP or RTMPS (push) stream
Real Time Messaging Protocol (RTMP) is this the most common way to stream to a CDN, including both
Facebook Live and YouTube.
Use Real Time Messaging Protocol Secure (RTMPS) to encrypt content before it's streamed over a TLS/SSL
connection for secure live streaming. When enabled, Pearl-2 will always attempt to validate the digital
certificate it receives from the CDN to establish a secure RTMPS connection. The connection will fail if Pearl-2
can't find the CA certificate of your CDN in it's list of certificates.
Pearl-2 has the CA certificates for many of the major CDNs already installed. For RTMPS streaming to work for
your particular CDN, or if you're using a proprietary RTMPS server, ensure that your streaming server's CA
certificate is uploaded to Pearl-2, see Manage CA and self-signed certificates.
To stream using RTMP or RTMPS:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
354
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up an RTMP or RTMPS (push) stream
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The Streaming configuration page
opens.
3. Click New stream and choose RTMP push. The new stream is created using the default name Stream
1.
4. Click the stream name to see the stream settings.
5. (Optional) Uncheck Single touch control if you don't want this stream to be started and stopped
using One Touch streaming and recording control. This is enabled by default.
6. Enter the URL of the ingestion point provided by the CDN or media server.
l
For RTMP push, enter rtmp followed by the rest of the URL, for example: rtmp://<server-ipaddress>:<port>/etc...
l
For RTMPS, enter rtmps followed by the rest of the URL, for example: rtmps://<server-ipaddress>:<port>/etc...
7. Enter the Stream name (which also is called a stream key by some CDNs)
8. (Optional) Enter a User name and Password.
The CDN provider assigns a user name and password to authenticate the publisher.
Contact the CDN provider for your log in credentials. Some CDNs, like YouTube and
Facebook Live, do not require you to enter your log in credentials here.
9. (Optional) Rename the stream. Click the current name and enter a different name, then press Enter.
Refresh your browser if the new stream name doesn't immediately display.
355
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up an SRT stream using rendezvous mode
10. Click Apply.
11. To start streaming, click Start or click Start all to simultaneously start this stream and any other
streams you have configured for this channel.
12. Click Delete this stream at any time to delete the stream.
See Start and stop streaming to a CDN for instructions to control streaming from the touch screen or see
Control streaming and recording for instructions to use Epiphan Live.
Set up an SRT stream using rendezvous mode
Secure Reliable Transport (SRT) is an open-source streaming protocol that offers quality, low latency streaming
to CDNs and other SRT enabled decoders across unreliable Internet connections via UDP.
The easiest way to establish a link between the SRT source and destination devices is to use rendezvous mode.
In rendezvous mode, both the SRT source and destination device are ready to establish the SRT connection as
soon as an SRT stream starts.
Typically, no intervention is needed from your IT administrator to traverse a firewall in rendezvous mode.
However, you can switch to SRT caller and listener modes if you experience difficulties streaming through a
firewall in rendezvous mode, see Set up an SRT stream using caller and listener modes.
To establish the SRT connection between the source and destination devices in rendezvous mode, both
devices must be configured and ready to establish the connection between them. Each must know the
IP address of the other device and both must be configured to use the same port for the SRT stream.
In the following example, a Pearl-2 is setup as SRT Source A (192.168.1.10) with port 20000 and another
Pearl-2 is setup as SRT Destination B (203.0.113.10) with port 20000.
356
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up an SRT stream using rendezvous mode
Source A streams through Firewall A and Firewall B to Destination B, which ingests the SRT stream as a video
input with embedded audio. All traffic received at Firewall B that's addressed to 168.112.1.1 on port 20000
passes through the firewall directly to Destination B (203.0.113.10) because of the port number.
What's needed for this setup
l
The public IP address of Source A (e.g. 198.51.100.20) and the public IP address of Destination B (e.g.
168.0.113.10).
l
The SRT streaming port that Source A is configured to use (e.g. port 20000).
357
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Set up an SRT stream using rendezvous mode
Configure SRT Destination B to use the same port value as Source A for the SRT stream (e.g. 20000). If
the destination device is another Pearl-2, you do this when adding the SRT stream as a video input
source using the Admin panel, see Connect an SRT stream as an input.
When you're configuring an SRT stream on Pearl-2, you can also adjust the recovery bandwidth overhead
using the Admin panel. This setting defines how much of the stream's total bandwidth is dedicated for the
exchange of SRT control and recovery packets between the source and destination. Ensure that the total SRT
stream bitrate (i.e. the bandwidth required for the stream plus the recovery bandwidth overhead) is less than
the network bandwidth you have available.
To setup Pearl-2 as a streaming source in rendezvous mode using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The Streaming configuration page
opens.
3. Click New stream and choose SRT push. The new stream with the default name Stream 1 is created.
4. Click the stream name to expand the stream settings.
5. In the Connection mode field, select Rendezvous.
6. Enter the URL of the SRT destination (decoder) using the format srt://<decoder-ip-address>:<port>,
where the <decoder-ip-address> and <port> values are provided by the CDN, media server, or an SRT
decoder device such as a second Pearl-2 at the destination.
358
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up an SRT stream using caller and listener modes
7. (Optional) Check Encryption and choose the AES key length if the SRT destination requires AES
encryption. These settings must match the encryption settings of the destination device, see Set AES
encryption and a passphrase for SRT.
8. (Optional) If the SRT destination has a required security Passphrase along with the AES encryption,
you can enter that here.
9. (Optional) In the Latency field adjust the amount of latency to apply to the stream. The default value
is 125 ms.
We recommend using the default latency and recovery bandwidth overhead values for an
initial test stream. After you perform a test stream, you can determine the Quality of
Service (QoS) and calculate the latency requirements. To set the SRT stream latency, see
Adjust latency and view the SRT stream status.
10. (Optional) In the Recovery bandwidth overhead field, adjust the % value of the bandwidth that's
dedicate for SRT control and recovery packets. The default value is 25%.
11. (Optional) Rename the stream. Click the current name and enter a different name, then press Enter.
Refresh your browser if the new stream name doesn't immediately display.
12. Click Apply.
13. When your ready to start streaming, click Start
What's next?
If you also need to set up Pearl-2 as an SRT destination and ingest an SRT stream from a remote source, you
must add the SRT stream as a input, see Connect an SRT stream as an input.
Set up an SRT stream using caller and listener modes
When setting up SRT streaming on Pearl-2, you can configure Pearl-2 as an SRT source encoder and send an
SRT stream over the Internet to other SRT destinations (decoders) such as a CDN or another Pearl-2.
Caller and listener modes work together to establish the SRT link between your SRT source and destination
device when traversing the firewall is difficult and Rendezvous mode didn't work.
359
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up an SRT stream using caller and listener modes
To establish an SRT link between the source and destination devices, ensure that one device is a Listener and
the other is a caller. The device you set as the caller (or listener) is arbitrary. If the destination device is set as
the listener and is ingesting multiple SRT sources, then all your SRT source devices must be set as callers.
In the following example, a Pearl-2 is setup as SRT Source A (192.168.1.10) and another Pearl-2 is setup as
SRT Destination B (203.0.113.10). Source A is streaming through a firewall/NAT to Destination B, which
ingests the SRT stream as a video input with embedded audio.
360
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up an SRT stream using caller and listener modes
The public IP address of the Firewall/NAT is 168.112.1.1 and port 2000 is the designated SRT streaming port.
All traffic received at 168.112.1.1 on port 2000 is granted permission to pass through the firewall and is
forwarded ( C ) to Destination B's internal IP address (203.0.113.10) on port 3000.
What's needed for this setup
l
The internal IP address of SRT Destination B (e.g. 203.0.113.10).
l
The SRT port value that was configured on SRT Destination B using the Admin panel when the SRT
stream was added as a video input source using the Admin panel (e.g. port 3000).
l
The public IP address of the firewall. An easy way to get the public IP address is to use a web browser
and do a Google search for "What is my IP address" (e.g. 168.112.1.1).
l
The IT administrator in charge of the firewall must open a port for the SRT stream (e.g. port 2000). The
port must allow 2-way traffic and route the traffic to the internal IP address and SRT port of
Destination B. In this example, traffic received at the firewall's public IP address 168.112.1.1 on SRT
port 2000 is routed to 203.0.113.10:3000.
When you're configuring an SRT stream on Pearl-2, you can also adjust the recovery bandwidth overhead
using the Admin panel. This setting defines how much of the stream's total bandwidth is dedicated for the
exchange of SRT control and recovery packets between the source and destination. Ensure that the total SRT
stream bitrate (i.e. the bandwidth required for the stream plus the recovery bandwidth overhead) is less than
the network bandwidth you have available.
To setup Pearl-2 as a streaming source in caller/listener mode using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The Streaming configuration page
opens.
3. Click New stream and choose SRT push. The new stream with the default name Stream 1 is created.
361
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up an SRT stream using caller and listener modes
4. Click the stream name to see the stream settings.
5. In the Connection mode field, select if this Pearl-2 is the caller or a listener.
a. If Caller is selected, do the following:
i. In the URL field, enter the IP address of the SRT destination (decoder) using the format
srt://<decoder-ip-address>:<port>, where the <decoder-ip-address> and <port> could be
provided by the CDN, media server, or be another SRT decoder device such as a second
Pearl-2.
ii. (Optional) In the Source port field, enter the port number that this Pearl-2 should use for
SRT traffic.
b. If Listener is selected, enter the Port number that this Pearl-2 should use for SRT traffic. See
Network ports used by Pearl-2 to determine available ports.
6. (Optional) In the Stream ID field, enter a unique name for this stream.
7. (Optional) Check Encryption and choose the AES key length if the SRT destination requires AES
encryption. These settings must match the encryption settings of the destination device, see Set AES
encryption and a passphrase for SRT.
8. (Optional) If the SRT destination has a required security Passphrase along with the AES encryption,
you can enter that here.
362
Pearl-2 User Guide
Adjust latency and view the SRT stream status
9. (Optional) In the Latency field adjust the amount of latency to apply to the stream. The default value
is 125 ms.
We recommend using the default latency and recovery bandwidth overhead values for an
initial test stream. After you perform a test stream, you can determine the Quality of
Service (QoS) and calculate the latency requirements. To set the SRT stream latency, see
Adjust latency and view the SRT stream status.
10. (Optional) In the Recovery bandwidth overhead field, adjust the % value of the bandwidth that's
dedicate for SRT control and recovery packets. The default value is 25%.
11. (Optional) Rename the stream. Click the current name and enter a different name, then press Enter.
Refresh your browser if the new stream name doesn't immediately display.
12. Click Apply.
13. When your ready to start streaming, click Start
What's next?
If you also need to set up Pearl-2 as an SRT destination and ingest an SRT stream from a remote source, you
must add the SRT stream as a input, see Connect an SRT stream as an input.
Adjust latency and view the SRT stream status
Secure Reliable Transport (SRT) achieves high-quality, low-latency streaming across unreliable Internet
connections via UDP packets. If packets are lost in transit to the SRT destination, a request to retransmit the
lost packets is sent back to Pearl-2. Using the Admin panel, you can adjust the latency to improve the Quality
of Service (QoS) of the stream and reduce the number of dropped packets.
During the SRT stream, you can view the stream statistics using the Admin panel and adjust the amount of
latency based on the packet loss % and Round Trip Time (RTT). SRT stream statistics are provided on the
streaming configuration page for a channel when Pearl-2 is configured as an SRT source. If Pearl-2 is
configured as an SRT destination with an SRT input, then SRT statistics are available on the SRT input
configuration page.
The following example shows SRT statistics for an SRT stream. The statistics section appears only while an SRT
stream is active. It takes about 30 seconds for the statistics to appear after the SRT connection is established.
363
Pearl-2 User Guide
Adjust latency and view the SRT stream status
You can add from 80 ms to 8000 ms of latency to the SRT stream. Increasing latency gives more time to
buffer packets and resend any that got lost in transit to the destination. If the latency value set for the stream
is too low and there is packet loss over the network, retransmission of lost packets will not be possible and the
stream quality will suffer.
Latency can be configured at the source and at the destination. SRT uses the highest of the two
latency values.
The formula to calculate latency is:
SRT Latency = RTT Multiplier × RTT
where the recommended range of the RTT Multiplier is a value from 3 to 20.
The following table provides guidelines for what values to use when calculating latency. An RTT multiplier
value less than 3 is too small for SRT to be effective and a value above 20 indicates a network with 100%
packet loss. Ensure the measured buffer is less than or equal to the latency value you use.
364
Pearl-2 User Guide
Adjust latency and view the SRT stream status
Table 61 Suggested SRT latency values
Packet
RTT mul-
loss %
tiplier
Recovery
bandwidth
overhead
Minimum SRT
latency
(for RTT ≤ 20
ms)
% is ≤ 1
3
33
60
% is ≤ 3
4
25
80
% is ≤ 7
5
20
100
% is ≤ 10
6
17
120
These values are from the SRT Deployment Guide. For up-to-date calculations, visit www.srtalliance.org.
For example, if the % of packet loss is 0.53 and the measured RTT is 16.506 ms, the latency calculation is:
49.518 = 3 × 16.506 ms or 50 ms of latency (rounded up).
To adjust the latency and recovery bandwidth overhead for an SRT stream using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. View the SRT statistics for the active stream. Do one of the following:
a. To open the SRT statistics from the Channels menu, select the channel with the SRT stream to
configure and click Streaming. The Streaming configuration page opens. Then select the arrow
beside the SRT stream to reveal the SRT stream statistics.
b. To open the SRT statistics from the Inputs menu, select the SRT input. Then on the SRT input
configuration page, select the arrow beside Statistics.
365
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set AES encryption and a passphrase for SRT
The statistics section only appears while an SRT stream is active.
3. In the Latency field, enter a numerical value from 80 ms to 8000 ms.
4. Click Apply.
We recommend testing your settings. Start the SRT stream and use the stream statistics to evaluate the effect
the latency and recovery bandwidth overhead values have on the packet loss % of the stream.
Set AES encryption and a passphrase for SRT
You can configure your Secure Reliable Transport (SRT) streams to use 128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits AES
encryption using the Admin panel. You can also assign the SRT stream an alphanumeric passphrase if
required. The encryption and passphrase settings on the SRT encoder sending the stream must match the
settings on the SRT decoder receiving the stream.
The encryption key length is negotiated between the source and destination devices. The largest key length
setting is what both devices will use for the stream. As long as the passphrases match, the key length will be
negotiated.
To set up AES encryption and a passphrase for SRT using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
366
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set AES encryption and a passphrase for SRT
2. To set the AES encryption and passphrase for an SRT stream, do the following:
1. From the Channels menu, select the channel with the SRT stream to configure and click
Streaming. The Streaming configuration page opens.
2. Click the arrowhead beside the SRT stream name to reveal the stream settings. In this example,
the name of the SRT stream is Stream 1.
3. Check Encryption and choose the Key length.
4. In the Passphrase field, enter the passphrase using alphanumeric characters (if required).
5. Click Apply.
3. To set the AES encryption and passphrase for an SRT input, do the following:
a. From the Inputs menu, select the SRT input you want to configure. The SRT input configuration
page opens.
367
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up an HLS (push) stream
b. Check Encryption and choose the Key length.
c. In the Passphrase field, enter the passphrase using alphanumeric characters (if required).
Special characters are not supported.
d. Click Apply.
Set up an HLS (push) stream
HTTP Live Streaming (HLS) is an adaptive, HTTP-based streaming protocol that sends video and audio content
over the network in small, media segments that get reassembled at the streaming destination. Media
segments stream over HTTP port 80 or port 443 for HTTPS, which are typically open for network access. As
such, the content can easily traverse firewalls with little to no IT involvement.
368
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up an HLS (push) stream
Pearl-2 can send a single resolution and bitrate HLS stream as an HTTP POST (or HTTP PUT) to HLS ingestion
servers and CDNs such as Akamai and YouTube. The default is HTTP POST. Your channels on Pearl-2 must be
configured for H.264 and AAC audio codec to stream using HLS. Pearl-2 supports MD5, SHA-256, and SHA512 hashing algorithms to authenticate the stream.
HLS uses an MPEG2-TS transport stream container with a configurable media segment duration, as well as a
configurable playlist size for reassembling the media segments at the ingestion server. Because HLS favors
Quality of Service (QoS) over low-latency, lag times that can be high. If a specific media segment size isn't
required by the ingestion server, then you can shorten the duration of the media segment to decrease
latency. The default segment duration is six seconds.
Using the Admin panel, you can add advanced features like a master manifest, which is an address applied to
each individual media playlist in the stream. You can also assign the HLS stream a user name and password. If
security and authentication credentials are required to stream to the ingestion server, consult the ingestion
server provider.
Important considerations
l
Only a single resolution and bitrate stream is supported.
l
Set the channel you're streaming to H.264 video encoding.
l
Fragmented MP4 is not supported.
l
If the HLS ingestion server requires a custom user-agent name, add that to the HLS stream in the
Advanced settings using the Admin panel and ensure the agent-name is added to the HLS ingestion
server's white list. Contact the IT administrator responsible for the ingestion server.
l
If the HLS ingestion server requires a user name and password, you can get those credentials from the
IT administrator responsible for the ingestion server.
To stream using HLS (push):
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The Streaming configuration page
opens.
3. Click New stream and choose HLS push. The new stream is created using the default name Stream 1.
To see the settings, click the stream name.
369
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up an HLS (push) stream
4. In the Media Playlist URL field, enter the URL of the destination server that is ingesting the stream.
For example: http://p-ep721023.i.akamaientrypoin.net/722223/hlsQualification/my_video.m3u8
5. (Optional) In the Segment template field, enter the naming format used for the names of media
segments. For example: chunk-$Number%05d$.ts
6. (Optional) Enter a Username and Password if required for this stream. Get this from the ingestion
server provider.
7. In the Method field, select POST or PUT. This selection must match the requirements of the ingestion
server.
8. In the Segment duration field, enter the length of the media segment in seconds. The default
duration is six seconds. Fractions and periods are not supported.
9. In the Playlist size field, enter the number of .ts segment files in each segment. The default playlist
size is six.
10. (Optional) Under Advanced settings, you can set the following:
a. Master manifest: Enter the URL (including the master playlist file name) of where Pearl-2 will
upload the master manifest file. The master playlist also provides the bitrate, resolution, and
codec.
370
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up an MPEG-DASH (push) stream
b. User-agent: Enter a user-agent name using alphanumerical characters only if the ingestion
server requires a specific value in the user-agent header to allow the incoming stream from this
device.
11. Click Apply.
12. When you're ready to start streaming this channel, click Start.
For details on how to start and stop streaming using the touch screen, see Stream a channel using the touch
screen. To learn how to start and stop streaming using Epiphan Live, see Control streaming and recording. For
details about using the One Touch feature to control your recording and streaming across multiple channels
and recorders simultaneously with the touch of a button, see About One Touch streaming and recording.
Set up an MPEG-DASH (push) stream
MPEG-DASH (Dynamic Adaptive Streaming over HTTP) is an open standard, adaptive HTTP-based streaming
protocol that sends video and audio content over the network in small, media segments that get reassembled
at the streaming destination. Media segments can stream over HTTP port 80 or port 443 for HTTPS, which are
typically open for network access. As such, the content can easily traverse firewalls with little to no IT
involvement.
As an open standard, MPEG-DASH is designed to be codec and resolution agnostic. Pearl-2 can send a single
resolution and bitrate MPEG-DASH stream as an HTTP POST (or HTTP PUT) to HLS ingestion servers and CDNs
such as Akamai and YouTube. The default is HTTP POST. Your channels on Pearl-2 must be configured for
H.264 and AAC audio codec to stream using MPEG-DASH. Pearl-2 supports MD5, SHA-256, and SHA-512
hashing algorithms to authenticate the stream.
MPEG-DASH uses an MPEG2-TS transport stream container with a configurable media segment duration, as
well as a configurable DASH list size for reassembling the media segments at the ingestion server. Because
MPEG-DASH favors quality of Service (QoS) over low-latency, lag times that can be high. If a specific media
segment size isn't required by the ingestion server, then you can shorten the duration of the media segment
to decrease latency. The default segment duration is six seconds.
Using the Admin panel, you can configure advanced features like enabling DASH multiplex streaming. You can
also assign the MPEG-DASH stream a user name and password.
The following table lists the optional advanced MPEG-DASH parameters. Check with the ingestion server
provider to confirm if any of these parameters need to be configured.
Table 62 Advanced MPEG-DASH parameters
Item
DASH Multiplex streams
Description
Check this parameter to enable multiplex
streams. When enabled, video and audio are sent
371
Pearl-2 User Guide
Item
Set up an MPEG-DASH (push) stream
Description
in the same segment file instead of one segment
for audio and a different one for the video.
Check this parameter to enable inserting an
embedded initialization segment into this stream.
Embedded initialization segment
When enabled, initialization data for the stream is
embedded in the MPEG DASH MPD file instead of
sending it separately.
If the ingestion server requires or only allows
incoming streams with specific values in the user-
User-Agent
agent header, use this parameter to configure
Pearl-2 with the value to insert in its user-agent
header.
Use this field to specify the name of the
Initialization template
initialization file that Pearl-2 sends to the
ingestion server. Check with the ingestion server
provider for what value to use.
Use this field to specify the name of the media
Media segment template
segment file that Pearl-2 sends to the ingestion
server. Check with the ingestion server provider
for what value to use.
Set the duration as an integer in seconds. The
DASH MPD upload period
acceptable range is from 1 to 999 seconds. The
default value is 60 seconds. Fractions and periods
are not allowed.
Important considerations
l
Only a single resolution and bitrate stream is supported.
l
Set the channel you're streaming to H.264 video encoding.
l
Fragmented MP4 is not supported.
l
If the MPEG-DASH ingestion server requires a user name and password, you can get those credentials
from the IT administrator responsible for the ingestion server.
To stream using MPEG-DASH (push):
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
372
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up an MPEG-DASH (push) stream
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The Streaming configuration page
opens.
3. Click New stream and choose DASH push. The new stream is created using the default name Stream
1. To see the settings, click the stream name.
4. In the URL field, enter the URL of the destination server that is ingesting the stream. For example:
http://p-ep721023.i.akamaientrypoin.net/722223/hlsQualification/my_video.m3u8
5. (Optional) Enter a Username and Password if required for this stream. Get this from the ingestion
server provider.
6. In the Method field, select POST or PUT. This selection must match the requirements of the ingestion
server.
373
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up an RTSP announce stream
7. In the Segment duration field, enter the length of the media segment in seconds. The default
duration is five seconds. Fractions and periods are not supported.
8. In the DASH List size field, enter the number of .ts segment files in each segment. The default playlist
size is five.
9. (Optional) Under Advanced settings, you can set the following:
a. Check DASH Multiplex streams to enable multiplex streaming.
b. Check Embedded initialization segment to add an optional initialization segment to the
stream.
c. User-agent: Enter a user-agent name using alphanumerical characters only if the ingestion
server requires that to allow the incoming stream from this device.
d. Initialization template: Enter the address to use for each individual DASH list in the stream.
The initialization template also provides the bitrate, resolution, and codec.
e. In the Media segment template field, enter the naming format used for the names of media
segments. For example: chunk-$Number%05d$.ts
f. Enter the DASH MPD upload period as an integer in seconds. The default is 60 seconds.
10. Click Apply.
11. When you're ready to start streaming this channel, click Start.
For details on how to start and stop streaming using the touch screen, see Stream a channel using the touch
screen. To learn how to start and stop streaming using Epiphan Live, see Control streaming and recording. For
details about using the One Touch feature to control your recording and streaming across multiple channels
and recorders simultaneously with the touch of a button, see About One Touch streaming and recording.
Set up an RTSP announce stream
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The Streaming configuration page
opens.
3. Click New stream and choose RTSP announce. The new stream is created using the default name
Stream 1.
374
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up an RTSP announce stream
4. Click the stream name to see the stream settings.
5. (Optional) To rename the stream, click the current name and type a different name, then press Enter.
Refresh your browser if the new stream name doesn't immediately display.
6. (Optional) Uncheck Single touch control if you don't want this stream to be started and stopped
using One Touch streaming and recording control (checked by default).
7. Enter the following parameters:
l
The URL of the ingestion point provided by the CDN or media server.
l
Select the Transport type as either UDP or TCP. Consult your CDN provider to find out which
transport protocols the CDN supports.
l
The CDN User name and Password (if required).
The CDN provider assigns a user name and password to authenticate the publisher.
Contact the CDN provider for your log in credentials.
8. Click Apply.
9. To start streaming, click Start or click Start all to simultaneously start this stream and any other
streams you have configured for this channel.
10. Click Delete this stream at any time to delete the stream.
See Start and stop streaming to a CDN for instructions to control streaming from the touch screen or see
Control streaming and recording for instructions to use Epiphan Live.
375
Pearl-2 User Guide
Stream to a CDN using an XML profile
Stream to a CDN using an XML profile
Some CDNs provide an XML file for easy configuration.
To stream to a CDN using an XML profile:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The Streaming configuration page
opens.
3. Click New stream and select Use profile XML.
4. Select the XML file that was provided by your CDN provider, then click OK. The new stream is created
using the default name Stream 1 and the configuration from the XML file is applied.
376
Pearl-2 User Guide
Start and stop streaming to a CDN
5. Click Apply.
6. To start streaming, click Start or click Start all to simultaneously start this stream and any other
streams you have configured for this channel.
7. Click Delete this stream at any time to delete the stream.
See Start and stop streaming to a CDN for instructions to control streaming from the touch screen or see
Control streaming and recording for instructions to use Epiphan Live.
Start and stop streaming to a CDN
After your CDN streaming is configured for RTMP or RTSP, you can start and stop streaming using the Admin
panel, the touch screen, or Epiphan Live.
To start and stop streaming using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The Streaming configuration page
opens.
To set up a stream using the Admin panel, click New stream and follow the instructions
for how to Streaming to a CDN, multicasting, and streaming to multiple
destinations.
377
Pearl-2 User Guide
Start and stop streaming to a CDN
3. Click Start at the top right corner to start that stream, or click Start all at the top of the page to start
streaming all streams that are configured for that channel.
4. Click Stop at the top right corner to stop that stream, or click Stop all at the top of the page to stop
streaming for all streams that are configured for that channel.
You can tell if your channel is streaming from the touch screen on Pearl-2 when you look at the channel view
or the Grid view. The following shows an example Grid view.
l
A blue dot in the top right corner means the channel is currently streaming.
l
A yellow dot with an exclamation mark means a problem with streaming occurred that requires
attention.
For details to start and stop streaming using the touch screen, see Stream a channel using the touch screen.
For details to start and stop streaming using Epiphan Live, see Control streaming and recording.
To learn how to use One Touch feature to control your recording and streaming across any number of
specified channels and recorders simultaneously with the touch of a button, see About One Touch streaming
and recording.
378
Pearl-2 User Guide
Start and stop streaming to a CDN
379
Pearl-2 User Guide
Multicast streaming
Multicast streaming
You can add multiple multicast streams to a channel in Pearl-2. A multicast stream consists of one stream
distributed to many viewers via a multicast-capable network. You can stream to several multicast networks
and at the same time, stream to non-multicast CDNs.
Pearl-2 supports multicast streaming to an IP TV or a set-top box playlist using SAP when the stream format is
MPEG-TS.
Topics include:
l
MPEG-TS streams using RTP/UDP push
l
MPEG-TS streams using UDP push
l
Multicast streaming using RTP/UDP
l
Set up traffic shaping
l
Viewing with Session Announcement Protocol (SAP)
To setup multicast streaming to set-top boxes, digital signs, smart TVs and other digital media players over a
local network using UPnP, see Stream using UPnP.
MPEG-TS streams using RTP/UDP push
When you configure an MPEG-TS stream using RTP/UDP push, you have the option to enable SAP and
multicast over a local network at the same time.
Before configuring your channel for MPEG-TS streaming, ensure the following codecs are configured:
l
Video – H.264
l
Audio – MP3 or AAC, if audio is configured.
To configure your channel for MPEG-TS using RTP/UDP push and enable SAP:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The Streaming configuration page
opens.
3. Click New stream and select MPEG-TS RTP/UDP push.
380
Pearl-2 User Guide
MPEG-TS streams using RTP/UDP push
4. Enter the destination multicast IP address where the broadcast can be viewed.
A IPv4 multicast address range is an address between 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
Contact your System Administrator for the specific address to use.
5. Enter the destination port number through which the media will stream.
6. (Optional) To advertise your stream to a media player over a local network, do the following:
a. Check SAP announcement to enable advertising your stream over a local network. When this is
enabled and a multicast IP address is configured, your stream is displayed in the playlist of the
local media player.
b. Enter a multicast IP address in the SAP announcement IP field. If your media player is
configured to receive multicast streams from an IP address that is different from the default
address 224.2.127.254, you may need to contact your system administrator for a specific
multicast IP address.
c. Enter a channel number in the Channel number field to identify your stream in the media
player. By default, the Channel number is the channel identifier.
381
Pearl-2 User Guide
MPEG-TS streams using UDP push
When a channel number value is not specified, viewers cannot select a
channel from the set-top box or Smart TV .
d. Enter a name for a group of streams in the text box next to Group name. Since media players
simply present a list of available streams, you can organize your streams into multiple folders or
in cases where folders are not displayed, use dot separator hierarchy to help your viewers filter
out unwanted streams by category.
7. Click Apply.
8. Select Start when you're ready to start streaming.
9. Select the Info menu to see the stream information.
To view the stream from a media player, open the URL in a media player, for example:
rtp://@ip:port or in the case of the sample configuration in the figure shown above:
rtp://@226.10.24.32:7000
To view the stream when SAP announce has been set and the stream is advertised on a media player, set-top
box or Smart TV, refer to Viewing with Session Announcement Protocol (SAP).
If you're streaming to 10/100 Mbps set-top boxes over Gigabit Ethernet and you notice frames are dropping,
you can limit the bandwidth of the stream, see Set up traffic shaping.
MPEG-TS streams using UDP push
When you configure an MPEG-TS stream using UDP push, you have the option to enable SAP and multicast
over a local network at the same time.
Before configuring your channel for MPEG-TS streaming, ensure the following codecs are configured in the
encoding section:
l
Video – H.264
l
Audio – MP3 or AAC, if audio is configured.
To configure MPEG-TS with UDP push and enable SAP:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
3. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The Streaming configuration page
opens.
4. Click New stream and select MPEG-TS UDP push.
382
Pearl-2 User Guide
MPEG-TS streams using UDP push
5. Enter the destination multicast IP address where the broadcast can be viewed.
A IPv4 multicast address range is an address between 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
Contact your System Administrator for the specific address to use.
6. Enter the destination port number through which the media will stream.
7. (Optional) To advertise your stream to a media player over a local network, do the following:
a. Check SAP announcement to enable advertising your stream over a local network. When this is
enabled and a multicast IP address is configured, your stream is displayed in the playlist of the
local media player.
b. Enter a multicast IP address in the SAP announcement IP field. If your media player is
configured to receive multicast streams from an IP address that is different from the default
address 224.2.127.254, you may need to contact your system administrator for a specific
multicast IP address.
c. Enter a channel number in the Channel number field to identify your stream in the media
player. By default, the Channel number is the channel identifier.
383
Pearl-2 User Guide
Multicast streaming using RTP/UDP
When a channel number value is not specified, viewers cannot select a
channel from the set-top box or Smart TV .
d. Enter a name for a group of streams in the text box next to Group name. Since media players
simply present a list of available streams, you can organize your streams into multiple folders or
in cases where folders are not displayed, use dot separator hierarchy to help your viewers filter
out unwanted streams by category.
8. Click Apply.
9. Select Start when you're ready to start streaming.
To view the stream, open the URL in a media player, for example:
udp://@ip:port
For example: udp://@226.10.24.32:7000
To view the stream when SAP announce has been set and the stream is advertised from a media player, settop box or Smart TV, refer to Viewing with Session Announcement Protocol (SAP).
If you're streaming to 10/100 Mbps set-top boxes over Gigabit Ethernet and you notice frames are dropping,
you can limit the bandwidth of the stream, see Set up traffic shaping.
Multicast streaming using RTP/UDP
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
3. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The Streaming configuration page
opens.
4. Click New stream and select RTP/UDP push.
384
Pearl-2 User Guide
Multicast streaming using RTP/UDP
5. Enter the following:
l
Destination multicast IP address.
l
Audio port number through which the audio will stream.
l
Video port number through which the video will stream.
Audio and video use nearby port numbers (<port number>and <port number+2>). The minimum
distance between audio and video ports must be 2.
6. Click Apply. An SDP file is generated.
7. From the channel's Status page, click the SDP file to download it. Provide the SDP file name and
location if prompted.
8. Share the file with your viewers and when you're ready to start streaming, select Start.
If you're streaming to 10/100 Mbps set-top boxes over Gigabit Ethernet and you notice frames are dropping,
you can limit the bandwidth of the stream, see Set up traffic shaping.
385
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up traffic shaping
Set up traffic shaping
If you're multicasting to set-top boxes that have 10/100 Mbps interfaces on the same Gigabit Ethernet and
you notice frames are dropping, you can limit the bandwidth of the stream using traffic shaping to adapt for
the lower bandwidth set-top boxes. Only multicast streams support traffic shaping: MPEG-TS USP, MPEG-TS
RTP/UDP, and RTP/UDP.
If traffic shaping was previously setup using the API, we recommend switching to this method of
setting traffic shaping using the Admin panel. If traffic shaping is currently setup using Pearl-2's
API, see the Technical Notes for your Pearl-2 model for instructions. They're available from the
product resources page on the Epiphan.com website.
When traffic shaping is enabled, the default bitrate limit is set to auto. In auto mode, the bitrate is limited to
the sum of the channel's configured bitrate plus 4 Mbps and is adjusted to fit within the range of 4 Mbps
minimum to 95 Mbps maximum.
You can also set a bitrate limit for the maximum amount of bandwidth that gets streamed using the Admin
panel when traffic shaping is enabled. When you do, the streamed video won't exceed the maximum bitrate
you set. The valid bandwidth limit bitrate range is 4 Mbps to 95 Mbps. We recommend that you set the bitrate
to a value no less than the channel encoding bitrate plus 4 Mbps.
For example, if the bitrate for the channel is set to 10 Mbps in the encoding settings, the minimum value we
recommend for the bandwidth limit bitrate is 14 Mbps.
Important considerations
l
Traffic shaping works for the local switch. Switches connected to the local switch don't respect the
policy.
l
If the channel encoding bitrate is set to a value that's less than 4 Mbps and traffic shaping is enabled,
the minimum bandwidth limit does not drop below than 4 Mbps.
l
If the channel encoding bitrate value is greater than 95 Mbps and traffic shaping is enabled, the
maximum bandwidth limit does not exceed 95 Mbps.
l
If the bandwidth limit is set to auto and the total of the channel bitrate plus 4 Mbps exceeds 95 Mbps,
the maximum bandwidth limit does not exceed 95 Mbps.
l
After enabling traffic shaping for a channel using the Admin panel, you can no longer use the Pearl-2
API to clear or configure traffic shaping for that channel. If you currently use the API to configure traffic
shaping, see the Technical Notes for your Pearl-2 model for instructions. They're available from the
product resources page on the Epiphan.com website.
386
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set up traffic shaping
After traffic shaping is enabled, we recommend that you first test a multicast stream using the auto traffic
shaping settings. If your low bandwidth network device is displaying poor video quality, then go ahead and
manually set the limit bandwidth bitrate according to the bandwidth of your particular network device.
To set traffic shaping for a multicast stream:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The Streaming configuration page
opens.
3. Click New stream and select a multicasting stream as the type: MPEG-TS USP, MPEG-TS RTP/UDP, or
RTP/UDP. The new stream is created with the default name Stream 1.
4. Click the stream name to see the stream settings.
5. Check Limit bandwidth. The default bitrate is set to auto.
6. (Optional) Set the Limit bandwidth rate and enter a bitrate value from 4,000 kbps to 95,000 kbps.
7. Click Apply.
387
Pearl-2 User Guide
Viewing with Session Announcement Protocol (SAP)
Viewing with Session Announcement Protocol (SAP)
When SAP Announce is configured for a stream that uses UDP streaming, the stream is advertised over the
local network. Local viewers can view the stream using a software or hardware media player. Viewers are
presented with a list of available channels, similar to a television menu. Viewers need only click on a stream
and the video is streamed to their desktop, mobile or tablet. To configure SAP announce, go to Multicast
streaming.
Your stream is advertised by the metadata title, if one was configured under Branding, otherwise it is
identified by its channel identifier. For a description of how to set the metadata, refer to Add or remove
channel metadata.
When browsing from a VLC media player, streams are advertised by their channel identifier and are organized
by the group name. When browsing from an XBMC media player, streams are advertised by the stream's
metadata title (if configured), otherwise streams are advertised by their channel identifier.
1. Ensure the stream has SAP announcement enabled, otherwise, it is not advertised in the media player's
playlist.
2. Ensure the SAP announcement IP is a multicast IP address.
3.
Some media players, for example Exterity receivers, listen for SAP announcements on a
specific multicast address 239.255.255.255. If your audience is using Exterity to view your
stream, you must change the SAP announcement IP address to 239.255.255.255.
4. Launch a media player and play the streams.
a. Using VLC, click View and select Playlist. The right-hand panel indicates the playlist is empty.
b. From the side menu, click Network streams (SAP). The playlist is populated with all streams in
your network that are SAP announcement enabled. If you specified a Group Name when you
configured the publish stream the stream will be listed in folder identified by the group name.
c. Click on a live stream in the playlist to play the stream.
This VLC example shows two streams D2P83658.vga and D2P83658.video, which are organized in a
folder by their group name.
388
Pearl-2 User Guide
Viewing with Session Announcement Protocol (SAP)
389
Pearl-2 User Guide
Streaming to a media player or smart TV
Streaming to a media player or smart TV
Your Pearl-2 can use UPnP and SAP to stream to set-top boxes, digital signs, smart TVs and other digital media
players.
The following table gives an overview of each option.
Publishing Options
Use this option to...
Using the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) networking protocol, your Pearl-2
UPnP
can be discovered and can stream to software and hardware media players,
set-top boxes and Smart TVs with ease. See Stream using UPnP.
SAP (session announcement protocol) is a protocol for broadcasting
multicast session information. You can enable SAP and stream over a local
network when MPEG-TS multicast streaming is configured, see Multicast
SAP
streaming.
Media players can see the announcement or can use the multicast SDP file
(session description file) directly, see Viewing with Session Announcement
Protocol (SAP).
To stream video outside of your LAN, use a CDN or configure port forwarding on your router.
Refer to your Network Administrator. Network configuration is beyond the scope of this guide.
Stream using UPnP
Using the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) networking protocol, your Pearl-2 can be discovered and can stream
to software and hardware media players, set-top boxes and Smart TVs with ease. If UPnP is enabled, Pearl-2
automatically establishes communication with media players on the network.
UPnP uses MPEG-TS over HTTP with the H.264 codec and MP3 or AAC audio encoding (or no audio). You can
only access live streams or recordings that meet these requirements.
For security reasons, UPnP access to live streams and recorded files is disabled by default.
Some players can not access the stream or saved recordings if a viewer password is set. See User
administration to remove the viewer password if set.
Topics include:
390
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Enable UPnP
l
Disable UPnP
l
Viewing with UPnP
l
Play directly to a media player
l
Auto-restart playback to a UPnP device
l
Change UPnP device name
Enable UPnP
To choose recordings or live streams from your media player, see Play directly to a media player.
Enable UPnP
For security reasons, UPnP is disabled for Pearl-2 at the device level and for each channel by default. You can
enable UPnP to allow digital media players on the network to browse for recorded media files or live streams
on your Pearl-2.
There are two steps to enable UPnP on Pearl-2:
l
Enable UPnP at the device level (including setting a share name)
l
Enable UPnP for channels and recorders
Streams and MPEG-TS recorded files must use the supported codecs: H.264 with MP3 or AAC
audio. Having a viewer password could prevent the ability to use UPnP.
Enable UPnP for the device
To enable UPnP sharing for the device:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
3. From the Configuration menu, click UPnP. The UPnP configuration page opens.
391
Pearl-2 User Guide
Enable UPnP
4. Enter a name in the Server name field. If no name is provided the server name will be the serial
number of Pearl-2.
5. Select whether you want to share live video and recorded files and click Apply.
If no live stream is available that meets the criteria for UPnP, a message is displayed in the Play on
service start section of the page.
Otherwise, the Play on service start section shows a drop-down list of what can be streamed.
Enable UPnP for channels and recorders
After you enable UPnP for the device to allow live stream and recorded file sharing, you need to enable
sharing for each channel and recorder you want to share.
To enable UPnP sharing for channels and recorders:
1. For channels (live streaming):
a. Click Streaming for the channel. The Streaming configuration page opens.
b. Check Share via UPnP and click Apply.
392
Pearl-2 User Guide
Enable UPnP
If you have not already enabled UPnP for the device, the message "UPnP live video sharing is not
enabled with this device, to fix it, click here" appears. Click to fix it click here. The UPnP service
will start when you click Apply.
2. For channels (recorded files):
a. Click Recording for a channel. The channel's recording page opens.
b. Click change under Recorder Setup. The recording setup options opens.
393
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable UPnP
c. Check Share via UPnP and click Apply.
If you have not already enabled UPnP for the device, the message "UPnP live video sharing is not
enabled with this device, to fix it, click here" appears. Click to fix it click here. The UPnP service
will start when you click Apply.
3. For recorders:
a. Click Recording for a channel. The channel's recording page opens.
b. Click change under Recorder Setup. The recording setup options open.
c. Check Share via UPnP and click Apply.
If you have not already enabled UPnP for the device, the message "UPnP live video sharing is not
enabled with this device, to fix it, click here" appears. Click to fix it click here. The UPnP service
will start when you click Apply.
You can now browse for your server from your digital media player.
Disable UPnP
By default, UPnP sharing is disable for the device, and for each channels and recorder. If you enabled UPnP
sharing it for a particular broadcast, you may want to disable UPnP sharing after the broadcast is complete.
You can choose to disable access to live streams, recorded files, or to the whole system.
To disable UPnP for a channel or recorder:
394
Pearl-2 User Guide
Viewing with UPnP
1. For channels:
a. Click Streaming for the channel. The Streaming configuration page opens.
b. Uncheck Share via UPnP and click Apply.
2. For recorders:
a. From the Recorders menu, select a recorder.
b. Click change under Recorder Setup. The recording setup options opens.
c. Uncheck Share via UPnP and click Apply.
To disable UPnP globally for the device:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
3. From the Configuration menu, click UPnP. The UPnP configuration page opens.
4. Uncheck Share live video through UPnP to stop sharing live video.
5. Uncheck Share recorded files through UPnP to stop sharing recorded files.
6. Click Apply.
Viewing with UPnP
Using a software or hardware media player, you can browse for files or streams with Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP). UPnP uses MPEG-TS over HTTP with the H.264 codec and MP3 or AAC audio encoding (or no audio).
You can only access live streams or recordings that meet these requirements.
395
Pearl-2 User Guide
Viewing with UPnP
For security reasons, UPnP access to live streams and recorded files is disabled by default. To enable UPnP,
see Enable UPnP
Some players cannot access the stream or saved recordings if a viewer password is set. If needed,
see Remove user passwords to clear the viewer password.
When browsing via UPnP your Pearl-2 is displayed by the server name you set, or it's product serial number.
For example, when browsing from a Windows computer, you will see a list of media devices that includes
Pearl-2:
Live streams
When you open the device from Windows Media Player, you'll see a list of the available channels you can
stream under the Videos tab. From other digital media players, the channel list can be under a Live Streams
folder.
With Windows Media Player, double click to open any channel and press Play to start the stream. Using your
digital media player, select a live stream and press play.
Recorded files
Recorded files are shown in the Recorded Files folder. Files are organized by the channel or recorder from
which they were recorded. Windows Media Player shows the recorder files side by side with the channels and
other digital media players show the recorded files in a file tree format, see below.
396
Pearl-2 User Guide
Play directly to a media player
UPnP can also be used to directly play a recording to the digital media player, or to set a media player to
automatically play a particular live stream after reboot of Pearl-2. See Stream using UPnP and Play directly to
a media player.
Play directly to a media player
If your digital media player is UPnP enabled, Pearl-2 can play direct the media player to play recorded files,
without browsing through menus in the player.
Recorded files must be in MPEG-TS format and use the supported codecs: H.264 with MP3 or AAC audio.
If a viewer password is configured, that could prevent the ability to use UPnP, see Set or change user
passwords.
To play directly to a media player:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Ensure Share recorded files through UPnP is enabled on your Pearl-2 and for the channel or
recorder you want to share, see Enable UPnP.
3. Open the recorded files list for the channel or recorder, see View list of recorded files.
4. From the list of files, select the file you want to play and click on the Play To icon for the file. A list of
visible digital media players is displayed.
5. Select a media player. The recording plays on the screen that is connected to the media player.
397
Pearl-2 User Guide
Auto-restart playback to a UPnP device
Auto-restart playback to a UPnP device
In unmanned situations such as industrial applications and digital signs, it is useful to automatically have a
stream played to a digital media player, even if Pearl-2 restarts.
To configure auto-restart of a stream to a media player:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
3. From the Configuration menu, click UPnP. The UPnP configuration page opens.
4. In the Play on service start section, select a stream from the Live stream drop-down list.
5. Select a digital media player from the Player drop-down list. Digital media players on your network
that support UPnP playback appear automatically in the list.
6. Click Apply.
Only a single stream and player combination can be configured for auto play. The channel's UPnP
configuration must be enabled for it to appear.
Change UPnP device name
You can configure the UPnP server name that appears for your Pearl-2. By default, if you left the server name
field blank when enabling UPnP, the server name is the system's serial number.
To change the UPnP server name:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
3. From the Configuration menu, click UPnP. The UPnP configuration page opens.
4. Highlight and delete the text in the Server name field, if any.
5. Type a new server name. Use characters A-Z, a-z, 0-9, _, :, @, ^, #, -. {}, [], ().
6. Click Apply.
Streaming NDI
For other NDI resources on the network to see the video resources on Pearl-2, you must start an NDI stream
for the channel you want to broadcast on the network.
Topics include:
l
About streaming NDI
l
Start and stop an NDI stream
398
Pearl-2 User Guide
About streaming NDI
To connect an NDI source to Pearl-2, see Connect an NDI source.
About streaming NDI
NDI® (Network Device Interface) is used to transmit low-latency video content over Gigabit networks at
broadcast quality with no audio compression. The quality of the video transported over the network is
virtually lossless.
Pearl-2 can output any configured channel over the network as a unicast NDI stream. You setup the NDI
stream for the channel using the Admin panel. NDI grouping is supported to allow for organizing of individual
NDI resources.
You can use NDI on wired and wireless networks; however, NDI video is bandwidth intensive. Depending on
the video content, a single 1920×[email protected] fps NDI video source needs about 125 Mbps of dedicated
bandwidth.
For NDI to work properly, network ports 49152 to 65535 need to be open for two-way traffic.
Contact your network administrator for assistance.
The unicast NDI stream can be ingested by other NDI devices on the network. You can start and stop the NDI
output stream using either the Admin panel, the touch screen, or Epiphan Live, see Start and stop streaming
to a CDN.
Important considerations
l
Pearl-2 can unicast up to two 1920×1080 @ 30 fps NDI output streams at the same time. However,
NDI allows receivers to request a lower quality stream. If that happens, Pearl-2 will send two streams:
one at the original resolution and a second one at the requested resolution. This can impact the CPU
performance of Pearl-2, see Optimum CPU performance.
l
Pearl-2 does not output NDI|HX.
l
We recommend having at least 125 Mbps Ethernet for a single 1920×1080 30 fps NDI stream, and
between 8 to 20 Mbps for a single 1920×1080 30 fps NDI|HX stream. Keep in mind that a Gigabit
Ethernet network will only have between 600 Mbps and 700 Mbps available for practical use. If
multiple NDI receivers connect to an NDI stream on Pearl-2, the bandwidth needed for each
NDI receiver adds to the total bandwidth consumption.
l
After you start an NDI stream on Pearl-2, if NDI detects there are no receivers connected to the stream,
Pearl-2 stops broadcasting to conserve bandwidth and resources. However, the Pearl-2 stream can still
be discovered on the network.
399
Pearl-2 User Guide
Start and stop an NDI stream
Pearl-2 can ingest up to three multicast or unicast 1920×[email protected] fps NDI video inputs or up to one 4K NDI
input to Pearl-2, and supports both NDI and NDI|HX video inputs. For more information about NDI inputs,
see Connect an NDI source.
Start and stop an NDI stream
NDI® (Network Device Interface) is used to transmit low-latency video content over Gigabit networks at
broadcast quality with no audio compression. Pearl-2 supports up to two unicast NDI output streams at
1920×[email protected] fps.
You can assign the NDI stream a unique name using alphanumeric characters. The name appears in
parenthesis after the Pearl-2 serial number and three-letter prefix as part of the NDI stream ID as seen by
other NDI resources on the network.
For example: PLTTSG999901 (name)
where name is the unique alphanumeric name you assign the stream and PLT is the three-digit prefix that
identifies this as a Pearl-2 system.
Pearl-2 shows up as an NDI resource to other NDI resources on the network as soon as you start an
NDI stream. All NDI devices on the same network as Pearl-2 can access the unicast stream.
Important considerations
l
Pearl-2 can unicast up to two 1920×1080 NDI streams simultaneously. However, NDI allows receivers
to request a lower quality stream. If that happens, Pearl-2 will send two streams: one at the original
resolution and a second one at the lower resolution. This has an impact on the CPU performance of
Pearl-2, see Optimum CPU performance.
l
We recommend having at least 125 Mbps Ethernet for a single 1920×1080 30 fps stream using NDI,
and between 8 and 20 Mbps for a single 1920×1080 30 fps stream using NDI|HX.
To stream using NDI:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Streaming. The Streaming configuration page
opens.
3. Click New stream and choose NDI Streaming. The new stream is created using the default name
Stream 1.
400
Pearl-2 User Guide
Start and stop an NDI stream
4. Click the stream name to see the stream settings.
5. (Optional) Uncheck Single touch control if you don't want this stream to be started and stopped
using One Touch streaming and recording control. This is enabled by default.
6. Enter a unique name for Pearl-2 in the Name field. The name you enter appears in parenthesis after
the serial number of Pearl-2 and the three-letter prefix. For example: PLTTSG999901 (name)
7. (Optional) Enter a Group to assign the stream to a specific NDI group (if applicable).
8. (Optional) Rename the stream. Click the current name and enter a different name, then press Enter.
9. Click Apply.
10. To start streaming, click Start or click Start all to simultaneously start this stream and any other
streams you have configured for this channel.
11. Click Delete this stream at any time to delete the stream.
For details on how to start and stop streaming using the touch screen, see Stream a channel using the touch
screen. To learn how to start and stop streaming using Epiphan Live, see Control streaming and recording. For
details about using the One Touch feature to control your recording and streaming across multiple channels
and recorders simultaneously with the touch of a button, see About One Touch streaming and recording.
401
PART 4: Record
Pearl-2 encodes the video and audio it captures. You can stream your content and record it at the same time.
You can even stream your switched program using a lower quality stream (i.e. 1280×720 at 2Mbps) and at the
same time, make high quality recordings of each of the video inputs at full frame with a high bitrate for future
re-use and post-processing.
Recorded files are stored on Pearl-2's hard drive. Plus there are a variety of automatic and manual
mechanisms available to download the files.
Topics include:
l
About recording
l
Record a channel
l
Record using One Touch control
l
Configure recording settings, file size and type
l
Restart recording
l
Recorders
l
Manage recorded files
l
FTP and automatic file transfers
l
Local FTP server
For instructions on how to use Pearl-2's touch screen to start/stop scheduled recordings and authenticate
with a CMS to create unscheduled ad hoc events, see CMS event controls using the touch screen.
For information about recording with Content Management Systems (CMSs) like Kaltura and Panopto, see
CMS recording and webcasting using the Admin panel.
402
Pearl-2 User Guide
About recording
About recording
You can record each of the channels on Pearl-2 as AVI, MOV, MPEG-TS, MP4, or MP4-Fragmented. You can
also setup multi-track recorders, see Recorders.
Easily stop and start recording using any of the user interfaces and access Pearl-2 remotely, see User
interfaces and remote access:
l
Admin panel
l
Touch screen
l
Epiphan Live
Using the One Touch feature, you can control recording of all your channels and recorders with a single tap on
the touch screen, see About One Touch streaming and recording. Pearl-2 also comes with APIs so you can
setup third party tools to control recording, see the Pearl System API Guide for details.
Recording using Pearl-2 is robust. If an accidental system shutdown occurs while recording is in progress, your
recordings are gracefully closed off so they are still playable.
Physically unplugging a video source from the input port or otherwise interrupting the signal does not stop
recording. A No Signal image is inserted. When recording auto channels, a new recording is made when the
input changes from one to another due to signal loss. When recording a multi-channel recorder or a multisource layout channel, a new file is created if an additional source is added to the recorder.
Each channel or recorder has a maximum time or file size limit setting that you can configure using the Admin
panel. The default recording limits are set to 30 minutes or 500 MB, whichever comes first. When the time or
file size limit is reached, the current recording is saved and a new recording file starts automatically without
losing any content. When the local drive is full, newer recordings overwrite oldest recordings.
For information about recording to Content Management Systems (CMSs) like Kaltura and Panopto, see CMS
recording and webcasting using the Admin panel. For instructions on how to use Pearl-2's touch screen to
start/stop scheduled recordings and authenticate with a CMS to create unscheduled ad hoc events, see CMS
event controls using the touch screen.
Tested media players
Epiphan has tested recordings with the following players. See Troubleshooting Quick Reference for known
player issues.
Table 63 Tested Media Players
Operating System
Mac OS
Tested Players
l
QuickTime 10.3
403
Pearl-2 User Guide
Operating System
Windows
Record a channel
Tested Players
l
QuickTime 7.6.6+
l
VLC 2.2.4
l
Playback Pro 2.3.2
l
Final Cut Pro 10.3.2
l
Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2017
l
QuickTime 7.6.6+
l
VLC 2.2.6
l
Windows Media player 12+
l
Movies & TV (Windows 10)
l
Adobe Premiere Pro CC 2015
l
MPlayer
l
VLC 2.2.2
l
Google Chrome 37+ (works with MOV and MP4 files using H.264 codec)
Linux
HTML 5 Browsers
(Windows)
Not all media players and editors support all recording formats, such as the more modern MP4fragmented format. To playback MOV files created by Pearl-2, we recommend using a newer
media player.
Record a channel
Each channel has a configuration page in the Admin panel where you can start and stop recording, as well as
configure recording settings for the channel.
You can also start and stop recording from the channel view using the touch screen on Pearl-2 (see Record a
channel using the touch screen) and using Epiphan Live (see Control streaming and recording).
The channel number turns red to indicate it is recording. If the system runs out of storage space, the oldest
recorded file is deleted to make room for the new recording.
404
Pearl-2 User Guide
Record a channel
To start and stop channel recording using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select the channel and click Recording. The channel recording menu opens.
405
Pearl-2 User Guide
Record using One Touch control
3. Click Start to start recording the channel and click Stop to stop recording.
If the Start button is not active, there are no active sources for this channel or recorder.
Check your inputs to ensure signals are working as expected.
You can navigate away from the recording page without affecting the recording.
Record using One Touch control
Pearl-2's One Touch recording and streaming control allows you to control your recording and streaming
across any number of channels and recorders with a single tap on the touch screen. Channels and recorders
are enabled for One Touch recording by default. For more information, see One Touch streaming and
recording control.
To control recording using One Touch control:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Configure your channels and recorders for One Touch control, see Specify channels and recorders for
One Touch recording.
3. Tap the One Touch control icon along the bottom of the touch screen to display the One Touch
control screen.
406
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure recording settings, file size and type
If the One Touch control icon is not visible on the touch screen, tap the screen once to
activate the control icons. If the control icons are still not visible, they are disabled. See
Configure the touch screen.
4. From the One Touch control screen, tap Start to begin recording and tap Stop to end recording.
Configure recording settings, file size and
type
Recordings are saved as AVI files by default. Each channel and recorder also has a file size limit set to 500 MB
and the maximum file length set to 30 minutes by default.
407
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure recording settings, file size and type
When a recording reaches the file length of 30 minutes or 500 MB (whichever comes first), the system closes
the current recording file and immediately opens a new one. No recorded data is lost.
Tip: If you don’t know what size to select, do some test recordings to get an idea of the file
sizes you can expect. If you want to guarantee the recording lasts to a given time limit,
select a file size that is far larger than you saw in your tests.
Important considerations
l
You cannot change the recording settings, file size, and type for channels used with Kaltura events.
l
The file recording type for a channel you are controlling and recording using AV Studio must be set to
MP4 and the maximum file size supported is 500 MB.
The following table describes the recordings configuration settings.
Table 64 Recordings Configuration Settings
Label
Description / Options
Specifies the length of time the system waits before the recording file is saved and a
Time limit
new one is started (assuming the size limit has not yet been reached). Values range
from 5 minutes to unlimited.
Specifies the maximum file size a recording can reach before it is saved and a new
Size limit
recording is started (assuming the time limit has not yet been reached). Values range
from 50 MB to 64 GB.
Specifies the recording file type. Select from AVI, MP4, MP4-Fragmented, MPEG-TS, or
MOV. Choose MPEG-TS for UPnP playback.
l
AVI: Generally used for playback on Windows.
l
MP4: A progressive version of MP4. Select MP4 for the best compatibility with
most video players and editors. Progressive MP4 files are initially recorded as
MP4-Fragmented and are converted when the recording ends.
File type
If power is lost while recording is in progress or during conversion, the files
remain in fragmented MP4 format. You can run the file through ffmpeg or
another transcoder to convert to the progressive format.
l
MP4-Fragmented: A newer MP4 format. Fixed 10 second intervals. Select MP4Fragmented for the same file format as releases 3.15.x. Some applications, like
Adobe Premiere Pro, don't yet support fragmented MP4.
There's no way to tell the difference between MP4 files and MP4-Fragmented
408
Pearl-2 User Guide
Label
Configure recording settings, file size and type
Description / Options
files from the file name because both use the .mp4 extension.
l
MPEG-TS: Choose for UPnP playback. Does not support PCM audio encoding.
l
MOV: A progressive version of MOV. Generally used for playback on Mac OS.
This type of MOV has the best compatibility with video players and editors.
Specifies how the recordings are named. Recording files start with the given prefix
followed by the date and time of the recording, which is set by the system. The channel
or recorder name is used if no prefix is given. Allowed characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, _, , #, -, [],
Filename prefix
().
Avoid using spaces in recording file names. Use underscores or hyphens to separate
words instead.
Automatic file
Select this if you want this channel or recorder to be part of any scheduled automatic
upload
uploads. See FTP and automatic file transfers for information on automatic uploads.
Share via UPnP
Single-touch
control
Select this if you want this channel or recorder to be available via UPnP. If global UPnP
is not enabled when you select this option, a link appears to let you to fix it.
Record using One Touch control
To change the recording configuration:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Do one of the following:
a. For a channel, click Recording from the Channels menu. The Recording page opens.
b. For a recorder, select a recorder from the Recorders menu. The Recorder configuration page
opens.
3. Click change under Recorder Setup. The recorder settings open.
409
Pearl-2 User Guide
Restart recording
4. Change the default recording file settings.
l
Time limit: Select a value from 5 minutes to unlimited.
l
Size limit: Select a value from 50 MB to 64 GB.
l
File type: AVI, MPEG-TS, MOV, MP4, or MP4-Fragmented.
5. (Optional) Enter a prefix for the recordings. All new recorded files for this channel or recorder will be
prefixed using the text you enter.
6. (Optional) Click the check box to exclude this channel or recorder from automatic file uploads, see FTP
and automatic file transfers.
7. Click Apply.
Restart recording
Recordings are automatically saved to a file and a new recording is started when:
410
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
The recording reaches the configured time or size limit.
l
The channel or recorder name is changed.
l
Changes are made to the stream.
Restart recording
You can manually force a recording that's in progress to save to a file and continue recording in a new file from
that point forward without any loss of content.
This is useful if you need to download a recording since you cannot download recordings that are in progress.
To restart recording to a new file:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Do one of the following:
a. For a channel, click Recording from the Channels menu. The Recording page opens.
b. For a recorder, click the recorder from the Recorders menu. The Recording page opens.
3. Click Reset to stop the current recording and start a new recording.
4. Refresh the page to see the updated list of recordings.
411
Pearl-2 User Guide
Recorders
Recorders
Using recorders with Pearl-2, you can record multiple channels together in a single multi-track file.
Recording multiple channels at the same time ensures that all your recordings start and stop at the same time.
After recording stops, you can automatically use one of the system's file synchronization methods to copy the
recordings off the server, or you can use our built-in tool to split the file into individual tracks for postprocessing.
For important considerations about file size limits when creating multiple recorders, see Configure recording
settings, file size and type.
We do not recommend using Recorders for manual (ad hoc) recordings to the Kaltura Content Management
System (CMS), see About Kaltura recording and webcasting.
Topics include:
l
Add a recorder
l
Select channels to record
l
Rename a recorder
l
Duplicate a recorder
l
Delete a recorder
To change recording settings, such as the file size limit, type, or to add a custom prefix to the file name, see
Configure recording settings, file size and type.
You only need to create recorders for multi-track recordings. For single channel recordings, see
Record a channel.
Add a recorder
Each channel has its own built-in recorder which you access from the channel's Recording page. However, if
you want to record several channels simultaneously to a multi-track file, you need to add a recorder to Pearl-2
using the Admin panel.
Each new recorder is automatically assigned a number, for example: Recorder 1, Recorder 2, etc. and is set to
record all configured channels by default.
For important considerations about file size limits when creating multiple recorders, see Configure recording
settings, file size and type.
To add a recorder:
412
Pearl-2 User Guide
Select channels to record
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Recorders menu, click Add recorder.
Select channels to record
When you create a new recorder, it records all the channels configured on Pearl-2 in the single multi-track file
by default. If you create new channels, they are automatically added to the recorder. You can choose which
channels the recorder includes in the multi-track file using the Admin panel.
To change the channels recorded by a recorder:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Recorders menu, select a recorder. The recorder configuration page opens.
3. Click change next to the list of channels to record.
413
Pearl-2 User Guide
Start and stop a recorder
4. Check the boxes next to the channels you want to include, and click Apply.
Channels with no active video source are displayed in italics. You can include these channels
in your channel selections for the recorder.
Start and stop a recorder
You can start and stop recorders from the recorder's configuration page using the Admin panel.
You can also start and stop recorders using the One Touch control feature (see Record using One Touch
control) and using Epiphan Live (see Record a channel using the touch screen).
The recorder number turns red to indicate it is recording. If the system runs out of storage space, the oldest
recorded file is deleted to make room for the new recording.
You can have multiple recorders and multiple channels recording all at the same time. The number of channels
being recorded is shown below the Start and Stop buttons on the recorder's configuration page. To select
which channels to include in the recorder, see Select channels to record.
To start and stop a recorder using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator, see Connect to Admin panel.
414
Pearl-2 User Guide
Rename a recorder
2. From the Recorders menu, select a recorder. The recorder configuration page opens.
3. Click Start to begin recording and click Stop to end recording.
You can navigate away from the page without affecting the recording.
Rename a recorder
To rename a recorder:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Recorders menu, select a recorder. The recorder configuration page opens.
3. Click the recorder name and type the new name for the recorder.
4. Press Enter to save the new name.
415
Pearl-2 User Guide
Duplicate a recorder
You must press Enter to save the recorder name change.
Duplicate a recorder
You can duplicate any recorder you've created. All settings in the recorder you duplicate are recreated.
To duplicate a recorder:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Recorders menu, select a recorder. The recorder configuration page opens.
3. Click Duplicate this recorder . The duplicate recorder is created and assigned the next recorder
number in your list of recorders.
Delete a recorder
When you no longer need a recorder, you can delete it.
Deleting a recorder deletes all the recorded files for the recorder. Be sure you have a copy of any
important recorded files before proceeding.
To delete a recorder:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Recorders menu, select a recorder. The recorder configuration page opens.
416
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete a recorder
3. Click Delete this recorder and click OK when prompted.
417
Pearl-2 User Guide
Manage recorded files
Manage recorded files
Your recordings are stored on the system's internal hard drive. Although there's a lot of space on the hard
drive, it's good practice to remove old recordings to free up space before the drive if full. If there's no more
free space for new recordings, new recordings will overwrite the oldest recordings on the hard drive.
There are a variety of ways to automatically transfer files from the system to local network storage. You can
also manually select individual recordings to transfer or delete using the Admin panel.
Topics include:
l
View list of recorded files
l
Download recorded files manually
l
Join recorded files together
l
Extract tracks from a recording
l
Rename recorded files
l
Delete recorded files
For information about automatic file transfers or setting up Pearl-2 as a local FTP server so you can manually
or automatically connect to the system and download recordings, see FTP and automatic file transfers.
View list of recorded files
Recordings for Pearl-2 are stored for each channel and each recorder separately. You can view all the
recordings for a channel or recorder using the Admin panel. You can also view the list of recordings using
Epiphan Live in the section called Your recordings.
To view the recordings for a channels or recorders using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Do one of the following:
a. To view files recorded for a channel, select a channel from the Channels menu and click
Recording. The Recording page opens.
b. To view files recoded for a recorder, select a recorder from the Recorders menu. The Recorder
page opens.
3. All recordings are listed and sorted by date.
418
Pearl-2 User Guide
Download recorded files manually
Files that are part of the same recording session are listed one after another. Three dots appear
between files of different recording sessions. The file currently being recorded (if applicable) is shown at
the top of the list. It cannot be modified or downloaded until it has finished recording.
4. If there are no recordings, a message indicates there are no recorded files for this channel or recorder.
Download recorded files manually
You can manually download recordings using the Admin panel. Files you download are saved to your
connected admin computer.
This feature is not available using the local console on Pearl-2.
To download recordings to your admin computer:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Find the recordings by channel or by recorder. See View list of recorded files.
419
Pearl-2 User Guide
Join recorded files together
3. To download an individual file:
a. Click the name of a recording file to download it.
4. To download multiple files:
a. Select the check box next to the recordings you wish to download from this channel or recorder.
b. Click Download Selected to download a zip file containing the selected recordings.
What's next?
To free up space for new recordings, consider deleting recordings off of Pearl-2, see Delete recorded files.
Join recorded files together
After recording files on Pearl-2, you can join two or more files together. This is useful when a recording
exceeds the maximum recording time limit and the recording is split in to multiple files. You can use the thirdparty tool called ffmpeg to join the files.
Download ffmpeg from the Internet (if necessary) to join recorded files:
1. Download the files that you need from Pearl-2 and make sure you have the right paths and file names.
For example:
C:\Users\JoesComputer\downloads\Program_A_May11_16-24-56.avi
420
Pearl-2 User Guide
Extract tracks from a recording
2. Use the command ffmpeg -i to specify the input file. For example:
ffmpeg -i C:\Users\JoesComputer\downloads\Program_A_May11_16-24-56.avi
3. Repeat the process and specify the file you want to join to the first file. You can keep adding as many
files as you want to join together. For example, specifying a second file looks like this:
ffmpeg -i C:\Users\JoesComputer\downloads\Program_A_May11_16-24-56.avi -i
C:\Users\JoesComputer\downloads\Program_A_May11_12-26-14.avi
4. Use the -c copy command to specify the output file. After the command, type in the location, file name
and file extension that you want for the concatenated file. The full line looks like this:
ffmpeg -i C:\Users\JoesComputer\downloads\Program_A_May11_16-24-56.avi -i
C:\Users\JoesComputer\downloads\Program_A_May11_12-26-14.avi -c copy
C:\Users\JoesComputer\Desktop\Concatenated_File.avi
5. After completing the process, you will be able to access your new file in the location you specified. The
file moves straight from the first video into the second without a pause.
You can this process to join multiple files; however, the more files you join, the greater the chance
that some audio desychronization can occur between the clips.
Extract tracks from a recording
Recorders combine multiple channels and audio sources together in a single multi-track file. You can create a
copy of a recording using only select tracks. This feature is supported for .AVI, .MP4 and .MOV recordings
only. MPEG-TS does not support track extraction.
Specific track versions of recorded files are not included in any automatic file transfers and need to be
downloaded manually. Click the extracted track filename to manually download, see Download recorded files
manually.
Ensure you have enough storage space for the extracted files before you start this procedure. To check how
much internal storage space is available on Pearl-2, see Storage capacity maintenance.
To create a duplicate recording file with only select tracks:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator, see Connect to Admin panel.
421
Pearl-2 User Guide
Extract tracks from a recording
2. From the Recorders menu, select a recorder. The recorder page appears.
3. Click the multi-track icon beside the recording. A list of tracks appears.
4. Select the tracks you want to extract.
Tip: To deselect all tracks, click the check box for the top track, then hold SHIFT and click
the check box for the bottom track.
5. Click Extract tracks. A copy of the recording is created with only the selected tracks.
422
Pearl-2 User Guide
Rename recorded files
Only one copy is saved per original recording. If you create a second copy, it will overwrite the
previous one. Download the extracted copy of the recording with your chosen tracks to
preserve it.
Rename recorded files
Recording files are named based on the file name prefix specified during configuration. You can change the
recording file name using the Admin panel.
You can also change the default name that Pearl-2 assigns recordings, see Configure recording settings, file
size and type for information about setting file name prefixes.
To rename recordings:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Find the recordings by channel or by recorder. See View list of recorded files.
3. Select the edit icon next to the file name you wish to change.
4. Type the new file name and press Enter using your keyboard.
The Admin panel keeps track of the filename extension (i.e. .avi) so you do not need to
include it when renaming the file.
Delete recorded files
You can delete recordings using the Admin panel. You can delete one file at a time, select multiple files for a
given recorder or channel and delete those, or you can delete all recordings for a channel or recorder.
Deleted recordings cannot be recovered.
To delete recordings:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator, see Connect to Admin panel.
423
Pearl-2 User Guide
Delete recorded files
2. Find the recordings by channel or by recorder. See View list of recorded files.
3. Do one of the following:
a. To delete a single recording, click the X icon to the right of a recording and click OK when
prompted.
b. To delete multiple recordings, check the check box beside the recordings you want to delete and
click OK when prompted.
c. To delete all recordings for the selected channel or recorder, click Delete Selected and click OK
when prompted.
The list may not update immediately. You can refresh the list by reloading the Recording
page (for channels) or the recorder settings page (for recorders).
424
Pearl-2 User Guide
FTP and automatic file transfers
FTP and automatic file transfers
Pearl-2 can be configured to automatically upload recordings from local storage to a network storage location
or an attached USB drive. We call this Automatic File Upload or AFU for short. You can schedule automatic file
uploads for a time and day that's most convenient for your workflow. You can also configure Pearl-2 to act as
an FTP server, allowing you to manually or automatically connect to Pearl-2 and download recordings.
Topics include:
l
About Automatic File Upload (AFU)
l
Configure AFU to FTP server parameters
l
Choose Channels and recorders to include in AFU
l
Add recordings to an AFU queue
l
Enable AFU, schedule, and set options
l
Configure AFU to FTP server parameters
l
Configure AFU to RSync server parameters
l
Configure AFU to CIFS server parameters
l
Configure AFU to SCP client parameters
l
Configure AFU to SFTP server parameters
l
Configure AFU to AWS S3 parameters
l
Configure AFU to WebDav server parameters
l
AFU or copy to USB
l
Local FTP server
To view and manage the USB file transfer queue, manage the AFU queue, and view the AFU upload logs:
l
Manage USB file transfer queue
l
View the AFU log
l
View AFU and file transfer progress (via Pearl-2's touch screen)
l
Manage the AFU queue
About Automatic File Upload (AFU)
Pearl-2 can automatically upload recorded files from channels and recorders to an accessible off-system
storage location. You can set the file transfer to happen after a set amount of time or after the file completes
recording.
425
Pearl-2 User Guide
Choose Channels and recorders to include in AFU
There are additional settings to help you manage your AFU recordings and avoid file name collisions at the
AFU server side. You can:
l
Automatically create a folder for your recorded files using the channel or recorder name.
l
Save recordings to a folder that's labeled using the Pearl-2 serial number.
Automatic File Upload (AFU) is not enabled by default. You must enable this feature for each channel or
recorder that you want included in automatic file transfers. A log file of all file transfers is created that you can
view anytime from the Admin panel.
The following types of off-system storage are supported for AFU:
l
FTP
l
RSync
l
CIFS
l
CP
l
SFTP
l
Amazon Web Server (AWS)
l
WebDav
l
USB Drive
Important considerations
l
Only one type of AFU can be used for all file transfers from the same channel or recorder.
l
Automatic File Upload (AFU) is not available while Content Management System (CMS) is enabled Pearl2.
l
Files are automatically uploaded only once. New recordings created during later sessions do not
overwrite files that were previously uploaded. A new file is uploaded.
l
If the connection is lost during the transfer, the transfer automatically restarts when the connection is
reestablished.
l
If recorded files are selected for upload while the AFU is at maximum upload capacity or when the AFU
is unavailable, they are added to an upload queue. Files and their relevant information are displayed in
a list and are uploaded when the upload capacity becomes available.
Choose Channels and recorders to include in AFU
When configuring automatic file upload (AFU), you need to tell the system which channels and recorders you
want included in the upload schedule.
426
Pearl-2 User Guide
Choose Channels and recorders to include in AFU
If no channels or recorders are configured as a part of AFU, the following message appears in the Automatic
File Upload configuration page.
To add a channel or recorder to your AFU schedule:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Do one of the following:
a. To add a channel, select the channel from the Channels menu and click Recording. The
Recording page opens.
b. To add a recorder, select the recorder from the Recorders menu. The recorder configuration
page opens.
3. Click change under Recorder Setup. The recorder setup opens.
427
Pearl-2 User Guide
Enable AFU, schedule, and set options
4. Check Automatic file upload and click Apply.
What's Next
After you've enabled AFU for your channels and recorders, enable AFU and configure the AFU settings for the
location type (i.e. FTP, USB, AWS, etc).
Enable AFU, schedule, and set options
After the channels and recorders you want to include in your Automatic File Upload (AFU) are selected, you
can enable AFU and schedule when and where you want the recorded files to upload. To select channels and
recorders to include in AFU, see Choose Channels and recorders to include in AFU.
By default, recorded video files are uploaded as soon as recording stops. However, you can schedule file
uploads to only occur during a specific period of time every 24-hours. Recordings that end within the
configured time period automatically upload right away. Recordings that end outside the upload time period
are queued up and upload when the scheduled upload time period is reached.
If you want to use the reset button to force the current recording to close and open a new one or want to limit
the recorded file size, see Configure recording settings, file size and type.
Recorded files saved before automatic file upload is configured are not included as part of the
automatic upload. You can manually transfer those recordings, see Download recorded files
manually.
The following table describes the AFU options.
Table 65 AFU options
Option
Remote path
Remove after upload
Description
If no remote path is specified, the files are copied to the root folder
of the destination file system.
Delete files from local storage on Pearl-2 when the upload
completes.
Change the color of the file in the recording list to show the files are
Mark file as downloaded
downloaded. This only applies if the files are not deleted after
upload is complete.
Create a subfolder for each
Save the downloaded files into a folder. Use either the channel or
channel
recorder name.
428
Pearl-2 User Guide
Option
Create a subfolder for device
Enable AFU, schedule, and set options
Description
Save the downloaded files into a folder using the serial number of
Pearl-2.
To enable AFU and set a schedule or AFU options:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Automatic File Upload. The Automatic File Upload configuration
page opens.
If your screen does not indicate that AFU is enabled for at least one channel or recorder, return to
Choose Channels and recorders to include in AFU
429
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure AFU to FTP server parameters
3. Check Enable Automatic File Upload.
4. (Optional) Enter a remote path. If no path is specified, the files are copied to the root folder of the
destination file system.
5. (Optional) Check any optional parameter to select it. For example, you can check Mark file as
downloaded and Create a subfolder for each channel.
6. To schedule AFU, check File upload schedule and select a start time and an end time in the Start
upload and Stop upload fields to define the automatic file upload period.
7. Click Apply.
If AFU to your server fails, check the server configuration and permissions.
What's next?
Select the protocol transfer type and configure the protocol settings. Do one of the following:
l
Configure AFU to FTP server parameters
l
Configure AFU to RSync server parameters
l
Configure AFU to CIFS server parameters
l
Configure AFU to SCP client parameters
l
Configure AFU to SFTP server parameters
l
Configure AFU to AWS S3 parameters
l
Configure AFU to WebDav server parameters
l
AFU or copy to USB
Configure AFU to FTP server parameters
You can automatically upload recordings to an FTP server when you select FTP as the AFU protocol transfer
type using the Admin panel.
The following table describes the parameters to configure for AFU to an FTP server.
430
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure AFU to FTP server parameters
Table 66 FTP Automatic Upload Configuration Parameters
Name
Server
address
Description
The IP address (or fully qualified domain name) of the FTP server.
Server port
The port used by the target FTP server. Standard port is 21.
Login
User name for the FTP server.
Password
Password for the FTP user.
Causes files to be named with .part extension on the server during active upload. When
Use temp file
the upload completes, the file is renamed to the appropriate extension (.mov, .mp4 or
.avi).
Prerequisites
l
Channels and recorders are already added for AFU, see Choose Channels and recorders to include in
AFU
l
AFU is enabled and the parameters configured, see Enable AFU, schedule, and set options.
To set the FTP server parameters for AFU:
1. From the Automatic File Upload configuration page, select FTP Client as the protocol transfer type.
2. Specify the target Server address. If your system is configured with DHCP or has a valid DNS
configuration (see Configure DHCP), you can use the server’s fully qualified domain name instead of
the IP address.
3. Specify the Server Port used for the target FTP server. The standard port is 21.
431
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure AFU to RSync server parameters
4. Enter the FTP account username in the Login field.
5. Enter the FTP account password in the Password field. The characters are masked with dots.
6. Select Use temp file to name files with a temporary filename extension (.part) on the server until
upload is complete.
7. Click Apply.
Configure AFU to RSync server parameters
You can automatically upload recordings to an RSync server when you select RSync as the AFU protocol
transfer type using the Admin panel.
The following table describes the parameters to configure for AFU to an RSync server.
Table 67 RSync Automatic File Upload Configuration Parameters
Name
Server
address
Description
The IP address (or fully qualified domain name) of the RSync server.
Server module The name of the shared folder on the RSync server.
Login
Username for the RSync server.
Password
Password for the RSync user.
Checksum
Select to enable checksum checking during file transfer. This increases the time taken to
transfer, but also increases reliability of the transfer.
Prerequisites
l
Channels and recorders are already added for AFU, see Choose Channels and recorders to include in
AFU
l
AFU is enabled and the parameters configured, see Enable AFU, schedule, and set options.
To configure upload using RSync:
1. From the Automatic File Upload configuration page, select RSync Client as the protocol transfer type.
432
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure AFU to CIFS server parameters
2. Specify the target Server address. If your system is configured with DHCP or has a valid DNS
configuration (see Configure DHCP), you can use the server’s fully qualified domain name instead of
the IP address.
3. Specify the Server module. This is the name of the shared folder on the server. If needed, request this
value from your network administrator.
4. Specify a username for the RSync Server in the Login field. The user must have write permissions for
the module.
5. Specify the password for the user in the Password field; the value is masked by dots.
6. If desired, select the Checksum check box to add a checksum validation to the transfer between the
system and the recipient server.
7. Click Apply.
Configure AFU to CIFS server parameters
You can automatically upload recordings to a CIFS server (also known as SMB or samba) when you select CIFS
as the AFU protocol transfer type using the Admin panel. Samba version 1 is supported.
The following table describes the parameters to configure AFU to a CIFS server.
Table 68 CIFS Automatic File Upload Configuration Parameters
Name
Server Port
Server
address
Description
The CIFS server port. Leave blank to use the default port, or enter the port used for your
CIFS server.
The IP address (or fully qualified domain name) of the CIFS server.
433
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure AFU to CIFS server parameters
Name
Description
Server share
The name of the shared folder on the CIFS server.
Domain
The CIFS server's Windows domain or Work Group name . Needed if the server is part of
Active Directory or a Domain Controller.
Login
Username for the CIFS server.
Password
Password for the CIFS user.
Causes files to be named with .part extension on the server during active upload. When
Use temp file
the upload completes, the file is renamed to the appropriate extension (.mov, .mp4, .ts or
.avi).
Prerequisites
l
Channels and recorders are already added for AFU, see Choose Channels and recorders to include in
AFU
l
AFU is enabled and the parameters configured, see Enable AFU, schedule, and set options.
To configure upload using CIFS:
1. From the Automatic File Upload configuration page, select CIFS Client as the protocol transfer type.
2. Specify the target Server address. If your system is configured with DHCP or has a valid DNS
configuration (see Configure DHCP), you can use the server’s fully qualified domain name instead of
the IP address.
3. Enter the target Server port, if you have configured the server to use something non-standard. Leave
this value blank to use the default port.
434
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure AFU to SCP client parameters
4. Specify the Server share. This is the CIFS share name or the name of the shared folder on the server.
If needed, request this value from the network administrator.
5. If the system is in a different domain than the server or if it is part of Active Directory, enter the
Domain name of the CIFS server.
6. Specify a username for the CIFS Server in the Login field. The user must have write permissions for the
share folder.
7. Specify the password for the user in the Password field; the value is masked by dots.
8. Select Use temp file to name files with a temporary filename extension (.part) on the server until
upload is complete.
9. Click Apply
Configure AFU to SCP client parameters
You can automatically upload recordings to an SCP (secure copy) client when you select SCP as the AFU
protocol transfer type using the Admin panel.
The following table describes the parameters to configure AFU to an SCP client.
Table 69 SCP Automatic Upload Configuration Parameters
Name
Description
Server address The IP address (or fully qualified domain name) of the destination server.
Server port
The SCP port used by the target server. Standard port is 22.
Login
Username for the SCP server.
Password
Password for the SCP user.
Prerequisites
l
Channels and recorders are already added for AFU, see Choose Channels and recorders to include in
AFU
l
AFU is enabled and the parameters configured, see Enable AFU, schedule, and set options.
To configure upload to an SCP client:
1. From the Automatic File Upload configuration page, select SCP Client as the protocol transfer type.
435
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure AFU to SCP client parameters
2. Specify the target Server address. If your system is configured with DHCP or has a valid DNS
configuration (see Configure DHCP), you can use the server’s fully qualified domain name instead of
the IP address.
3. Specify the Server Port used for the destination SCP server. The standard port is 22.
4. Enter the SCP account username in the Login field.
5. Enter the SCP account password in the Password field; the characters are masked with dots.
(Alternatively you can choose to use a private key instead of a password for authentication.)
For secure copy you can upload an SSH identity for your Pearl-2. This key must be
trusted by the destination server. Details for generating the key and setting up this
trust are beyond the scope of this document.
6. (Optional) Set up SSH identity for SCP and SFTP clients. If no identity is uploaded, or to upload a new
identity (overwrites the old identity):
436
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure AFU to SFTP server parameters
a. Click Choose File and navigate to select the private key file from your hard drive, then click
Open.
b. Click Upload to upload the file.
The system accepts RSA keys for SSH-1; DSA, ECDSA, EC25519 and RSA for SSH-2.
Keys must be in OpenSSH format.
c. (Optional) Use the Test your key field to test your uploaded key against the secure server.
7. Click Apply
Configure AFU to SFTP server parameters
You can automatically upload recordings to a secure FTP (SFTP) server when you select SFTP as the AFU
protocol transfer type using the Admin panel.
The following table describes the parameters to configure AFU to an SFTP server.
Table 70 SFTP Automatic Upload Configuration Parameters
Name
Server
address
Description
The IP address or fully qualified domain name of the SFTP server.
Server port
The port used by the target SFTP server. Standard port is 22.
Login
Username for the SFTP server.
437
Pearl-2 User Guide
Name
Description
Password
Password for the SFTP user.
Configure AFU to SFTP server parameters
Causes files to be named with .part extension on the server during active upload. When
Use temp file
the upload completes, the file is renamed to the appropriate extension (.mov, .mp4 or
.avi).
Prerequisites
l
Channels and recorders are already added for AFU, see Choose Channels and recorders to include in
AFU
l
AFU is enabled and the parameters configured, see Enable AFU, schedule, and set options.
To configure upload to an SFTP server:
1. From the Automatic File Upload configuration page, select SFTP Client as the protocol transfer type.
2. Specify the target Server address. If your system is configured with DHCP or has a valid DNS
configuration (see Configure DHCP), you can use the server’s fully qualified domain name instead of
the IP address.
3. Specify the Server Port used for the target SFTP server. The standard port is 22.
4. Enter the SFTP account username in the Login field.
5. Enter the SFTP account password in the Password field. The characters are masked with dots.
Alternatively, you can choose to use a private key instead of a password for authentication.
438
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure AFU to AWS S3 parameters
6. Select Use temp file to name files with a temporary filename extension (.part) on the server until
upload is complete.
For secure file transfer, you can upload an SSH identity for your Pearl-2. This key must be
trusted by the destination server. Details for generating the key and setting up this trust
are beyond the scope of this document.
7. (Optional) Set up SSH identity for SCP and SFTP clients. If no identity is uploaded, or to upload a new
identity (overwrites the old identity):
a. Click Choose File and navigate to select the private key file from your hard drive, then click
Open.
b. Click Upload to upload the file.
The system accepts RSA keys for SSH-1; DSA, ECDSA, EC25519 and RSA for SSH-2.
Keys must be in OpenSSH format.
c. (Optional) Use the Test your key field to test your uploaded key against the secure server.
8. Click Apply
Configure AFU to AWS S3 parameters
You can automatically upload recordings to an Amazon Web Server (AWS) when you select AWS S3 as the AFU
protocol transfer type using the Admin panel.
439
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure AFU to AWS S3 parameters
The following table describes the parameters to configure AFU to a bucket on Amazon Simple Storage
Solution (S3).
Table 71 AWS Automatic Upload Configuration Parameters
Name
AWS Region Code
Bucket
Access Key Id
Secret Access Key
Session Token
Description
The geographical region of the AWS server that contains the bucket you want to
upload to, e.g. us-east-2.
The id of the data storage container you created in Amazon S3 for the recorded live
streaming files.
The Access Key Id is part of your access key for your AWS account, i.e.
GAKSOSIFDONN2EXAMPLE.
The secret access key is part of your access key for your AWS account,
i.e.bHaprXUenFEMI/K6MANVG/cPxDfiBYEXAMPLEKEY.
The temporary security token provided by the AWS Security Token Service (STS) that
allows access to your AWS account for authorized users.
Prerequisites
l
You must have read and write privileges for your AWS account to setup AFU to upload to an AWS S3
location
l
Channels and recorders are already added for AFU, see Choose Channels and recorders to include in
AFU
l
AFU is enabled and the parameters configured, see Enable AFU, schedule, and set options.
To configure upload to AWS S3:
1. From the Automatic File Upload configuration page, select AWS S3 Client as the protocol transfer
type.
440
Pearl-2 User Guide
Configure AFU to WebDav server parameters
2. Specify the AWS Region Code and the data storage Bucket where you want to upload the file.
3. Enter your AWS Access Key Id and Secret Access Key to authenticate access to the AWS S3 data
storage bucket.
4. In the Session Token field, enter the temporary token you got from the AWS Security Token Service
(STS).
5. Click Apply.
Configure AFU to WebDav server parameters
You can automatically upload recordings to a WebDav server when you select WebDav as the AFU protocol
transfer type using the Admin panel.
The following table describes the parameters to configure AFU to a WebDav server.
Table 72 WebDav Automatic Upload Configuration Options
Name
Server
address
Description / Options
The IP address (or fully qualified domain name) of the FTP server.
Server port
The port used by the target WebDav server. Standard port is 21.
Login
Username for the WebDav server.
Password
Password for the WebDav user.
Enable HTTPS
Select if you need to use a secured HTTPS link to the WebDav server.
441
Pearl-2 User Guide
Name
Configure AFU to WebDav server parameters
Description / Options
Causes files to be named with .part extension on the server during active upload. When
Use temp file
the upload completes, the file is renamed to the appropriate extension (.mov, .mp4 or
.avi).
Prerequisites
l
Channels and recorders are already added for AFU, see Choose Channels and recorders to include in
AFU
l
AFU is enabled and the parameters configured, see Enable AFU, schedule, and set options.
To configure upload to a WebDav server:
1. From the Automatic File Upload configuration page, select WebDav Client as the protocol transfer
type.
2. Specify the target Server address. If your system is configured with DHCP or has a valid DNS
configuration (see Configure DHCP), you can use the server’s fully qualified domain name instead of
the IP address.
3. Specify the Server Port used for the target WebDav server. The standard port is 21.
4. Enter the FTP account username in the Login field.
5. Enter the FTP account password in the Password field. The characters are masked with dots.
6. Select Enable HTTPS if you need a secure HTTPS link to the WebDav server.
442
Pearl-2 User Guide
AFU or copy to USB
7. Select Use temp file to name files with a temporary filename extension (.part) on the server until
upload is complete.
8. Click Apply.
AFU or copy to USB
Pearl-2 has USB 3.0 ports that you can use to copy recordings from internal storage to external USB flash
drives or hard drives. Use this to conveniently provide speakers with a copy of their presentation before they
leave the presentation venue.
The USB storage device must be formatted with one of the following file systems:
l
FAT16
l
FAT32
l
XFS
l
EXT2
l
EXT3
l
EXT4
l
NTFS
There are several different ways you can transfer recordings to a USB storage device:
l
AFU to a USB storage device
l
Do a one-time copy/move all recordings to USB storage device
l
Manually copy recordings to USB storage device
We recommend you only connect one USB device to Pearl-2 at a time. Only one copy or move
to USB operation is permitted at a time, even though the UI may appear to let you start a second
one. Please wait until the first is complete before starting a new operation.
AFU to a USB storage device
You can transfer recordings to a USB storage device automatically when you select an external USB device as
the AFU protocol transfer type using the Admin panel.
USB ports are available on both the back and the front panels of Pearl-2.
Prerequisites
l
A properly formatted USB device must be connected to one of the USB ports.
l
Channels and recorders are already added for AFU, see Choose Channels and recorders to include in
AFU
l
AFU is enabled and the parameters configured, see Enable AFU, schedule, and set options.
To configure automatic file upload to a USB storage device:
443
Pearl-2 User Guide
Do a one-time copy/move all recordings to USB storage
device
1. From the Automatic File Upload configuration page, select External USB Drive as the protocol
transfer type.
Table 73 If your Automatic File Upload setting conflicts with your new USB device setting, a message is displayed.
Click the fix it link and click Apply.
The fix it link disables any other type of automatic file upload you have configured. When
you are done with USB uploads, return to the Automatic File Upload configuration page
and reconfigure your AFU settings.
2. Select Create a subfolder for each channel to have recordings organized by channel.
3. Click Apply.
Do a one-time copy/move all recordings to USB storage device
When one-time move/copy of files is configured, Pearl-2 automatically starts copying files as soon as you
connect a USB storage device to one of the USB ports.
Newest recordings are copied first. Files continue copying over until one of the following events occur:
l
all files are copied
l
the specified maximum number of files are copied
l
the target drive runs out of storage space
File that are currently recording do not transfer until recording ends.
444
Pearl-2 User Guide
Do a one-time copy/move all recordings to USB storage
device
The following table describes the options available for a one-time move/copy of recordings to a USB storage
device.
Table 74 One-Time Move/Copy File Transfer Options
Name
Description
If checked, the transfer process creates a sub-folder with the system’s
create subfolder with
serial number on the USB drive. This is useful if you are using the same
serial number (<serial>)
drive to collect recordings from multiple systems and want to know which
system they came from.
create subfolder for
each channel
remove after copying
If checked, the transfer process creates a sub-folder for each channel and
recorder (within the subfolder for the serial number, if that option is also
selected). Files are copied to their respective folders.
If checked, the file(s) are removed after being copied to the USB drive.
Checking this box makes the transfer a move instead of a copy.
If checked, the files that are downloaded are marked with a downloaded
mark file as downloaded
icon when viewing file lists. This has no effect if remove after copying is
checked.
ignore already
If checked, files that were previously downloaded or marked as
downloaded files
downloaded are not included in subsequent downloads.
If your USB drive has no activity indicator to let you know when the transfer is complete, select
the one-time move/copy option to remove after copying or mark the file as downloaded so
that you know when the transfer has finished.
Prerequisites
l
A properly formatted USB device not connected to a USB port on Pearl-2.
To configure a one-time copy of all recorded files to a USB storage device:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select External USB Drive. The External USB Drive configuration page
opens.
445
Pearl-2 User Guide
Manually copy recordings to USB storage device
3. Select used for one-time move/copy of the recorded files (upon insertion).
If a conflict is reported regarding the Automatic file upload settings, click Fix it or go to the
Automatic File Upload configuration page and either disable automatic file upload or switch
to a non-USB based upload type.
4. Check the options you want to use for the one-time move/copy file transfer and click Apply.
5. Insert the USB storage device into one of the USB ports. File transfer starts automatically.
6. Follow the steps to Safely eject USB storage device when the activity light on the USB storage device
stops flashing. If your USB device doesn't have activity indicators:
a. Check the Recording list for each channel and the Recorded Files list for each recorder to
verify if there are files that have yet to be copied.
b. Safely eject USB storage device when you are satisfied all files have been copied, or if you notice
the USB storage device is out of space, see View available USB storage space.
Manually copy recordings to USB storage device
You can manually copy recordings to a USB drive connected to Pearl-2.
The following table describes the options available when manually copying recordings to a USB storage
device.
Table 75 One-Time Move/Copy File Transfer Options
Name
Description
create subfolder with
If checked, the transfer process creates a sub-folder with the system’s
serial number (<serial>)
serial number on the USB drive. This is useful if you are using the same
446
Pearl-2 User Guide
Name
Manually copy recordings to USB storage device
Description
drive to collect recordings from multiple systems and want to know which
system they came from.
create subfolder for
each channel
If checked, the transfer process creates a sub-folder for each channel and
recorder (within the subfolder for the serial number, if that option is also
selected). Files are copied to their respective folders.
Choose the action to take if a file with the same name already exists in the
copy location:
File already exists
l
replace (default)
l
skip
l
rename
This procedure is separate from automatic file upload and does not need any pre-configuration in the
automatic file upload page.
To manually copy recorded files to a USB device:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select External USB Drive link. The External USB Drive configuration
page opens.
3. Select used to manually move/copy selected files via the Admin panel and click Apply.
If a conflict is reported regarding the Automatic file upload, click Fix it or go to the
Automatic File Upload configuration page and disable automatic file upload or switch to a
non-USB based upload type.
447
Pearl-2 User Guide
View available USB storage space
4. Insert your USB storage device into an available USB port on Pearl-2 and do one of the following:
a. To download files for a specific channel, click Recording from the Channels menu.
b. To download files for a recorder, select a recorder from the Recorders menu.
5. Check the files you want to download and do one of the following:
a. Click Copy Selected to external drive to copy the files to the USB drive.
b. Click Move Selected to external drive to move the files and delete them off of Pearl-2.
In this example, the first file is currently recording and cannot be downloaded.
6. Follow the steps to Safely eject USB storage device when you're done.
View available USB storage space
When you insert a USB storage device into an available USB port and select an External USB Drive action
other than ignored (i.e. manual copy, automatic copy, etc), the total and free space are calculated and
displayed in the Admin panel.
When you insert your USB storage device into an available USB port, an External storage usage information
tab appears at the bottom of the menus panel.
Safely eject USB storage device
When you're done saving recordings to the USB storage device, you can safely eject it using the link at the
bottom of the Admin panel page.
448
Pearl-2 User Guide
Safely eject USB storage device
To safely eject the USB drive:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. At the bottom of the menus panel, click eject and click OK when prompted.
It's now safe to disconnect the USB storage device from Pearl-2.
Manage USB file transfer queue
You can view USB file transfer information, delete files in the USB file transfer queue, and cancel USB file
uploads using the Admin panel.
Information such as the file name and size, start time, duration, and progress are displayed. A history of file
transfers displays until either Pearl-2 is restarted or the list is manually cleared. External USB storage must be
configured for the USB file transfer status to display.
To view USB file transfer status, delete files in the queue, or cancel file uploads using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select External USB Drive. The External USB Drive configuration page
opens. If there are files to be uploaded, they appear in the queue.
449
Pearl-2 User Guide
Add recordings to an AFU queue
3. To remove a file from the USB transfer queue, click X beside the file you want to remove.
4. To cancel the current USB file transfer that's in progress and remove all files that are currently waiting
in the USB transfer queue, click Cancel.
Add recordings to an AFU queue
You can add previously recorded files to an AFU queue using the Admin panel. Before you can add a
previously recorded file, the channel must be enabled for AFU and at least one new recording must have been
queued.
This feature is not available using the local console on Pearl-2.
To add an existing recording to an AFU queue using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Find the recordings by channel or by recorder and select the files you want to add to the AFU queue.
3. Select Add Selected to Automatic file upload.
450
Pearl-2 User Guide
View the AFU log
What's next?
Add more recorded files to the queue or delete any of the recordings before they are uploaded, see Manage
USB file transfer queue.
View the AFU log
A log is kept of automatic file uploads. You can view the AFU log using the Admin panel, If you want to view
the AFU status, see View AFU and file transfer progress
To view the AFU log:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Automatic File Upload. The Automatic File Upload
configuration page opens.
451
Pearl-2 User Guide
Manage the AFU queue
3. Click Show log of automatic file upload. The log page opens. If no logs are present, the page is
blank.
4. Click the browser's back button when you are done.
Manage the AFU queue
The Automatic File Upload (AFU) queue displays a list of recorded files waiting to be uploaded. You can view
the AFU queue and remove files from the queue using the Admin panel. Automatic File Transfer must be
configured for the AFU queue to display.
To view the AFU queue and remove files from the queue using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Automatic File Upload. If there are files to be uploaded, they
appear in the queue.
452
Pearl-2 User Guide
Manage the AFU queue
3. To remove a file from the AFU queue, click X beside the file you want to remove.
4. To remove all files that are currently waiting in the AFU queue, click Empty Queue.
The Empty Queue button does not delete an AFU file transfer that's in progress.
453
Pearl-2 User Guide
Local FTP server
Local FTP server
Pearl-2 can act as an FTP server, allowing you to manually or automatically connect to the system and
download recordings. Depending on configuration of the FTP server, you may also be able to remotely delete
files after download, maximizing available system storage.
When using an FTP server to download a file, it is possible to start the download while that file is
still in the process of being recorded. This results in an incomplete file. To avoid this, check the
status of the file in the Admin panel before beginning the download process.
Topics include:
l
Configure the local FTP server
l
Using the local FTP server
Configure the local FTP server
You can setup the local FTP server on Pearl-2 using the Admin panel.
The following table describes the configuration parameters to setup Pearl-2's local FTP server.
Table 76 FTP Server Configuration Parameters
Name
Enable FTP access
FTP user name
Enable FTP
DELETE
command
Description
The check box controls whether or not the system acts as an FTP server. By default this
is disabled.
Select one of the system users: admin, operator, or viewer. The ftp password will be the
access password for the selected user. By default the admin user is selected.
Controls whether or not FTP users can delete files. By default file deletion is not
permitted.
To configure Pearl-2's local FTP server:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select FTP Server. The FTP Server configuration page opens.
454
Pearl-2 User Guide
Local FTP server
3. To enable or disable the FTP server, do one of the following:
a. Check Enable FTP access and select a user from the FTP user name drop down. Then click
Apply to enable the FTP server.
b. Uncheck Enable FTP access and click Apply to disable the FTP server.
The ftp password is the regular access password for the selected user. See User
administration for details on user names and passwords.
4. To allow or disable FTP users to delete files, do one of the following:
a. Check Enable FTP DELETE command and click Apply to allow users to delete files.
Any currently logged in ftp users must log out and back in again to have
access to the command.
b. Uncheck Enable FTP DELETE command and click Apply to disable file deletion by FTP.
Any currently logged in users will continue to have access to the delete
command until they log out and log in again.
Using the local FTP server
Once you have configured a local FTP server, you can use the tool of your choice to download files from Pearl2.
Files are stored in a folder structure with a folder for each channel and a folder for each recorder. Channel and
recorder numbers are displayed next to the name of the channel or sources in the Admin panel.
455
Pearl-2 User Guide
Local FTP server
l
Channel folders are labeled video<channel number> (i.e. video3 for channel 3)
l
Recorder folders are labeled videom<recorder number> (i.e. videom1 for the first recorder).
Prerequisites
l
The IP address of your Pearl-2, see Verify IP address and MAC address of Pearl-2
l
An FTP tool
l
The username and password for your FTP user, see Configure the local FTP server
In the following example, the IP address of Pearl-2 is 192.168.1.210, the username is admin, there is no
password, and the Windows command line ftp utility is used.
To connect to the FTP server:
1. Open a command window on Windows (alternatively open a terminal window on Linux/Mac, or open
your FTP utility of choice).
2. Establish an ftp connection using the command: ftp 192.168.1.210
3. Provide the username: admin (provide the username of your FTP user).
4. Provide the password: (provide the correct password for your FTP user).
5. Type dir to see the file structure.
6. Use dir or your tool’s GUI to look in each folder for recordings.
7. Use get or your tool’s transfer mechanism to transfer files to your computer.
456
Pearl-2 User Guide
Local FTP server
8. If enabled in the FTP configuration page, delete the file after downloading it by issuing the delete
command, or using your tool’s delete mechanism.
If the delete command is not enabled, attempting to delete a file will result in an Unknown
Command error.
457
PART 5: Integration
Pearl-2 is fully integrated with Kaltura and Panopto Content Management Systems (CMSs). Learn to use the
Admin panel to set up and manage Pearl-2 with Kaltura and Panopto, as well as how to record and stream.
Topics include:
l
Kaltura registration
l
Panopto registration
l
Kaltura recording and webcasting setup
l
Panopto recording and webcasting setup
l
CMS recording and webcasting using the Admin panel
For information about using the Pearl-2 RS-232 and HTTP/HTTPS APIs, see the Pearl System API Guide.
458
Pearl-2 User Guide
Kaltura registration
Kaltura registration
Pearl-2 is fully integrated with Kaltura Content Management Systems (CMSs) for a seamless video recording
and webcasting experience. After Pearl-2 is registered, the encoder appears as a resource in Kaltura's
MediaSpace and can be selected for scheduled recordings and webcasts, as well as be used for unscheduled
ad hoc events. Registering Pearl-2 as a resource with the Kaltura Content Management System (CMS) only
needs to be done once.
Topics include:
l
Enable CMS and register with Kaltura
l
Disable or deregister from Kaltura
l
Change the resource name used for Kaltura
l
Reassign a registered resource
After Kaltura is registered, proceed to configure which channels on Pearl-2 you want to assign by default to
VODs and webcasts, as well as setup authentication for ad hoc events. See Kaltura recording and webcasting
setup.
Enable CMS and register with Kaltura
Use the Admin panel to register Pearl-2 as an encoder resource for Kaltura. After Pearl-2 is registered, you can
assign it a unique name that appears in the list of resources when creating an event in Kaltura's MediaSpace.
The default name includes the serial number of Pearl-2 to ensure the name is unique.
If more than two other resources are already registered with the same name, you're prompted to choose a
different name and try to register Pearl-2 again. If only one resource is registered with the same name, you're
prompted to take over the events for that other resource. If you do, Kaltura transfers all scheduled events
from that other device over to Pearl-2. For more information, see Reassign a registered resource.
It may take some time for Kaltura to display a newly registered resource, depending on how busy
the Kaltura system is when you register.
There are two methods to register your Pearl-2:
l
Using your Kaltura partner ID and administrator secret
l
Using an application token and the token ID
A Kaltura application token can be created from the Kaltura developer website: www.developer.kaltura.com
459
Pearl-2 User Guide
Enable CMS and register with Kaltura
There are two types of Kaltura application tokens you can use with Pearl-2: an administrative session type and
a user session type. With an administrative session token, Pearl-2 uploads event recordings to the respective
event owner's account in Kaltura as expected.
A user session token requires the following permissions:
KMC_ACCESS,KMC_READ_ONLY,BASE_USER_SESSION_PERMISSION,WIDGET_SESSION_
PERMISSION,CONTENT_INGEST_BASE,CONTENT_INGEST_UPLOAD,CONTENT_MANAGE_
BASE,cuePoint.MANAGE,CONTENT_MANAGE_SCHEDULE,CAPTURE_DEVICE_
PERMISSION,CONTENT_INGEST_REFERENCE_MODIFY,LIVE_STREAM_ADD
Important considerations for user session application tokens
l
Pearl-2 uploads all events (scheduled and ad hoc) to the user account ID associated with the user
token.
l
All event recordings (scheduled and ad hoc) upload to the Kaltura account of the user who created the
event if there is no user ID associated with the token.
460
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Enable CMS and register with Kaltura
Do not include a creation date for the user session token. A creation date in the token causes Pearl-2 to
upload events only to the token creator and restricts login using Pearl-2's touch screen to only the
token creator.
Before you begin, you should already have:
l
A Kaltura instance created
l
Either of the following:
l
Your Kaltura partner ID and administrator secret
l
Your application token ID and token value
To enable Pearl-2 as a resource and register with Kaltura using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click CMS. The Content management system configuration menu
opens.
3. From the Choose CMS drop down, select Kaltura and then click Apply.
4. In the Authorization method field, select the authorization method and do one of the following:
a. If you select Administrator secret, enter your Kaltura Partner ID and Administrator secret
that you got from Kaltura.
461
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable or deregister from Kaltura
b. If you select Application token, enter the application Token ID and Token value .
Ensure the Token hash type matches the hash type set in the application token.
The default is SHA1.
5. (Optional) Change the Resource name that appears for this device in Kaltura. The default resource
name includes the serial number of your Pearl-2.
6. Click Register device.
A calendar icon appears on the touch screen of Pearl-2 to show that Pearl is in CMS mode, see CMS
event controls using the touch screen.
What's next
Choose which Pearl-2 channels you want this resource to record, assign the channel to use for webcasting,
setup authentication for ad hoc events, and specify default ad hoc event parameters. See Kaltura recording
and webcasting setup.
Disable or deregister from Kaltura
You can disable CMS for a registered Pearl-2 using the Admin panel and still select Pearl-2 as a resource using
Kaltura MediaSpace. However, the events schedule won't synchronize on Pearl-2 and any events that are
scheduled to start while CMS is disable do not start on Pearl-2. If CMS is re-enabled on Pearl-2 before the
event is scheduled to end, that event will start automatically after the events schedule is refreshed on Pearl-2,
see View scheduled events and history.
Existing events that are already associated with the device do not lose their association when CMS is disabled.
As soon as you re-enable Kaltura CMS on Pearl-2, you can record and stream events as usual. CMS is disabled
by default.
Deregistering removes Pearl-2 from Kaltura's list of resources and any existing events that were associated
with that resource lose their association. You must select a new resource for those events using MediaSpace.
Important considerations
l
You can not start ad hoc (manual) Kaltura events when CMS is disabled or when Pearl-2 has been
deregistered.
l
When CMS is disabled or Pearl-2 is deregistered, existing scheduled events that are associated with the
device do not record or stream.
l
If Pearl-2 is deregistered, existing events associated with that device lose the association. You must
select a new resource for those events.
462
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Disable or deregister from Kaltura
Ensure the deregistered Pearl-2 entry in the list of encoder devices on Kaltura disappears before
registering again if using the same device name.
l
Do not disable CMS while an event is in progress.
To disable Pearl-2 as a resource or deregister from Kaltura using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click CMS. The Content management system configuration menu
opens.
3. To disable CMS, select none from the Choose CMS drop down and then click Apply.
4. To deregister Pearl-2, click Deregister device.
463
Pearl-2 User Guide
Change the resource name used for Kaltura
The calendar icon disappears from Pearl-2's touchscreen when CMS is disabled or deregistered.
Change the resource name used for Kaltura
Using the Admin panel, you can change the resource name that's assigned to Pearl-2 while it's registered with
Kaltura.
Each Pearl-2 is assigned a unique resource name that includes the serial number of the device by default. You
can transfer scheduled VOD and scheduled webcasting events from one resource to another by assigning
Pearl-2 the same resource name as another resource.
When a resource with the same name is already registered in Kaltura, a warning message appears when you
try to apply the new resource name to Pearl-2.
l
If there's only one other registered resource with that name, you're prompted to choose whether or
not to take over the events for that other resource. If you do take them over, Kaltura transfers all
scheduled events from that other device over to Pearl-2.
l
If more than two other resources are already registered with the same resource name in Kaltura, the
name change fails. You're prompted to choose a different resource name and try again.
To change the Pearl-2 resource name using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click CMS. The Content management system configuration menu
opens.
464
Pearl-2 User Guide
Reassign a registered resource
3. Change the Resource name and click Apply.
Reassign a registered resource
Every encoder you register with Kaltura has a unique resource name. To swap out one Pearl-2 encoder with
another one, you can simply reassign the existing Pearl-2 resource name to the replacement Pearl-2.
Assigning Pearl-2 the same resource name when you register the encoder transfers all the existing schedules
and recordings over to the replacement Pearl-2. When a resource tries to register using the same name as
another device, a warning message appears and you're asked whether or not you want to take over from the
other resource.
l
If there's only one other registered resource with that name, you're prompted to choose whether or
not to take over the events for that other resource. If you do take them over, Kaltura transfers all
scheduled events from that other device.
l
If more than two other resources are already registered with the same resource name in Kaltura,
registration fails. You're prompted to choose a different resource name and to try registering Pearl-2
again.
This works well when you want to change the encoder in a room but retain all the existing schedules and
recordings that are associated with the encoder for that room.
Alternatively, you can avoid having to register the replacement Pearl-2 with Kaltura. If you apply a
configuration preset to set up the replacement Pearl-2 with the settings from the currently registered Pearl-2,
the replacement Pearl-2 assumes the identity of the registered resource. For more information about
configuration presets, see About configuration presets.
465
Pearl-2 User Guide
Reassign a registered resource
Using a configuration preset can result in two Pearl-2 resources with the same identity, which can
effect recording and the content that's uploaded to Kaltura for scheduled events. Power down,
disconnect from the network, and consider performing a factory reset on one of the Pearl-2
resources to remove the possibility of having duplicate resources.
You can also use this procedure if you've performed a factory reset, which resulted in an orphaned Kaltura
resource registration and you need to reregister your Pearl-2 using the same resource name to take over the
resource instance that is still registered in Kaltura.
Before you begin, you should already have:
l
A Kaltura instance created
l
Access to the Kaltura Management Console (KMC)
l
Your Kaltura partner ID
l
Your Kaltura administrator secret
To enable Pearl-2 as a resource and register with an existing resource name using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click CMS. The Content management system configuration menu
opens.
3. From the Choose CMS drop down, select Kaltura and then click Apply.
4. Enter your Partner ID and Administrator secret that you got from Kaltura.
466
Pearl-2 User Guide
Reassign a registered resource
5. Change the Resource name to the resource name of the Pearl-2 you are replacing and click Register
device.
6. When you're prompted to take over the events from the existing resource with that same name, click
Yes.
467
Pearl-2 User Guide
Kaltura recording and webcasting setup
Kaltura recording and webcasting setup
Pearl-2 appears as an available resource as soon as the device is registered with Kaltura. Connect multiple
audio and video sources directly to Pearl-2 and assign them to separate channels. Each channel you configure
on Pearl-2 is treated as a separate video source. For more information about using the auto channel feature,
creating channels or using custom layouts, see What is a channel?.
Topics include:
l
About Kaltura recording and webcasting
l
Select channels for Kaltura VOD events
l
Select channel for Kaltura webcasting events
l
Set Kaltura ad hoc event parameters
l
Change the events schedule refresh interval
l
Use RTMPS for a Kaltura webcasting event
About Kaltura recording and webcasting
Pearl-2 supports scheduled, recurring, and unscheduled multiple source ad hoc recordings and webcasts.
After Pearl-2 is registered, Kaltura users can simply assign Pearl-2 as a resource when setting up an event using
MediaSpace.
Scheduled events start and end automatically. No manual intervention is required. After the event ends, the
recording automatically uploads. Back up recordings for each channel are also saved locally on Pearl-2. If the
network connection or the CMS goes down during an event, Pearl-2 continues to record locally and uploads
the recording when network connectivity resumes. Depending on how busy the Kaltura CMS system is when
the files upload, it may take some time for the files to appear in Kaltura's media lists.
You can start and stop events earlier than the scheduled time using either the Admin panel or the touch
screen on Pearl-2, as well as create ad hoc events.
Starting or stopping a scheduled VOD event before the scheduled start or stop time does not
change the event in to an ad hoc event.
Using multiple Pearl-2 channels is how you get multiple views for a Kaltura event. Each channel is treated as a
separate video source. Using the Admin panel, Pearl-2 administrators can choose up to five channels on Pearl2 for multiple source recordings. For webcasting, you can select only one channel at a time.
468
Pearl-2 User Guide
About Kaltura recording and webcasting
For example, if you have a main camera and a presentation laptop that you want to capture as a multiple
source recording, you'd create two channels on Pearl-2: one for the main camera and another one for the
presentation laptop. To learn how to create a channel or to use the Auto channels, see Channel configuration.
For events with multiple sources, the recording for each source is uploaded to Kaltura and appears as a single,
multi-view entry in the Kaltura media list with each source (i.e. view) listed as a separate "child" sub-entry. The
name of each file includes the name of the channel plus the date and time the file was recorded. For example:
Channel 1_May23_10-12-05
Pearl-2 administrators can:
l
Set the video source that is used as the default main entry. The channel selected as the main entry
becomes the default view that people see when watching the VOD, as well as the main view (i.e. the
large screen) for PiP.
l
Set which Pearl-2 channels are used for scheduled and ad hoc recordings and webcasts.
l
Set the channel used for scheduled and ad hoc webcasts.
l
Set ad hoc event parameters.
l
Change how often Pearl-2 polls Kaltura for an updated list of Events.
Pearl-2 administrators and operators can use the Admin panel to:
l
Create ad hoc events, see Create ad hoc events using the Admin panel.
l
View the Events page to see all upcoming scheduled sessions and completed sessions, see View
scheduled events and history.
l
Download local recordings for each channel, see Recover channel backup recordings.
l
Start and stop scheduled events before the scheduled time, see Start/stop scheduled events using the
Admin panel.
To use the touchscreen on Pearl-2 to start, stop, and create events, see CMS event controls using the touch
screen.
Important considerations:
l
Pearl-2 must be registered with Kaltura to record and stream Kaltura events, see Enable CMS and
register with Kaltura.
l
Scheduled events have priority over ad hoc events. If an ad hoc event is still in progress when it's time
to start a scheduled event, the ad hoc event is stopped and the scheduled event starts.
l
Scheduled events automatically start recording locally on Pearl-2 even If the network is down or Kaltura
is unavailable. After the session ends, the locally recorded files upload automatically to your Kaltura
media list when the network link to Panopto is re-established.
469
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
About Kaltura recording and webcasting
After the event ends, it may take a while for content to show up in Kaltura's media lists, depending on
how busy the Kaltura CMS system is at that time.
l
If the network connection is lost during a file upload to Kaltura, the transfer automatically restarts
when the network connection re-establishes.
l
If Pearl-2 loses power while a scheduled event is being recorded, the recording stops. If Pearl-2 is
powered back on before the scheduled end time for the event, recording of the scheduled event
restarts automatically and a second set of files are created. When the event ends, both files
automatically upload to Kaltura.
l
If Pearl-2 was unavailable on the network or powered down and misses a scheduled event, the status
of that event appears as Skipped on the Events page in the Admin panel.
l
Do not schedule recordings that are longer than the capacity of Pearl-2 to store the recording on the
local drive.
l
If the time and zone settings of Pearl-2 are out of synchronization with Kaltura's scheduling server, an
error appears on the Events page and you're prompted to reconfigure the time settings on Pearl-2, see
Configure date and time.
l
We recommend that you configure the channel that is selected as the main entry as well as the other
channels in a multi-view scheduled VOD event to include all audio sources. Audio is taken from the
channel configured as the main entry in the Kaltura CMS.
l
Do not use the One Touch recording control, AFU, or configure recording file size, type and other
channel recording settings when CMS is enabled on Pearl-2.
l
To monitor a channel during an event, you can go to the Channel view using the touch screen, see
Channel monitoring using the touch screen or monitor channels using the Admin panel. You can also
monitor channels directly on the Events screen using the touch screen, see View scheduled events and
history.
l
If you modify a particular recurring lecture capture plus live webcasting event (e.g. a VOD + Live Stream
event in a recurring series), Kaltura excludes that event from the recurring series and the webcast
doesn't stream. That's because the RMTP URLs for the modified event looses it's mandatory tokens.
However, the recurring Kaltura event does record as scheduled and other events in the series are not
affected.
Workarounds: To regenerate the RTMP tokens for a live event, go to MediaSpace, find the modified
live event entry and uncheck the Live event checkbox - and save. Then re-check it and save the event
again. Alternatively, you can go to the Kaltura Management Console (KMC), find the modified live event
entry and then, in the Live stream tab, click Re-generate Stream Token.
470
Pearl-2 User Guide
Select channels for Kaltura VOD events
Select channels for Kaltura VOD events
You can select which Pearl-2 channels are included in scheduled and ad hoc recordings using the Admin panel.
Each channel that is configure on Pearl-2 is treated as a separate video source for all VOD events. Using
multiple channels is how you record multiple views for a scheduled or ad hoc VOD event.
For example, if you have a main camera and a presentation laptop that you want to capture as a multi-source
recording, you'd create two channels on Pearl-2: one for the main camera and another one for the
presentation laptop.
Set up your channels before performing this task. To learn how to create a channel, see Create a
channel.
The main entry is the default view that people see when they are watching, as well as the main view (i.e. the
large screen) for PiP. The main view, VOD metadata, and edits like trimning the VOD can be done later in
Kaltura after the recording has uploaded.
Important consideration
l
Ensure that all the same audio sources are selected for each channel if a multi-view event with multiple
channels is configured.
To select channels for event views using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click CMS. The Content management system configuration menu
opens.
471
Pearl-2 User Guide
Select channel for Kaltura webcasting events
3. Under VOD event channels, check the channels to include.
4. (Optional) Select a different Main entry channel for multi-view recordings.
5. Click Apply.
Failing to apply the changes could result in recording unwanted channels.
Select channel for Kaltura webcasting events
You can select which Pearl-2 channel is used for scheduled and ad hoc webcasting events. Optionally, you can
stream the event to the secondary backup stream URL.
When a webcasting event is scheduled in Kaltura or started from Pearl-2 as an unscheduled ad hoc event, the
stream url and other event settings are sent to Pearl-2. When the event is scheduled to start, the ingestion
settings are applied automatically to Pearl-2. Only the primary URL from Kaltura is used by default, but you
can optionally enable a secondary backup stream URL.
472
Pearl-2 User Guide
Select channel for Kaltura webcasting events
Ensure that you have selected the channel on Pearl-2 that you want to use for your scheduled
webcasting event well in advanced of the event start time. The first channel on Pearl-2 is selected
by default.
When it's time for the scheduled webcasting event to start, Pearl-2 automatically sends an RTMP (or RTMPS)
stream to the primary URL associated with that event. If you've enabled the backup stream, then Pearl-2
sends an RTMP stream to both the primary URL and the secondary backup URL associated with that event. If
the primary URL stream fails for any reason, Kaltura automatically switches over to the backup URL.
The channel you're streaming should have at least one layout, see Create a channel. For the correct encoding
settings to use for the channel, see Kaltura's requirements.
During the webcast, you can switch layouts using Pearl-2 for a more dynamic live broadcast. For information
about creating layouts for a channel and switching, see: Custom layout configuration.
You can start a scheduled webcasting event before the scheduled start time using the touch screen on Pearl-2
or the Admin panel.
You can preview the channel that is included for a scheduled webcasting event from the Events
touch screen, see View scheduled events and history.
Important considerations
l
Ensure that the same audio sources are selected on each layout if the channel is configured with
multiple layouts for live switching.
To set up a channel in Pearl-2 for a scheduled webcasting event using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click CMS. The Content management system configuration menu
opens.
3. Under Live-stream event channel, select the channel you want to stream.
4. (Optionally) Check Backup stream to enable streaming to the secondary backup stream URL for this
event.
5. Click Apply.
473
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set Kaltura ad hoc event parameters
Set Kaltura ad hoc event parameters
CMS must be enabled and Pearl-2 registered with Kaltura to create ad hoc events. The same channels that you
select for scheduled VOD events using the Admin panel are the channels that are recorded for ad hoc events,
see Select channels for Kaltura VOD events. Similarly, the channel you selected for scheduled webcasts is used
for ad hoc webcast events, see Select channel for Kaltura webcasting events.
For ad hoc events, you can enter the metadata to associate with the uploaded media using the Admin panel.
However, you can modify the metadata at any time using the Kaltura Management Console (KMC) after the
content is uploaded.
l
Session title: This assigns a default title for ad hoc events. Default variables specify the current date
and time as the title using the format yyy-mm-dd hh:mm. This default title can be changed when an
ad hoc event is created.
l
Event owner: This assigns an owner to ad hoc events created using Pearl-2. The owner you enter here
appears on the Login touch screen by default and can be overwritten when authenticating from Pearl2.
474
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Set Kaltura ad hoc event parameters
Owner suffix: Enter a suffix to be automatically applied to the Event owner field when users
authenticate with Kaltura from Pearl-2. For example, if the owner account is [email protected], enter
the suffix @myorg.com here so that the user only needs to enter wilson to authenticate.
l
Description: The description of the uploaded media that appears in Kaltura.
l
Tags: Assign tags to the uploaded media for use by Kaltura.
l
Categories: Assign Kaltura categories to the uploaded media.
l
Duration: Assign a default duration for ad hoc events. This value can be changed when an ad hoc
event is created.
l
Automatic logout: Automatically logs out the ad hoc event creator when the ad hoc event ends if the
touch screen was used to create the ad hoc event. This is disabled by default.
Important considerations
l
Before you start recording, we recommend that you enter the event parameters you want associated
with ad hoc events using the Admin panel. However, users can modify or add this metadata later using
the Kaltura Management Console.
To enter metadata for an ad hoc event using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click CMS. The Content management system configuration menu
opens.
3. Under Unscheduled ad hoc events, enter the information you want associated with this ad hoc
event and click Apply.
475
Pearl-2 User Guide
Change the events schedule refresh interval
Change the events schedule refresh interval
Using the Admin panel, you can change how frequently Pearl-2 polls Kaltura for the latest event information
to refresh the events listed on the Events page. The default interval is once every 3600 seconds (1 hour).
Requesting updated information too frequently can impact performance. We recommend setting
an interval of no less than 120 seconds (once every 2 minutes). The longest interval supported is
604800 seconds (once a week).
To change how often Pearl-2 polls Kaltura for the latest event information:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click CMS. The Content management system configuration menu
opens.
3. Under Advanced, enter the Schedule refresh interval in seconds or choose a value from the drop down
list. Click Apply.
476
Pearl-2 User Guide
Use RTMPS for a Kaltura webcasting event
Use RTMPS for a Kaltura webcasting event
Pearl-2 sends an RTMP stream to the primary URL associated with the webcasting event, or to both the
primary URL and the secondary backup URL if you've enabled the backup stream, see Select channel for
Kaltura webcasting events.
You can configure Pearl-2 to send an RTMPS stream instead using the Admin panel.
To configure Pearl-2 to send an RTMPS stream using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click CMS. The Content management system configuration menu
opens.
3. Under Live-stream event channel, check Secure streaming and click Apply.
477
Pearl-2 User Guide
Use RTMPS for a Kaltura webcasting event
478
Pearl-2 User Guide
Panopto registration
Panopto registration
Pearl-2 is fully integrated with Panopto Content Management Systems (CMSs) for a seamless video recording
and webcasting experience. After a simple registration process, Pearl-2 is available for your CMS users to select
as a remote recorder resource or capture device for scheduled, recurring, and ad hoc events. Completed
recordings automatically upload to the CMS. Registering Pearl-2 as a remote recorder for Panopto only needs
to be done once.
Topics include:
l
Enable CMS and register with Panopto
l
Disable CMS and disconnect from Panopto
After Pearl-2 is registered, proceed to create URL redirects for Pearl-2, setup authentication for ad hoc events,
and select default settings. See Panopto recording and webcasting setup.
Enable CMS and register with Panopto
Use the Admin panel to register Pearl-2 as a remote recorder for scheduled, recurring, and ad hoc recordings
and webcasts. When you register Pearl-2, a default name is assigned that includes the serial number of Pearl2. This name appears in the list of remote recorders in Panopto. You can change the remote recorder name
using the Admin panel.
Before you begin, you need:
l
Your Panopto service URL, for example: https://<myorg>.hosted.panopto.com/
l
A Panopto-generated registration key for the remote recorder.
l
The Epiphan API key from Panopto is required for on-premise versions of Panopto version 6 or earlier.
Contact Panopto support for assistance to install the Epiphan API key.
Important considerations
l
You create a registration key in Panopto from System > Remote Recorders when you click Manage
registration keys. Record the key somewhere safe before closing the screen in Panopto. The key
cannot be retrieved after the screen is closed. If you lose the registration key, you must create a new
one to register Pearl-2 as a remote recorder.
l
Scheduled recordings are associated to a remote recorder using the registration key and not the device
name.
l
If you disconnect Pearl-2 and register again using a different registration key, the scheduled sessions
previously associated with the original key do not migrate over.
479
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Enable CMS and register with Panopto
If you're using the on-premise version of Panopto version 6 or earlier, you must manually add the API
key for Pearl-2. Contact Panopto support for assistance.
l
If you are unable to register Pearl-2, contact your Panopto administrator or Epiphan support.
l
If you want a different name for this Pearl-2 to appear in Panopto, enter the name into the Device
name field before you register Pearl-2. Changes after Pearl-2 is registered do not appear in Panopto.
To enable Pearl-2 as a remote recorder and register with Panopto using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click CMS. The Content management system configuration page opens.
3. From the Choose CMS drop down, select Panopto and then click Apply.
4. Enter the Panopto Service URL, Registration key, and optionally enter a Device name you want to
appear in Panopto for this device, then click Apply. The Status updates to Connected.
480
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable CMS and disconnect from Panopto
Changing Panopto's device name for Pearl-2 does not change the name that is
assigned to Pearl-2 in the Device info fields, see Configure device info, name,
description, and location
What's next?
For Panopto, proceed to create URL redirects for Pearl-2, setup authentication for ad hoc events, and select
default settings. See Panopto recording and webcasting setup.
An API client ID with two URL redirects are required to enable authentication on Pearl-2, see Setup
Panopto authentication for ad hoc events
Disable CMS and disconnect from Panopto
When you use the Admin panel to disable CMS for a registered Pearl-2, the remote recorder disconnects from
Panopto. As long as Pearl-2 is still registered, you can create new scheduled sessions in Panopto for this
remote recorder, but the events schedule won't synchronize until CMS is re-enabled.
If CMS is re-enabled on Pearl-2 before a VOD session is scheduled to end, recording starts automatically on
Pearl-2 when the connection to Panopto is re-established. However, when the start of a scheduled webcasting
event is missed, the stream does not automatically start when the connection is re-established. A new
webcasting event should be created.
Revoking the registration key and deleting Pearl-2 as a remote recorder is performed in Panopto, see
Panopto's documentation for instructions. If you delete Pearl-2 in Panopto, all scheduled and recurring
events that were associated with Pearl-2 are permanently deleted.
Important considerations
l
You can not start unscheduled ad hoc events when CMS is disabled on Pearl-2.
l
Sessions that are scheduled to start while CMS is disabled on Pearl-2 do not start on Pearl-2.
l
Scheduled webcasting events do not start if Pearl-2's connection to Panopto is not available.
l
Deleting Pearl-2 in Panopto permanently deletes future scheduled and recurring sessions associated
with that remote recorder.
l
Do not disable CMS while an event is in progress.
To disconnect Pearl-2 using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
481
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable CMS and disconnect from Panopto
2. From the Configuration menu, click CMS. The Content management system configuration menu
opens.
3. To disconnect Pearl-2, select none from the Choose CMS drop down and then click Apply.
482
Pearl-2 User Guide
Panopto recording and webcasting setup
Panopto recording and webcasting setup
Pearl-2 appears as an available resource as soon as the device is registered with Panopto. Now you must
setup authentication for ad hoc events to create ad hoc events from Pearl-2. After that, you're ready to select
video sources for multiple source recordings and webcasts. Video sources must be connected to Pearl-2 and
assigned to channels. Each channel configure on Pearl-2 is treated as a separate video source for multiple
source events in Panopto. For more information about using the auto channel feature, creating channels or
using custom layouts, see What is a channel?.
Topics include:
l
About Panopto recording and webcasting
l
Setup Panopto authentication for ad hoc events
l
Set Panopto ad hoc event parameters
About Panopto recording and webcasting
Pearl-2 supports scheduled, recurring, and unscheduled multiple source ad hoc recordings and webcasts. Each
Pearl-2 channel is treated as a separate video source that Panopto users can select when scheduling an event
in Panopto.
Scheduled events start and end automatically. No manual intervention is required. After the event ends,
recorded files automatically upload to the event owner's folder in Panopto. Back up recordings for each
channel are also saved locally on Pearl-2. If the network connection or the CMS goes down during an event,
Pearl-2 continues to record locally and uploads the recording when network connectivity resumes.
You can start and stop events earlier than the scheduled time using either the Admin panel or the touch
screen on Pearl-2, as well as create ad hoc events.
Starting or stopping a scheduled VOD event before the scheduled start or stop time does not
change the event into an ad hoc event.
Using multiple Pearl-2 channels is how you get multiple views for a Panopto event. Each channel is treated as
a separate video source. Using the Admin panel, Pearl-2 administrators can configure up to up to six channels
on Pearl-2 for multiple source recordings and up to four separate channels for webcasts.
For example, if you have a main camera and a presentation laptop that you want to capture as a multiple
source recording, you'd create two channels on Pearl-2: one for the main camera and another one for the
presentation laptop. To learn how to create a channel or to use the Auto channels, see Channel configuration.
483
Pearl-2 User Guide
About Panopto recording and webcasting
For ad hoc events, the default name of the multi-view file includes the date and start time of the event. For
example: 2019-07-15 08:00. A more intuitive name can be entered when the ad hoc event is created.
Pearl-2 administrators can:
l
Setup Panopto authentication for ad hoc events, see Setup Panopto authentication for ad hoc events.
l
Set Panopto ad hoc event parameters, Set Panopto ad hoc event parameters.
Pearl-2 administrators and operators can use the Admin panel to:
l
Create ad hoc events, see Create ad hoc events using the Admin panel.
l
View the Events page to see all upcoming scheduled sessions and completed sessions, see View
scheduled events and history.
l
Download local recordings for each channel, see Recover channel backup recordings.
l
Start and stop scheduled events before the scheduled time, see Start/stop scheduled events using the
Admin panel.
To use the touchscreen on Pearl-2 to start, stop, and create events, see CMS event controls using the touch
screen.
Panopto users select the channel resolution in Panopto when creating a new scheduled or
recurring session. The Panopto encoding settings are applied automatically to the channel and
overrides the channel encoding settings made using the Admin panel.
Important considerations:
l
Pearl-2 must be registered with Panopto to record and stream Panopto events, see Enable CMS and
register with Panopto.
l
You can configure up to up to six channels on Pearl-2 for multiple source recordings and up to four
separate channels for webcasts.
l
If you choose more than four Pearl-2 channels for a webcast in Panopto, then Panopto arbitrarily
chooses a maximum of four channels to webcast.
l
The maximum allowed bitrate for webcasts in Panopto is 2.5 Mbps, regardless of what bitrate is
actually set as the target resolution for the remote recorder in Panopto. For example, when creating a
scheduled webcasting event in Panopto, if you set the target resolution to a quality of 1920 x 1080 60
fps Bitrate: 4000 kbps, Pearl streams the event at the maximum bitrate of 2500 kbps.
l
Scheduled events have priority over ad hoc events. If an ad hoc event is still in progress when it's time
to start a scheduled event, the ad hoc event is stopped and the scheduled event starts.
484
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
About Panopto recording and webcasting
Scheduled VOD events automatically start recording locally on Pearl-2 even If the network is down or
Panopto is unavailable. After the session ends, the locally recorded files upload automatically to your
folder in Panopto when the network link to Panopto is re-established.
l
Scheduled webcasting events do not start if Pearl-2's connection to the CMS is not available.
l
If the network connection is lost during a file upload to Panopto, the transfer automatically restarts
when the network connection re-establishes.
l
If Pearl-2 loses power while a scheduled event is being recorded, the recording stops. If Pearl-2 is
powered back on before the scheduled end time for the event, recording of the scheduled event
restarts automatically and a second set of files are created. When the event ends, both sets of files are
uploaded to Panopto.
l
If Pearl-2 was unavailable on the network or powered down and misses a scheduled event, the status
of that event appears as Skipped on the Events page in the Admin panel.
l
For recurring events with more sessions than can be displayed at any one time on the CMS Events page
in the Admin panel, upcoming events are added as room becomes available and the list automatically
refreshes once every six hours.
l
Do not use the One Touch recording control, AFU, or configure recording file size, type and other
channel recording settings when CMS is enabled on Pearl-2.
l
Do not schedule recordings that are longer than the capacity of Pearl-2 to store the recording on the
local drive.
l
For ad hoc events, Pearl-2 ignores a user's presets that are set in Panopto. As a result, ad hoc recordings
automatically upload to the user's default folder as originally assigned by Panopto.
l
Channel encoding settings you make on Pearl-2 are overridden by the default encoding settings the
system uses to record to Panopto.
l
To monitor the health of the video and audio, you can go to the Channel view using the touch screen,
see Channel monitoring using the touch screen or monitor channels using the Admin panel.
Thumbnails of your video sources display on the Events screen so you can see the status of your video
sources from the touch screen, see View scheduled events and history. It's also possible to see a live
preview of the channels and the audio level from the remote recorder page in Panopto.
l
For multiple-source Panopto events that are manually stopped or have ended, if you use the Admin
panel to delete a locally saved recording for any channel on Pearl-2 that hasn't yet uploaded to
Panopto as part of the multiple-source event, that event remains in the In Progress state indefinitely in
Panopto.
For Panopto VOD events, if you manually stop a scheduled VOD event before the scheduled end
time when Pearl-2 doesn't have network connectivity, Pearl-2 uploads the completed event's
recording when network connectivity resumes. However, Panopto does not recognize that the
485
Pearl-2 User Guide
Setup Panopto authentication for ad hoc events
event has ended. The event remains in the In Progress state in Panopto and you must wait until
the original event's scheduled end time before creating a new event using that Pearl-2.
Setup Panopto authentication for ad hoc events
Panopto users can create unscheduled ad hoc events directly from the touch screen on Pearl-2 or using the
Admin panel. You can set up Pearl-2 to allow users to authenticate using their local Panopto login credentials,
their credentials for a third-party LMS integrated with Panopto (like Canvas), and SAML 2.0 credentials if
configured on Panopto.
Pearl-2 uses a JavaScript web application to negotiate authentication with Panopto. You must create a new
API client ID and add two URL redirects in Panopto for ad hoc event authentication to work.
l
One API client URL redirect is for Pearl-2.
l
The other API client URL redirect is for the web-based Admin UI.
An API client ID and both URL redirects are required to enable ad hoc authentication on Pearl-2.
Before you begin, you need:
l
Admin access to Panopto.
l
A Pearl-2 remote recorder that's registered with Panopto.
Important considerations
l
Record all API client IDs and secret keys that are generated in Panopto somewhere safe. The ID and key
cannot be retrieved after the screen is closed and must be regenerated if lost.
l
You can use the same API Client ID to enable ad hoc authentication on multiple Pearl-2 systems;
however, you must create a separate API client URL redirect for the web-based Admin UI of each
individual Pearl-2 device.
l
Third-party application authentication for ad hoc events is only supported for Panopto.
To enable ad hoc authentication on Pearl-2:
1. Login to Panopto as an administrator.
2. In the header bar, click the arrow beside your user name and select User Settings. The User Settings
page opens.
486
Pearl-2 User Guide
Setup Panopto authentication for ad hoc events
3. Create the API Client ID and URL redirect for Pearl-2. Do the following:
a. From the User Settings page, click API Clients, and then click Create a new API Client. The
Create API Client page opens.
b. From the Create API Client page, enter a unique name for the Pearl-2 API client in the Client
Name field. If a client already exists in Panopto with that name, choose a different name.
c. In the Client Type field, select JavaScript Web Application.
d. In the Redirect URL field, enter http://pearl/sso and then click Create API Client.
487
Pearl-2 User Guide
Setup Panopto authentication for ad hoc events
e. On the New API Client created pop-up, record the Client ID and the Client Secret for future
reference, and then click OK. The new Pearl API Client appears in your list of API clients.
4. Add a URL redirect for the web-based Admin panel to the Pearl API Client. Do the following:
a. From the User Settings page under API Clients, click Edit beside the Pearl API Client that you
just created.
b. In the Allowed Redirect URLs field, enter http://<device_ip>/admin/events where
<device_ip> is the IP address of Pearl-2.
If Pearl-2 is configured for https, enter https:// instead of http://.
c. In the URL Type field, select Redirect URL.
d. Click Add URL. The Admin panel URL redirect appears in the Allowed URL list.
5. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
6. From the Configuration menu, click CMS. The Content management system configuration page opens.
488
Pearl-2 User Guide
Set Panopto ad hoc event parameters
7. In the Unscheduled ad hoc events section, enter the Pearl-2 API client id that was generated
earlier, and then click Apply.
Set Panopto ad hoc event parameters
Using the Admin panel, you can set parameters that are associated with ad hoc events, including:
l
Session title: This assigns a default title for ad hoc events. Default variables specify the current date
and time as the title using the format yyy-mm-dd hh:mm. This default title can be changed when an
ad hoc event is created.
l
API client id: This is the API client ID that was generated for ad hoc event authentication, see Setup
Panopto authentication for ad hoc events.
l
Duration: Assign a default duration for ad hoc events. This value can be changed when an ad hoc
event is created.
l
Automatic logout: Automatically logs out the ad hoc event creator when the ad hoc event ends if the
touch screen was used to create the ad hoc event.
Pearl-2 must be connected to Panopto for this procedure to work.
To enter ad hoc event parameters using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click CMS. The Content management system configuration menu
opens.
3. Under Unscheduled ad hoc events, enter the information you want associated with this ad hoc
event and click Apply
489
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable low disk space alerts
Disable low disk space alerts
Pearl-2 sends a low disk space alert to Panopto when the amount of internal storage space on the device is
low. You can disable the low disk space alerts that Pearl-2 sends to Panopto using the Admin panel and enable
it again at any time.
To disable low disk space alerts using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click CMS. The Content management system configuration page opens.
3. Uncheck Low disk space alert and click Apply to disable sending these alerts to Panopto.
490
Pearl-2 User Guide
Disable low disk space alerts
4. To enable this feature again, simply check Low disk space alert and click Apply.
491
Pearl-2 User Guide
CMS recording and webcasting using the Admin
panel
CMS recording and webcasting using the
Admin panel
Pearl-2 records scheduled, recurring, and unscheduled ad hoc events for Kaltura and Panopto CMSs. Pearl-2
appears as an available resource as soon as the device is registered with your CMS. Connect multiple audio
and video sources directly to Pearl-2 and record content from HD cameras, document cameras, HDMI output
from computers, and even digital microscope cameras.
Scheduled events start and end automatically. No manual intervention is required. After the event ends,
recorded files automatically upload to the CMS. If the network connection or the CMS goes down during an
event, it records locally on Pearl-2 and uploads automatically when network connectivity resumes. Back up
recordings of each channel can easily be recovered using the Admin panel.
Do not schedule recordings that are longer than the capacity of Pearl-2 to store the recording on
it's local drive.
Topics include:
l
Create ad hoc events using the Admin panel
l
Start/stop scheduled events using the Admin panel
l
Logout of an ad hoc session
l
Recover channel backup recordings
To start/stop scheduled events and create ad hoc events using the touch screen, see CMS event controls using
the touch screen.
For important considerations before recording or webcasting to a CMS, see About Kaltura recording and
webcasting and About Panopto recording and webcasting.
Start/stop scheduled events using the Admin panel
After an event ends, the recorded video files upload automatically to the CMS.
Important considerations
l
If you manually stop a scheduled Panopto VOD event before the scheduled end time when Pearl-2
doesn't have network connectivity, Pearl-2 uploads the completed event's recording when network
connectivity resumes. However, Panopto does not recognize that the event has ended. The event
remains in the In Progress state in Panopto and you must wait until the original event's scheduled end
time before creating a new event using that Pearl-2.
492
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Start/stop scheduled events using the Admin
panel
For multiple-source Panopto events that are manually stopped or have ended, if you use the Admin
panel to delete a locally saved recording for any channel on Pearl-2 that hasn't yet uploaded to
Panopto as part of the multiple-source event, that event remains in the In Progress state indefinitely in
Panopto.
l
Do not power down Pearl-2 while a scheduled webcast event is in progress. The webcast ends but the
RTMP stream that was created automatically on Pearl-2 is not deleted from the channel's Streaming
page. Use the Admin panel to manually delete the webcast stream instance from the channel's
Streaming page.
From the Admin panel, select the Events menu and click Start beside the event on the Events page.
A Stop button appears beside the event while the event is recording. You can click that to stop the event
before the scheduled end time.
In the Admin panel, you can click Refresh schedule at any time to manually update the events listed on the
Events page.
493
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create ad hoc events using the Admin panel
After the event ends, it may take a while for content to show up in Kaltura's media lists, depending
on how busy the Kaltura CMS system is at the time.
Create ad hoc events using the Admin panel
You can create and start an ad hoc recording or webcast using the Admin panel. Pearl-2 must be registered
with your CMS to create ad hoc events, see Integration.
You must authenticate using your CMS login credentials before you can enter the ad hoc event details and
start the event. Contact your CMS administrator if authentication fails and login is denied.
User accounts must be defined on the CMS itself and not a subsidiary system such as an LMS.
Kaltura event details
494
Pearl-2 User Guide
Create ad hoc events using the Admin panel
Table 77 Kaltura ad hoc event details
Item
Session title
Description
Enter a unique name for the ad hoc event. If no name is entered, a default event
consisting of the current date and time is applied. For example: 2019-07-04 13:22
Description
Enter a description of the event.
Tags
Add Kaltura search tags separated by commas. For example: tag1, tag2, tag3.
Category
Add a Kaltura category.
Select the event duration in minutes from the drop down list or enter a value using
Duration
your keyboard. Select a value from 5 to 240 minutes or enter a value using your
keyboard.
Event type
Choose either VOD (Video on Demand), Live-stream, or VOD + Live-stream as the
ad hoc event type.
Panopto event details
Table 78 Panopto ad hoc event details
Item
Session title
Folder
Description
Enter a unique name for the ad hoc event. If no name is entered, a default event
consisting of the current date and time is applied. For example: 2019-07-04 13:22
Select the folder in Panopto where you want the recorded file to upload. Your
Panopto MyFolder is the default folder.
495
Pearl-2 User Guide
Item
Create ad hoc events using the Admin panel
Description
For ad hoc events, Pearl-2 ignores a user's presets that are set in Panopto. As a
result, ad hoc recordings automatically upload to the user's default folder as
originally assigned by Panopto.
Select the event duration in minutes from the drop down list or enter a value using
Duration
your keyboard. Select a value from 5 to 240 minutes or enter a value using your
keyboard.
Event type
Choose either VOD or Live-stream as the ad hoc event type.
To create an ad hoc event using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Events menu, click Events. The Events page opens.
3. Click Create new event.
a. For Kaltura, enter your Kaltura user ID as your CMS login credentials in the pop up window, then
click Login. After you're authenticated, your user name appears in the Full name field and you
can enter the ad hoc event details.
b. For Panopto, enter your Panopto CMS user name and password in the login window, then click
Sign in. In the events details pop up, your user name appears in the Full name field and you
can enter the ad hoc event details.
496
Pearl-2 User Guide
Logout of an ad hoc session
If you get the login error that your account is not active, your CMS has blocked your
account. If login to the CMS is denied, the account you entered may not exist or may
not have access rights to create an ad hoc event using Pearl-2. Contact your CMS
administrator for CMS related login and account issues.
4. Click Start event now when you're ready to start recording or Live-streaming. Or click Cancel.
Logout of an ad hoc session
After you've logged into your CMS from the touch screen on Pearl-2 and started an unscheduled ad hoc
event, you're automatically logged out after the ad hoc event ends. If your Pearl-2 administrator has not
enabled the automatic logout feature, then your login session stays active for one hour after the event ends.
For Panopto ad hoc events that you start using the web-based Admin panel, Panopto preserves your login
credentials after the ad hoc event ends. To avoid someone else from using your account to create ad hoc
Panopto events from the Admin panel, manually logout after you're ad hoc event ends.
Before you begin, you need your Panopto server URL, for example:
https://<myorg>.hosted.panopto.com/
To manually logout of an ad hoc session with Panopto using the Admin panel:
1. From the Events menu, click Events. The Events page opens.
2. Click Logout beside your login user name.
3. To close the authentication session with the Panopto server, open a new tab in the same browser that
you used to login and go to:
https://<PanoptoServerURL>/Panopto/Pages/Auth/Logout.aspx
Closing the authentication session with the Panopto server may not close the
authentication session with the third-party LMS.
497
Pearl-2 User Guide
Recover channel backup recordings
4. Return to the Admin panel and click Create new event on the Events page to confirm that you're
logged out of Panopto. A blank login page should appear.
Recover channel backup recordings
Recordings automatically upload to Kaltura or Panopto after the event ends. If for some reason the
recordings are not available in the CMS, administrators can manually download backup recordings for each
channel on Pearl-2.
Pearl saves a local backup of recordings automatically in a round-robin fashion. When the record drive is full,
new recordings overwrite the oldest ones. Pearl-2 administrators and operators can use the Admin panel to
manually download and delete channel recordings. For more details about managing recordings, see Manage
recorded files.
To download and delete channel recordings using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Events menu, click the arrow icon beside the event to see which channels were included for
that event.
3. To download recordings for each channel included in the event.
a. From the Channels menu, click Recording. The Recordings page for that channel opens with a
list of recorded files.
b. Click the name of the recording to download the file or select multiple files and click Download
498
Pearl-2 User Guide
Recover channel backup recordings
Selected.
c. Repeat for each additional channel.
4. To delete recordings, do one of the following:
a. To delete a single recording, click the X icon to the right of a recording and click OK when
prompted.
b. To delete multiple recordings, check the check box beside the recordings you want to delete and
click OK when prompted.
c. To delete all recordings for the selected channel or recorder, click Delete Selected and click OK
when prompted.
499
Pearl-2 User Guide
Recover channel backup recordings
The list may not update immediately. You can refresh the list by reloading the Recording
page (for channels) or the recorder settings page (for recorders).
500
PART 6: Maintenance
Keep your Pearl-2 running smoothly using the latest firmware updates and maintenance features.
Topics include:
l
Power down and system restart
l
Perform a factory reset
l
Firmware upgrade
l
Support
l
Storage capacity maintenance
501
Pearl-2 User Guide
Power down and system restart
Power down and system restart
You can perform the following tasks:
l
Reboot using the Admin panel
l
Power off the device using the Admin panel
l
Power off the device using the power button
Reboot using the Admin panel
To reboot Pearl-2 using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Maintenance. The maintenance page opens.
3. Click Reboot Now and click OK when prompted.
Power off the device using the Admin panel
You can use the Admin panel to power off Pearl-2. The power button on Pearl-2 is a toggle switch. If you
power off the device using the Admin panel, the power switch remains in the on state. To power back on, you
must double press the power button.
To power off Pearl-2 using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Maintenance. The maintenance page opens.
502
Pearl-2 User Guide
Power down and system restart
3. Click Shutdown Now and click OK when prompted.
Power off the device using the power button
You can manually shut down Pearl-2 using the power button.
The power button for Pearl-2 is found on the front.
To power off Pearl-2 manually, double-press (two successive fast presses and releases) the power button to
initiate a safe power down.
If the system is unresponsive, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds to force an
immediate power down.
503
Pearl-2 User Guide
Backup your Pearl-2 setup
Backup your Pearl-2 setup
Configuration presets are the perfect way to backup your Pearl-2 setup so that you can reapply it later
without worrying if someone changes your settings or does a factory reset.
You can create a configuration preset from the Configuration menu when you select Maintenance, see
Configuration presets.
504
Pearl-2 User Guide
Perform a factory reset
Perform a factory reset
Administrators can use the Admin panel to perform a factory reset and restore the configuration of Pearl-2 to
the manufacturer's original default settings. For a list of affected settings, see The Factory default
configuration preset and Factory reset.
Performing a factory reset erases all your input port settings (video and audio), channels,
configuration presets, network settings, all locally saved media files and recordings from Pearl-2.
Consider applying a factory default configuration preset if you want to preserve your uploaded media files,
configuration presets, and channel recordings, see Configuration presets.
To perform a factory reset:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Maintenance. The maintenance page opens.
3. Click the Reset and click OK when prompted.
4. The system resets to factory defaults and reboots. Wait for the system to finish rebooting before
configuring Pearl-2.
505
Pearl-2 User Guide
Firmware upgrade
Firmware upgrade
When you register your product with Epiphan, you can choose to receive email notifications whenever
firmware updates are available. To take advantage of exciting new features and important fixes for your Pearl2, install new firmware whenever the system indicates that a firmware update is available.
Topics include:
l
Check for firmware updates
l
Update the firmware
l
BIOS update
The BIOS update section appears on the Firmware Update page only when your Pearl-2 system
requires a BIOS update.
Check for firmware updates
Your Pearl-2 automatically checks for firmware updates if the Enable connection to maintenance server
option is checked on the Maintenance page of the Admin panel. You can also manually check for updates If
your Pearl-2 has internet access.
When Enable connection to maintenance server is checked, the built-in firmware update
mechanism checks for updates for your specific product and hardware version automatically.
To manually check for new firmware:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Firmware Upgrade. The firmware upgrade page opens.
3. Click check for updates beside the current firmware version. If an update is found, a red box appears
in the top left side of the Admin panel with a link to download and install the firmware.
506
Pearl-2 User Guide
Firmware upgrade
Update the firmware
If your Pearl-2 has internet access, the easiest way to install a firmware update is to use the download link
that's provided when you check for new firmware. If you have a Pearl-2 firmware file that was provided to you
by Epiphan Video, you can install the new firmware using the web-based Admin panel.
You cannot install new firmware from a locally saved file using the local console on Pearl-2.
While the firmware is updating, the touch screen displays a firmware update in-progress notice. All streaming
and recording functions stop until after the firmware upgrade is complete.
Installing new firmware takes a few minutes, after which the system reboots. Depending on the upgrade, a
disk rebuild may be required, causing the restart process to take more time. Please be patient and wait for the
system to finish rebooting.
Do not interrupt power to the system during a firmware upgrade.
Before you begin
Schedule a time to when you can update the firmware without negatively impacting viewers or automatic file
upload and recording schedules.
It's good practice to make a backup of your current configuration before applying a firmware update so that
you can revert to the previous firmware if needed, see Create a configuration preset. You should also clear
your web browser's cache after the update is complete.
To perform a firmware update:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. (Optional) Save a copy of the current system configuration. See Configuration presets.
3. From the Configuration menu, select Firmware Upgrade. The firmware upgrade page opens.
4. Do one of the following:
a. Click check for updates. If a red box appears in the top left side of the Admin panel, click
Download and install.
b. Click Choose File and select the firmware upgrade file that's located on your admin computer,
then click Apply. The system unpacks and verifies the file. If the file is valid, the upgrade begins.
If the touch screen is enabled, a notice that the firmware update is in progress appears.
507
Pearl-2 User Guide
Firmware upgrade
Do not interrupt power to the system during the firmware upgrade.
5. When the firmware update is complete, a message lets you know that Pearl-2 is going to reboot. Wait
for the system to restart.
6. After the system reinitializes, go to the settings for your web browser and clear your web browser's
cache.
7. Connect to the Admin panel and login as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
8. From the Configuration menu, select Firmware Upgrade. The firmware upgrade page opens. Verify
that the firmware version is the expected new version.
If in the rare occasion the firmware update fails, the touch screen reports the failure. Please collect system
information such as the serial number of Pearl-2, the previous firmware version (if known), and the new
firmware version and contact [email protected]
508
Pearl-2 User Guide
Firmware upgrade
BIOS update
If Pearl-2 requires a BIOS update, a BIOS Upgrade section appears on the Firmware update page in the Admin
panel. We recommend performing the BIOS update whenever they become available to ensure optimum
performance of your device.
The BIOS Upgrade section appears on the Firmware Update page only when your Pearl-2 system requires a
BIOS update.
To perform a BIOS update:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. (Optional) Save a copy of the current system configuration. See Configuration presets.
3. From the Configuration menu, select Firmware Upgrade. The firmware upgrade page opens.
4. Click Update BIOS and click OK when prompted. The update should begin.
If the touch screen is enabled, a notice that the BIOS update is in progress appears.
509
Pearl-2 User Guide
Firmware upgrade
Do not interrupt power to the system during the BIOS update.
5. When the BIOS update is complete, a message lets you know that Pearl-2 is going to reboot. Wait for
the system to restart.
6. After the system reinitializes, go to the settings for your web browser and clear your web browser's
cache
7. Connect to the Admin panel and login as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
8. From the Configuration menu, select Info and confirm that the date of the BIOS has updated.
You can also confirm that the latest BIOS is installed on Pearl-2 when the section called
BIOS Upgrade no longer appears on the Firmware Upgrade page in the Admin panel.
510
Pearl-2 User Guide
Support
Support
Your Pearl-2 comes with a one-year complimentary support plan starting one year from the original product
shipment date. You can purchase a 2-year extended support plan from Epiphan Video for a total of three
years of product support from the original product shipment date:
l
SupportPlan offers a 2-year support extension
l
SupportPlan+ offers a 2-year support extension plus remote troubleshooting support
Remote troubleshooting support allows the Epiphan support team to remotely access Pearl-2 to help
troubleshoot issues and reset lost admin passwords, see Support. No private information is sent to the
Epiphan maintenance server during a remote session. For more information about service plans, see
www.epiphan.com/supportplan.
To contact Epiphan support:
l
Email: [email protected]
l
Online chat: www.epiphan.com/support (Monday to Friday between 9am and 5pm Eastern)
l
Call: 1-877-599-6581 / 613-599-6581
From time to time, Epiphan support may ask you for logs from your system. Follow the instructions to
download the log files and allinfo file for support.
Remote support is only provided for systems covered by SupportPlan+.
Download logs and allinfo file
If requested by Epiphan support, you can download the logs files and/or "allinfo" data from your system.
These files help our support team troubleshoot problems.
To download the logs and allinfo file:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Maintenance. The maintenance page opens.
511
Pearl-2 User Guide
Support
3. Check Permanent Logs and click Apply.
4. Click Maintenance again to refresh the maintenance page and click Download permanent logs. A
zip file containing system downloads.
5. From your browser, run the allinfo script. A file is saved to your computer.
http://<ip address of your system>/admin/allinfo.cgi
6. Share the log files and the allinfo results with Epiphan support.
Configure remote support
Remote support is enabled on Pearl Mini by default and allows the Epiphan support team to remotely access
Pearl-2 to help you troubleshoot issues and reset lost admin passwords.
Your network must allow access to the Epiphan maintenance server, which has the domain name
epiphany.epiphan.com. Pearl-2 must be able to resolve this domain name to connect to the Epiphan
maintenance server for remote support.
Remote support uses ports 22 and 30. Ensure that these ports are opened to allow remote communication. If
your Pearl-2 is on a network that is protected from the Internet by a firewall, consult with your network
administrator to configure your network to allow remote Internet access through the firewall for those ports
and to add epiphany.epiphan.com to the network's allowed list.
512
Pearl-2 User Guide
Support
Remote support is only provided for systems covered by SupportPlan+. For more information
about service plans, see www.epiphan.com/supportplan.
To configure remote support:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Maintenance. The maintenance page opens.
3. Check Enable remote support to enable incoming connections from Epiphan Systems.
4. Check Enable connection to maintenance server to enable outgoing links to the Epiphan
maintenance server epiphany.epiphan.com.
5. Click Apply.
6. Test that Pearl-2 can access the maintenance server:
a. From the Configuration menu, click Network.
b. In Network Diagnostics, enter epiphany.epiphan.com and click ping.
c. The result of the ping should show an IP address for epiphany.epiphan.com. Report any packet
losses to Epiphan support.
7. If Pearl-2 can't reach the maintenance server, check the network settings (see Configure DHCP) to
ensure DHCP is selected or a DNS server is listed, then try again. Consult with your network
administrator if problems persist.
513
Pearl-2 User Guide
Support
8. If Pearl-2 reaches the maintenance server, ensure your firewall has port 30 open.
9. Confirm with Epiphan support that they are able to access your Pearl-2 for remote troubleshooting.
Disable remote support
Remote support is enabled by default. You can turn remote support off for your Pearl-2 using the Admin
panel.
Disabling remote support removes the ability for Epiphan to reset a lost admin password on your
Pearl-2. If you forget the admin password and remote support feature is off, you will need to
return the system to Epiphan for reprogramming.
To disable remote support for your Pearl-2:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Maintenance. The maintenance page opens.
3. Uncheck Enable remote support to disable incoming connections from Epiphan Systems.
4. Uncheck Enable connection to maintenance server to disable outgoing links to the Epiphan
maintenance server epiphany.epiphan.com.
5. Click Apply.
514
Pearl-2 User Guide
Register your device
Register your device
When you register your product with Epiphan, you become eligible to download firmware updates when they
become available. Take advantage of exciting new features and important fixes for your Pearl-2. Registering
your Pearl-2 is free and only needs to be done once. You have an option to sign up for email notifications
whenever a new firmware update is available.
You can register using the Admin panel or Register your device
Have the serial number of your Pearl-2 handy when you register. The serial number appears on a sticker
attached to the bottom of the device. You can also see the serial number from the System Status screen using
the touch screen on Pearl-2.
The banner to register your device appears on the Firmware update page in the Admin panel. If
your system is registered or there are no firmware updates are available, you will not see a banner
on the Firmware update page.
To register using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Firmware Upgrade. The firmware upgrade page opens.
3. Click Register in the banner at the top of the page, then enter the information on the registration
form.
515
Pearl-2 User Guide
Register your device
516
Pearl-2 User Guide
Storage capacity maintenance
Storage capacity maintenance
Pearl-2 has a solid-state storage drive for storage of recordings. Occasionally, some maintenance is required.
Topics include:
l
Check internal storage space
l
Schedule disk check
l
Perform disk check
Check internal storage space
You can check how much internal storage space is available on Pearl-2 using Using the Admin panel and from
the touch screen.Pearl-2 has a 512 GB SSD.
It’s good practice to monitor how much free space is available. If the amount of available storage is low, you
can always remove some of the recorded files, see Manage recorded files and FTP and automatic file transfers.
Disk space can also be checked using Epiphan Live, see Configure Dashboard panels.
To check internal storage space:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin or operator, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. View the Internal Storage section at the bottom of the menu panel. The bar will be mostly green if
there is lots of space left, or mostly red if storage space is nearly full.
Schedule disk check
A disk maintenance schedule is used to check the system storage drives for errors. Two values are supplied,
one to specify the number of system restarts that should occur before disk check, and the second to specify
the number of months before performing a disk check. The disk check happens based on whichever event
occurs first.
517
Pearl-2 User Guide
Storage capacity maintenance
For example, let's say the restart setting is set to 50 and the months setting is set to 6. If six months pass and
less than 50 restarts happened, a disk check will occur on the next restart. However if you do 50 restarts in
one month, the disk check will happen after the fiftieth restart.
Disk check occurs during start up and can cause a lengthy delay in starting up the system.
To set the disk check schedule:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Select the Disk Check link in the Configuration menu; the disk maintenance page opens.
3. Set the number of restarts to occur before the next check. Set to 0 if you don’t want to force a
disk check after a specific number of restarts.
4. Set the number of months to pass before the next check. Set to 0 if you don’t want to force a
disk check after a specific number of months.
5. Click Save.
Perform disk check
A disk maintenance schedule is used to periodically check the system storage drives for errors. If you prefer,
you can run the disk check manually at a time that is convenient for you.
Running the disk check manually resets the timers for the scheduled disk check (i.e. next check won’t happen
automatically until either the number of restarts or months passes).
If the system is recording when you start a disk check, it will stop recording and resume after the
check is complete. Frames presented during the disk check are not part of any recording.
To start a manual disk check:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. Select the Disk Check link in the Configuration menu; the disk maintenance page opens.
3. Click the Check Now button; a new page opens showing you the progress of the disk check.
Do not interrupt power to the system during the disk check.
518
Pearl-2 User Guide
Storage capacity maintenance
4. When the disk check is complete, the main page returns and a summary is shown.
519
Pearl-2 User Guide
PART 7: Troubleshooting
PART 7: Troubleshooting
Pearl-2 has easy-to-use diagnostic tools to test connectivity status, check upload/download bandwidth,
traceroute, and more to help you troubleshoot your Pearl-2. You can also fine tune channel settings such as
frame rate, resolution and bitrate to ensure optimal use of resources while streaming a quality video and fine
tune the video input sources.
Topics include:
l
Diagnostic tools
l
Run diagnostic tests using the Admin panel
l
Run diagnostic tests using the touchscreen
l
Troubleshooting Quick Reference
l
Remove black bars (matte) from the video
l
Use a specific EDID for the video input port
l
Unstretch the output video
l
Remove the combing effect on images
It's good practice to backup your configuration settings so that you can revert back to a good
configuration if the changes you made are not desirable, see Configuration presets.
Diagnostic tools
Diagnostic tools are available to help you troubleshoot your Pearl-2 setup and network connection. You can
run them from the touch screen on Pearl-2 or using the Admin panel .
Available diagnostic tools:
l
Connectivity status: Display the status of critical network connections and features like 802.1x, see
Connectivity status diagnostics.
l
Ping: Test if Pearl-2 can reach a specified destination server on the network. Not all networks support
ping.
l
Trace route: Trace the route that packet traffic takes to get from Pearl-2 to a specified destination
server on the network. Not all networks support traceroute.
l
Bandwidth test: Display the available upload and download bandwidth speed in Mbps.
520
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Diagnostic tools
Domain name resolution: Confirm that the domain name of the DNS server configured on Pearl-2 is
resolvable.
l
Probe: Check if a network port is open on the network side.
Using the Admin UI, diagnostic tools are accessed from the Configuration menu when you select Network. To
learn how, see Run diagnostic tests using the Admin panel.
Using the touch screen, the diagnostic tools are accessed when you tap Settings > Network and select
Connectivity Status. More diagnostic tools are found on the second page under Network Tools. To learn
how, see Run diagnostic tests using the touchscreen.
The following table describes what the colored icons in the results indicate.
Table 79 Diagnostic test result icons
Icon
Description
The diagnostic test result is ok. This can also mean
that a specific feature is enabled on Pearl-2.
521
Pearl-2 User Guide
Connectivity status diagnostics
Icon
Description
The feature or option is disabled on Pearl-2.
The diagnostic test result is not ok. An error was
detected.
Connectivity status diagnostics
The following table describes the Connectivity status diagnostics results shown on the touch screen and the
Admin panel.
Table 80 Connectivity status diagnostics results
Diagnostic
Ethernet cable
Description
Check if an Ethernet cable is detected and connected to
the LAN.
Report the status of 802.1x negotiation and if the feature
802.1x
is disabled on Pearl-2. Status results include: disabled,
authenticated, in progress, and failed.
Check if Pearl-2 can resolve host names with their
associated IP address using the DNS server that is
DNS
configured for Pearl-2. For information about setting a
DNS server IP address for Pearl-2, see Configure a static IP
address.
Check for connectivity issues caused by a Captive portal.
An Ok result can indicate several conditions:
Captive portal
l
No captive portal is detected and Pearl-2 can
successfully reach the Internet.
l
A captive portal is detected and Pearl-2 can
successfully reach the public Internet.
Internet
HTTP (port 80)
Check if Pearl-2 is connected to the Internet by sending a
ping to IP address 8.8.8.8 on the Internet.
Check if traffic can be sent and received over the network
using HTTP port 80.
522
Pearl-2 User Guide
Diagnostic
HTTPS (port 443)
Run diagnostic tests using the Admin panel
Description
Check if traffic can be sent and received over the network
using HTTPS port 443.
Check if the connection to the Epiphan support server is
Support server
enabled and if enabled, confirm that Pearl-2 can establish
communication with the server. A successful connection is
required to use the Epiphan Cloud remote login feature.
Check if the Epiphan Cloud remote management feature
Epiphan Cloud™
is disabled on Pearl-2 and if Pearl-2 can successfully
connect to Epiphan Cloud.
Display the public IP address of this Pearl-2. Knowing the
Public IP
public IP address is useful when configuring SRT on Pearl2, especially if Pearl-2 is behind a NAT on the network. An
empty result means the IP address was not reported.
When you run Connectivity status diagnostics using the Admin panel, additional networking information
about Pearl-2 is displayed.
l
MAC address
l
IP address
l
Network mask
l
Default gateway
l
DNS servers
l
mDNS
Run diagnostic tests using the Admin panel
Using the Admin panel, you can access useful diagnostic tools from the Configuration menu when you select
Network.
Available diagnostic tools:
l
Connectivity status: Display the status of critical network connections and features like 802.1x, see
Run diagnostic tests using the Admin panel.
l
Ping: Test if Pearl-2 can reach a specified destination server on the network. Not all networks support
ping.
523
Pearl-2 User Guide
l
Run diagnostic tests using the Admin panel
Trace route: Trace the route that packet traffic takes to get from Pearl-2 to a specified destination
server on the network. Not all networks support traceroute.
l
Bandwidth test: Display the available upload and download bandwidth speed in Mbps up to a
maximum bandwidth of 1000 Mbps.
l
Domain name resolution: Confirm that Pearl-2 can resolve a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN)
using the DNS server that is configured for Pearl-2.
l
Probe: Check if Pearl-2 can establish communication to a specific port on a network host using a
network protocol that you specify. Supported network protocols are: TCP, HTTP, HTTPS, RTSP, RTMP,
and RTMPS.
To troubleshoot networking issues yourself, try to ping the IP address of your Pearl-2 or do a traceroute to a
server such as 8.8.8.8. If you are unable to resolve your networking issues, contact your network
administrator and provide them the IP address and MAC address of your Pearl-2 or contact Epiphan support.
For more information about diagnostic tools, see Diagnostic tools.
To run diagnostics using the Admin panel:
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Configuration menu, click Network. The Network configuration page opens.
3. In the Network diagnostics section, select the diagnostic test to run from drop down.
a. If Connectivity status is selected, the results display after you click Start.
b. If Ping is selected, enter the destination server IP address or domain name before clicking Start.
c. If Trace route is selected, enter the destination server IP address or domain name to routetrace
before clicking Start.
524
Pearl-2 User Guide
Run diagnostic tests using the touchscreen
d. If Bandwidth test is selected, the measured upload and download bandwidth displays after
you click Start.
e. If Domain name resolution is selected, enter the IP address or server name to resolve before
clicking Start.
f. If Probe is selected, choose the transport protocol from the drop-down menu and then enter
the destination server IP address or server name along with the port before clicking Start. For
example, enter: 10.100.10.1:1234 or domain.example.com:1234
4. Click Start.
For more information about test results, see Diagnostic tools.
Run diagnostic tests using the touchscreen
You can access useful diagnostic tools from the touch screen when you tap Settings > Network and select
Connectivity Status. And more diagnostic tools are found on the second page under Network Tools.
Available diagnostic tools:
l
Connectivity status: Display the status of critical network connections and features like 802.1x, see
Run diagnostic tests using the touchscreen.
l
Ping: Test if Pearl-2 can reach a specified destination server on the network. Not all networks support
ping.
l
Trace route: Trace the route that packet traffic takes to get from Pearl-2 to a specified destination
server on the network. Not all networks support traceroute.
l
Bandwidth test: Display the available upload and download bandwidth speed in Mbps up to a
maximum bandwidth of 1000 Mbps.
l
Domain name resolution: Confirm that Pearl-2 can resolve a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN)
using the DNS server that is configured for Pearl-2.
l
Probe: Check if Pearl-2 can establish communication to a specific port on a network host using a
network protocol that you specify. Supported network protocols are: TCP, HTTP, HTTPS, RTSP, RTMP,
and RTMPS.
To troubleshoot networking issues yourself, try to ping the IP address of your Pearl-2 or do a traceroute to a
server such as 8.8.8.8. If you are unable to resolve your networking issues, contact your network
administrator and provide them the IP address and MAC address of your Pearl-2 or contact Epiphan support.
For more information about diagnostic tools, see Diagnostic tools.
To run diagnostics using the touch screen:
525
Pearl-2 User Guide
Run diagnostic tests using the touchscreen
1. Tap the gear icon to open the System settings screen. If the control icons aren't showing, tap anywhere
on the touch screen.
2. Tap Network. The Network settings page opens.
3. To run the connectivity status diagnostics, tap Connectivity status and then tap Start on the
Connectivity status screen.
4. To run other diagnostic tools, tap the chevron icon in the bottom right of the screen to go to the
second page of network options, and then tap Network Tools.
5. Do one of the following:
a. If Ping is selected, enter the destination server IP address or domain name in the empty field.
b. If Trace route is selected, enter the destination server IP address or domain name to routetrace
in the empty field.
c. If Bandwidth test is selected, the measured upload and download bandwidth displays after
you click Start.
d. If Domain name resolution is selected, enter the IP address or server name to resolve in the
empty field.
e. If Probe is selected, choose the transport protocol from the drop-down menu and then enter
the destination server IP address or server name along with the port in the empty field. For
example, enter: 10.100.10.1:1234 or domain.example.com:1234
6. Tap Start.
For more information about test results, see Diagnostic tools.
526
Pearl-2 User Guide
Troubleshooting Quick Reference
Troubleshooting Quick Reference
Use the follow quick reference table for help if you are experiencing problems or unexpected behavior from
your Pearl-2.
Table 81 Troubleshooting Quick Reference
Problem
Action(s) to Resolve
The most likely problem is that the 4K Feature add-on is not
4K features not working
activated. You can lean more about activating this feature here:
4K
Check each source's input from the source preview in the
Admin panel.
OR
Not sure if the connected video inputs
Check the touchscreen interface to view confidence monitoring
are being captured.
for each channel, see About the touch screen.
OR
Check the Dashboard interface in Epiphan Live, see Monitor
video and audio input sources.
Verify that you are using the correct audio input by following
the steps in Configure encoding.
OR
No sound is coming from an audio
source.
Check the audio meter from the Dashboard view in Epiphan
Live, see Monitor video and audio input sources.
OR
Check the touchscreen interface for audio monitoring or use
the 3.5 mm audio jack on the front of Pearl-2 to verify audio,
see About the touch screen.
Captured SDI audio contains audible
"clicking" sound or other audio
distortions upon playback.
Ensure audio sample rate is set to 48 kHz. Lower sample rates
(i.e. 32 kHz and 44 kHz) can sometimes cause audio distortion.
When previewing a channel using the Live
The Flash (FLV) plugin must be installed for your web browser
broadcast link or the preview link in the
to play back audio that's encoded as PCM.
Admin panel, some web browsers do not
Web browsers that use Flash players to preview video do not
527
Pearl-2 User Guide
Problem
play audio.
All my input names don't look normal in
the Admin panel menu after I applied the
default preset
Troubleshooting Quick Reference
Action(s) to Resolve
support audio that's encoded using 48 kHz MP3 or 48 kHz
PCM.
Refresh your browser to clear the cache and restore the proper
input names displayed in the Admin panel.
Reconnect your RTSP source to reset desynchronized time
Time stamps between Pearl-2 and an
stamps. Verify that you are using a local NTP server on your
RTSP source are not synchronized.
Pearl-2 as a time synchronization server for your RTSP source,
see Configure a time server.
Ensure Pearl-2 is connected to the network and that the
Pearl-2 doesn't show up as an NDI source
network discovery port 5557 on Pearl-2 is enabled, see Disable
the network discovery port.
My NDI source keeps connecting &
disconnecting.
The timecode sent from the source may not be stable. Set the
Ignore timecode parameter for the connected NDI source, see
Connect an NDI source.
The NDI source may not send a timecode. Set the Ignore
My NDI source won't connect.
timecode parameter for the connected NDI source, see
Connect an NDI source.
Pearl-2 supports NDI version 4.1. Some products with earlier
My NDI source isn't detected.
NDI versions may not be compatible. Check with the
manufacturer and upgrade to NDI 4.1 if possible.
Too much noise is present in the audio
output.
Video playback is fine, but when I play the
clip in Adobe Premiere Pro the audio and
video are out of sync.
Check the input level of the audio source to make sure it's the
correct level. Modify the input gain if necessary, see Adjust
audio gain and delay.
Adobe Premiere Pro has a known issue handling video that is
recorded using a variable frame rate. Convert the clip to a
constant frame rate using a third-party software, such as
Handbrake, before editing in Adobe Premiere Pro.
Check if the selected recording format in Pearl-2 is MP4-
Adobe Premiere Pro won't load my .mp4
recording from Pearl-2.
Fragmented. Adobe Premiere Pro does not currently support
fragmented .mp4 files. Before editing in Adobe Premiere Pro,
convert the clip to progressive .mp4 format. Run the file
through ffmpeg or a third-party software such as Handbrake to
528
Pearl-2 User Guide
Problem
Troubleshooting Quick Reference
Action(s) to Resolve
preserve both audio and video output.
Some versions of Chrome and Microsoft Edge don't display
I can't preview my channels using the
Epiphan Live Dashboard on Chrome even
after I updated the security certificate for
my website
channel previews from the Dashboard if you're on an HTTPs
network and your website has an insecure or invalid security
certificate, even after you update the security certificate. Use a
different web browser such as Firefox or update the version of
your web browser, then add the security certificate for the
website to the exceptions list.
The following tips can help improve image quality:
1. Ensure the source resolution is used as the output or
recorded resolution. Up-scaling and down-scaling can
Image quality is poor or insufficient.
affect picture quality.
2. Increase the Bitrate value and/or decrease the Limit
frame rate value in the Encoding menu. See Configure
encoding.
The following tips can help improve frames per second (fps):
1. Increase the Limit frame rate value and/or decrease
the Bitrate value in the Encoding menu. See Configure
encoding.
2. Reduce the number of actions happening
simultaneously on the system (i.e. if streaming,
Frames per second are lower than
recording, and copying files, consider waiting to copy
expected.
files until after streaming and recording are complete).
3. Enter a low negative value (i.e. -5) in the Frame Grabber's
Vertical Shift field.
4. Reduce the number of channels encoding data.
5. Ensure the hardware-accelerated H.264 encoding preset
is chosen for all channels.
Verify that the Stream Type matches with the media player
used and that you have the correct url or SDP file for the
Stream won't play in my media player or
player. See Share a live broadcast stream (HTTP, HTTPS or RTSP)
browser.
and Streaming to a media player or smart TV.
If you still cannot see the stream, try disabling your local
529
Pearl-2 User Guide
Problem
Troubleshooting Quick Reference
Action(s) to Resolve
computer firewall.
If the issue is still not resolved, contact Epiphan Support at
[email protected]
The following tips can help diagnose image problems:
1. Ensure the source resolution is used as the output or
recorded resolution. Up-scaling and down-scaling can
affect picture quality. See Configure encoding.
The stream interrupts or the image
breaks up.
2. Increase the Bitrate value and/or decrease the Limit
frame rate value in the Encoding menu. See Configure
encoding.
3. Check network settings including filters, routers and
application settings. Packet loss can result in stream
failure.
If you're streaming to set-top boxes that have 10/100 Mbps
The video streamed to my set-top box is
dropping frames.
interfaces on the same Gigabit Ethernet and you notice frames
are dropping, you can limit the bandwidth of the stream using
traffic shaping to adapt for lower bandwidth set-top boxes and
prevent frame drops, see Set up traffic shaping.
If recording will not start, check the Disk Status Information to
Recording won't start.
see if the system is out of disk space. See Check internal storage
space and Manage recorded files.
AFU to my CIFS server doesn't work.
Firmware upgrade fails.
Pearl-2 supports Automatic File Transfer (AFU) to CIFS servers
(also known as SMB or samba) with samba version 1.
Reboot the system and try again. If the problem persists,
contact Epiphan support at [email protected]
Depending on the media player used, there could be different
issues. If you encounter a playback issue, try using a different
media player. Some issues we know of include:
Certain Media players won't play encoded
videos but others will.
1. On Windows 10, the Movies & TV app sometimes fails to
playback MP4-fragmented files with MP3 audio: try
changing your MP4 audio encoding to AAC.
2. VLC doesn't play MP4-fragmented files normally.
530
Pearl-2 User Guide
Problem
Troubleshooting Quick Reference
Action(s) to Resolve
3. Streams and recordings at very low frame rates (e.g. 1
fps) are not playable in VLC media player, use Windows
Media Player and Quicktime Player instead.
Some media players won't play MOV videos that are recorded
with MP3 audio encoding, including:
1. VLC 2.2.4 (Microsoft Windows) if MP3 audio encoding is
at 48 kbps.
Certain Media players won't play MOV
videos.
2. Movies & TV 10.16122.1029 on Windows 10.
3. Windows Media Player 12.
Choose a different audio encoding when recording MOV files or
use a different media player to playback the recording.
Apple doesn't support MP3 audio. If your MP4 file is created
There's no audio when I playback an MP4
file in QuickTime 10.
with MP3 audio, you will not hear the audio during playback in
QuickTime 10. Choose a different audio encoding when
recording MP4 files or use a different media player to playback
the recording.
VLC version 3.0.3 won't play audio for MP4 fragmented files. In
VLC's Input/Codecs settings page, you can try increasing the file
I can't hear the audio in VLC or the video
caching parameter.
won't play.
VLC version 3.0.6 (windows) won't play MP4 fragmented video
files. This is a VLC issue.
Legacy Ubuntu systems have poor support for HDMI 2.0, and
Ubuntu not recognizing attached
does not recognize a monitor being plugged into Pearl-2 unless
monitor.
the monitor is plugged into Pearl-2 before the system is turned
on.
Feature add-on purchase/activation not
working.
In Epiphan Live, sources are sometimes
invisible in the preview panel.
Currently, Pearl-2 requires internet access to activate new addons. If the system has internet access, ensure that there is no
firewall preventing access to license.epiphan.com, Port 443.
This can occur if the image is too large for the panel. Check the
size of the source, and ensure that constraints are applied to
each corner of the layout.
Video output port is configured to display Not all AOC brand monitors are compatible with HDMI 1.4
531
Pearl-2 User Guide
Problem
Troubleshooting Quick Reference
Action(s) to Resolve
4K video, but the video is not appearing
on is configured to display working, but
output. Check the brand of your monitor and attempt on
not appearing on the connected 4K
different display.
monitor.
There's noticeable latency on the video
output port.
Disabling the audio on the video output port improves latency
for the port, see Disable or enable audio and output port
volume.
Ensure there are no USB sticks inserted into the USB ports
System is not starting up correctly.
during power up. They may be conflicting with the internal hard
drive, causing unexpected behavior.
If you deregister Pearl-2 from Kaltura and then too quickly
register again using the same name, you may receive the
I can't register my Pearl-2 with Kaltura
following error message "Unable to register device: System
using the same device name that I just
name [D Pearl test] already exists". To avoid this, ensure the
deregistered.
deregistered Pearl-2 entry in the list of encoder devices
disappears before registering again using the same device
name.
Kaltura or Panopto has denied you access to create
My login attempt to create an ad hoc
unscheduled ad hoc recordings and webcasts using Pearl-2.
event from Pearl-2 was denied.
Contact your CMS administrator to either activate your CMS
account or enable the necessary access rights.
There are several possible causes of poor performance on web
cameras:
l
The camera itself might be malfunctioning. Try hooking it
into a computer to see if the problem remains.
Web camera is not working correctly.
l
If the picture quality is below standard, try adjusting the
settings using the instructions for how to Configure a
video input source
l
Check that your web camera is on our list of supported
models. If it is not, try using a supported camera, and if
the problem persists, contact our support team.
532
Pearl-2 User Guide
Remove black bars (matte) from the video
Remove black bars (matte) from the video
Channels with only one layout and only one source by default use the aspect ratio of input signals when the
output is streamed. If an input video signal doesn't match the encoded frame aspect ratio, bars are added to
the sides or top and bottom of the encoded stream when the output is streamed and recorded.
If you see bars on your output but would rather have the image fill the whole screen, you have to options:
1. Change the output frame size to match the aspect ratio of the input, see Match output frame size with
aspect ratio of input signal.
2. Stretch the image to fit the output frame size aspect ratio, see Stretch the image.
The color of the bars (matte) is defined by the Background color that is selected using the custom layout
editor for the channel, see Custom layout configuration.
For example:
l
Input signal resolution is 720×480 (a 3:2 aspect ratio)
l
encoded resolution is 640×480 (a 4:3 aspect ratio that is narrower than the input resolution)
Borders are added to the top and bottom of the image to preserve the wider ratio of the input.
For example:
l
Input signal resolution is 720×480 (a 3:2 aspect ratio)
l
encoded resolution is 1280×800 (a 16:10 aspect ratio that is wider than the input resolution)
Borders are added to the left and right of the image to preserve the narrower ratio of the input.
533
Pearl-2 User Guide
Remove black bars (matte) from the video
Match output frame size with aspect ratio of input signal
The frame size is matched only for layouts that have only one source. Note that if you have
layouts with different frame sizes, switching them while live streaming will cause an interruption
and restart of the stream. The same thing happens if you change the resolution of your source
while streaming.
To change the output frame size on channels to match the aspect ratio of the video source:
1. Connect to the Admin panel and login as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. To determine the input port name of the video source that's used in the channel, select the channel
from the Channels menu and click Layouts. The custom layouts page opens.
3. Once you have determined the name of the video input source , select the input port for that video
source under Inputs menu.
4. Make note of the input signal resolution.
5. From the Channel's menu, click Encoding for the channel. The Encoding page opens.
6. You can either check Use current signal resolution as frame size or you can choose the frame size
resolution from the list.
534
Pearl-2 User Guide
Remove black bars (matte) from the video
a. If the source resolution appears in the list, you can choose any resolution that's listed on the same line
(i.e. with the same aspect ratio).
b. If the source resolution doesn't appear in the list, calculate the source resolution and enter it in the
Frame size fields.
TIP: Temporarily check Use current signal resolution as frame size to see the frame
size listed in the Frame size fields, then uncheck that check box and manually enter the
value in the Frame size fields.
7. Click Apply.
Stretch the image
You can remove the matte (black bars) by stretching the image to fit your output frame size using the custom
layout editor.
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select the channel and click Layouts. The custom layout editor page opens.
3. In the layouts list, select the row for the layout you want.
4. In the items list below the layout editing area, select the video source. The video source settings appear.
5. Uncheck Keep aspect ratio when scaling.
6. In the layout editing area, click and drag to stretch the video source to fill the frame.
7. Click Save.
535
Pearl-2 User Guide
Use a specific EDID for the video input port
Use a specific EDID for the video input port
Extended display identification data (EDID) is data provided by a video display device, like a monitor. The
EDID describes the display's capabilities to a video source, such as the graphics card in a PC or other video
output device.
In Pearl-2, the video source uses the EDID information to determine what resolutions, color depth, and other
settings the monitor supports.
EDID is crucial for DVI sources.
The video input ports on Pearl-2 have a factory set EDID. When you connect a video source such as a laptop
or camera to Pearl-2, the video source sees Pearl-2 as if it were a monitor. The EDID that's assigned to the
input port is read by the video source to determine what video signal it needs to send to Pearl-2.
Usually, the video input ports on Pearl-2 correctly emulate a monitor for the connected video source.
However, there are times when you may need to upload a custom EDID, like when your source uses a custom
set of display properties.
When you upload a custom EDID to an input port on Pearl-2, you can force the port to supply a specific
resolution, color depth, etc to the connected video source.
Upload a new EDID
In most cases, the factory installed default EDID works fine for sources connected to the HDMI ports on Pearl2. However, there may be times when a connected video source uses resolutions that you do not want to use.
In that case, you can manually upload an EDID and force Pearl-2 to use a specific set of attributes for a specific
HDMI input port. All video sources you connect to that HDMI input port will use the EDID you've manually
assigned to the port.
EDID changes remain in effect for the HDMI input port until you replace the EDID with another one or
specifically choose to restore the factory EDID for that specific HDMI input port. A system-level factory reset
does not remove a manually assigned EDID from the HDMI port.
This feature is not available using the local console on Pearl-2.
To download a new EDID file:
1. Go to the Epiphan support web page and select the support page for Pearl-2.
2. Scroll to the EDID section and select an EDID from the list. The file is saved to your downloads folder
on your hard drive.
536
Pearl-2 User Guide
Use a specific EDID for the video input port
3. Connect to the Admin panel and log in as admin. See Connect to Admin panel
4. From the Inputs menu, select the input port for which you want to upload the EDID.
5. On the configuration page for that source, scroll to the EDID upload section and click Choose FIle.
6. Browse to the location where the custom EDID file was saved and select it, then click open.
7. Click upload. When the upload is complete, the page updates to reflect success or failure.
Restore factory default EDID
When you no longer want a custom EDID assigned to an input port, you can restore the input port to use the
factory default EDID. Currently there is no way to tell if your input port is using a custom EDID. If you are
unsure, restoring to factory default is the best approach.
To restore the default EDID:.
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Inputs menu, select the source you want to restore. The source configuration page opens.
3. Scroll to the EDID section and click restore.
537
Pearl-2 User Guide
Unstretch the output video
4. When the default EDID is applied, the page updates to reflect success or failure.
Unstretch the output video
Pearl-2 preserves the aspect ratio of your input video signal by default when you add the source to a layout
using the custom layout editor. If you've changed the default setting, the image is stretched to match the
output frame size.
To prevent the image from looking stretched, you can use the custom layout editor to preserve the video
source's aspect ratio.
Unstretching the image causes a matte (black bars) to appear on the sides or top and bottom of
the output. To remove these see Remove black bars (matte) from the video.
To preserve the video source's aspect ratio:
1. Connect to the Admin panel and login as admin. See Connect to Admin panel.
2. From the Channels menu, select a channel and click Layouts. The custom layout editor page opens.
3. In the layouts list, select the row for the layout you want.
4. In the items list below the layout editing area, select the video source. The video source settings appear.
5. Check Keep aspect ratio when scaling and click Save.
538
Pearl-2 User Guide
Remove the combing effect on images
Remove the combing effect on images
When frames are interlaced, artifacts from one frame may appear on the next frame. This happens when a
fast motion video is interlaced.
Since each frame is captured from a different point in time, the action captured in one frame is carried over to
the next frame. The result is a blurred image and horizontal lines running across the video.
To convert an interlaced source signal to a non-interlaced signal.
1. Login to the Admin panel as admin, see Connect to Admin panel.
3. From the Inputs menu, click the source name. The configuration page for the source opens.
4. Check Enable deinterlace and click Apply.
539
Previous releases and features
This section lists features and updates introduced in previous product releases.
Release 4.12.1
l
External keyboard control for the touch screen
l
Status light indicator support for select models of Kuando BusyLight and Delcom Product's USB HID status
indicators.
l
Email address lookup for Kaltura ad hoc events
Release 4.12
l
Secure Reliable Transport (SRT) streaming protocol support
l
HTTP Live Streaming (HLS) streaming protocol support
l
MPEG-DASH streaming protocol support
l
Additional HLS (pull) options to configure the segment size and playlist duration
l
Mutliple multicast publishers support in the same Pearl-2 channel and the ability to start and stop the
publishers
l
Adding pre-existing recordings to an Automatic File Upload (AFU) queue
l
Changed some status fields on the Admin Panel's Info page and changed the bitrate status to now show the
total combined bitrate of the video plus audio.
l
Enhanced streaming error messages
Release 4.11
l
Extend certain admin privileges to operators
l
NDI 4.1 support on Pearl-2
l
Monitor status of file transfers using touch screen and cancel file transfers using the Admin panel
l
Added support for Kaltura's lecture capture plus live event type
Release 4.10
l
Local Admin panel access using a USB keyboard, mouse, and monitor connected directly to Pearl-2 plus a builtin virtual keyboard, multiple keyboard language layouts, and support for touch screen monitors
l
NDI Alpha channel support on Pearl-2 plus the option to ignore timecodes
l
Assigning Pearl-2 a unique device name, description, and location
l
Using a Kaltura application token to register Pearl-2 as a remote recorder
l
Selecting a video output source using the touch screen
Release 4.9.1
l
Kaltura ad hoc event details and configurable event schedule refresh interval
l
Panopto support for ad hoc event authentication from Pearl-2's touch screen using credentials for external
identity providers
l
Panopto ad hoc event folder selection from the Pearl-2's touch screen
l
Automatic user logout when an ad hoc event ends
l
International character support in channel names, layout names, video and audio input names, text overlays,
and recorded file names. For a list, see International character support
l
Epiphan Discovery Utility support deprecation
Releases 4.9.0 and 4.9.0h
l
Full Panopto integration
l
Kaltura ad hoc event creation using the touch screen
l
Toggle Temperature/CPU load on the touch screen
l
Automatic EDID verification of connected sources upon start up
l
USB tethering removed
l
Confirmation before AFU queue file deletion
l
Kaltura users who are only defined in MediaSpace are allowed to start unsheduled ad hoc events using both the
touch screen and the Admin panel (4.9.0h)
Release 4.8.1
l
Traffic shaping to improve video output quality when streaming over a Gibabit Ethernet network to 10/100
Mbps set-top boxes. If the API is used for traffic shaping, see the Technical Notes for your Pearl-2 model for
instructions. They're available from the product resources page on the Epiphan.com website.
l
Improved video smoothness of the HDMI outputs
l
We improved the smoothness and quality of interlaced video from SDI inputs
Release 4.8.0
l
NDI and NDI|HX support
l
Hardware acceleration
l
Live switching improvement
l
Audio inputs as playback audio sources for HDMI outputs
l
Product registration changes
l
Pairing to AV Studio changes
l
Original Livestream and Wowza Cloud streaming presets removed
Release 4.7.1
l
AFU to SFTP server stability improvement
l
BIOS update to resume status after a power cycle
Release 4.7.0
l
Integration with Kaltura CMS
l
International character support in text overlays
l
Chroma key color selection update
l
RTMPS certificate update
l
EAP-TLS user name field update
Release 4.6.0
l
802.1x network security compliance
l
RTMPS AV encryption
l
HTTPS
l
Discovery utility port disabled
Release 4.5.1
l
Constant volume for layouts with multiple audio sources
l
Stereo and mono analog audio selection
l
Assign XLR B/RCA audio sources to an input
l
Mute audio
l
Remote login
l
Channel as a source
l
Mirror the video output
l
Some important UI terminology changes
Release 4.4.1
l
AV synchronization improvements of RTSP streams and loopbacks.
l
Improved synchronization and performance of 4K sources on SDI and 4K HDMI port.
l
Fixed the Wowza custom streaming option.
l
Improved the recognition of AV.io SDI capture cards when they are first plugged in.
l
Fixed a hot plug issue affecting the detection of interlaced 1080i signals from certain camera models (for
example, Sony HDR-CX180, HDRCX190, and Panasonic HC-VX980M).
Release 4.4.0
l
Constant frame rate
l
Audio VU meter
l
Epiphan Live preview on HTTPS networks
l
AFU to an SCP server remote directory creation
Release 4.3.0
l
Chroma keying
l
Text overlay and custom layout editor enhancements
l
Clone channels and custom layouts
l
Clone recorders and recorder metadata
l
AFU enhancements
l
Start and stop individual streams using Epiphan Live
l
Logitech BRIO 4K camera support
Release 4.2.0
l
USB 3.0 support for web cameras and AV.io UVC video capture cards
l
Fully integrated multi-publishing
l
Enhanced video cropping
l
Audio delay control
l
Epiphan Live recordings management
Release 4.0.1
l
Launch of Pearl-2 Rackmount models
l
4K add-on
Release 4.0.0
l
Inaugural release of Pearl-2 with the following features
l
Capture 6 video sources at once
l
Epiphan Live
l
Switch video sources live
l
Pro video inputs and outputs
l
Pro audio inputs
l
512 GB data storage (SSD)
l
Touchscreen
Software license
ATTENTION: THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT ARE BEING LICENSED TO
YOU BY EPIPHAN SYSTEMS INC. ("LICENSOR") AND ARE NOT BEING SOLD. THIS AGREEMENT CONTAINS LIMITATIONS
ON REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS, REMEDIES, AND LIABILITIES THAT ARE APPLICABLE TO THE
SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION.
Epiphan Systems Inc.
Software License
IMPORTANT: BEFORE DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING, OR USING THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION,
PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS AGREEMENT WHICH CONTAINS THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH
YOU ARE ACQUIRING A LICENSE TO USE THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT
THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT PLEASE DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, OR USE THE
SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION AND PROMPTLY RETURN OR DESTROY THE SOFTWARE AND
DOCUMENTATION. IF YOU DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND/OR DOCUMENTATION, YOU
WILL HAVE ACCEPTED AND AGREED TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. THE SOFTWARE, HARDWARE AND
DOCUMENTATION ARE ALSO PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT LAWS AND INTERNATIONAL COPYRIGHT TREATIES,
AS WELL AS OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY LAWS. IF YOU ARE AN AGENT OR EMPLOYEE OF AN ENTITY,
YOU REPRESENT AND WARRANT THAT (I) THE INDIVIDUAL ACCEPTING THIS AGREEMENT IS DULY
AUTHORIZED TO ACCEPT THIS AGREEMENT ON SUCH ENTITY'S BEHALF AND TO BIND SUCH ENTITY, AND (II)
SUCH ENTITY HAS FULL POWER, CORPORATE OR OTHERWISE, TO ENTER INTO THIS AGREEMENT AND
PERFORM ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT.
1. Definitions: In this Agreement:
"Agreement" means this Epiphan Systems Inc. Software License;
"API" means an application programming interface;
"Documentation" means the technical publications delivered to You with the Software relating to the installation and
operation of the Software and/or Hardware, such as reference, user, installation and technical guides and release
notes;
"Epiphan" means Epiphan Systems Inc;
"Epiphan Hardware Product" means an Epiphan hardware product (including enclosure and mechanical parts,
circuitry and electrical and electronic components contained therein) purchased by You, which is intended to be used
in conjunction with the licensed Software and Documentation;
"License Key" means a series of computer-generated characters used for the purpose of controlling the operation of
Epiphan Hardware Products and/or related Software;
"Software" means the Licensor binary and/or bytecode software and/or firmware programs that are (i) specified in
Your Order or that are included with or in the Epiphan Hardware Products specified in Your Order, (ii) are made
available to You for download after acceptance of this Agreement, (iii) are packaged with this Agreement, (iv) preinstalled on Epiphan Hardware Products, (v) embed this Agreement in their installer(s) and which are installed after
acceptance of this Agreement, or (vi) embed this Agreement in their product documentation. Software also includes
the related Documentation;
"You" or "Your" means the individual acquiring the Software license or any entity on whose behalf such individual is
acting. In the case of an entity, "You" includes any entity that by majority voting interest controls, is controlled by, or is
under common control with You; and
545
"Your Order" means (i) the web forms provided by Epiphan or its applicable reseller or distributor for ordering
Epiphan Hardware Products and related Software licenses, or (ii) written documents executed by Epiphan, or one of its
resellers or distributors, and You in respect to Your purchases of Epiphan Hardware Products and/or related Software
licenses.
2. Grant of Software License: Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, including payment of any
applicable fees specified in Your Order, Licensor grants You a non-exclusive, non-transferable, non-sublicensable,
internal license to use the number of copies of the Software specified in Your Order and to use the Software functions
specified in Your Order solely for operation on the Epiphan Hardware Products for which such Software has been
designed as specified in the Documentation for such Software. If the number of copies of Software is not specified in
Your Order, then the number of copies shall be a reasonable number of copies. You acknowledge and agree that the
ability to use certain Software functions is controlled by a Licensing Key and that You will not be able to use such
functions unless You have paid the applicable fees charged by Epiphan for the right to use such functions and to
receive a Licensing Key to enable such functions. For functions that are controlled by a Licensing String You shall only
use that Licensing String with the copy of the Software for which it was issued and You shall not use that copy of the
Licensing String with any other copies of the Software that You may have or make. All copies of the Software made by
You shall include all trademarks, copyright notices, restricted rights legends, proprietary markings and the like exactly
as they appear on the copy of the Software originally provided to You. No other rights in the Software or
Documentation are granted to You.
3. Open Source Software: Binary, bytecode and source code versions of certain open source software packages may
be embedded in or distributed with the Software ("Open Source Software"). If a separate license agreement for an
item of open source software is: delivered to You with the Software; included in the download package for the
Software; referenced in any material (including the Documentation) that is included in the download or distribution
package for the Software; or listed at www.epiphan.com/opensource, then such open source software shall be Open
Source Software and such separate license agreement shall govern Your use of that item or version of such open
source software. The Open Source Software may include free software (i.e. software licensed under the GNU Lesser
General Public License or other free software licenses) for which the applicable free software license may also require
that the source code for such free software be made available to those receiving only executable versions of such free
software. If the source code for any free software distributed with the Software is not provided with the Software, then
upon request, within a three (3) year period from the original receipt of the binary or bytecode version of such Open
Source Software from Licensor, for a fee that shall not exceed Licensor's costs associated with the shipping of the
source code for such free software, Licensor will provide a copy of the source code for such free software to You.
4. Restrictions: The terms set forth in this Section 4 are additional conditions to the licenses granted in Section 2.
Your right to use the Software is conditioned upon Your timely payment of the full amount of fees due for: (i) the
Epiphan Hardware Product(s) on which You want to use the Software; (ii) all support agreements You have entered
into with Licensor or any of its distributors and/or resellers; (iii) licensed Software and Documentation.
You shall not reverse engineer, disassemble, reverse translate, decompile or in any other manner decode any
Epiphan Hardware Product or Software except to the extent the Software is distributed with any Open Source
Software that prohibits the imposition of such a restriction or to the extent the foregoing restriction is expressly
prohibited by applicable law notwithstanding a contractual obligation to the contrary. You acknowledge and agree that
no rights in respect to the source code of the Software are granted to You. You acknowledge and agree that the rights
in respect to use of the Software and Documentation are granted only for use in conjunction with Epiphan Hardware
Products. You shall not distribute, lease, rent, grant a security interest in, assign, or otherwise transfer the Software
except as expressly provided in this Agreement. You shall not modify or create any derivatives works of the Software
or merge all or any part of the Software with another program. Notwithstanding the foregoing, You may call public
APIs made available by Epiphan in the Software from applications developed by or on Your behalf provided that such
applications do not embed any of the Software other than the minimum linkage materials required to call separately
running instances of the Software. You shall not use the Software or make the Software available to any third parties
as part of any service bureau, time sharing service, application service provider offering, software-as-a-service
offering or any other managed service offering. You shall not disclose any performance, benchmarking, or feature-
546
related information about the Software. You further agree not to disclose, transfer or otherwise provide to any third
party any portion of the Software, except as expressly permitted herein.
Some Epiphan Hardware Products and Software embed third-party APIs that integrate with third-party party services
(“Third-Party Services”) to allow users of such Epiphan Hardware Products and Software to interact with such ThirdParty Services for various capabilities offered by such Third-Party Services, such as, and without limitation,
authentication, uploading and downloading of video content and other features made available by such Third-Party
Services. If You access or use any Third-Party Service and/or related APIs using an Epiphan Hardware Product and/or
the Software then You shall comply with all of the terms and conditions for such Third-Party Service and/or related
APIs.
5. Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT FOR ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY BE PROVIDED IN ANY COMMERCIAL
AGREEMENT EXECUTED BETWEEN YOU AND LICENSOR (OR BETWEEN YOU AND ONE OF LICENSOR’S
RESELLERS OR DISTRIBUTORS), THE EPIPHAN HARDWARE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE AND/OR DOCUMENTATION
ARE PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT ANY REPRESENTATIONS, CONDITIONS, AND/OR WARRANTIES OF ANY
KIND. WITHOUT LIMITATION, LICENSOR AND ITS AFFILIATES AND ITS AND THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS,
SUBCONTRACTORS, RESELLERS AND DISTRIBUTORS DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL IMPLIED REPRESENTATIONS,
CONDITIONS AND/OR WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, MERCHANTABLE QUALITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT,
DURABILITY, COMPATIBILITY, TITLE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND/OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
WHETHER ARISING BY STATUTE, COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE OF TRADE OR OTHERWISE. EXCEPT AS
OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN ANY COMMERCIAL AGREEMENT EXECUTED BETWEEN YOU AND
LICENSOR (OR BETWEEN YOU AND ONE OF LICENSOR’S RESELLERS OR DISTRIBUTORS), THE ENTIRE RISK OF
THE USE OF THE EPIPHAN HARDWARE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE AND/OR DOCUMENTATION SHALL BE BORNE
BY YOU. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN ANY COMMERCIAL AGREEMENT EXECUTED
BETWEEN YOU AND LICENSOR (OR BETWEEN YOU AND ONE OF LICENSOR’S RESELLERS OR DISTRIBUTORS),
NEITHER LICENSOR NOR ANY OF ITS AFFILIATES NOR ANY OF ITS OR THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS,
SUBCONTRACTORS, RESELLERS AND/OR DISTRIBUTORS MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR PROVIDE ANY
CONDITIONS AND/OR WARRANTIES ABOUT THE SUITABILITY OF THE EPIPHAN HARDWARE PRODUCTS,
SOFTWARE, SERVICES AND/OR DOCUMENTATION. NEITHER LICENSOR NOR ANY OF ITS AFFILIATES NOR ANY
ITS OR THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS, SUBCONTRACTORS, RESELLERS AND/OR DISTRIBUTORS MAKE ANY
REPRESENTATIONS OR PROVIDE ANY CONDITIONS AND/OR WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER ABOUT ANY
INFORMATION AND/OR DATA THAT MAY BE PROCESSED BY OR MADE AVAILABLE USING ANY EPIPHAN
HARDWARE PRODUCT AND/OR SOFTWARE OR ABOUT ANY THIRD-PARTY SERVICE THAT MAY BE ACCESSIBLE
USING ANY EPIPHAN HARDWARE PRODUCT AND/OR SOFTWARE.
6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: NEITHER LICENSOR NOR ANY OF ITS AFFILIATES NOR ANY OF ITS OR THEIR
LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS, SUBCONTRACTORS, RESELLERS AND/OR DISTRIBUTORS SHALL HAVE ANY LIABILITY
TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DAMAGES ARISING FROM THIS AGREEMENT, RELATING
TO THE HARDWARE, SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION, OR RELATING TO ANY SERVICES PROVIDED TO YOU
BY LICENSOR (INCLUDING ITS AFFILIATES AND ITS AND THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS, SUBCONTRACTORS,
RESELLERS AND/OR DISTRIBUTORS) IN RELATION TO THE EPIPHAN HARDWARE PRODUCTS, SERVICES,
SOFTWARE AND/OR DOCUMENTATION FOR ANY INDIRECT, RELIANCE, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE,
EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF REVENUE OR
PROFIT, LOSS OF OR DAMAGE TO DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF DATA, REPLACEMENT OR
RECOVERY COSTS, OR OTHER COMMERCIAL OR ECONOMIC LOSS, WHETHER ARISING FROM CONTRACT,
EQUITY, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY) OR ANY OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY, EVEN
IF LICENSOR (INCLUDING ITS AFFILIATES AND ITS AND THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS, SUBCONTRACTORS,
RESELLERS AND/OR DISTRIBUTORS) HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR THEY
ARE FORESEEABLE. THE LIMITATIONS IN THIS SECTION SHALL APPLY WHETHER OR NOT THE ALLEGED
BREACH OR DEFAULT IS A BREACH OF A FUNDAMENTAL CONDITION OR TERM OR FUNDAMENTAL BREACH.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
547
TOTAL CUMULATIVE LIABILITY OF LICENSOR (INCLUDING ITS AFFILIATES AND ITS AND THEIR LICENSORS,
SUPPLIERS, SUBCONTRACTORS, RESELLERS AND DISTRIBUTORS) TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY
FOR ANY DAMAGES ARISING FROM THIS AGREEMENT, RELATING TO THE EPIPHAN HARDWARE PRODUCTS,
SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION AND/OR RELATING TO ANY SERVICES PROVIDED TO YOU BY LICENSOR
(INCLUDING ITS AFFILIATES AND ITS AND THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS, SUBCONTRACTORS, RESELLERS
AND DISTRIBUTORS) IN RELATION TO THE EPIPHAN HARDWARE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE AND/OR
DOCUMENTATION, EXCEED THE LICENSE FEES PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION IN THIS AGREEMENT, NEITHER LICENSOR NOR ANY OF ITS
AFFILIATES OR ITS OR THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS, SUBCONTRACTORS, RESELLERS AND/OR DISTRIBUTORS
SHALL HAVE ANY LIABILITY TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY WHATSOEVER IN RESPECT TO ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, RELIANCE, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF OR DAMAGE TO DATA, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF DATA, REPLACEMENT OR RECOVERY COSTS, OR OTHER COMMERCIAL OR
ECONOMIC LOSS, ARISING FROM OR RELATING TO ANY INFORMATION AND/OR DATA THAT MAY BE
PROCESSED BY OR MADE AVAILABLE USING ANY EPIPHAN HARDWARE PRODUCT AND/OR SOFTWARE OR
ARISING FROM OR RELATING TO ANY THIRD-PARTY SERVICE THAT MAY BE ACCESSIBLE USING ANY EPIPHAN
HARDWARE PRODUCT AND/OR SOFTWARE.
THE DISCLAIMER OF REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
CONSTITUTE AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS AGREEMENT. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT BUT FOR THE
DISCLAIMER OF REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY,
NEITHER LICENSOR NOR ANY OF ITS AFFILIATES OR ITS OR THEIR LICENSORS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR
DISTRIBUTORS WOULD GRANT THE RIGHTS GRANTED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
7. Term and Termination: This Agreement shall continue for as long as You use the Software, however, it may be
terminated sooner as provided in this Section 7. You may terminate this Agreement by destroying all copies of the
Software and Documentation under Your control and providing certification of such destruction to Licensor or by
returning the Software to Licensor. Licensor may terminate this Agreement immediately by providing You with written
notice if: (a) You are in material breach of any provision of this Agreement, which breach, if capable of being cured, is
not cured within thirty (30) days after Licensor gives You written notice thereof; or (b) You have committed a noncurable material breach of this Agreement. Upon termination You shall destroy all copies of the Software and
Documentation. In addition to this Section, the Sections entitled Definitions, Disclaimer of Warranties, Limitation of
Liability, Title, Indemnities, High-Risk Activities, Intellectual Property, and General shall continue in force even after any
termination of this Agreement. No termination of this Agreement will entitle You to a refund of any amounts paid by
You to Licensor or any reseller or distributor or affect any obligations You may have to pay any outstanding amounts
owing to Licensor or any reseller or distributor. Upon any termination of this Agreement, Your license to the Software
and Documentation will terminate and You shall destroy all copies of the Software and Documentation under Your
control and certify such destruction to Licensor.
8. Support and Updates: This Agreement does not grant You the right to any updates or enhancements of the
Software or the right to receive any technical support for the Software. Such updates and other technical support
services, if available, may be purchased separately from Licensor or one of Licensor’s resellers or distributors. Use of
any updates or enhancements to the Software provided pursuant to any technical support You may procure from
Licensor or one of Licensor’s resellers or distributors shall be governed by the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Licensor reserves the right at any time not to release or to discontinue the release of any Software and to
alter prices, features, specifications, capabilities, functions, licensing terms, release dates, general availability or other
characteristics of the Software.
9. Title: All right, title, and interest (including all intellectual property rights) in, to, and under the Software (including
all copies thereof) shall remain with Licensor and its licensors.
10. Indemnities: You shall indemnify, defend and hold Licensor, its affiliates, its and their licensors, suppliers,
subcontractors, resellers and/or distributors and all of the directors, officers, employees of all of the foregoing
548
(collectively the “Indemnified Parties”) harmless from and against any damages, losses, liabilities, expenses, costs,
claims, demands, actions, suits and/or proceedings incurred by the Indemnified Parties as a result of (i) Your use of
the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software and/or Documentation, (ii) any use of the Epiphan Hardware Products,
Software and/or Documentation on Your behalf, (iii) the use of the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software and/or
Documentation by anyone to whom You give the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software and/or Documentation, and/or
(iv) the use of the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software and/or Documentation on behalf of anyone to whom You give
the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software and/or Documentation, including, without limitation, in all of the foregoing
cases, any damages, losses, liabilities, expenses, costs, claims, demands, actions, suits and/or proceedings arising
from or relating to any information and/or data that may be processed by or made available using any Epiphan
Hardware Product and/or Software or arising from or relating to any Third-Party Service that may be accessible using
any Epiphan Hardware Product and/or Software (collectively, each matter falling within any of the foregoing, a
“Claim”), including, without limitation, indemnifying, defending and holding the Indemnified Parties harmless from and
against any settlements agreed by You in connection with any Claims and/or any damages, costs or other amounts
(including reasonable attorneys' fees) awarded to a third party against any of the Indemnified Parties by a court or
tribunal of competent jurisdiction in respect to any Claim. If You do not timely defend against or resist a Claim after
notice from Licensor, Licensor shall be entitled to investigate, defend, compromise, settle, or otherwise dispose of the
Claim, and incur costs in connection therewith, at Your expense, in such manner as Licensor deems in its best
interests until a reasonable time after You comply with its obligations under this Section 10. You shall not enter into a
settlement of any Claim without the Licensor’s written consent unless such settlement is solely for monetary payment
by You and contains an express, complete, unconditional release of all of the Indemnified Parties and which does not
impose any obligations or restrictions on any of the Indemnified Parties.
11. High-Risk Activities: The Software and Epiphan Hardware Products are not fault-tolerant and are not designed,
manufactured or intended for use in or in conjunction with on-line control equipment in hazardous environments
requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation systems, air traffic
control, or direct life support machines. Licensor, its licensors, suppliers, subcontractors, resellers and distributors
specifically disclaim any express or implied representations, warranties and/or conditions for such uses.
12. U.S. Government End-Users: The Software and Documentation are each a "commercial item" as that term is
defined at FAR 2.101, consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software
documentation" as such terms are defined in FAR 12.212, and are provided to the U.S. Government only as
commercial end items. Government end users acquire the rights set out in this Agreement for the Software, Epiphan
Hardware Products and Documentation consistent with: (i) for acquisition by or on behalf of civilian agencies, the
terms set forth in FAR12.212; or (ii) for acquisition by or on behalf of units of the Department of Defense, the terms set
forth in DFARS 227.7202. Use of the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software and Documentation is further restricted by
the terms and conditions of this Agreement and the applicable commercial purchase agreement for the Epiphan
Hardware Products. For the purposes of any applicable government use, the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software
and Documentation were developed exclusively at private expense, and are trade secrets of Epiphan Systems Inc. for
the purpose of any Freedom of Information legislation or any other disclosure statute, regulation or provision.
13. Export Restrictions: The Epiphan Hardware Products, Software, Documentation and related information are
subject to export and import restrictions. By downloading, installing, or using the Software, Epiphan Hardware
Products, Documentation and/or related information, You are representing and warranting that You are not located in,
are not under the control of, and are not a national or resident of any country to which the export of the Epiphan
Hardware Products, Software, Documentation and/or related information would be prohibited by the laws and/or
regulations of Canada or the United States. You are also representing and warranting that You are not an individual to
whom the export of the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software, Documentation or related information would be
prohibited by the laws and/or regulations of Canada or the United States. You shall comply with the export laws and
regulations of Canada and the United States that are applicable to the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software,
Documentation and related information and You shall also comply with any local laws and/or regulations in Your
jurisdiction that may impact Your right to export, import, or use the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software,
Documentation or related information, and You represent and warrant that You have complied with any such
549
applicable laws and/or regulations. The Epiphan Hardware Products, Software, Documentation and related
information shall not be used for any purposes prohibited by export laws and/or regulations, including, without
limitation, nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation. You shall be responsible for procuring all required
permissions for any subsequent export, import, or use of the Epiphan Hardware Products, Software, Documentation
or related information.
14. Intellectual Property: Epiphan, Epiphan Systems and Epiphan Video are tradenames, trademarks or registered
trademarks of Epiphan Systems Inc. in certain countries. All Licensor product names and logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Epiphan Systems Inc. in certain countries. All other company and product names and logos
are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners in certain countries. You shall not disclose,
transfer or otherwise provide to any third party any portion of the Software, except as expressly permitted in this
Agreement.
15. General: This Agreement is the entire agreement between You and Licensor in respect to the Software,
superseding any other agreements or discussions, oral or written. The terms and conditions of this Agreement shall
prevail over any pre-printed terms on any quotes, orders, purchase orders, or purchase order acknowledgements,
and shall prevail over any other communications between the parties in relation to the Software. You may not assign
this Agreement whether voluntarily, by operation of law, or otherwise without Licensor's prior written consent.
Licensor may assign this Agreement at any time without notice. The failure of a party to claim a breach of any term of
this Agreement shall not constitute a waiver of such breach or the right of such party to enforce any subsequent
breach of such term. If any provision of this Agreement is held to be unenforceable or illegal, such decision shall not
affect the validity or enforceability of such provisions under other circumstances or the remaining provisions of this
Agreement and such remaining provisions shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make them enforceable
under such circumstances. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the Province of Ontario and the laws of
Canada applicable therein. No choice or conflict of laws rules of any jurisdiction shall apply to this Agreement. You
shall only be entitled to bring any action or proceeding arising out of or relating to this Agreement, the Epiphan
Hardware Products, Software, Documentation or any services provided in respect to the Epiphan Hardware Products,
Software and/or Documentation in a court in Ottawa, Ontario, Canada, and You consent to the jurisdiction of such
courts for any such action or proceeding. You waive all rights that You may have or that may hereafter arise to contest
the jurisdiction of such courts for any action or proceeding brought by You. You hereby waive any right You may have
to request a jury trial with respect to any action brought by You in connection with this Agreement, the Epiphan
Hardware Products or Software or any services provided in respect to the Epiphan Hardware Products or Software.
The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods to this Agreement is
expressly excluded.
April 22, 2019
© 2006-2020. Epiphan Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Environmental Information
The equipment that you bought has required the extraction and use of natural resources for its production. It may
contain hazardous substances that could impact health and the environment. In order to avoid the dissemination of
those substances in our environment and to diminish the pressure on the natural resources, we encourage you to
use the appropriate take-back systems. Those systems will reuse or recycle most of the materials of your end life
equipment in a sound way. The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol invites you to use those systems. If you need more
information about collection, reuse and recycling systems, please contact your local or regional waste
administration. You can also contact us for more information on the environmental performance of our products.
Important Safety Warnings
Model numbers covered by this document: ESP1440, ESP1441, ESP1442, ESP1474, and ESP1556
Ensure the power cord attached to Pearl-2 is connected to a socket with a ground connection.
WARNING: Risk of explosion if the power supply is replaced by an incorrect type.
550
WARNING: This product has no user-serviceable parts and the battery used in this device is not replaceable. Do not
attempt to disassemble. Return the device for service.
CAUTION, RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK: This device may have multiple AC power cords installed. All power sources
shall be disconnected before servicing to avoid shock hazard.
ATTENTION: Risque d'explosion si la source de courant est remplacée par un type incorrect.
ATTENTION: Cet appareil ne contient aucun composant pouvant être entretenu ou réparé par l'utilisateur. En cas de
panne, retourner l'appareil pour réparation.
ATTENTION, RISQUE DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE: Cet appareil peut être équipé de multiples cordons d'alimentation en
courant alternatif. Pour placer cet appareil hors tension, débrancher tous les cordons d'alimentation sans exception.
FCC Compliance Statement
47 CFR Section 2.1077 Compliance Information
Unique identifier: Pearl-2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Responsible party (US contact):
Epiphan Video
116 University Avenue, Suite 100
Palo Alto, CA
94301, USA
www.Epiphan.com
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada:
This device complies with ICES-003 of the ISED rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme ISED NBM-003 pour les appareils radio agréés. Son fonctionnement est sujet
aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) Le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage préjudiciable, et
(2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage reçu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un
fonctionnement indésirable.
551
CE Compliance Statement
Marking by the symbol
indicates compliance of this device with the applicable directives of the European
Community and meets or exceeds the following technical standards.
Directive 2014/30/EU - Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive 2014/35/EU - Low Voltage Directive
Directive 2011/65/EU - RoHS, restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic
equipment
Warning: Operation of this equipment is not intended for a residential environment and could cause radio
interference.
Other Jurisdictional Issues
Epiphan makes no representation that its products or information in this document or its web site is appropriate or
available for use in your jurisdiction. Those who choose to access the Epiphan web site or use Epiphan products do so
on their own initiative and are responsible for compliance with local laws, if and to the extent local laws are applicable
Submissions to Epiphan and Affiliated Servers
Any information, including but not limited to remarks, suggestions, ideas, graphics, or other submissions,
communicated to Epiphan through their Epiphan web site is the exclusive property of Epiphan. Epiphan is entitled to
use any information submitted for any purpose, without restriction (except as stated in Epiphan's Privacy Statement
or compensation to the person sending the submission. The user acknowledges the originality of any submission
communicated to Epiphan and accepts responsibility for its accuracy, appropriateness, and legality.
Third Parties and Links to Third-Party Web Sites
Mention of non-Epiphan Systems Inc. products or services on their website, or this document site is for informational
purposes and does not constitute an endorsement or recommendation.
This document may contain links to non-Epiphan web sites. These links are provided to you as a convenience, and
Epiphan is not responsible for the content of any linked web site. Any outside web site accessed from the Epiphan web
site is independent from Epiphan, and Epiphan has no control over the content of that web site. In addition, a link to
any non-Epiphan web site does not imply that Epiphan endorses or accepts any responsibility for the content or use of
such a web site.
In no event shall any reference to any third party or third party product or service be construed as an approval or
endorsement by Epiphan of that third party or of any product or service provided by a third party.
Miscellaneous
It is the user's responsibility to ascertain whether any information downloaded from the Epiphan web site or other
websites is free of viruses, worms, trojan horses, or other items of a potentially destructive nature.
Enforcement of Terms and Conditions
These Terms and Conditions for use of this document and the associated Epiphan Product are governed and
interpreted pursuant to the laws of the province of Ontario, Canada, notwithstanding any principles of conflicts of law.
552
All disputes arising out of or relating to these Terms and Conditions shall be finally resolved by arbitration conducted
in the English language in Ottawa, Ontario, Canada under the commercial arbitration rules of the Canada. The parties
shall appoint as sole arbitrator a retired judge who presided in the province of Ontario. The parties shall bear equally
the cost of the arbitration (except that the prevailing party shall be entitled to an award of reasonable attorneys' fees
incurred in connection with the arbitration in such an amount as may be determined by the arbitrator). All decisions of
the arbitrator shall be final and binding on both parties and enforceable in any court of competent jurisdiction.
Notwithstanding this, application may be made to any court for a judicial acceptance of the award or order of
enforcement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Epiphan shall be entitled to seek injunctive relief, security, or other
equitable remedies from any court of competent jurisdiction.
If any part of these terms is unlawful, void, or unenforceable, that part will be deemed severable and will not affect the
validity and enforceability of the remaining provisions. Epiphan may, at its sole discretion and without notice, revise
these terms at any time by updating this posting.
Copyright © 2020 Epiphan Systems Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
553
© and ™ 2020, Epiphan Systems, Inc
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement